This file is a user guide to the GNU assembler as
(GNU Binutils)
version 2.42.
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.
.include
Search Path: -I path.abort
.ABORT
(COFF).align [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.altmacro
.ascii "string"
….asciz "string"
….attach_to_group name
.balign[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.bss subsection
.byte expressions
.cfi_sections section_list
.cfi_startproc [simple]
.cfi_endproc
.cfi_personality encoding [, exp]
.cfi_personality_id id
.cfi_fde_data [opcode1 [, …]]
.cfi_lsda encoding [, exp]
.cfi_inline_lsda
[align].cfi_def_cfa register, offset
.cfi_def_cfa_register register
.cfi_def_cfa_offset offset
.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset offset
.cfi_offset register, offset
.cfi_val_offset register, offset
.cfi_rel_offset register, offset
.cfi_register register1, register2
.cfi_restore register
.cfi_undefined register
.cfi_same_value register
.cfi_remember_state
and .cfi_restore_state
.cfi_return_column register
.cfi_signal_frame
.cfi_window_save
.cfi_escape
expression[, …].cfi_val_encoded_addr register, encoding, label
.comm symbol , length
.data subsection
.dc[size] expressions
.dcb[size] number [,fill]
.ds[size] number [,fill]
.def name
.desc symbol, abs-expression
.dim
.double flonums
.eject
.else
.elseif
.end
.endef
.endfunc
.endif
.equ symbol, expression
.equiv symbol, expression
.eqv symbol, expression
.err
.error "string"
.exitm
.extern
.fail expression
.file
.fill repeat , size , value
.float flonums
.func name[,label]
.global symbol
, .globl symbol
.gnu_attribute tag,value
.hword expressions
.ident
.if absolute expression
.incbin "file"[,skip[,count]]
.include "file"
.int expressions
.internal names
.irp symbol,values
….irpc symbol,values
….lcomm symbol , length
.lflags
.line line-number
.linkonce [type]
.list
.ln line-number
.loc fileno lineno [column] [options]
.loc_mark_labels enable
.local names
.long expressions
.macro
.mri val
.noaltmacro
.nolist
.nop [size]
.nops size[, control]
.octa bignums
.offset loc
.org new-lc , fill
.p2align[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.popsection
.previous
.print string
.protected names
.psize lines , columns
.purgem name
.pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
.quad expressions
.reloc offset, reloc_name[, expression]
.rept count
.sbttl "subheading"
.scl class
.section name
.set symbol, expression
.short expressions
.single flonums
.size
.skip size [,fill]
.sleb128 expressions
.space size [,fill]
.stabd, .stabn, .stabs
.string
"str", .string8
"str", .string16
.struct expression
.subsection name
.symver
.tag structname
.text subsection
.title "heading"
.tls_common symbol, length[, alignment]
.type
.uleb128 expressions
.val addr
.version "string"
.vtable_entry table, offset
.vtable_inherit child, parent
.warning "string"
.weak names
.weakref alias, target
.word expressions
.zero size
.2byte expression [, expression]*
.4byte expression [, expression]*
.8byte expression [, expression]*
Here is a brief summary of how to invoke as
. For details,
see Command-Line Options.
as [-a[cdghilns][=file]] [--alternate] [--compress-debug-sections] [--nocompress-debug-sections] [-D] [--dump-config] [--debug-prefix-map old=new] [--defsym sym=val] [--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]] [--emulation=name] [-f] [-g] [--gstabs] [--gstabs+] [--gdwarf-<N>] [--gdwarf-sections] [--gdwarf-cie-version=VERSION] [--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]] [--gsframe] [--hash-size=N] [--help] [--target-help] [-I dir] [-J] [-K] [--keep-locals] [-L] [--listing-lhs-width=NUM] [--listing-lhs-width2=NUM] [--listing-rhs-width=NUM] [--listing-cont-lines=NUM] [--multibyte-handling=[allow|warn|warn-sym-only]] [--no-pad-sections] [-o objfile] [-R] [--scfi=experimental] [--sectname-subst] [--size-check=[error|warning]] [--statistics] [-v] [-version] [--version] [-W] [--warn] [--fatal-warnings] [-w] [-x] [-Z] [@FILE] [target-options] [--|files ...] Target AArch64 options: [-EB|-EL] [-mabi=ABI] Target Alpha options: [-mcpu] [-mdebug | -no-mdebug] [-replace | -noreplace] [-relax] [-g] [-Gsize] [-F] [-32addr] Target ARC options: [-mcpu=cpu] [-mA6|-mARC600|-mARC601|-mA7|-mARC700|-mEM|-mHS] [-mcode-density] [-mrelax] [-EB|-EL] Target ARM options: [-mcpu=processor[+extension...]] [-march=architecture[+extension...]] [-mfpu=floating-point-format] [-mfloat-abi=abi] [-meabi=ver] [-mthumb] [-EB|-EL] [-mapcs-32|-mapcs-26|-mapcs-float| -mapcs-reentrant] [-mthumb-interwork] [-k] Target Blackfin options: [-mcpu=processor[-sirevision]] [-mfdpic] [-mno-fdpic] [-mnopic] Target BPF options: [-EL] [-EB] Target CRIS options: [--underscore | --no-underscore] [--pic] [-N] [--emulation=criself | --emulation=crisaout] [--march=v0_v10 | --march=v10 | --march=v32 | --march=common_v10_v32] Target C-SKY options: [-march=arch] [-mcpu=cpu] [-EL] [-mlittle-endian] [-EB] [-mbig-endian] [-fpic] [-pic] [-mljump] [-mno-ljump] [-force2bsr] [-mforce2bsr] [-no-force2bsr] [-mno-force2bsr] [-jsri2bsr] [-mjsri2bsr] [-no-jsri2bsr ] [-mno-jsri2bsr] [-mnolrw ] [-mno-lrw] [-melrw] [-mno-elrw] [-mlaf ] [-mliterals-after-func] [-mno-laf] [-mno-literals-after-func] [-mlabr] [-mliterals-after-br] [-mno-labr] [-mnoliterals-after-br] [-mistack] [-mno-istack] [-mhard-float] [-mmp] [-mcp] [-mcache] [-msecurity] [-mtrust] [-mdsp] [-medsp] [-mvdsp] Target D10V options: [-O] Target D30V options: [-O|-n|-N] Target EPIPHANY options: [-mepiphany|-mepiphany16] Target H8/300 options: [-h-tick-hex] Target i386 options: [--32|--x32|--64] [-n] [-march=CPU[+EXTENSION...]] [-mtune=CPU] Target IA-64 options: [-mconstant-gp|-mauto-pic] [-milp32|-milp64|-mlp64|-mp64] [-mle|mbe] [-mtune=itanium1|-mtune=itanium2] [-munwind-check=warning|-munwind-check=error] [-mhint.b=ok|-mhint.b=warning|-mhint.b=error] [-x|-xexplicit] [-xauto] [-xdebug] Target IP2K options: [-mip2022|-mip2022ext] Target M32C options: [-m32c|-m16c] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex] Target M32R options: [--m32rx|--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts| --W[n]p] Target M680X0 options: [-l] [-m68000|-m68010|-m68020|...] Target M68HC11 options: [-m68hc11|-m68hc12|-m68hcs12|-mm9s12x|-mm9s12xg] [-mshort|-mlong] [-mshort-double|-mlong-double] [--force-long-branches] [--short-branches] [--strict-direct-mode] [--print-insn-syntax] [--print-opcodes] [--generate-example] Target MCORE options: [-jsri2bsr] [-sifilter] [-relax] [-mcpu=[210|340]] Target Meta options: [-mcpu=cpu] [-mfpu=cpu] [-mdsp=cpu] Target MICROBLAZE options: [-mlittle-endian] [-mbig-endian] Target MIPS options: [-nocpp] [-EL] [-EB] [-O[optimization level]] [-g[debug level]] [-G num] [-KPIC] [-call_shared] [-non_shared] [-xgot [-mvxworks-pic] [-mabi=ABI] [-32] [-n32] [-64] [-mfp32] [-mgp32] [-mfp64] [-mgp64] [-mfpxx] [-modd-spreg] [-mno-odd-spreg] [-march=CPU] [-mtune=CPU] [-mips1] [-mips2] [-mips3] [-mips4] [-mips5] [-mips32] [-mips32r2] [-mips32r3] [-mips32r5] [-mips32r6] [-mips64] [-mips64r2] [-mips64r3] [-mips64r5] [-mips64r6] [-construct-floats] [-no-construct-floats] [-mignore-branch-isa] [-mno-ignore-branch-isa] [-mnan=encoding] [-trap] [-no-break] [-break] [-no-trap] [-mips16] [-no-mips16] [-mmips16e2] [-mno-mips16e2] [-mmicromips] [-mno-micromips] [-msmartmips] [-mno-smartmips] [-mips3d] [-no-mips3d] [-mdmx] [-no-mdmx] [-mdsp] [-mno-dsp] [-mdspr2] [-mno-dspr2] [-mdspr3] [-mno-dspr3] [-mmsa] [-mno-msa] [-mxpa] [-mno-xpa] [-mmt] [-mno-mt] [-mmcu] [-mno-mcu] [-mcrc] [-mno-crc] [-mginv] [-mno-ginv] [-mloongson-mmi] [-mno-loongson-mmi] [-mloongson-cam] [-mno-loongson-cam] [-mloongson-ext] [-mno-loongson-ext] [-mloongson-ext2] [-mno-loongson-ext2] [-minsn32] [-mno-insn32] [-mfix7000] [-mno-fix7000] [-mfix-rm7000] [-mno-fix-rm7000] [-mfix-vr4120] [-mno-fix-vr4120] [-mfix-vr4130] [-mno-fix-vr4130] [-mfix-r5900] [-mno-fix-r5900] [-mdebug] [-no-mdebug] [-mpdr] [-mno-pdr] Target MMIX options: [--fixed-special-register-names] [--globalize-symbols] [--gnu-syntax] [--relax] [--no-predefined-symbols] [--no-expand] [--no-merge-gregs] [-x] [--linker-allocated-gregs] Target Nios II options: [-relax-all] [-relax-section] [-no-relax] [-EB] [-EL] Target NDS32 options: [-EL] [-EB] [-O] [-Os] [-mcpu=cpu] [-misa=isa] [-mabi=abi] [-mall-ext] [-m[no-]16-bit] [-m[no-]perf-ext] [-m[no-]perf2-ext] [-m[no-]string-ext] [-m[no-]dsp-ext] [-m[no-]mac] [-m[no-]div] [-m[no-]audio-isa-ext] [-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext] [-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext] [-m[no-]fpu-fma] [-mfpu-freg=FREG] [-mreduced-regs] [-mfull-regs] [-m[no-]dx-regs] [-mpic] [-mno-relax] [-mb2bb] Target PDP11 options: [-mpic|-mno-pic] [-mall] [-mno-extensions] [-mextension|-mno-extension] [-mcpu] [-mmachine] Target picoJava options: [-mb|-me] Target PowerPC options: [-a32|-a64] [-mpwrx|-mpwr2|-mpwr|-m601|-mppc|-mppc32|-m603|-m604|-m403|-m405| -m440|-m464|-m476|-m7400|-m7410|-m7450|-m7455|-m750cl|-mgekko| -mbroadway|-mppc64|-m620|-me500|-e500x2|-me500mc|-me500mc64|-me5500| -me6500|-mppc64bridge|-mbooke|-mpower4|-mpwr4|-mpower5|-mpwr5|-mpwr5x| -mpower6|-mpwr6|-mpower7|-mpwr7|-mpower8|-mpwr8|-mpower9|-mpwr9-ma2| -mcell|-mspe|-mspe2|-mtitan|-me300|-mcom] [-many] [-maltivec|-mvsx|-mhtm|-mvle] [-mregnames|-mno-regnames] [-mrelocatable|-mrelocatable-lib|-K PIC] [-memb] [-mlittle|-mlittle-endian|-le|-mbig|-mbig-endian|-be] [-msolaris|-mno-solaris] [-nops=count] Target PRU options: [-link-relax] [-mnolink-relax] [-mno-warn-regname-label] Target RISC-V options: [-fpic|-fPIC|-fno-pic] [-march=ISA] [-mabi=ABI] [-mlittle-endian|-mbig-endian] Target RL78 options: [-mg10] [-m32bit-doubles|-m64bit-doubles] Target RX options: [-mlittle-endian|-mbig-endian] [-m32bit-doubles|-m64bit-doubles] [-muse-conventional-section-names] [-msmall-data-limit] [-mpid] [-mrelax] [-mint-register=number] [-mgcc-abi|-mrx-abi] Target s390 options: [-m31|-m64] [-mesa|-mzarch] [-march=CPU] [-mregnames|-mno-regnames] [-mwarn-areg-zero] Target SCORE options: [-EB][-EL][-FIXDD][-NWARN] [-SCORE5][-SCORE5U][-SCORE7][-SCORE3] [-march=score7][-march=score3] [-USE_R1][-KPIC][-O0][-G num][-V] Target SPARC options: [-Av6|-Av7|-Av8|-Aleon|-Asparclet|-Asparclite -Av8plus|-Av8plusa|-Av8plusb|-Av8plusc|-Av8plusd -Av8plusv|-Av8plusm|-Av9|-Av9a|-Av9b|-Av9c -Av9d|-Av9e|-Av9v|-Av9m|-Asparc|-Asparcvis -Asparcvis2|-Asparcfmaf|-Asparcima|-Asparcvis3 -Asparcvisr|-Asparc5] [-xarch=v8plus|-xarch=v8plusa]|-xarch=v8plusb|-xarch=v8plusc -xarch=v8plusd|-xarch=v8plusv|-xarch=v8plusm|-xarch=v9 -xarch=v9a|-xarch=v9b|-xarch=v9c|-xarch=v9d|-xarch=v9e -xarch=v9v|-xarch=v9m|-xarch=sparc|-xarch=sparcvis -xarch=sparcvis2|-xarch=sparcfmaf|-xarch=sparcima -xarch=sparcvis3|-xarch=sparcvisr|-xarch=sparc5 -bump] [-32|-64] [--enforce-aligned-data][--dcti-couples-detect] Target TIC54X options: [-mcpu=54[123589]|-mcpu=54[56]lp] [-mfar-mode|-mf] [-merrors-to-file <filename>|-me <filename>] Target TIC6X options: [-march=arch] [-mbig-endian|-mlittle-endian] [-mdsbt|-mno-dsbt] [-mpid=no|-mpid=near|-mpid=far] [-mpic|-mno-pic] Target TILE-Gx options: [-m32|-m64][-EB][-EL] Target Visium options: [-mtune=arch] Target Xtensa options: [--[no-]text-section-literals] [--[no-]auto-litpools] [--[no-]absolute-literals] [--[no-]target-align] [--[no-]longcalls] [--[no-]transform] [--rename-section oldname=newname] [--[no-]trampolines] [--abi-windowed|--abi-call0] Target Z80 options: [-march=CPU[-EXT][+EXT]] [-local-prefix=PREFIX] [-colonless] [-sdcc] [-fp-s=FORMAT] [-fp-d=FORMAT]
@file
Read command-line options from file. The options read are inserted in place of the original @file option. If file does not exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not removed.
Options in file are separated by whitespace. A whitespace character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire option in either single or double quotes. Any character (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be included with a backslash. The file may itself contain additional @file options; any such options will be processed recursively.
-a[cdghilmns]
Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
-ac
omit false conditionals
-ad
omit debugging directives
-ag
include general information, like as version and options passed
-ah
include high-level source
-al
include assembly
-ali
include assembly with ginsn
-am
include macro expansions
-an
omit forms processing
-as
include symbols
=file
set the name of the listing file
You may combine these options; for example, use ‘-aln’ for assembly listing without forms processing. The ‘=file’ option, if used, must be the last one. By itself, ‘-a’ defaults to ‘-ahls’.
--alternate
Begin in alternate macro mode.
See .altmacro
.
--compress-debug-sections
Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a given section larger then it is not compressed.
--compress-debug-sections=none
¶--compress-debug-sections=zlib
--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
--compress-debug-sections=zstd
These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed. --compress-debug-sections=none is equivalent to --nocompress-debug-sections. --compress-debug-sections=zlib and --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi are equivalent to --compress-debug-sections. --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu compresses DWARF debug sections using the obsoleted zlib-gnu format. The debug sections are renamed to begin with ‘.zdebug’. --compress-debug-sections=zstd compresses DWARF debug sections using zstd. Note - if compression would actually make a section larger, then it is not compressed nor renamed.
--nocompress-debug-sections
Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to override this.
-D
Enable debugging in target specific backends, if supported. Otherwise ignored. Even if ignored, this option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to other assemblers.
--debug-prefix-map old=new
When assembling files in directory old, record debugging information describing them as in new instead.
--defsym sym=value
Define the symbol sym to be value before assembling the input file.
value must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading ‘0x’
indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading ‘0’ indicates an octal
value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
use of a .set
pseudo-op.
--dump-config
Displays how the assembler is configured and then exits.
--elf-stt-common=no
--elf-stt-common=yes
These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
symbols with the STT_COMMON
type. The default can be controlled
by a configure option --enable-elf-stt-common.
--emulation=name
If the assembler is configured to support multiple different target configurations then this option can be used to select the desired form.
-f
“fast”—skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is compiler output).
-g
--gen-debug
Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
ECOFF or DWARF2. When the debug format is DWARF then a .debug_info
and
.debug_line
section is only emitted when the assembly file doesn’t
generate one itself.
--gstabs
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
--gstabs+
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
--gdwarf-2
Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note—this option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
--gdwarf-3
This option is the same as the --gdwarf-2 option, except that it allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per version 3 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a per target basis.
--gdwarf-4
This option is the same as the --gdwarf-2 option, except that it allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per version 4 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a per target basis.
--gdwarf-5
This option is the same as the --gdwarf-2 option, except that it allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per version 5 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a per target basis.
--gdwarf-sections
Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of .debug_line.foo sections where foo is the name of the corresponding code section. For example a code section called .text.func will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called .debug_line.text.func. If the code section is just called .text then debug line section will still be called just .debug_line without any suffix.
--gdwarf-cie-version=version
Control which version of DWARF Common Information Entries (CIEs) are produced. When this flag is not specified the default is version 1, though some targets can modify this default. Other possible values for version are 3 or 4.
--generate-missing-build-notes=yes
--generate-missing-build-notes=no
These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build attribute notes if none are present in the input sources. The default can be controlled by the --enable-generate-build-notes configure option.
--gsframe
--gsframe
Create .sframe section from CFI directives.
--hash-size N
Ignored. Supported for command line compatibility with other assemblers.
--help
Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
--target-help
Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
-I dir
Add directory dir to the search list for .include
directives.
-J
Don’t warn about signed overflow.
-K
Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
-L
--keep-locals
Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with system-specific local label prefixes, typically ‘.L’ for ELF systems or ‘L’ for traditional a.out systems. See Symbol Names.
--listing-lhs-width=number
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler listing to number.
--listing-lhs-width2=number
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation lines in an assembler listing to number.
--listing-rhs-width=number
Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to number bytes.
--listing-cont-lines=number
Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input to number + 1.
--multibyte-handling=allow
--multibyte-handling=warn
--multibyte-handling=warn-sym-only
--multibyte-handling=warn_sym_only
Controls how the assembler handles multibyte characters in the input. The default (which can be restored by using the allow argument) is to allow such characters without complaint. Using the warn argument will make the assembler generate a warning message whenever any multibyte character is encountered. Using the warn-sym-only argument will only cause a warning to be generated when a symbol is defined with a name that contains multibyte characters. (References to undefined symbols will not generate a warning).
--no-pad-sections
Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
-o objfile
Name the object-file output from as
objfile.
-R
Fold the data section into the text section.
--reduce-memory-overheads
Ignored. Supported for compatibility with tools that apss the same option to both the assembler and the linker.
--scfi=experimental
This option controls whether the assembler should synthesize CFI for
hand-written input. If the input already contains some synthesizable CFI
directives, the assembler ignores them and emits a warning. Note that
--scfi=experimental
is not intended to be used for compiler-generated
code, including inline assembly. This experimental support is work in
progress. Only System V AMD64 ABI is supported.
Each input function in assembly must begin with the .type
directive, and
should ideally be closed off using a .size
directive. When using SCFI,
each .type
directive prompts GAS to start a new FDE (a.k.a., Function
Descriptor Entry). This implies that with each .type
directive, a
previous block of instructions, if any, is finalised as a distinct FDE.
--sectname-subst
Honor substitution sequences in section names.
See .section name
.
--size-check=error
--size-check=warning
Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
--statistics
Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by assembly.
--strip-local-absolute
Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
-v
-version
Print the as
version.
--version
Print the as
version and exit.
-W
--no-warn
Suppress warning messages.
--fatal-warnings
Treat warnings as errors.
--warn
Don’t suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
-w
Ignored.
-x
Ignored.
-Z
Generate an object file even after errors.
-- | files …
Standard input, or source files to assemble.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for an Alpha processor.
The following options are available when as is configured for an ARC processor.
-mcpu=cpu
This option selects the core processor variant.
-EB | -EL
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
-mcode-density
Enable Code Density extension instructions.
The following options are available when as is configured for the ARM processor family.
-mcpu=processor[+extension…]
Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
-march=architecture[+extension…]
Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
-mfpu=floating-point-format
Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
-mfloat-abi=abi
Select which floating point ABI is in use.
-mthumb
Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
-mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
-EB | -EL
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
-mthumb-interwork
Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and ARM code in mind.
-mccs
Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
-k
Specify that PIC code has been generated.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for the Blackfin processor family.
See BPF Options, for the options available when as is configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for the C-SKY processor family.
The following options are available when as is configured for a D10V processor.
-O
¶Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
The following options are available when as is configured for a D30V processor.
-O
¶Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
-n
¶Warn when nops are generated.
-N
¶Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for an Epiphany processor.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for an i386 processor.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Ubicom IP2K series.
-mip2022ext
Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
-mip2022
Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to just the basic IP2022 ones.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
-m32c
Assemble M32C instructions.
-m16c
Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
-relax
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
-h-tick-hex
Support H’00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
--m32rx
Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
--warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are encountered.
--no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are encountered.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Motorola 68000 series.
-l
Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
-m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
| -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
| -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
-m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor. The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the two can be specified, since it’s possible to do emulation of the coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
-m68851 | -mno-68851
The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for an Altera Nios II processor.
For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options, see Options.
-mpic | -mno-pic
Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The default is -mpic.
-mall
-mall-extensions
Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
-mno-extensions
Disable all instruction set extensions.
-mextension | -mno-extension
Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
-mcpu
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and disable all other extensions.
-mmachine
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine model, and disable all other extensions.
The following options are available when as is configured for a picoJava processor.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for a PRU processor.
The following options are available when as is configured for the Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
-m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
Specify what processor is the target. The default is defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
--xgate-ramoffset
Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into XGATE address space.
-mshort
Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
-mlong
Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
-mshort-double
Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
-mlong-double
Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
--force-long-branches
Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a sub routine.
-S | --short-branches
Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones when the offset is out of range.
--strict-direct-mode
Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
--print-insn-syntax
Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
--print-opcodes
Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
--generate-example
Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
This option is only useful for testing as
.
The following options are available when as
is configured
for the SPARC architecture:
-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
‘-Av8plus’ and ‘-Av8plusa’ select a 32 bit environment. ‘-Av9’ and ‘-Av9a’ select a 64 bit environment.
‘-Av8plusa’ and ‘-Av9a’ enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with UltraSPARC extensions.
-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
-bump
Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
The following options are available when as is configured for the ’c54x architecture.
-mfar-mode
Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
-mcpu=CPU_VERSION
Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
-merrors-to-file FILENAME
Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don’t support such behaviour in the shell.
The following options are available when as is configured for a MIPS processor.
-G num
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
implicitly with the gp
register. It is only accepted for targets that
use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
-EB
¶Generate “big endian” format output.
-EL
¶Generate “little endian” format output.
-mips1
¶-mips2
-mips3
-mips4
-mips5
-mips32
-mips32r2
-mips32r3
-mips32r5
-mips32r6
-mips64
-mips64r2
-mips64r3
-mips64r5
-mips64r6
Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level. ‘-mips1’ is an alias for ‘-march=r3000’, ‘-mips2’ is an alias for ‘-march=r6000’, ‘-mips3’ is an alias for ‘-march=r4000’ and ‘-mips4’ is an alias for ‘-march=r8000’. ‘-mips5’, ‘-mips32’, ‘-mips32r2’, ‘-mips32r3’, ‘-mips32r5’, ‘-mips32r6’, ‘-mips64’, ‘-mips64r2’, ‘-mips64r3’, ‘-mips64r5’, and ‘-mips64r6’ correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
-march=cpu
Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
-mtune=cpu
Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
-mfix7000
-mno-fix7000
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
-mfix-rm7000
-mno-fix-rm7000
Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is followed by a load instruction.
-mfix-r5900
-mno-fix-r5900
Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
instructions or fewer and always schedule a nop
instruction there
instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
-mdebug
-no-mdebug
Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
-mpdr
-mno-pdr
Control generation of .pdr
sections.
-mgp32
-mfp32
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at all times. ‘-mgp32’ controls the size of general-purpose registers and ‘-mfp32’ controls the size of floating-point registers.
-mgp64
-mfp64
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at all times. ‘-mgp64’ controls the size of general-purpose registers and ‘-mfp64’ controls the size of floating-point registers.
-mfpxx
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using this flag in combination with ‘-mabi=32’ enables an ABI variant which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are 32 or 64 bits wide.
-modd-spreg
-mno-odd-spreg
Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision registers when supported by the ISA. ‘-mfpxx’ implies ‘-mno-odd-spreg’, otherwise the default is ‘-modd-spreg’.
-mips16
-no-mips16
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
.module mips16
at the start of the assembly file. ‘-no-mips16’
turns off this option.
-mmips16e2
-mno-mips16e2
Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
to putting .module mips16e2
at the start of the assembly file.
‘-mno-mips16e2’ turns off this option.
-mmicromips
-mno-micromips
Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
.module micromips
at the start of the assembly file.
‘-mno-micromips’ turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
.module nomicromips
at the start of the assembly file.
-msmartmips
-mno-smartmips
Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
equivalent to putting .module smartmips
at the start of the assembly
file. ‘-mno-smartmips’ turns off this option.
-mips3d
-no-mips3d
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions. ‘-no-mips3d’ turns off this option.
-mdmx
-no-mdmx
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions. ‘-no-mdmx’ turns off this option.
-mdsp
-mno-dsp
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions. ‘-mno-dsp’ turns off this option.
-mdspr2
-mno-dspr2
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension. This option implies ‘-mdsp’. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions. ‘-mno-dspr2’ turns off this option.
-mdspr3
-mno-dspr3
Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension. This option implies ‘-mdsp’ and ‘-mdspr2’. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions. ‘-mno-dspr3’ turns off this option.
-mmsa
-mno-msa
Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions. ‘-mno-msa’ turns off this option.
-mxpa
-mno-xpa
Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension. This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions. ‘-mno-xpa’ turns off this option.
-mmt
-mno-mt
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions. ‘-mno-mt’ turns off this option.
-mmcu
-mno-mcu
Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions. ‘-mno-mcu’ turns off this option.
-mcrc
-mno-crc
Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions. ‘-mno-crc’ turns off this option.
-mginv
-mno-ginv
Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions. ‘-mno-ginv’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-mmi
-mno-loongson-mmi
Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-mmi’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-cam
-mno-loongson-cam
Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions. This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-cam’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-ext
-mno-loongson-ext
Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions. This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-ext’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-ext2
-mno-loongson-ext2
Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions. This option implies ‘-mloongson-ext’. This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-ext2’ turns off this option.
-minsn32
-mno-insn32
Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
instructions. This is equivalent to putting .set insn32
at
the start of the assembly file. ‘-mno-insn32’ turns off this
option. This is equivalent to putting .set noinsn32
at the
start of the assembly file. By default ‘-mno-insn32’ is
selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
--construct-floats
--no-construct-floats
The ‘--no-construct-floats’ option disables the construction of double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the value into the two single width floating point registers that make up the double width register. By default ‘--construct-floats’ is selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
--relax-branch
--no-relax-branch
The ‘--relax-branch’ option enables the relaxation of out-of-range branches. By default ‘--no-relax-branch’ is selected, causing any out-of-range branches to produce an error.
-mignore-branch-isa
-mno-ignore-branch-isa
Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the same as the ISA mode of the branch’s target label. Therefore GAS has checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA modes match. ‘-mignore-branch-isa’ disables these checks. By default ‘-mno-ignore-branch-isa’ is selected, causing any invalid branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
-mnan=encoding
Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (-mnan=2008) or the legacy (-mnan=legacy) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
--emulation=name
¶This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose. It is retained for backwards compatibility.
The available configuration names are: ‘mipself’, ‘mipslelf’ and ‘mipsbelf’. Choosing ‘mipself’ now has no effect, since the output is always ELF. ‘mipslelf’ and ‘mipsbelf’ select little- and big-endian output respectively, but ‘-EL’ and ‘-EB’ are now the preferred options instead.
-nocpp
as
ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
the native tools.
--trap
--no-trap
--break
--no-break
Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero. ‘--trap’ or ‘--no-break’ (which are synonyms) take a trap exception (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher); ‘--break’ or ‘--no-trap’ (also synonyms, and the default) take a break exception.
-n
When this option is used, as
will issue a warning every
time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
The following options are available when as is configured for an MCore processor.
-jsri2bsr
-nojsri2bsr
Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled. The command-line option ‘-nojsri2bsr’ can be used to disable it.
-sifilter
-nosifilter
Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled. The default can be overridden by the ‘-sifilter’ command-line option.
-relax
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
-mcpu=[210|340]
Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions can be assembled.
-EB
Assemble for a big endian target.
-EL
Assemble for a little endian target.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for a Meta processor.
See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
See NDS32 Options, for the options available when as is configured for a NDS32 processor.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for a PowerPC processor.
See RISC-V Options, for the options available when as is configured for a RISC-V processor.
See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
The following options are available when as is configured for the s390 processor family.
-m31
-m64
Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
-mesa
-mzarch
Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
-march=processor
Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, ‘g5’ (or ‘arch3’), ‘g6’, ‘z900’ (or ‘arch5’), ‘z990’ (or ‘arch6’), ‘z9-109’, ‘z9-ec’ (or ‘arch7’), ‘z10’ (or ‘arch8’), ‘z196’ (or ‘arch9’), ‘zEC12’ (or ‘arch10’), ‘z13’ (or ‘arch11’), ‘z14’ (or ‘arch12’), ‘z15’ (or ‘arch13’), or ‘z16’ (or ‘arch14’).
-mregnames
-mno-regnames
Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
-mwarn-areg-zero
Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified but evaluates to zero.
See TIC6X Options, for the options available when as is configured for a TMS320C6000 processor.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for a TILE-Gx processor.
See Options, for the options available when as is configured for a Visium processor.
See Command-line Options, for the options available when as is configured for an Xtensa processor.
See Command-line Options, for the options available when as is configured for an Z80 processor.
This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
GNU as
. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
as
understands; and of course how to invoke as
.
This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of various flavors of the assembler.
On the other hand, this manual is not intended as an introduction to programming in assembly language—let alone programming in general! In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine architecture; we do not describe the instruction set, standard mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a particular architecture. You may want to consult the manufacturer’s machine architecture manual for this information.
GNU as
is really a family of assemblers.
If you use (or have used) the GNU assembler on one architecture, you
should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
pseudo-ops) and assembler syntax.
as
is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
GNU C compiler gcc
for use by the linker
ld
. Nevertheless, we’ve tried to make as
assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
machine would assemble.
Any exceptions are documented explicitly (see Machine Dependent Features).
This doesn’t mean as
always uses the same syntax as another
assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
Unlike older assemblers, as
is designed to assemble a source
program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
.org directive (see .org
).
The GNU assembler can be configured to produce several alternative object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols are typically different in different file formats. See Symbol Attributes.
After the program name as
, the command line may contain
options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
significant.
-- (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
explicitly, as one of the files for as
to assemble.
Except for ‘--’ any command-line argument that begins with a
hyphen (‘-’) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
as
. No option changes the way another option works. An
option is a ‘-’ followed by one or more letters; the case of
the letter is important. All options are optional.
Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file name may either immediately follow the option’s letter (compatible with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (GNU standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
as -o my-object-file.o mumble.s as -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
We use the phrase source program, abbreviated source, to
describe the program input to one run of as
. The program may
be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
doesn’t change the meaning of the source.
The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the order specified.
Each time you run as
it assembles exactly one source
program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
(The standard input is also a file.)
You give as
a command line that has zero or more input file
names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
is taken to be an input file name.
If you give as
no file names it attempts to read one input file
from the as
standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
may have to type ctl-D to tell as
there is no more program
to assemble.
Use ‘--’ if you need to explicitly name the standard input file in your command line.
If the source is empty, as
produces a small, empty object
file.
There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a “logical” file. See Error and Warning Messages.
Physical files are those files named in the command line given
to as
.
Logical files are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
error messages reflect the original source file, when as
source
is itself synthesized from other files. as
understands the
‘#’ directives emitted by the gcc
preprocessor. See also
.file
.
Every time you run as
it produces an output file, which is
your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
is the object file. Its default name is a.out
.
You can give it another name by using the -o option. Conventionally,
object file names end with .o. The default name is used for historical
reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn’t currently
possible, but it can be done for the a.out
format.)
The object file is meant for input to the linker ld
. It contains
assembled program code, information to help ld
integrate
the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
information for the debugger.
as
may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
runs as
automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
that as
could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
grave problem that stops the assembly.
Warning messages have the format
file_name:NNN:Warning Message Text
(where NNN is a line number). If both a logical file name
(see .file
) and a logical line number
(see .line
)
have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the .file
directive, not the DWARF2 version of the .file
directive. For example:
.file 2 "bar.c" error_assembler_source .file "foo.c" .line 30 error_c_source
produces this output:
Assembler messages: asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source' foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
Error messages have the format
file_name:NNN:FATAL:Error Message Text
The file name and line number are derived as for warning messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory because many of them aren’t supposed to happen.
This chapter describes command-line options available in all versions of the GNU assembler; see Machine Dependent Features, for options specific to particular machine architectures.
If you are invoking as
via the GNU C compiler,
you can use the ‘-Wa’ option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the ‘-Wa’)
by commas. For example:
gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
This passes two options to the assembler: ‘-alh’ (emit a listing to standard output with high-level and assembly source) and ‘-L’ (retain local symbols in the symbol table).
Usually you do not need to use this ‘-Wa’ mechanism, since many compiler command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler. (You can call the GNU compiler driver with the ‘-v’ option to see precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the assembler.)
.include
Search Path: -I pathThese options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself, ‘-a’ requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing. You can use other letters to select specific options for the list: ‘-ah’ requests a high-level language listing, ‘-al’ requests an output-program assembly listing, ‘-ali’ requests an output-program assembly listing along with the associated ginsn, and ‘-as’ requests a symbol table listing. High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like ‘-g’ be used, and that assembly listings (‘-al’) be requested also.
Use the ‘-ag’ option to print a first section with general assembly information, like as version, switches passed, or time stamp.
Use the ‘-ac’ option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
which are not assembled because of a false .if
(or .ifdef
, or any
other conditional), or a true .if
followed by an .else
, will be
omitted from the listing.
Use the ‘-ad’ option to omit debugging directives from the listing.
Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
listing output and its appearance using the directives .list
,
.nolist
, .psize
, .eject
, .title
, and
.sbttl
.
The ‘-an’ option turns off all forms processing.
If you do not request listing output with one of the ‘-a’ options, the
listing-control directives have no effect.
The letters after ‘-a’ may be combined into one option, e.g., ‘-aln’.
Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
because it
is being created by gcc
and the ‘-pipe’ command-line switch
is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
This option enables debugging, if it is supported by the assembler’s
configuration. Otherwise it does nothing as is ignored. This allows scripts
designed to work with other assemblers to also work with GAS.
as
.
‘-f’ should only be used when assembling programs written by a (trusted) compiler. ‘-f’ stops the assembler from doing whitespace and comment preprocessing on the input file(s) before assembling them. See Preprocessing.
Warning: if you use ‘-f’ when the files actually need to be preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example),
as
does not work correctly.
.include
Search Path: -I path ¶Use this option to add a path to the list of directories
as
searches for files specified in .include
directives (see .include
). You may use -I as
many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
working directory is always searched first; after that, as
searches any ‘-I’ directories in the same order as they were
specified (left to right) on the command line.
as
sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
form ‘.word sym1-sym2’. See .word
.
You can use the ‘-K’ option if you want a warning issued when this
is done.
Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
‘.L’ for ELF systems or ‘L’ for traditional a.out systems, are
called local symbols. See Symbol Names. Normally you do not see
such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
notice. Normally both as
and ld
discard
such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
This option tells as
to retain those local symbols
in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
ld
to preserve those symbols.
The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
‘-a’ (see Enable Listings: -a[cdghilns]). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
directives inside the assembler source (i.e., .list
(see .list
),
.title
(see .title "heading"
), .sbttl
(see .sbttl "subheading"
),
.psize
(see .psize lines , columns
), and
.eject
(see .eject
) and also by the following switches:
--listing-lhs-width=‘number’
¶Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
--listing-lhs-width2=‘number’
¶Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being the same as the value specified for ‘--listing-lhs-width’. If neither switch is used the default is to one.
--listing-rhs-width=‘number’
¶Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
--listing-cont-lines=‘number’
¶Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
The -M or --mri option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of as
to make it
compatible with the ASM68K
assembler from Microtec Research.
The exact nature of the
MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
assembling existing MRI assembler code using as
.
The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format individually. These are:
The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
Other object file formats do not support this. as
handles
common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These are not support by other object file formats.
END
pseudo-op specifying start address
The MRI END
pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
instead be specified using the -e option to the linker, or in a linker
script.
IDNT
, .ident
and NAME
pseudo-ops
The MRI IDNT
, .ident
and NAME
pseudo-ops assign a module
name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
ORG
pseudo-op
The m68k MRI ORG
pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
address. This differs from the usual as
.org
pseudo-op,
which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
assigned within a linker script.
There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
as
, typically either because they are difficult or because they
seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
EBCDIC strings are not supported.
Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the DC.P
and DCB.P
pseudo-ops are not supported.
FEQU
pseudo-op
The m68k FEQU
pseudo-op is not supported.
NOOBJ
pseudo-op
The m68k NOOBJ
pseudo-op is not supported.
OPT
branch control options
The m68k OPT
branch control options—B
, BRS
, BRB
,
BRL
, and BRW
—are ignored. as
automatically
relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
these options serve no purpose.
OPT
list control options
The following m68k OPT
list control options are ignored: C
,
CEX
, CL
, CRE
, E
, G
, I
, M
,
MEX
, MC
, MD
, X
.
OPT
options
The following m68k OPT
options are ignored: NEST
, O
,
OLD
, OP
, P
, PCO
, PCR
, PCS
, R
.
OPT
D
option is default
The m68k OPT
D
option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
OPT NOD
may be used to turn it off.
XREF
pseudo-op.
The m68k XREF
pseudo-op is ignored.
as
can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
file consists of a single rule suitable for make
describing the
dependencies of the main source file.
The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on memory constrained targets. So the --no-pad-sections option will disable this behaviour.
There is always one object file output when you run as
. By
default it has the name a.out.
You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
object file a different name.
Whatever the object file is called, as
overwrites any
existing file of the same name.
-R tells as
to write the object file as if all
data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
appended to the text section. (See Sections and Relocation.)
When you specify -R it would be possible to generate shorter
address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
older versions of as
. In future, -R may work this way.
When as
is configured for COFF or ELF output,
this option is only useful if you use sections named ‘.text’ and
‘.data’.
-R is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
-R generates a warning from as
.
Use ‘--statistics’ to display two statistics about the resources used by
as
: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in CPU
seconds).
For some targets, the output of as
is different in some ways
from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
as
to use the traditional format instead.
For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
as
normally does by default on gcc
output.
You can find out what version of as is running by including the option ‘-v’ (which you can also spell as ‘-version’) on the command line.
as
should never give a warning or error message when
assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
cause as
to give a warning that a particular assumption was
made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
If you use the -W and --no-warn options, no warnings are issued.
This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
how as
assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
are still reported.
If you use the --fatal-warnings option, as
considers
files that generate warnings to be in error.
You can switch these options off again by specifying --warn, which causes warnings to be output as usual.
After an error message, as
normally produces no output. If for
some reason you are interested in object file output even after
as
gives an error message on your program, use the ‘-Z’
option. If there are any errors, as
continues anyways, and
writes an object file after a final warning message of the form ‘n
errors, m warnings, generating bad object file.’
This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
source file. as
syntax is similar to what many other
assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
assembler, except that as
does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
The as
internal preprocessor:
It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
anything else you may get from your C compiler’s preprocessor. You can
do include file processing with the .include
directive
(see .include
). You can use the GNU C compiler driver
to get other “CPP” style preprocessing by giving the input file a
‘.S’ suffix. See the ’Options Controlling the Kind of Output’ section of the GCC manual for
more details
Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not preprocessed.
If the first line of an input file is #NO_APP
or if you use the
‘-f’ option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
specific portions of the file by putting a line that says #APP
before the
text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
#NO_APP
after this text. This feature is mainly intended to support
asm
statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
and whitespace.
Whitespace is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order. Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for people to read. Unless within character constants (see Character Constants), any whitespace means the same as exactly one space.
There are two ways of rendering comments to as
. In both
cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
Anything from ‘/*’ through the next ‘*/’ is a comment. This means you may not nest these comments.
/* The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment is to use this sort of comment. */ /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
Anything from a line comment character up to the next newline is considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target specific, and some targets support multiple comment characters. Some targets also have line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the Syntax section in the documentation for individual targets.
If the line comment character is the hash sign (‘#’) then it still has the special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (see Preprocessing) and to specify logical line numbers:
To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with ‘#’ have a special interpretation. Following the ‘#’ should be an absolute expression (see Expressions): the logical line number of the next line. Then a string (see Strings) is allowed: if present it is a new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric, the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
# This is an ordinary comment. # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name # This is logical line # 36.
This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
of as
.
A symbol is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
‘_.$’.
On most machines, you can also use $
in symbol names; exceptions
are noted in Machine Dependent Features.
No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
are supported, but note that the setting of the
--multibyte-handling option might prevent their use. Symbols
are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
(since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is not a
possible symbol delimiter). See Symbols.
Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote "
characters. In such
cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceded by a
backslash \
character.
A statement ends at a newline character (‘\n’) or a line separator character. The line separator character is target specific and described in the Syntax section of each target’s documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character. The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an exception: they do not end statements.
It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last character of any input file should be a newline.
An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
symbol begins with a dot ‘.’ then the statement is an assembler
directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
a letter the statement is an assembly language instruction: it
assembles into a machine language instruction.
Different versions of as
for different computers
recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
represent a different instruction in a different computer’s assembly
language.
A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (:
).
Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
have whitespace between a label’s symbol and its colon. See Labels.
For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that only one label may be defined on each line.
label: .directive followed by something another_label: # This is an empty statement. instruction operand_1, operand_2, ...
A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
.byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value. .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant. .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum. .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\ 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
There are two kinds of character constants. A character stands for one character in one byte and its value may be used in numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string literals) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be used in arithmetic expressions.
A string is written between double-quotes. It may contain
double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
into a string is to escape these characters: precede them with
a backslash ‘\’ character. For example ‘\\’ represents
one backslash: the first \
is an escape which tells
as
to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
(which prevents as
from recognizing the second \
as an
escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
for example, \008
has the value 010, and \009
the value 011.
x
hex-digits... ¶A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
lower case x
works.
Represents one ‘\’ character.
Represents one ‘"’ character. Needed in strings to represent this character, because an unescaped ‘"’ would end the string.
Any other character when escaped by \ gives a warning, but
assembles as if the ‘\’ was not present. The idea is that if
you used an escape sequence you clearly didn’t want the literal
interpretation of the following character. However as
has no
other interpretation, so as
knows it is giving you the wrong
code and warns you of the fact.
Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent, varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape sequence.
A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, \b
,
\f
, \n
, \r
, \t
, and \"
with the same meaning
as for strings, plus \'
for a single quote. So if you want to write the
character backslash, you must write '\\ where the first \
escapes
the second \
. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
accent. A newline
immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
constant in a numeric expression is the machine’s byte-wide code for
that character. as
assumes your character code is ASCII:
'A means 65, 'B means 66, and so on.
as
distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
are stored in the target machine. Integers are numbers that
would fit into an int
in the C language. Bignums are
integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. Flonums
are floating point numbers, described below.
A binary integer is ‘0b’ or ‘0B’ followed by zero or more of the binary digits ‘01’.
An octal integer is ‘0’ followed by zero or more of the octal digits (‘01234567’).
A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or more digits (‘0123456789’).
A hexadecimal integer is ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ followed by one or more hexadecimal digits chosen from ‘0123456789abcdefABCDEF’.
Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use the prefix operator ‘-’ discussed under expressions (see Prefix Operators).
A bignum has the same syntax and semantics as an integer except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places integers are permitted while bignums are not.
A flonum represents a floating point number. The translation is
indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
as
to a generic binary floating point number of more than
sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
to a particular computer’s floating point format (or formats) by a
portion of as
specialized to that computer.
A flonum is written by writing (in order)
as
the rest of the number is a flonum.
e is recommended. Case is not important.
On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be one of the letters ‘DFPRSX’ (in upper or lower case).
On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters ‘DFRS’ (in upper or lower case).
On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be ‘E’ (upper case only).
At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
as
does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
as
.
Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data “in” those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose. For example there may be a “read only” section.
The linker ld
reads many object files (partial programs) and
combines their contents to form a runnable program. When as
emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
ld
assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how as
uses
sections.
ld
moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
within them. Such a rigid unit is called a section. Assigning
run-time addresses to sections is called relocation. It includes
the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
the proper run-time addresses.
For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
as
pads sections if needed to
ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
An object file written by as
has at least three sections, any
of which may be empty. These are named text, data and
bss sections.
When it generates COFF or ELF output,
as
can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
using the ‘.section’ directive (see .section
).
If you do not use any directives that place output in the ‘.text’
or ‘.data’ sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
When as
generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
as
can also generate whatever other named sections you
specify using the ‘.space’ and ‘.subspace’ directives. See
HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual
(HP 92432-90001) for details on the ‘.space’ and ‘.subspace’
assembler directives.
Additionally, as
uses different names for the standard
text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
is placed into the ‘$CODE$’ section, data into ‘$DATA$’, and
BSS into ‘$BSS$’.
Within the object file, the text section starts at address 0
, the
data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
section starts at address 0
, the data section at address
0x4000000
, and the bss section follows the data section.
To let ld
know which data changes when the sections are
relocated, and how to change that data, as
also writes to the
object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
ld
must know, each time an address in the object
file is mentioned:
(address) − (start-address of section)?
In fact, every address as
ever uses is expressed as
(section) + (offset into section)
Further, most expressions as
computes have this section-relative
nature.
(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
symbol-relative instead.)
In this manual we use the notation {secname N} to mean “offset N into section secname.”
Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
absolute section. When ld
mixes partial programs,
addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
{absolute 0}
is “relocated” to run-time address 0 by
ld
. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs’
data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, by definition
their absolute sections must overlap. Address {absolute 239}
in one
part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
address {absolute 239}
in any other part of the program.
The idea of sections is extended to the undefined section. Any address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition rendered {undefined U}—where U is filled in later. Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly time so it has section undefined.
By analogy the word section is used to describe groups of sections in
the linked program. ld
puts all partial programs’ text
sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
customary to refer to the text section of a program, meaning all
the addresses of all partial programs’ text sections. Likewise for
data and bss sections.
Some sections are manipulated by ld
; others are invented for
use of as
and have no meaning except during assembly.
ld
deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
These sections hold your program. as
and ld
treat them as
separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
true of another.
When the program is running, however, it is
customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
text section is often shared among processes: it contains
instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
in the data section.
This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of each partial program’s bss section is important, but because it starts out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate those explicit zeros from object files.
Address 0 of this section is always “relocated” to runtime address 0.
This is useful if you want to refer to an address that ld
must
not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
addresses being “unrelocatable”: they do not change during relocation.
This “section” is a catch-all for address references to objects not in the preceding sections.
An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows. The example uses the traditional section names ‘.text’ and ‘.data’. Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
+-----+----+--+ partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00| +-----+----+--+ text data bss seg. seg. seg. +---+---+---+ partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000| +---+---+---+ +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000| +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ addresses: 0 ...
These sections are meant only for the internal use of as
. They
have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in as
warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
meanings to as
. These sections are used to permit the
value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
section-relative address.
An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a bug in the assembler.
The assembler stores complex expressions internally as combinations of symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts it in the expr section.
Assembled bytes
conventionally
fall into two sections: text and data.
You may have separate groups of
data in named sections
that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
are not contiguous in the assembler source. as
allows you to
use subsections for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a ‘.text 0’ before each
section of code being output, and a ‘.text 1’ before each group of
constants being output.
Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything goes in subsection number zero.
Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
of as
.)
Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people’s assemblers.)
The object file contains no representation of subsections; ld
and
other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
data subsections as a data section.
To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a ‘.text
expression’ or a ‘.data expression’ statement.
When generating COFF output, you
can also use an extra subsection
argument with arbitrary named sections: ‘.section name,
expression’.
When generating ELF output, you
can also use the .subsection
directive (see .subsection name
)
to specify a subsection: ‘.subsection expression’.
Expression should be an absolute expression
(see Expressions). If you just say ‘.text’ then ‘.text 0’
is assumed. Likewise ‘.data’ means ‘.data 0’. Assembly
begins in text 0
. For instance:
.text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway. .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *" .text 1 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection." .data 0 .ascii "This lives in the data section," .ascii "in the first data subsection." .text 0 .ascii "This lives in the first text section," .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
Each section has a location counter incremented by one for every byte
assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
restricted to as
there is no concept of a subsection location
counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter—but the
.align
directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
assembled is said to be the active location counter.
The bss section is used for local common variable storage. You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When your program starts running, all the contents of the bss section are zeroed bytes.
The .lcomm
pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
.lcomm
.
The .comm
pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
another form of uninitialized symbol; see .comm
.
When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
COFF, you may switch into the .bss
section and define symbols as usual;
see .section
. You may only assemble zero values into the
section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
.skip
directives (see .skip
).
Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols to debug.
Warning:
as
does not place symbols in the object file in the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
A label is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon ‘:’. The symbol then represents the current value of the active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two different locations: the first definition overrides any other definitions.
On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of as
also
provides a special directive .label
for defining labels more flexibly.
A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
by an equals sign ‘=’, followed by an expression
(see Expressions). This is equivalent to using the .set
directive. See .set
. In the same way, using a double
equals sign ‘=’‘=’ here represents an equivalent of the
.eqv
directive. See .eqv
.
Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with ‘=’.
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of ‘._’. On most
machines, you can also use $
in symbol names; exceptions are
noted in Machine Dependent Features. That character may be followed by any
string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
particular target machine), and underscores. These restrictions do not
apply when quoting symbol names by ‘"’, which is permitted for most
targets. Escaping characters in quoted symbol names with ‘\’ generally
extends only to ‘\’ itself and ‘"’, at the time of writing.
Case of letters is significant: foo
is a different symbol name
than Foo
.
Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for Local Labels. See below.
Multibyte characters are supported, but note that the setting of the multibyte-handling option might prevent their use. To generate a symbol name containing multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf See Strings. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not currently supported.
Since multibyte symbol names are unusual, and could possibly be used
maliciously, as
provides a command line option
(--multibyte-handling=warn-sym-only) which can be used to generate a
warning message whenever a symbol name containing multibyte characters is defined.
Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times in a program.
A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes. By default, the local label prefix is ‘.L’ for ELF systems or ‘L’ for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own set of local label prefixes. On the HPPA local symbols begin with ‘L$’.
Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging. You may use the ‘-L’ option (see Include Local Symbols) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of the form ‘N:’ (where N represents any non-negative integer). To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write ‘Nb’, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write ‘Nf’. The ‘b’ stands for “backwards” and the ‘f’ stands for “forwards”.
There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using the same number ‘N’), although you can only refer to the most recently defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth noting that the first 10 local labels (‘0:’…‘9:’) are implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
Here is an example:
1: branch 1f 2: branch 1b 1: branch 2f 2: branch 1b
Which is the equivalent of:
label_1: branch label_3 label_2: branch label_1 label_3: branch label_4 label_4: branch label_3
Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them. The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using these parts:
local label prefix
All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
Normally both as
and ld
forget symbols
that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
‘-L’ option then as
retains these symbols in the
object file. If you also instruct ld
to retain these symbols,
you may use them in debugging.
number
This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the label is written ‘55:’ then the number is ‘55’.
C-B
This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol of the same name. The character has ASCII value of ‘\002’ (control-B).
ordinal number
This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of ‘0:’ gets the number ‘1’. The 15th definition of ‘0:’ gets the number ‘15’, and so on. Likewise the first definition of ‘1:’ gets the number ‘1’ and its 15th definition gets ‘15’ as well.
So for example, the first 1:
may be named .L1C-B1
, and
the 44th 3:
may be named .L3C-B44
.
On some targets as
also supports an even more local form of
local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
by another occurrence of the same local label.
Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels, except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g., ‘55$:’.
They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed names which use ASCII character ‘\001’ (control-A) as the magic character to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of ‘6$’ may be named ‘.L6C-A5’.
The special symbol ‘.’ refers to the current address that
as
is assembling into. Thus, the expression ‘melvin:
.long .’ defines melvin
to contain its own address.
Assigning a value to .
is treated the same as a .org
directive.
Thus, the expression ‘.=.+4’ is the same as saying
‘.space 4’.
Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes “Value” and “Type”. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary attributes.
If you use a symbol without defining it, as
assumes zero for
all these attributes, and probably won’t warn you. This makes the
symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
would want.
The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
as ld
changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
symbols’ values do not change during linking: that is why they are
called absolute.
The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
ld
tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a .comm
common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
allocated storage.
The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section) information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact format depends on the object-code output format in use.
a.out
¶The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between .def
and
.endef
directives.
The symbol name is set with .def
; the value and type,
respectively, with .val
and .type
.
The as
directives .dim
, .line
, .scl
,
.size
, .tag
, and .weak
can generate auxiliary symbol
table information for COFF.
The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
the .EXPORT
and .IMPORT
directives.
The attributes are described in HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
Language Reference Manual (HP 92432-90001) under the IMPORT
and
EXPORT
assembler directive documentation.
An expression specifies an address or numeric value. Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
enough information when as
sees the expression to know its
section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
the expression—but the second pass is currently not implemented.
as
aborts with an error message in this situation.
An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
expression, and as
assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
is compatible with other assemblers.
An integer expression is one or more arguments delimited by operators.
Arguments are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other contexts arguments are sometimes called “arithmetic operands”. In this manual, to avoid confusing them with the “instruction operands” of the machine language, we use the term “argument” to refer to parts of expressions only, reserving the word “operand” to refer only to machine instruction operands.
Symbols are evaluated to yield {section NNN} where section is one of text, data, bss, absolute, or undefined. NNN is a signed, 2’s complement 32 bit integer.
Numbers are usually integers.
A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
that only the low order 32 bits are used, and as
pretends
these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
assemblers.
Subexpressions are a left parenthesis ‘(’ followed by an integer expression, followed by a right parenthesis ‘)’; or a prefix operator followed by an argument.
Operators are arithmetic functions, like +
or %
. Prefix
operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
whitespace.
as
has the following prefix operators. They each take
one argument, which must be absolute.
-
Negation. Two’s complement negation.
~
Complementation. Bitwise not.
Infix operators take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
to right. Apart from +
or -, both arguments must be
absolute, and the result is absolute.
*
Multiplication.
/
Division. Truncation is the same as the C operator ‘/’
%
Remainder.
<<
Shift Left. Same as the C operator ‘<<’.
>>
Shift Right. Same as the C operator ‘>>’.
|
Bitwise Inclusive Or.
&
Bitwise And.
^
Bitwise Exclusive Or.
!
Bitwise Or Not.
+
¶Addition. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different sections.
-
¶Subtraction. If the right argument is absolute, the result has the section of the left argument. If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute. You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
==
¶Is Equal To
<>
!=
Is Not Equal To
<
Is Less Than
>
Is Greater Than
>=
Is Greater Than Or Equal To
<=
Is Less Than Or Equal To
The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true result has a value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators perform signed comparisons.
&&
Logical And.
||
Logical Or.
These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a value of 1 but a false result does still return 0. Also note that the logical or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
In short, it’s only meaningful to add or subtract the offsets in an address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (‘.’). The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written in lower case.
This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the target machine configuration for the GNU assembler. Some machine configurations provide additional directives. See Machine Dependent Features.
.abort
.ABORT
(COFF).align [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.altmacro
.ascii "string"
….asciz "string"
….attach_to_group name
.balign[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.bss subsection
.byte expressions
.comm symbol , length
.data subsection
.dc[size] expressions
.dcb[size] number [,fill]
.ds[size] number [,fill]
.def name
.desc symbol, abs-expression
.dim
.double flonums
.eject
.else
.elseif
.end
.endef
.endfunc
.endif
.equ symbol, expression
.equiv symbol, expression
.eqv symbol, expression
.err
.error "string"
.exitm
.extern
.fail expression
.file
.fill repeat , size , value
.float flonums
.func name[,label]
.global symbol
, .globl symbol
.gnu_attribute tag,value
.hidden names
.hword expressions
.ident
.if absolute expression
.incbin "file"[,skip[,count]]
.include "file"
.int expressions
.internal names
.irp symbol,values
….irpc symbol,values
….lcomm symbol , length
.lflags
.line line-number
.linkonce [type]
.list
.ln line-number
.loc fileno lineno [column] [options]
.loc_mark_labels enable
.local names
.long expressions
.macro
.mri val
.noaltmacro
.nolist
.nop [size]
.nops size[, control]
.octa bignums
.offset loc
.org new-lc , fill
.p2align[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
.popsection
.previous
.print string
.protected names
.psize lines , columns
.purgem name
.pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
.quad expressions
.reloc offset, reloc_name[, expression]
.rept count
.sbttl "subheading"
.scl class
.section name
.set symbol, expression
.short expressions
.single flonums
.size
.skip size [,fill]
.sleb128 expressions
.space size [,fill]
.stabd, .stabn, .stabs
.string
"str", .string8
"str", .string16
.struct expression
.subsection name
.symver
.tag structname
.text subsection
.title "heading"
.tls_common symbol, length[, alignment]
.type
.uleb128 expressions
.val addr
.version "string"
.vtable_entry table, offset
.vtable_inherit child, parent
.warning "string"
.weak names
.weakref alias, target
.word expressions
.zero size
.2byte expression [, expression]*
.4byte expression [, expression]*
.8byte expression [, expression]*
.abort
¶This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
of the source quit, it could use this directive tells as
to
quit also. One day .abort
will not be supported.
.ABORT
(COFF) ¶When producing COFF output, as
accepts this directive as a
synonym for ‘.abort’.
.align [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
¶Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment required, as described below. If this expression is omitted then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when appropriate.
The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system. For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k, s390, sparc, tic4x and xtensa, the first expression is the alignment request in bytes. For example ‘.align 8’ advances the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the first expression is the alignment request in words.
For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and strongarm, it is the number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after advancement. For example ‘.align 3’ advances the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
GAS also provides .balign
and .p2align
directives,
described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
architectures (but are specific to GAS).
.altmacro
¶Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
LOCAL name [ , … ]
¶One additional directive, LOCAL
, is available. It is used to
generate a string replacement for each of the name arguments, and
replace any instances of name in each macro expansion. The
replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
separate macro expansion. LOCAL
allows you to write macros that
define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
String delimiters
¶You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
"string"
:
'string'
You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
<string>
You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
single-character string escape
¶To include any single character literally in a string (even if the character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the character with ‘!’ (an exclamation mark). For example, you can write ‘<4.3 !> 5.4!!>’ to get the literal text ‘4.3 > 5.4!’.
Expression results as strings
¶You can write ‘%expr’ to evaluate the expression expr and use the result as a string.
.ascii "string"
… ¶.ascii
expects zero or more string literals (see Strings)
separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
.asciz "string"
… ¶.asciz
is just like .ascii
, but each string is followed by
a zero byte. The “z” in ‘.asciz’ stands for “zero”. Note that
multiple string arguments not separated by commas will be concatenated
together and only one final zero byte will be stored.
.attach_to_group name
¶Attaches the current section to the named group. This is like declaring
the section with the G
attribute, but can be done after the section
has been created. Note if the group section does not exist at the point that
this directive is used then it will be created.
.balign[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
¶Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment request in bytes. For example ‘.balign 8’ advances the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when appropriate.
The .balignw
and .balignl
directives are variants of the
.balign
directive. The .balignw
directive treats the fill
pattern as a two byte word value. The .balignl
directives treats the
fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, .balignw
4,0x368d
will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
undefined.
.bss subsection
¶.bss
tells as
to assemble the following statements
onto the end of the bss section.
For most ELF based targets an optional subsection expression (which must
evaluate to a positive integer) can be provided. In this case the statements
are appended to the end of the indicated bss subsection.
.bundle_align_mode abs-expr
¶.bundle_align_mode
enables or disables aligned instruction
bundle mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
into fixed-sized bundles. If the argument is zero, this mode is
disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
.p2align
directive, see .p2align[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
).
For some targets, it’s an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
certain aligned boundary. A bundle is simply a sequence of
instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
abs-expr is 5
then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it’s an error if any single
instruction’s encoding is longer than the bundle size.
.bundle_lock
and .bundle_unlock
¶The .bundle_lock
and directive .bundle_unlock
directives
allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
are only valid when .bundle_align_mode
has been used to enable
aligned instruction bundle mode. It’s an error if they appear when
.bundle_align_mode
has not been used at all, or when the last
directive was .bundle_align_mode 0
.
For some targets, it’s an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of .bundle_lock
and .bundle_unlock
directives define a bundle-locked
instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
sequence starting with .bundle_lock
and ending with
.bundle_unlock
is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
aligned bundle boundary. It’s an error if the sequence is longer than the
bundle size.
For convenience when using .bundle_lock
and .bundle_unlock
inside assembler macros (see .macro
), bundle-locked sequences may be
nested. That is, a second .bundle_lock
directive before the next
.bundle_unlock
directive has no effect except that it must be
matched by another closing .bundle_unlock
so that there is the
same number of .bundle_lock
and .bundle_unlock
directives.
.byte expressions
¶.byte
expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
Note - this directive is not intended for encoding instructions, and it will
not trigger effects like DWARF line number generation. Instead some targets
support special directives for encoding arbitrary binary sequences as
instructions such as .insn
or .inst
.
.cfi_sections section_list
.cfi_startproc [simple]
.cfi_endproc
.cfi_personality encoding [, exp]
.cfi_personality_id id
.cfi_fde_data [opcode1 [, …]]
.cfi_lsda encoding [, exp]
.cfi_inline_lsda
[align].cfi_def_cfa register, offset
.cfi_def_cfa_register register
.cfi_def_cfa_offset offset
.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset offset
.cfi_offset register, offset
.cfi_val_offset register, offset
.cfi_rel_offset register, offset
.cfi_register register1, register2
.cfi_restore register
.cfi_undefined register
.cfi_same_value register
.cfi_remember_state
and .cfi_restore_state
.cfi_return_column register
.cfi_signal_frame
.cfi_window_save
.cfi_escape
expression[, …].cfi_val_encoded_addr register, encoding, label
.cfi_sections section_list
¶.cfi_sections
may be used to specify whether CFI directives
should emit .eh_frame
section, .debug_frame
section and/or
.sframe
section. If section_list contains .eh_frame
,
.eh_frame
is emitted, if section_list contains
.debug_frame
, .debug_frame
is emitted, and finally, if
section_list contains .sframe
, .sframe
is emitted.
To emit multiple sections, specify them together in a list. For example, to
emit both .eh_frame
and .debug_frame
, use
.eh_frame, .debug_frame
. The default if this directive is not used
is .cfi_sections .eh_frame
.
On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
by specifying .eh_frame_entry
instead of .eh_frame
.
Some targets may support an additional name, such as .c6xabi.exidx
which is used by the target.
The .cfi_sections
directive can be repeated, with the same or different
arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
redefine it will result in an error.
.cfi_startproc [simple]
¶.cfi_startproc
is used at the beginning of each function that
should have an entry in .eh_frame
. It initializes some internal
data structures. Don’t forget to close the function by
.cfi_endproc
.
Unless .cfi_startproc
is used along with parameter simple
it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
.cfi_endproc
¶.cfi_endproc
is used at the end of a function where it closes its
unwind entry previously opened by
.cfi_startproc
, and emits it to .eh_frame
.
.cfi_personality encoding [, exp]
¶.cfi_personality
defines personality routine and its encoding.
encoding must be a constant determining how the personality
should be encoded. If it is 255 (DW_EH_PE_omit
), second
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
the symbol provided should be the location where personality
can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
The default after .cfi_startproc
is .cfi_personality 0xff
,
no personality routine.
.cfi_personality_id id
¶cfi_personality_id
defines a personality routine by its index as
defined in a compact unwinding format.
Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
with .cfi_sections eh_frame_entry
.
.cfi_fde_data [opcode1 [, …]]
¶cfi_fde_data
is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
.eh_frame_entry
section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
in the .gnu.extab
section otherwise.
Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
with .cfi_sections eh_frame_entry
.
.cfi_lsda encoding [, exp]
¶.cfi_lsda
defines LSDA and its encoding.
encoding must be a constant determining how the LSDA
should be encoded. If it is 255 (DW_EH_PE_omit
), the second
argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
or a symbol name. The default after .cfi_startproc
is .cfi_lsda 0xff
,
meaning that no LSDA is present.
.cfi_inline_lsda
[align] ¶.cfi_inline_lsda
marks the start of a LSDA data section and
switches to the corresponding .gnu.extab
section.
Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a .cfi_lsda
directive.
Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
with .cfi_sections eh_frame_entry
.
The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
referenced by the .cfi_lsda
directive should still be defined
in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
by a section directive.
The optional align argument specifies the alignment required.
The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
.p2align
directive.
.cfi_def_cfa register, offset
¶.cfi_def_cfa
defines a rule for computing CFA as: take
address from register and add offset to it.
.cfi_def_cfa_register register
¶.cfi_def_cfa_register
modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
now on register will be used instead of the old one. Offset
remains the same.
.cfi_def_cfa_offset offset
¶.cfi_def_cfa_offset
modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
remains the same, but offset is new. Note that it is the
absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
CFA address.
.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset offset
¶Same as .cfi_def_cfa_offset
but offset is a relative
value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
.cfi_offset register, offset
¶Previous value of register is saved at offset offset from CFA.
.cfi_val_offset register, offset
¶Previous value of register is CFA + offset.
.cfi_rel_offset register, offset
¶Previous value of register is saved at offset offset from
the current CFA register. This is transformed to .cfi_offset
using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
code it’s annotating.
.cfi_register register1, register2
¶Previous value of register1 is saved in register register2.
.cfi_restore register
¶.cfi_restore
says that the rule for register is now the
same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
instruction added by .cfi_startproc
were executed.
.cfi_undefined register
¶From now on the previous value of register can’t be restored anymore.
.cfi_same_value register
¶Current value of register is the same like in the previous frame, i.e. no restoration needed.
.cfi_remember_state
and .cfi_restore_state
¶.cfi_remember_state
pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
implicit stack, while .cfi_restore_state
pops them off the stack and
places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
multiple .cfi_*
directives that need to be undone due to the control
flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
the CFA is the value of rbp
):
je label popq %rbx .cfi_restore %rbx popq %r12 .cfi_restore %r12 popq %rbp .cfi_restore %rbp .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 ret label: /* Do something else */
Here, we want the .cfi
directives to affect only the rows corresponding
to the instructions before label
. This means we’d have to add multiple
.cfi
directives after label
to recreate the original save
locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
rbp
. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
we can write:
je label popq %rbx .cfi_remember_state .cfi_restore %rbx popq %r12 .cfi_restore %r12 popq %rbp .cfi_restore %rbp .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 ret label: .cfi_restore_state /* Do something else */
That way, the rules for the instructions after label
will be the same
as before the first .cfi_restore
without having to use multiple
.cfi
directives.
.cfi_return_column register
¶Change return column register, i.e. the return address is either directly in register or can be accessed by rules for register.
.cfi_signal_frame
¶Mark current function as signal trampoline.
.cfi_window_save
¶SPARC register window has been saved.
.cfi_escape
expression[, …] ¶Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
.cfi_val_encoded_addr register, encoding, label
¶The current value of register is label. The value of label
will be encoded in the output file according to encoding; see the
description of .cfi_personality
for details on this encoding.
The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory or another register.
.comm symbol , length
¶.comm
declares a common symbol named symbol. When linking, a
common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
of the same name in another object file. If ld
does not see a
definition for the symbol–just one or more common symbols–then it will
allocate length bytes of uninitialized memory. length must be an
absolute expression. If ld
sees multiple common symbols with
the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
using the largest size.
When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the .comm
directive takes
an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
power of two. If ld
allocates uninitialized memory for the
common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
alignment is specified, as
will set the alignment to the
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE1.
The syntax for .comm
differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
‘symbol .comm, length’; symbol is optional.
.data subsection
¶.data
tells as
to assemble the following statements onto the
end of the data subsection numbered subsection (which is an
absolute expression). If subsection is omitted, it defaults
to zero.
.dc[size] expressions
¶The .dc
directive expects zero or more expressions separated by
commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
.dc
directive:
‘.a’
Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
‘.b’
Emits 8-bit values.
‘.d’
Emits double precision floating-point values.
‘.l’
Emits 32-bit values.
‘.s’
Emits single precision floating-point values.
‘.w’
Emits 16-bit values.
Note - this is true even on targets where the .word
directive would emit
32-bit values.
‘.x’
Emits long double precision floating-point values.
If no suffix is used then ‘.w’ is assumed.
The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating point values.
Note - these directives are not intended for encoding instructions, and they
will not trigger effects like DWARF line number generation. Instead some
targets support special directives for encoding arbitrary binary sequences as
instructions such as .insn
or .inst
.
.dcb[size] number [,fill]
¶This directive emits number copies of fill, each of size bytes. Both number and fill are absolute expressions. If the comma and fill are omitted, fill is assumed to be zero. The size suffix, if present, must be one of:
‘.b’
Emits single byte values.
‘.d’
Emits double-precision floating point values.
‘.l’
Emits 4-byte values.
‘.s’
Emits single-precision floating point values.
‘.w’
Emits 2-byte values.
‘.x’
Emits long double-precision floating point values.
If the size suffix is omitted then ‘.w’ is assumed.
The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating point values.
.ds[size] number [,fill]
¶This directive emits number copies of fill, each of size bytes. Both number and fill are absolute expressions. If the comma and fill are omitted, fill is assumed to be zero. The size suffix, if present, must be one of:
‘.b’
Emits single byte values.
‘.d’
Emits 8-byte values.
‘.l’
Emits 4-byte values.
‘.p’
Emits values with size matching packed-decimal floating-point ones.
‘.s’
Emits 4-byte values.
‘.w’
Emits 2-byte values.
‘.x’
Emits values with size matching long double precision floating-point ones.
Note - unlike the .dcb
directive the ‘.d’, ‘.s’ and ‘.x’
suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
If the size suffix is omitted then ‘.w’ is assumed.
The byte ordering is target dependent.
.def name
¶Begin defining debugging information for a symbol name; the
definition extends until the .endef
directive is encountered.
.desc symbol, abs-expression
¶This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (see Symbol Attributes) to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
The ‘.desc’ directive is not available when as
is
configured for COFF output; it is only for a.out
or b.out
object format. For the sake of compatibility, as
accepts
it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
.dim
¶This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
.def
/.endef
pairs.
.double flonums
¶.double
expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
assembles floating point numbers.
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
as
is configured. See Machine Dependent Features.
.else
¶.else
is part of the as
support for conditional
assembly; see .if
. It marks the beginning of a section
of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding .if
was false.
.elseif
¶.elseif
is part of the as
support for conditional
assembly; see .if
. It is shorthand for beginning a new
.if
block that would otherwise fill the entire .else
section.
.end
¶.end
marks the end of the assembly file. as
does not
process anything in the file past the .end
directive.
.endif
¶.endif
is part of the as
support for conditional assembly;
it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
conditionally. See .if
.
.equ symbol, expression
¶This directive sets the value of symbol to expression.
It is synonymous with ‘.set’; see .set
.
The syntax for equ
on the HPPA is
‘symbol .equ expression’.
The syntax for equ
on the Z80 is
‘symbol equ expression’.
On the Z80 it is an error if symbol is already defined,
but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
Compare .equiv symbol, expression
.
.equiv symbol, expression
¶The .equiv
directive is like .equ
and .set
, except that
the assembler will signal an error if symbol is already defined. Note a
symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
undefined.
Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
.ifdef SYM .err .endif .equ SYM,VAL
plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
.eqv symbol, expression
¶The .eqv
directive is like .equiv
, but no attempt is made to
evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
value is taken.
.err
¶If as
assembles a .err
directive, it will print an error
message and, unless the -Z option was used, it will not generate an
object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
.error "string"
¶Similarly to .err
, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don’t specify the
message, it defaults to ".error directive invoked in source file"
.
See Error and Warning Messages.
.error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
.extern
¶.extern
is accepted in the source program—for compatibility
with other assemblers—but it is ignored. as
treats
all undefined symbols as external.
.fail expression
¶Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the expression is 500
or more, as
will print a warning message. If the value is less
than 500, as
will print an error message. The message will
include the value of expression. This can occasionally be useful inside
complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
.file
¶There are two different versions of the .file
directive. Targets
that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
.file
. Other targets use the default version.
This version of the .file
directive tells as
that we
are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
.file string
string is the new file name. In general, the filename is
recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes ‘"’; but if you wish
to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes–""
. This
statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
old as
programs.
When emitting DWARF2 line number information, .file
assigns filenames
to the .debug_line
file name table. The syntax is:
.file fileno filename
The fileno operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the index of the entry in the table. The filename operand is a C string literal enclosed in double quotes. The filename can include directory elements. If it does, then the directory will be added to the directory table and the basename will be added to the file table.
The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
table is shared with the .debug_info
section of the DWARF2 debugging
information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
entries will have.
If DWARF5 support has been enabled via the -gdwarf-5 option then
an extended version of .file
is also allowed:
.file fileno [dirname] filename [md5 value]
With this version a separate directory name is allowed, although if this is used then filename should not contain any directory component, except for fileno equal to 0: in this case, dirname is expected to be the current directory and filename the currently processed file, and the latter need not be located in the former. In addition an MD5 hash value of the contents of filename can be provided. This will be stored in the the file table as well, and can be used by tools reading the debug information to verify that the contents of the source file match the contents of the compiled file.
.fill repeat , size , value
¶repeat, size and value are absolute expressions.
This emits repeat copies of size bytes. Repeat
may be zero or more. Size may be zero or more, but if it is
more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
other people’s assemblers. The contents of each repeat bytes
is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are value rendered in the
byte-order of an integer on the computer as
is assembling for.
Each size bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
size bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
compatible with other people’s assemblers.
size and value are optional. If the second comma and value are absent, value is assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent, size is assumed to be 1.
.float flonums
¶This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
has the same effect as .single
.
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
as
is configured.
See Machine Dependent Features.
.func name[,label]
¶.func
emits debugging information to denote function name, and
is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
Only ‘--gstabs[+]’ is currently supported.
label is the entry point of the function and if omitted name
prepended with the ‘leading char’ is used.
‘leading char’ is usually _
or nothing, depending on the target.
All functions are currently defined to have void
return type.
The function must be terminated with .endfunc
.
.global symbol
, .globl symbol
¶.global
makes the symbol visible to ld
. If you define
symbol in your partial program, its value is made available to
other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
symbol takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
from another file linked into the same program.
Both spellings (‘.globl’ and ‘.global’) are accepted, for compatibility with other assemblers.
On the HPPA, .global
is not always enough to make it accessible to other
partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only .EXPORT
directive as well.
See HPPA Assembler Directives.
.hidden names
¶This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
.internal
(see .internal
) and
.protected
(see .protected
).
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
hidden
which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
Such symbols are always considered to be protected
as well.
.hword expressions
¶This expects zero or more expressions, and emits a 16 bit number for each.
This directive is a synonym for ‘.short’; depending on the target architecture, it may also be a synonym for ‘.word’.
.ident
¶This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
a.out object file format, as
simply accepts the directive for
source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the .comment
or
.rdata
section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
emitted to the .comment
section.
.if absolute expression
¶.if
marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
(which must be an absolute expression) is non-zero. The end of
the conditional section of code must be marked by .endif
(see .endif
); optionally, you may include code for the
alternative condition, flagged by .else
(see .else
).
If you have several conditions to check, .elseif
may be used to avoid
nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent .else
block.
The following variants of .if
are also supported:
.ifdef symbol
¶Assembles the following section of code if the specified symbol has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
.ifb text
¶Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
.ifc string1,string2
¶Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted, the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The string comparison is case sensitive.
.ifeq absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
.ifeqs string1,string2
¶Another form of .ifc
. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
.ifge absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or equal to zero.
.ifgt absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
.ifle absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal to zero.
.iflt absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
.ifnb text
¶Like .ifb
, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
.ifnc string1,string2.
¶Like .ifc
, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
.ifndef symbol
¶.ifnotdef symbol
Assembles the following section of code if the specified symbol has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
.ifne absolute expression
¶Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
(in other words, this is equivalent to .if
).
.ifnes string1,string2
¶Like .ifeqs
, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
.incbin "file"[,skip[,count]]
¶The incbin
directive includes file verbatim at the current
location. You can control the search paths used with the ‘-I’ command-line
option (see Command-Line Options). Quotation marks are required
around file.
The skip argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
file. The count argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user’s
responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
after the incbin
directive.
.include "file"
¶This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
points in your source program. The code from file is assembled as
if it followed the point of the .include
; when the end of the
included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
can control the search paths used with the ‘-I’ command-line option
(see Command-Line Options). Quotation marks are required
around file.
.int expressions
¶Expect zero or more expressions, of any section, separated by commas. For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind of target the assembly is for.
Note - this directive is not intended for encoding instructions, and it will
not trigger effects like DWARF line number generation. Instead some targets
support special directives for encoding arbitrary binary sequences as
instructions such as eg .insn
or .inst
.
.internal names
¶This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
.hidden
(see .hidden
) and
.protected
(see .protected
).
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
internal
which means that the symbols are considered to be hidden
(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
.irp symbol,values
… ¶Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to symbol.
The sequence of statements starts at the .irp
directive, and is
terminated by an .endr
directive. For each value, symbol is
set to value, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
value is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
symbol set to the null string. To refer to symbol within the
sequence of statements, use \symbol.
For example, assembling
.irp param,1,2,3 move d\param,sp@- .endr
is equivalent to assembling
move d1,sp@- move d2,sp@- move d3,sp@-
For some caveats with the spelling of symbol, see also .macro
.
.irpc symbol,values
… ¶Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to symbol.
The sequence of statements starts at the .irpc
directive, and is
terminated by an .endr
directive. For each character in value,
symbol is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
assembled. If no value is listed, the sequence of statements is
assembled once, with symbol set to the null string. To refer to
symbol within the sequence of statements, use \symbol.
For example, assembling
.irpc param,123 move d\param,sp@- .endr
is equivalent to assembling
move d1,sp@- move d2,sp@- move d3,sp@-
For some caveats with the spelling of symbol, see also the discussion
at See .macro
.
.lcomm symbol , length
¶Reserve length (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
denoted by symbol. The section and value of symbol are
those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. Symbol
is not declared global (see .global
), so is normally
not visible to ld
.
Some targets permit a third argument to be used with .lcomm
. This
argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
The syntax for .lcomm
differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
‘symbol .lcomm, length’; symbol is optional.
.line line-number
¶Change the logical line number. line-number must be an absolute
expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
reported as on logical line number line-number − 1. One day
as
will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
Even though this is a directive associated with the a.out
or
b.out
object-code formats, as
still recognizes it
when producing COFF output, and treats ‘.line’ as though it
were the COFF ‘.ln’ if it is found outside a
.def
/.endef
pair.
Inside a .def
, ‘.line’ is, instead, one of the directives
used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
debugging.
.linkonce [type]
¶Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
The .linkonce
pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
unique.
This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable Executable format used on Windows NT.
The type argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the following strings. For example:
.linkonce same_size
Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
discard
Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
one_only
Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
same_size
Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
same_contents
Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
.list
¶Control (in conjunction with the .nolist
directive) whether or
not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
internal counter (which is zero initially). .list
increments the
counter, and .nolist
decrements it. Assembly listings are
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the ‘-a’ command-line option; see Command-Line Options), the initial value of the listing counter is one.
.loc fileno lineno [column] [options]
¶When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
the .loc
directive will add a row to the .debug_line
line
number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
instruction. The fileno, lineno, and optional column
arguments will be applied to the .debug_line
state machine before
the row is added. It is an error for the input assembly file to generate
a non-empty .debug_line
and also use loc
directives.
The options are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
basic_block
This option will set the basic_block
register in the
.debug_line
state machine to true
.
prologue_end
This option will set the prologue_end
register in the
.debug_line
state machine to true
.
epilogue_begin
This option will set the epilogue_begin
register in the
.debug_line
state machine to true
.
is_stmt value
This option will set the is_stmt
register in the
.debug_line
state machine to value
, which must be
either 0 or 1.
isa value
This directive will set the isa
register in the .debug_line
state machine to value, which must be an unsigned integer.
discriminator value
This directive will set the discriminator
register in the .debug_line
state machine to value, which must be an unsigned integer.
view value
This option causes a row to be added to .debug_line
in reference to the
current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
instruction), and to associate value with the view
register in the
.debug_line
state machine. If value is a label, both the
view
register and the label are set to the number of prior .loc
directives at the same program location. If value is the literal
0
, the view
register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
that there aren’t any prior .loc
directives at the same program
location. If value is the literal -0
, the assembler arrange for
the view
register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
.loc
directives at the same program location.
.loc_mark_labels enable
¶When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
the .loc_mark_labels
directive makes the assembler emit an entry
to the .debug_line
line number matrix with the basic_block
register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
The enable argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
this function respectively.
.local names
¶This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
the comma-separated list of names
as a local symbol so that it
will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
they will be created.
For targets where the .lcomm
directive (see .lcomm symbol , length
) does not
accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
the .local
directive can be used in combination with .comm
(see .comm symbol , length
) to define aligned local common data.
.macro
¶The commands .macro
and .endm
allow you to define macros that
generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
sum
that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
.macro sum from=0, to=5 .long \from .if \to-\from sum "(\from+1)",\to .endif .endm
With that definition, ‘SUM 0,5’ is equivalent to this assembly input:
.long 0 .long 1 .long 2 .long 3 .long 4 .long 5
.macro macname
¶.macro macname macargs …
¶Begin the definition of a macro called macname. If your macro
definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
‘:req
’), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
(through ‘:vararg
’). You can supply a default value for any
macro argument by following the name with ‘=deflt’. You
cannot define two macros with the same macname unless it has been
subject to the .purgem
directive (see .purgem name
) between the two
definitions. For example, these are all valid .macro
statements:
.macro comm
Begin the definition of a macro called comm
, which takes no
arguments.
.macro plus1 p, p1
.macro plus1 p p1
Either statement begins the definition of a macro called plus1
,
which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
‘\p’ or ‘\p1’ to evaluate the arguments.
.macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
Begin the definition of a macro called reserve_str
, with two
arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
‘reserve_str a,b’ (with ‘\p1’ evaluating to
a and ‘\p2’ evaluating to b), or as ‘reserve_str
,b’ (with ‘\p1’ evaluating as the default, in this case
‘0’, and ‘\p2’ evaluating to b).
.macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
Begin the definition of a macro called m
, with at least three
arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by position, or by keyword. For example, ‘sum 9,17’ is equivalent to ‘sum to=17, from=9’.
Note that since each of the macargs can be an identifier exactly
as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
(:
) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
this macro definition:
.macro label l \l: .endm
might not work as expected. Invoking ‘label foo’ might not create a label called ‘foo’ but instead just insert the text ‘\l:’ into the assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised identifier.
Similarly problems might occur with the period character (‘.’) which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a length specifier like this:
.macro opcode base length \base.\length .endm
and invoking it as ‘opcode store l’ will not create a ‘store.l’ instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to interpret the text ‘\base.\length’.
There are several possible ways around this problem:
Insert white space
If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest solution. eg:
.macro label l \l : .endm
Use ‘\()’
The string ‘\()’ can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from the following text. eg:
.macro opcode base length \base\().\length .endm
Use the alternate macro syntax mode
In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (‘&’) can be used as a separator. eg:
.altmacro .macro label l l&: .endm
Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
also applies to the identifiers used in .irp
(see .irp symbol,values
…)
and .irpc
(see .irpc symbol,values
…) as well.
Another issue can occur with the actual arguments passed during macro
invocation: Multiple arguments can be separated by blanks or commas. To have
arguments actually contain blanks or commas (or potentially other non-alpha-
numeric characters), individual arguments will need to be enclosed in either
parentheses ()
, square brackets []
, or double quote "
characters. The latter may be the only viable option in certain situations,
as only double quotes are actually stripped while establishing arguments. It
may be important to be aware of two escaping models used when processing such
quoted argument strings: For one two adjacent double quotes represent a single
double quote in the resulting argument, going along the lines of the stripping
of the enclosing quotes. But then double quotes can also be escaped by a
backslash \
, but this backslash will not be retained in the resulting
actual argument as then seen / used while expanding the macro.
As a consequence to the first of these escaping mechanisms two string literals
intended to be representing separate macro arguments need to be separated by
white space (or, better yet, by a comma). To state it differently, such
adjacent string literals - even if separated only by a blank - will not be
concatenated when determining macro arguments, even if they’re only separated
by white space. This is unlike certain other pseudo ops, e.g. .ascii
.
.endm
¶Mark the end of a macro definition.
.exitm
¶Exit early from the current macro definition.
\@
¶as
maintains a counter of how many macros it has
executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
output with ‘\@’, but only within a macro definition.
LOCAL name [ , … ]
¶Warning: LOCAL
is only available if you select “alternate
macro syntax” with ‘--alternate’ or .altmacro
.
See .altmacro
.
.mri val
¶If val is non-zero, this tells as
to enter MRI mode. If
val is zero, this tells as
to exit MRI mode. This change
affects code assembled until the next .mri
directive, or until the end
of the file. See MRI mode.
.nolist
¶Control (in conjunction with the .list
directive) whether or
not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
internal counter (which is zero initially). .list
increments the
counter, and .nolist
decrements it. Assembly listings are
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
.nop [size]
¶This directive emits no-op instructions. It is provided on all architectures,
allowing the creation of architecture neutral tests involving actual code. The
size of the generated instruction is target specific, but if the optional
size argument is given and resolves to an absolute positive value at that
point in assembly (no forward expressions allowed) then the fewest no-op
instructions are emitted that equal or exceed a total size in bytes.
.nop
does affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
Some targets do not support using .nop
with size.
.nops size[, control]
¶This directive emits no-op instructions. It is specific to the Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets. It takes a size argument and generates size bytes of no-op instructions. size must be absolute and positive. These bytes do not affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
The optional control argument specifies a size limit for a single no-op instruction. If not provided then a value of 0 is assumed. The valid values of control are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
.octa bignums
¶This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
The term “octa” comes from contexts in which a “word” is two bytes; hence octa-word for 16 bytes.
.offset loc
¶Set the location counter to loc in the absolute section. loc must
be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the .org
directive.
.org new-lc , fill
¶Advance the location counter of the current section to
new-lc. new-lc is either an absolute expression or an
expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
you can’t use .org
to cross sections: if new-lc has the
wrong section, the .org
directive is ignored. To be compatible
with former assemblers, if the section of new-lc is absolute,
as
issues a warning, then pretends the section of new-lc
is the same as the current subsection.
.org
may only increase the location counter, or leave it
unchanged; you cannot use .org
to move the location counter
backwards.
Because as
tries to assemble programs in one pass, new-lc
may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
a chance to share your improved assembler.
Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other people’s assemblers.
When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the intervening bytes are filled with fill which should be an absolute expression. If the comma and fill are omitted, fill defaults to zero.
.p2align[wl] [abs-expr[, abs-expr[, abs-expr]]]
¶Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after advancement. For example ‘.p2align 3’ advances the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when appropriate.
The .p2alignw
and .p2alignl
directives are variants of the
.p2align
directive. The .p2alignw
directive treats the fill
pattern as a two byte word value. The .p2alignl
directives treats the
fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, .p2alignw
2,0x368d
will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
undefined.
.popsection
¶This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
.section
(see .section name
), .subsection
(see .subsection name
),
.pushsection
(see .pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
), and .previous
(see .previous
).
This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the stack.
.previous
¶This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
.section
(see .section name
), .subsection
(see .subsection name
),
.pushsection
(see .pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
), and .popsection
(see .popsection
).
This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
.previous
directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
subsections). For example:
.section A .subsection 1 .word 0x1234 .subsection 2 .word 0x5678 .previous .word 0x9abc
Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of section A. Whilst:
.section A .subsection 1 # Now in section A subsection 1 .word 0x1234 .section B .subsection 0 # Now in section B subsection 0 .word 0x5678 .subsection 1 # Now in section B subsection 1 .word 0x9abc .previous # Now in section B subsection 0 .word 0xdef0
Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with the top section on the section stack.
.print string
¶as
will print string on the standard output during
assembly. You must put string in double quotes.
.protected names
¶This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
.hidden
(see .hidden names
) and .internal
(see .internal names
).
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
protected
which means that any references to the symbols from within the
components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
this.
.psize lines , columns
¶Use this directive to declare the number of lines—and, optionally, the number of columns—to use for each page, when generating listings.
If you do not use .psize
, listings use a default line-count
of 60. You may omit the comma and columns specification; the
default width is 200 columns.
as
generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
.eject
).
If you specify lines as 0
, no formfeeds are generated save
those explicitly specified with .eject
.
.purgem name
¶Undefine the macro name, so that later uses of the string will not be
expanded. See .macro
.
.pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
¶This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
.section
(see .section name
), .subsection
(see .subsection name
),
.popsection
(see .popsection
), and .previous
(see .previous
).
This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
subsection with name
and subsection
. The optional
flags
, type
and arguments
are treated the same
as in the .section
(see .section name
) directive.
.quad expressions
¶For 64-bit architectures, or more generally with any GAS configured to support
64-bit target virtual addresses, this is like ‘.int’, but emitting 64-bit
quantities. Otherwise .quad
expects zero or more bignums, separated by
commas. For each item, it emits an 8-byte integer. If a bignum won’t fit in
8 bytes, a warning message is printed and just the lowest order 8 bytes of the
bignum are taken.
The term “quad” comes from contexts in which a “word” is two bytes; hence quad-word for 8 bytes.
Note - this directive is not intended for encoding instructions, and it will
not trigger effects like DWARF line number generation. Instead some targets
support special directives for encoding arbitrary binary sequences as
instructions such as .insn
or .inst
.
.reloc offset, reloc_name[, expression]
¶Generate a relocation at offset of type reloc_name with value expression. If offset is a number, the relocation is generated in the current section. If offset is an expression that resolves to a symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol’s section. expression, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the section.
.rept count
¶Repeat the sequence of lines between the .rept
directive and the next
.endr
directive count times.
For example, assembling
.rept 3 .long 0 .endr
is equivalent to assembling
.long 0 .long 0 .long 0
A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
.sbttl "subheading"
¶Use subheading as the title (third line, immediately after the title line) when generating assembly listings.
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
.scl class
¶Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
used inside a .def
/.endef
pair. Storage class may flag
whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
symbolic debugging information.
.section name
¶Use the .section
directive to assemble the following code into a section
named name.
This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
named sections; on a.out
targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
with a standard a.out
section name.
For COFF targets, the .section
directive is used in one of the following
ways:
.section name[, "flags"] .section name[, subsection]
If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
b
bss section (uninitialized data)
n
section is not loaded
w
writable section
d
data section
e
exclude section from linking
r
read-only section
x
executable section
s
shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
a
ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
y
section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
0-9
single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
loaded and writable. Note the n
and w
flags remove attributes
from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
If the optional argument to the .section
directive is not quoted, it is
taken as a subsection number (see Sub-Sections).
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
.subsection
(see .subsection name
), .pushsection
(see .pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
), .popsection
(see .popsection
), and
.previous
(see .previous
).
For ELF targets, the .section
directive is used like this:
.section name [, "flags"[, @type[,flag_specific_arguments]]]
If the ‘--sectname-subst’ command-line option is provided, the name
argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only %S
is supported
at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
.macro exception_code .section %S.exception [exception code here] .previous .endm .text [code] exception_code [...] .section .init [init code] exception_code [...]
The two exception_code
invocations above would create the
.text.exception
and .init.exception
sections respectively.
This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
need to stay resident without having to define multiple exception_code
macros just for that purpose.
The optional flags argument is a quoted string which may contain any combination of the following characters:
a
section is allocatable
d
section is a GNU_MBIND section
e
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
o
section references a symbol defined in another section (the linked-to section) in the same file.
w
section is writable
x
section is executable
M
section is mergeable
S
section contains zero terminated strings
G
section is a member of a section group
T
section is used for thread-local-storage
?
section is a member of the previously-current section’s group, if any
+
section inherits attributes and (unless explicitly specified) type from the previously-current section, adding other attributes as specified
-
section inherits attributes and (unless explicitly specified) type from the previously-current section, removing other attributes as specified
R
retained section (apply SHF_GNU_RETAIN to prevent linker garbage collection, GNU ELF extension)
<number>
a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header’s flags field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the resulting value.
<target specific>
some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
Note - once a section’s flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
flags can be added to an already defined section. The .interp
,
.strtab
and .symtab
sections can have the allocate flag
(a
) set after they are initially defined, and the .note-GNU-stack
section may have the executable (x
) flag added. Also note that the
.attach_to_group
directive can be used to add a section to a group even
if the section was not originally declared to be part of that group.
Note further that +
and -
need to come first and can only take
the effect described here unless overridden by a target. The attributes
inherited are those in effect at the time the directive is processed.
Attributes added later (see above) will not be inherited. Using either
together with ?
is undefined at this point.
The optional type argument may contain one of the following constants:
@progbits
section contains data
@nobits
section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
@note
section contains data which is used by things other than the program
@init_array
section contains an array of pointers to init functions
@fini_array
section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
@preinit_array
section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
@<number>
a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header’s type field.
@<target specific>
some targets extend this list with their own types
Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
Note on targets where the @
character is the start of a comment (eg
ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
%
character.
Note - some sections, eg .text
and .data
are considered to be
special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
type will generate an error from the assembler.
If flags contains the M
symbol then the type argument must
be specified as well as an extra argument—entsize—like this:
.section name , "flags"M, @type, entsize
Sections with the M
flag but not S
flag must contain fixed size
constants, each entsize octets long. Sections with both M
and
S
must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
entsize bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
the same name, same entity size and same flags. entsize must be an
absolute expression. For sections with both M
and S
, a string
which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
"def"
will be merged with "abcdef"
; A reference to the first
"def"
will be changed to a reference to "abcdef"+3
.
If flags contains the o
flag, then the type argument
must be present along with an additional field like this:
.section name,"flags"o,@type,SymbolName|SectionIndex
The SymbolName field specifies the symbol name which the section references. Alternatively a numeric SectionIndex can be provided. This is not generally a good idea as section indices are rarely known at assembly time, but the facility is provided for testing purposes. An index of zero is allowed. It indicates that the linked-to section has already been discarded.
Note: If both the M and o flags are present, then the fields for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
.section name,"flags"Mo,@type,entsize,SymbolName
If flags contains the G
symbol then the type argument must
be present along with an additional field like this:
.section name , "flags"G, @type, GroupName[, linkage]
The GroupName field specifies the name of the section group to which this particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
comdat
indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
.gnu.linkonce
an alias for comdat
Note: if both the M and G flags are present then the fields for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
.section name , "flags"MG, @type, entsize, GroupName[, linkage]
If both o
flag and G
flag are present, then the
SymbolName field for o
comes first, like this:
.section name,"flags"oG,@type,SymbolName,GroupName[,linkage]
If flags contains the ?
symbol then it may not also contain the
G
symbol and the GroupName or linkage fields should not be
present. Instead, ?
says to consider the section that’s current before
this directive. If that section used G
, then the new section will use
G
with those same GroupName and linkage fields implicitly.
If not, then the ?
symbol has no effect.
The optional unique,<number>
argument must come last. It
assigns <number>
as a unique section ID to distinguish
different sections with the same section name like these:
.section name,"flags",@type,unique,<number>
.section name,"flags"G,@type,GroupName,[linkage],unique,<number>
.section name,"flags"MG,@type,entsize,GroupName[,linkage],unique,<number>
The valid values of <number>
are between 0 and 4294967295.
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor executable. The section will contain data.
For SPARC ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of .section
directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
.section "name"[, flags...]
Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma separated flags:
#alloc
section is allocatable
#write
section is writable
#execinstr
section is executable
#exclude
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
#tls
section is used for thread local storage
This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
contents of the gas testsuite directory gas/testsuite/gas/elf
for
some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
work.
.set symbol, expression
¶Set the value of symbol to expression. This changes symbol’s value and type to conform to expression. If symbol was flagged as external, it remains flagged (see Symbol Attributes).
You may .set
a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
different symbols.
If you .set
a global symbol, the value stored in the object
file is the last value stored into it.
On Z80 set
is a real instruction, use .set
or
‘symbol defl expression’ instead.
.short expressions
¶.short
is normally the same as ‘.word’.
See .word
.
In some configurations, however, .short
and .word
generate
numbers of different lengths. See Machine Dependent Features.
Note - this directive is not intended for encoding instructions, and it will
not trigger effects like DWARF line number generation. Instead some targets
support special directives for encoding arbitrary binary sequences as
instructions such as .insn
or .inst
.
.single flonums
¶This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
has the same effect as .float
.
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
as
is configured. See Machine Dependent Features.
.size
¶This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
For COFF targets, the .size
directive is only permitted inside
.def
/.endef
pairs. It is used like this:
.size expression
For ELF targets, the .size
directive is used like this:
.size name , expression
This directive sets the size associated with a symbol name. The size in bytes is computed from expression which can make use of label arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function symbols.
.skip size [,fill]
¶This directive emits size bytes, each of value fill. Both size and fill are absolute expressions. If the comma and fill are omitted, fill is assumed to be zero. This is the same as ‘.space’.
.sleb128 expressions
¶sleb128 stands for “signed little endian base 128.” This is a
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
symbolic debugging format. See .uleb128
.
.space size [,fill]
¶This directive emits size bytes, each of value fill. Both size and fill are absolute expressions. If the comma and fill are omitted, fill is assumed to be zero. This is the same as ‘.skip’.
Warning:
.space
has a completely different meaning for HPPA targets; use.block
as a substitute. See HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the.space
directive. See HPPA Assembler Directives, for a summary.
.stabd, .stabn, .stabs
¶There are three directives that begin ‘.stab’.
All emit symbols (see Symbols), for use by symbolic debuggers.
The symbols are not entered in the as
hash table: they
cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
Up to five fields are required:
This is the symbol’s name. It may contain any character except ‘\000’, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names using this field.
An absolute expression. The symbol’s type is set to the low 8 bits of
this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but ld
and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
An absolute expression. The symbol’s “other” attribute is set to the low 8 bits of this expression.
An absolute expression. The symbol’s descriptor is set to the low 16 bits of this expression.
An absolute expression which becomes the symbol’s value.
If a warning is detected while reading a .stabd
, .stabn
,
or .stabs
statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
compatible with earlier assemblers!
.stabd type , other , desc
¶The “name” of the symbol generated is not even an empty string. It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a null pointer so they didn’t waste space in object files with empty strings.
The symbol’s value is set to the location counter,
relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
is the address of the location counter when the .stabd
was
assembled.
.stabn type , other , desc , value
¶The name of the symbol is set to the empty string ""
.
.stabs string , type , other , desc , value
¶All five fields are specified.
.string
"str", .string8
"str", .string16
¶"str", .string32
"str", .string64
"str"
Copy the characters in str to the object file. You may specify more than one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte. You can use any of the escape sequences described in Strings.
The variants string16
, string32
and string64
differ from
the string
pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from str is
copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
are stored in target endianness byte order.
Example:
.string32 "BYE" expands to: .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */ .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
.struct expression
¶Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to expression, which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
.struct 0 field1: .struct field1 + 4 field2: .struct field2 + 4 field3:
This would define the symbol field1
to have the value 0, the symbol
field2
to have the value 4, and the symbol field3
to have the
value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
use a .section
directive of some sort to change to some other section
before further assembly.
.subsection name
¶This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
.section
(see .section name
), .pushsection
(see .pushsection name [, subsection] [, "flags"[, @type[,arguments]]]
),
.popsection
(see .popsection
), and .previous
(see .previous
).
This directive replaces the current subsection with name
. The current
section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
.symver
¶Use the .symver
directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
shared library.
For ELF targets, the .symver
directive can be used like this:
.symver name, name2@nodename[ ,visibility]
If the original symbol name is defined within the file
being assembled, the .symver
directive effectively creates a symbol
alias with the name name2@nodename, and in fact the main reason that we
just don’t try and create a regular alias is that the @ character isn’t
permitted in symbol names. The name2 part of the name is the actual name
of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name name
itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
function is being mentioned. The nodename portion of the alias should be
the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
symbol from a shared library, then nodename should correspond to the
nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. The optional argument
visibility updates the visibility of the original symbol. The valid
visibilities are local
, hidden
, and remove
. The
local
visibility makes the original symbol a local symbol
(see .local names
). The hidden
visibility sets the visibility of the
original symbol to hidden
(see .hidden names
). The remove
visibility removes the original symbol from the symbol table. If visibility
isn’t specified, the original symbol is unchanged.
If the symbol name is not defined within the file being assembled, all references to name will be changed to name2@nodename. If no reference to name is made, name2@nodename will be removed from the symbol table.
Another usage of the .symver
directive is:
.symver name, name2@@nodename
In this case, the symbol name must exist and be defined within the file being assembled. It is similar to name2@nodename. The difference is name2@@nodename will also be used to resolve references to name2 by the linker.
The third usage of the .symver
directive is:
.symver name, name2@@@nodename
When name is not defined within the file being assembled, it is treated as name2@nodename. When name is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol name, name, will be changed to name2@@nodename.
.tag structname
¶This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
.def
/.endef
pairs. Tags are used to link structure
definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
.text subsection
¶Tells as
to assemble the following statements onto the end of
the text subsection numbered subsection, which is an absolute
expression. If subsection is omitted, subsection number zero
is used.
.title "heading"
¶Use heading as the title (second line, immediately after the source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
.tls_common symbol, length[, alignment]
¶This directive behaves in the same way as the .comm
directive
(see .comm symbol , length
) except that symbol has type of STT_TLS instead of
STT_OBJECT.
.type
¶This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
.def
/.endef
pairs. It is used like this:
.type int
This records the integer int as the type attribute of a symbol table entry.
For ELF targets, the .type
directive is used like this:
.type name , type description
This sets the type of symbol name to be either a function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes supported for the type description field, in order to provide compatibility with various other assemblers.
Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as ‘@’ and ‘#’) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other assemblers.
The syntaxes supported are:
.type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE> .type <name>,#<type> .type <name>,@<type> .type <name>,%<type> .type <name>,"<type>"
The types supported are:
STT_FUNC
function
Mark the symbol as being a function name.
STT_GNU_IFUNC
gnu_indirect_function
Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
STT_OBJECT
object
Mark the symbol as being a data object.
STT_TLS
tls_object
Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
STT_COMMON
common
Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
STT_NOTYPE
notype
Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
gnu_unique_object
Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence this.
Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
.uleb128 expressions
¶uleb128 stands for “unsigned little endian base 128.” This is a
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
symbolic debugging format. See .sleb128
.
.val addr
¶This directive, permitted only within .def
/.endef
pairs,
records the address addr as the value attribute of a symbol table
entry.
.version "string"
¶This directive creates a .note
section and places into it an ELF
formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note’s name is set to string
.
.vtable_entry table, offset
¶This directive finds or creates a symbol table
and creates a
VTABLE_ENTRY
relocation for it with an addend of offset
.
.vtable_inherit child, parent
¶This directive finds the symbol child
and finds or creates the symbol
parent
and then creates a VTABLE_INHERIT
relocation for the
parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
parent name of 0
is treated as referring to the *ABS*
section.
.warning "string"
¶Similar to the directive .error
(see .error "string"
), but just emits a warning.
.weak names
¶This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
names
. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
names
. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases. When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an alternate symbol to hold the default value.
.weakref alias, target
¶This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak. If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that had the references to the alias removed.
The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled within the assembler.
.word expressions
¶This directive expects zero or more expressions, of any section, separated by commas.
The size of the number emitted, and its byte order, depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers
Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn’t require it; see Machine Dependent Features), you can ignore this issue.
In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
as
occasionally does strange things to ‘.word’ directives.
Directives of the form ‘.word sym1-sym2’ are often emitted by
compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when as
assembles a
directive of the form ‘.word sym1-sym2’, and the difference between
sym1
and sym2
does not fit in 16 bits, as
creates a secondary jump table, immediately before the next label.
This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
table is a long-jump to sym2
. The original ‘.word’
contains sym1
minus the address of the long-jump to
sym2
.
If there were several occurrences of ‘.word sym1-sym2’ before the
secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
‘.word sym3-sym4’, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
long-jump to sym4
is included in the secondary jump table,
and the .word
directives are adjusted to contain sym3
minus the address of the long-jump to sym4
; and so on, for as many
entries in the original jump table as necessary.
.zero size
¶This directive emits size 0-valued bytes. size must be an absolute expression. This directive is actually an alias for the ‘.skip’ directive so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes instead of zero. Using ‘.zero’ in this way would be confusing however.
.2byte expression [, expression]*
¶This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two bytes of the expression’s value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the value at link time.
This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
.4byte expression [, expression]*
¶Like the .2byte directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte long values into the output.
.8byte expression [, expression]*
¶For 64-bit architectures, or more generally with any GAS configured to support
64-bit target virtual addresses, this is like the .2byte directive,
except that it inserts unaligned, eight byte long values into the output.
Otherwise, like .quad expressions
, it expects zero or
more bignums, separated by commas.
One day these directives won’t work. They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
.abort
.line
as
assembles source files written for a specific architecture
into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
requires hardware floating point support—or floating point arguments might be
passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
newer generation at run-time.
This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
ld
can warn about incompatible object files. After link
time, tools like gdb
can use it to process the linked file
correctly.
Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each attribute has a vendor, tag, and value. The vendor is a string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer, and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture. The file format is documented in ELF for the ARM Architecture.
The .gnu_attribute
directive records an object attribute
with vendor ‘gnu’.
Except for ‘Tag_compatibility’, which has both an integer and a string for
its value, GNU attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (tag &
2
is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
architecture-dependent ones.
These attributes are valid on all architectures.
The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1, then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The MIPS SIMD Architecture (MSA) ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
If you want to define a new GNU object attribute, here are the places you will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the ‘binutils’ mailing list.
The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
each machine where as
runs. Floating point representations
vary as well, and as
often supports a few additional
directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
as
support special pseudo-instructions for branch
optimization.
This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not include details on any machine’s instruction set. For details on that subject, see the hardware manufacturer’s manual.
-EB
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a big-endian processor.
-EL
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a little-endian processor.
-mabi=abi
¶Specify which ABI the source code uses. The recognized arguments
are: ilp32
and lp64
, which decides the generated object
file in ELF32 and ELF64 format respectively. The default is lp64
.
-mcpu=processor[+extension…]
¶This option specifies the target processor. The assembler will issue an error
message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which will not execute
on the target processor. The following processor names are recognized:
cortex-a34
,
cortex-a35
,
cortex-a53
,
cortex-a55
,
cortex-a57
,
cortex-a65
,
cortex-a65ae
,
cortex-a72
,
cortex-a73
,
cortex-a75
,
cortex-a76
,
cortex-a76ae
,
cortex-a77
,
cortex-a78
,
cortex-a78ae
,
cortex-a78c
,
cortex-a510
,
cortex-a520
,
cortex-a710
,
cortex-a720
,
ares
,
exynos-m1
,
falkor
,
neoverse-n1
,
neoverse-n2
,
neoverse-e1
,
neoverse-v1
,
qdf24xx
,
saphira
,
thunderx
,
vulcan
,
xgene1
xgene2
,
cortex-r82
,
cortex-x1
,
cortex-x2
,
cortex-x3
,
and
cortex-x4
.
The special name all
may be used to allow the assembler to accept
instructions valid for any supported processor, including all optional
extensions.
In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told to accept, or restrict, various extension mnemonics that extend the processor. See Architecture Extensions.
If some implementations of a particular processor can have an extension, then then those extensions are automatically enabled. Consequently, you will not normally have to specify any additional extensions.
-march=architecture[+extension…]
¶This option specifies the target architecture. The assembler will
issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an
instruction which will not execute on the target architecture. The
following architecture names are recognized: armv8-a
,
armv8.1-a
, armv8.2-a
, armv8.3-a
, armv8.4-a
armv8.5-a
, armv8.6-a
, armv8.7-a
, armv8.8-a
,
armv8.9-a
, armv8-r
, armv9-a
, armv9.1-a
,
armv9.2-a
, armv9.3-a
and armv9.4-a
.
If both -mcpu and -march are specified, the assembler will use the setting for -mcpu. If neither are specified, the assembler will default to -mcpu=all.
The architecture option can be extended with the same instruction set extension options as the -mcpu option. Unlike -mcpu, extensions are not always enabled by default. See Architecture Extensions.
-mverbose-error
¶This option enables verbose error messages for AArch64 gas. This option is enabled by default.
-mno-verbose-error
¶This option disables verbose error messages in AArch64 gas.
The tables below lists the permitted architecture extensions and architecture versions that are supported by the assembler, including a brief description and a list of other extensions that they depend upon.
Multiple extensions may be specified, separated by a +
.
Extension mnemonics may also be removed from those the assembler
accepts. This is done by prepending no
to the option that adds
the extension. Extensions that are removed must be listed after all
extensions that have been added.
Enabling an extension that depends upon other extensions (either directly or recursively) will automatically cause those extensions to be enabled. Similarly, disabling an extension that is required by other extensions will automatically cause those extensions to be disabled.
Extension | Depends upon | Description |
---|---|---|
aes | simd | Enable the AES and PMULL cryptographic extensions. |
b16b16 | sve2 | Enable BFloat16 to BFloat16 arithmetic for SVE2 and SME2. |
bf16 | fp | Enable BFloat16 extension. |
chk | Enable the Check Feature Status Extension. | |
compnum | simd | Enable the complex number SIMD extensions. An alias of fcma . |
crc | Enable CRC instructions. | |
crypto | simd | Enable cryptographic extensions. This is equivalent to aes+sha2 . |
cssc | Enable the Armv8.9-A Common Short Sequence Compression instructions. | |
d128 | lse128 | Enable the 128-bit Page Descriptor Extension. This implies lse128 . |
dotprod | simd | Enable the Dot Product extension. |
f32mm | sve | Enable the F32 Matrix Multiply extension |
f64mm | sve | Enable the F64 Matrix Multiply extension. |
fcma | fp16 , simd | Enable the complex number SIMD extensions. |
flagm | Enable Flag Manipulation instructions. | |
flagm2 | flagm | Enable FlagM2 flag conversion instructions. |
fp16fml | fp16 | Enable Armv8.2 16-bit floating-point multiplication variant support. |
fp16 | fp | Enable Armv8.2 16-bit floating-point support. |
fp | Enable floating-point extensions. | |
frintts | simd | Enable floating-point round to integral value instructions. |
gcs | Enable the Guarded Control Stack Extension. | |
hbc | Enable Armv8.8-A hinted conditional branch instructions | |
i8mm | simd | Enable the Int8 Matrix Multiply extension. |
ite | Enable the TRCIT instruction. | |
jscvt | fp | Enable the fjcvtzs JavaScript conversion instruction. |
lor | Enable Limited Ordering Regions extensions. | |
ls64 | Enable the 64 Byte Loads/Stores extensions. | |
lse | Enable Large System extensions. | |
lse128 | lse | Enable the 128-bit Atomic Instructions extension. |
memtag | Enable Armv8.5-A Memory Tagging Extensions. | |
mops | Enable Armv8.8-A memcpy and memset acceleration instructions | |
pan | Enable Privileged Access Never support. | |
pauth | Enable Pointer Authentication. | |
predres | Enable the Execution and Data and Prediction instructions. | |
predres2 | predres | Enable Prediction instructions. |
profile | Enable statistical profiling extensions. | |
ras | Enable the Reliability, Availability and Serviceability extension. | |
rasv2 | ras | Enable the Reliability, Availability and Serviceability extension v2. |
rcpc | Enable the Load-Acquire RCpc instructions extension. | |
rcpc2 | rcpc | Enable the Load-Acquire RCpc instructions extension v2. |
rcpc3 | rcpc2 | Enable the Load-Acquire RCpc instructions extension v3. |
rdma | simd | Enable rounding doubling multiply accumulate instructions. |
rdm | simd | An alias of rdma . |
rng | Enable Armv8.5-A random number instructions. | |
sb | Enable the speculation barrier instruction sb. | |
sha2 | simd | Enable the SHA1 and SHA256 cryptographic extensions. |
sha3 | sha2 | Enable the SHA512 and SHA3 cryptographic extensions. |
simd | fp | Enable Advanced SIMD extensions. |
sm4 | simd | Enable the SM3 and SM4 cryptographic extensions. |
sme | sve2 , bf16 | Enable the Scalable Matrix Extension. |
sme-f64f64 | sme | Enable SME F64F64 Extension. |
sme-i16i64 | sme | Enable SME I16I64 Extension. |
sme2 | sme | Enable SME2. |
sme2p1 | sme2 | Enable SME2.1. |
ssbs | Enable Speculative Store Bypassing Safe state read and write. | |
sve | fcma | Enable the Scalable Vector Extension. |
sve2 | sve | Enable SVE2. |
sve2-aes | sve2 , aes | Enable the SVE2 AES and PMULL Extensions. |
sve2-bitperm | sve2 | Enable the SVE2 BITPERM Extension. |
sve2-sha3 | sve2 , sha3 | Enable the SVE2 SHA3 Extension. |
sve2-sm4 | sve2 , sm4 | Enable the SVE2 SM4 Extension. |
sve2p1 | sve2 | Enable SVE2.1. |
the | Enable the Translation Hardening Extension. | |
tme | Enable the Transactional Memory Extension. | |
wfxt | Enable wfet and wfit instructions. | |
xs | Enable the XS memory attribute extension. |
Architecture Version | Includes |
---|---|
armv8-a | simd , chk , ras |
armv8.1-a | armv8-a , crc , lse , rdma , pan , lor |
armv8.2-a | armv8.1-a |
armv8.3-a | armv8.2-a , fcma , jscvt , pauth , rcpc |
armv8.4-a | armv8.3-a , fp16fml , dotprod , flagm , rcpc2 |
armv8.5-a | armv8.4-a , frintts , flagm2 , predres , sb , ssbs |
armv8.6-a | armv8.5-a , bf16 , i8mm |
armv8.7-a | armv8.6-a , ls64 , xs , wfxt |
armv8.8-a | armv8.7-a , hbc , mops |
armv8.9-a | armv8.8-a , rasv2 , predres2 |
armv9-a | armv8.5-a , sve2 |
armv9.1-a | armv9-a , armv8.6-a |
armv9.2-a | armv9.1-a , armv8.7-a |
armv9.3-a | armv9.2-a , armv8.8-a |
armv9.4-a | armv9.3-a , armv8.9-a |
armv8-r | armv8.4-a+nolor |
The presence of a ‘//’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line. If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment.
The ‘;’ character can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The ‘#’ can be optionally used to indicate immediate operands.
Please refer to the section ‘4.4 Register Names’ of ‘ARMv8 Instruction Set Overview’, which is available at http://infocenter.arm.com.
Relocations for ‘MOVZ’ and ‘MOVK’ instructions can be generated by prefixing the label with ‘#:abs_g2:’ etc. For example to load the 48-bit absolute address of foo into x0:
movz x0, #:abs_g2:foo // bits 32-47, overflow check movk x0, #:abs_g1_nc:foo // bits 16-31, no overflow check movk x0, #:abs_g0_nc:foo // bits 0-15, no overflow check
Relocations for ‘ADRP’, and ‘ADD’, ‘LDR’ or ‘STR’ instructions can be generated by prefixing the label with ‘:pg_hi21:’ and ‘#:lo12:’ respectively.
For example to use 33-bit (+/-4GB) pc-relative addressing to load the address of foo into x0:
adrp x0, :pg_hi21:foo add x0, x0, #:lo12:foo
Or to load the value of foo into x0:
adrp x0, :pg_hi21:foo ldr x0, [x0, #:lo12:foo]
Note that ‘:pg_hi21:’ is optional.
adrp x0, foo
is equivalent to
adrp x0, :pg_hi21:foo
.arch name
¶Select the target architecture. Valid values for name are the same as for the -march command-line option.
Specifying .arch
clears any previously selected architecture
extensions.
.arch_extension name
¶Add or remove an architecture extension to the target architecture. Valid values for name are the same as those accepted as architectural extensions by the -mcpu command-line option.
.arch_extension
may be used multiple times to add or remove extensions
incrementally to the architecture being compiled for.
.cpu name
¶Set the target processor. Valid values for name are the same as those accepted by the -mcpu= command-line option.
.dword expressions
¶The .dword
directive produces 64 bit values.
.even
¶The .even
directive aligns the output on the next even byte
boundary.
.float16 value [,...,value_n]
¶Place the half precision floating point representation of one or more floating-point values into the current section. The format used to encode the floating point values is always the IEEE 754-2008 half precision floating point format.
.inst expressions
¶Inserts the expressions into the output as if they were instructions, rather than data.
.ltorg
¶This directive causes the current contents of the literal pool to be
dumped into the current section (which is assumed to be the .text
section) at the current location (aligned to a word boundary).
GAS maintains a separate literal pool for each section and each
sub-section. The .ltorg
directive will only affect the literal
pool of the current section and sub-section. At the end of assembly
all remaining, un-empty literal pools will automatically be dumped.
Note - older versions of GAS would dump the current literal pool any time a section change occurred. This is no longer done, since it prevents accurate control of the placement of literal pools.
.pool
¶This is a synonym for .ltorg.
name .req register name
¶This creates an alias for register name called name. For example:
foo .req w0
ip0, ip1, lr and fp are automatically defined to alias to X16, X17, X30 and X29 respectively.
.tlsdescadd
¶Emits a TLSDESC_ADD reloc on the next instruction.
.tlsdesccall
¶Emits a TLSDESC_CALL reloc on the next instruction.
.tlsdescldr
¶Emits a TLSDESC_LDR reloc on the next instruction.
.unreq alias-name
¶This undefines a register alias which was previously defined using the
req
directive. For example:
foo .req w0 .unreq foo
An error occurs if the name is undefined. Note - this pseudo op can be used to delete builtin in register name aliases (eg ’w0’). This should only be done if it is really necessary.
.variant_pcs symbol
¶This directive marks symbol referencing a function that may follow a variant procedure call standard with different register usage convention from the base procedure call standard.
.xword expressions
¶The .xword
directive produces 64 bit values. This is the same
as the .dword
directive.
.cfi_b_key_frame
¶The .cfi_b_key_frame
directive inserts a ’B’ character into the CIE
corresponding to the current frame’s FDE, meaning that its return address has
been signed with the B-key. If two frames are signed with differing keys then
they will not share the same CIE. This information is intended to be used by
the stack unwinder in order to properly authenticate return addresses.
GAS implements all the standard AArch64 opcodes. It also implements several pseudo opcodes, including several synthetic load instructions.
LDR =
¶ldr <register> , =<expression>
The constant expression will be placed into the nearest literal pool (if it not already there) and a PC-relative LDR instruction will be generated.
For more information on the AArch64 instruction set and assembly language notation, see ‘ARMv8 Instruction Set Overview’ available at http://infocenter.arm.com.
The documentation here is primarily for the ELF object format.
as
also supports the ECOFF and EVAX formats, but
features specific to these formats are not yet documented.
-mcpu
¶This option specifies the target processor. If an attempt is made to
assemble an instruction which will not execute on the target processor,
the assembler may either expand the instruction as a macro or issue an
error message. This option is equivalent to the .arch
directive.
The following processor names are recognized:
21064
,
21064a
,
21066
,
21068
,
21164
,
21164a
,
21164pc
,
21264
,
21264a
,
21264b
,
ev4
,
ev5
,
lca45
,
ev5
,
ev56
,
pca56
,
ev6
,
ev67
,
ev68
.
The special name all
may be used to allow the assembler to accept
instructions valid for any Alpha processor.
In order to support existing practice in OSF/1 with respect to .arch
,
and existing practice within MILO
(the Linux ARC bootloader), the
numbered processor names (e.g. 21064) enable the processor-specific PALcode
instructions, while the “electro-vlasic” names (e.g. ev4
) do not.
-mdebug
¶-no-mdebug
Enables or disables the generation of .mdebug
encapsulation for
stabs directives and procedure descriptors. The default is to automatically
enable .mdebug
when the first stabs directive is seen.
-relax
¶This option forces all relocations to be put into the object file, instead of saving space and resolving some relocations at assembly time. Note that this option does not propagate all symbol arithmetic into the object file, because not all symbol arithmetic can be represented. However, the option can still be useful in specific applications.
-replace
¶-noreplace
Enables or disables the optimization of procedure calls, both at assemblage
and at link time. These options are only available for VMS targets and
-replace
is the default. See section 1.4.1 of the OpenVMS Linker
Utility Manual.
-g
¶This option is used when the compiler generates debug information. When
gcc
is using mips-tfile
to generate debug
information for ECOFF, local labels must be passed through to the object
file. Otherwise this option has no effect.
-Gsize
¶A local common symbol larger than size is placed in .bss
,
while smaller symbols are placed in .sbss
.
-F
¶-32addr
These options are ignored for backward compatibility.
The assembler syntax closely follow the Alpha Reference Manual; assembler directives and general syntax closely follow the OSF/1 and OpenVMS syntax, with a few differences for ELF.
‘#’ is the line comment character. Note that if ‘#’ is the first character on a line then it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
‘;’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The 32 integer registers are referred to as ‘$n’ or ‘$rn’. In addition, registers 15, 28, 29, and 30 may be referred to by the symbols ‘$fp’, ‘$at’, ‘$gp’, and ‘$sp’ respectively.
The 32 floating-point registers are referred to as ‘$fn’.
Some of these relocations are available for ECOFF, but mostly only for ELF. They are modeled after the relocation format introduced in Digital Unix 4.0, but there are additions.
The format is ‘!tag’ or ‘!tag!number’ where tag is the name of the relocation. In some cases number is used to relate specific instructions.
The relocation is placed at the end of the instruction like so:
ldah $0,a($29) !gprelhigh lda $0,a($0) !gprellow ldq $1,b($29) !literal!100 ldl $2,0($1) !lituse_base!100
!literal
!literal!N
Used with an ldq
instruction to load the address of a symbol
from the GOT.
A sequence number N is optional, and if present is used to pair
lituse
relocations with this literal
relocation. The
lituse
relocations are used by the linker to optimize the code
based on the final location of the symbol.
Note that these optimizations are dependent on the data flow of the
program. Therefore, if any lituse
is paired with a
literal
relocation, then all uses of the register set by
the literal
instruction must also be marked with lituse
relocations. This is because the original literal
instruction
may be deleted or transformed into another instruction.
Also note that there may be a one-to-many relationship between
literal
and lituse
, but not a many-to-one. That is, if
there are two code paths that load up the same address and feed the
value to a single use, then the use may not use a lituse
relocation.
!lituse_base!N
Used with any memory format instruction (e.g. ldl
) to indicate
that the literal is used for an address load. The offset field of the
instruction must be zero. During relaxation, the code may be altered
to use a gp-relative load.
!lituse_jsr!N
Used with a register branch format instruction (e.g. jsr
) to
indicate that the literal is used for a call. During relaxation, the
code may be altered to use a direct branch (e.g. bsr
).
!lituse_jsrdirect!N
Similar to lituse_jsr
, but also that this call cannot be vectored
through a PLT entry. This is useful for functions with special calling
conventions which do not allow the normal call-clobbered registers to be
clobbered.
!lituse_bytoff!N
Used with a byte mask instruction (e.g. extbl
) to indicate
that only the low 3 bits of the address are relevant. During relaxation,
the code may be altered to use an immediate instead of a register shift.
!lituse_addr!N
Used with any other instruction to indicate that the original address
is in fact used, and the original ldq
instruction may not be
altered or deleted. This is useful in conjunction with lituse_jsr
to test whether a weak symbol is defined.
ldq $27,foo($29) !literal!1 beq $27,is_undef !lituse_addr!1 jsr $26,($27),foo !lituse_jsr!1
!lituse_tlsgd!N
Used with a register branch format instruction to indicate that the
literal is the call to __tls_get_addr
used to compute the
address of the thread-local storage variable whose descriptor was
loaded with !tlsgd!N
.
!lituse_tlsldm!N
Used with a register branch format instruction to indicate that the
literal is the call to __tls_get_addr
used to compute the
address of the base of the thread-local storage block for the current
module. The descriptor for the module must have been loaded with
!tlsldm!N
.
!gpdisp!N
Used with ldah
and lda
to load the GP from the current
address, a-la the ldgp
macro. The source register for the
ldah
instruction must contain the address of the ldah
instruction. There must be exactly one lda
instruction paired
with the ldah
instruction, though it may appear anywhere in
the instruction stream. The immediate operands must be zero.
bsr $26,foo ldah $29,0($26) !gpdisp!1 lda $29,0($29) !gpdisp!1
!gprelhigh
Used with an ldah
instruction to add the high 16 bits of a
32-bit displacement from the GP.
!gprellow
Used with any memory format instruction to add the low 16 bits of a 32-bit displacement from the GP.
!gprel
Used with any memory format instruction to add a 16-bit displacement from the GP.
!samegp
Used with any branch format instruction to skip the GP load at the
target address. The referenced symbol must have the same GP as the
source object file, and it must be declared to either not use $27
or perform a standard GP load in the first two instructions via the
.prologue
directive.
!tlsgd
!tlsgd!N
Used with an lda
instruction to load the address of a TLS
descriptor for a symbol in the GOT.
The sequence number N is optional, and if present it used to
pair the descriptor load with both the literal
loading the
address of the __tls_get_addr
function and the lituse_tlsgd
marking the call to that function.
For proper relaxation, both the tlsgd
, literal
and
lituse
relocations must be in the same extended basic block.
That is, the relocation with the lowest address must be executed
first at runtime.
!tlsldm
!tlsldm!N
Used with an lda
instruction to load the address of a TLS
descriptor for the current module in the GOT.
Similar in other respects to tlsgd
.
!gotdtprel
Used with an ldq
instruction to load the offset of the TLS
symbol within its module’s thread-local storage block. Also known
as the dynamic thread pointer offset or dtp-relative offset.
!dtprelhi
!dtprello
!dtprel
Like gprel
relocations except they compute dtp-relative offsets.
!gottprel
Used with an ldq
instruction to load the offset of the TLS
symbol from the thread pointer. Also known as the tp-relative offset.
!tprelhi
!tprello
!tprel
Like gprel
relocations except they compute tp-relative offsets.
as
for the Alpha supports many additional directives for
compatibility with the native assembler. This section describes them only
briefly.
These are the additional directives in as
for the Alpha:
.arch cpu
Specifies the target processor. This is equivalent to the -mcpu command-line option. See Options, for a list of values for cpu.
.ent function[, n]
Mark the beginning of function. An optional number may follow for
compatibility with the OSF/1 assembler, but is ignored. When generating
.mdebug
information, this will create a procedure descriptor for
the function. In ELF, it will mark the symbol as a function a-la the
generic .type
directive.
.end function
Mark the end of function. In ELF, it will set the size of the symbol
a-la the generic .size
directive.
.mask mask, offset
Indicate which of the integer registers are saved in the current
function’s stack frame. mask is interpreted a bit mask in which
bit n set indicates that register n is saved. The registers
are saved in a block located offset bytes from the canonical
frame address (CFA) which is the value of the stack pointer on entry to
the function. The registers are saved sequentially, except that the
return address register (normally $26
) is saved first.
This and the other directives that describe the stack frame are
currently only used when generating .mdebug
information. They
may in the future be used to generate DWARF2 .debug_frame
unwind
information for hand written assembly.
.fmask mask, offset
Indicate which of the floating-point registers are saved in the current
stack frame. The mask and offset parameters are interpreted
as with .mask
.
.frame framereg, frameoffset, retreg[, argoffset]
Describes the shape of the stack frame. The frame pointer in use is
framereg; normally this is either $fp
or $sp
. The
frame pointer is frameoffset bytes below the CFA. The return
address is initially located in retreg until it is saved as
indicated in .mask
. For compatibility with OSF/1 an optional
argoffset parameter is accepted and ignored. It is believed to
indicate the offset from the CFA to the saved argument registers.
.prologue n
Indicate that the stack frame is set up and all registers have been
spilled. The argument n indicates whether and how the function
uses the incoming procedure vector (the address of the called
function) in $27
. 0 indicates that $27
is not used; 1
indicates that the first two instructions of the function use $27
to perform a load of the GP register; 2 indicates that $27
is
used in some non-standard way and so the linker cannot elide the load of
the procedure vector during relaxation.
.usepv function, which
Used to indicate the use of the $27
register, similar to
.prologue
, but without the other semantics of needing to
be inside an open .ent
/.end
block.
The which argument should be either no
, indicating that
$27
is not used, or std
, indicating that the first two
instructions of the function perform a GP load.
One might use this directive instead of .prologue
if you are
also using dwarf2 CFI directives.
.gprel32 expression
Computes the difference between the address in expression and the GP for the current object file, and stores it in 4 bytes. In addition to being smaller than a full 8 byte address, this also does not require a dynamic relocation when used in a shared library.
.t_floating expression
Stores expression as an IEEE double precision value.
.s_floating expression
Stores expression as an IEEE single precision value.
.f_floating expression
Stores expression as a VAX F format value.
.g_floating expression
Stores expression as a VAX G format value.
.d_floating expression
Stores expression as a VAX D format value.
.set feature
Enables or disables various assembler features. Using the positive name of the feature enables while using ‘nofeature’ disables.
at
Indicates that macro expansions may clobber the assembler
temporary ($at
or $28
) register. Some macros may not be
expanded without this and will generate an error message if noat
is in effect. When at
is in effect, a warning will be generated
if $at
is used by the programmer.
macro
Enables the expansion of macro instructions. Note that variants of real
instructions, such as br label
vs br $31,label
are
considered alternate forms and not macros.
move
reorder
volatile
These control whether and how the assembler may re-order instructions.
Accepted for compatibility with the OSF/1 assembler, but as
does not do instruction scheduling, so these features are ignored.
The following directives are recognized for compatibility with the OSF/1 assembler but are ignored.
.proc .aproc .reguse .livereg .option .aent .ugen .eflag .alias .noalias
For detailed information on the Alpha machine instruction set, see the Alpha Architecture Handbook.
The following options control the type of CPU for which code is assembled, and generic constraints on the code generated:
-mcpu=cpu
¶Set architecture type and register usage for cpu. There are also shortcut alias options available for backward compatibility and convenience. Supported values for cpu are
arc600
¶Assemble for ARC 600. Aliases: -mA6
, -mARC600
.
arc600_norm
Assemble for ARC 600 with norm instructions.
arc600_mul64
Assemble for ARC 600 with mul64 instructions.
arc600_mul32x16
Assemble for ARC 600 with mul32x16 instructions.
arc601
¶Assemble for ARC 601. Alias: -mARC601
.
arc601_norm
Assemble for ARC 601 with norm instructions.
arc601_mul64
Assemble for ARC 601 with mul64 instructions.
arc601_mul32x16
Assemble for ARC 601 with mul32x16 instructions.
arc700
¶Assemble for ARC 700. Aliases: -mA7
, -mARC700
.
arcem
¶Assemble for ARC EM. Aliases: -mEM
em
Assemble for ARC EM, identical as arcem variant.
em4
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_dmips
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_fpus
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_fpuda
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density, and double-precision assist instructions.
quarkse_em
Assemble for QuarkSE-EM cpu.
archs
¶Assemble for ARC HS. Aliases: -mHS
, -mav2hs
.
hs
Assemble for ARC HS.
hs34
Assemble for ARC HS34.
hs38
Assemble for ARC HS38.
hs38_linux
Assemble for ARC HS38 with floating point support on.
nps400
¶Assemble for ARC 700 with NPS-400 extended instructions.
Note: the .cpu
directive (see ARC Machine Directives) can
to be used to select a core variant from within assembly code.
-EB
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a big-endian processor.
-EL
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a little-endian processor - this is the default.
-mcode-density
¶This option turns on Code Density instructions. Only valid for ARC EM processors.
-mrelax
¶Enable support for assembly-time relaxation. The assembler will replace a longer version of an instruction with a shorter one, whenever it is possible.
-mnps400
¶Enable support for NPS-400 extended instructions.
-mspfp
¶Enable support for single-precision floating point instructions.
-mdpfp
¶Enable support for double-precision floating point instructions.
-mfpuda
¶Enable support for double-precision assist floating point instructions. Only valid for ARC EM processors.
%
¶A register name can optionally be prefixed by a ‘%’ character. So
register %r0
is equivalent to r0
in the assembly code.
#
¶The presence of a ‘#’ character within a line (but not at the start of a line) indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
Note: if a line starts with a ‘#’ character then it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
@
¶Prefixing an operand with an ‘@’ specifies that the operand is a symbol and not a register. This is how the assembler disambiguates the use of an ARC register name as a symbol. So the instruction
mov r0, @r0
moves the address of symbol r0
into register r0
.
`
¶The ‘`’ (backtick) character is used to separate statements on a single line.
-
¶Used as a separator to obtain a sequence of commands from a C preprocessor macro.
The ARC assembler uses the following register names for its core registers:
r0-r31
¶The core general registers. Registers r26
through r31
have special functions, and are usually referred to by those synonyms.
gp
¶The global pointer and a synonym for r26
.
fp
¶The frame pointer and a synonym for r27
.
sp
¶The stack pointer and a synonym for r28
.
ilink1
¶For ARC 600 and ARC 700, the level 1 interrupt link register and a
synonym for r29
. Not supported for ARCv2.
ilink
¶For ARCv2, the interrupt link register and a synonym for r29
.
Not supported for ARC 600 and ARC 700.
ilink2
¶For ARC 600 and ARC 700, the level 2 interrupt link register and a
synonym for r30
. Not supported for ARC v2.
blink
¶The link register and a synonym for r31
.
r32-r59
¶The extension core registers.
lp_count
¶The loop count register.
pcl
¶The word aligned program counter.
In addition the ARC processor has a large number of auxiliary registers. The precise set depends on the extensions being supported, but the following baseline set are always defined:
identity
¶Processor Identification register. Auxiliary register address 0x4.
pc
¶Program Counter. Auxiliary register address 0x6.
status32
¶Status register. Auxiliary register address 0x0a.
bta
¶Branch Target Address. Auxiliary register address 0x412.
ecr
¶Exception Cause Register. Auxiliary register address 0x403.
int_vector_base
¶Interrupt Vector Base address. Auxiliary register address 0x25.
status32_p0
¶Stored STATUS32 register on entry to level P0 interrupts. Auxiliary register address 0xb.
aux_user_sp
¶Saved User Stack Pointer. Auxiliary register address 0xd.
eret
¶Exception Return Address. Auxiliary register address 0x400.
erbta
¶BTA saved on exception entry. Auxiliary register address 0x401.
erstatus
¶STATUS32 saved on exception. Auxiliary register address 0x402.
bcr_ver
¶Build Configuration Registers Version. Auxiliary register address 0x60.
bta_link_build
¶Build configuration for: BTA Registers. Auxiliary register address 0x63.
vecbase_ac_build
¶Build configuration for: Interrupts. Auxiliary register address 0x68.
rf_build
¶Build configuration for: Core Registers. Auxiliary register address 0x6e.
dccm_build
¶DCCM RAM Configuration Register. Auxiliary register address 0xc1.
Additional auxiliary register names are defined according to the processor architecture version and extensions selected by the options.
The ARC version of as
supports the following additional
machine directives:
.lcomm symbol, length[, alignment]
¶Reserve length (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
denoted by symbol. The section and value of symbol are
those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. Since
symbol is not declared global, it is normally not visible to
ld
. The optional third parameter, alignment,
specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section,
specified as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero). The
alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a power of
two. If no alignment is specified, as will set the alignment to the
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up
to a maximum of 16.
.lcommon symbol, length[, alignment]
¶The same as lcomm
directive.
.cpu cpu
¶The .cpu
directive must be followed by the desired core
version. Permitted values for CPU are:
ARC600
Assemble for the ARC600 instruction set.
arc600_norm
Assemble for ARC 600 with norm instructions.
arc600_mul64
Assemble for ARC 600 with mul64 instructions.
arc600_mul32x16
Assemble for ARC 600 with mul32x16 instructions.
arc601
Assemble for ARC 601 instruction set.
arc601_norm
Assemble for ARC 601 with norm instructions.
arc601_mul64
Assemble for ARC 601 with mul64 instructions.
arc601_mul32x16
Assemble for ARC 601 with mul32x16 instructions.
ARC700
Assemble for the ARC700 instruction set.
NPS400
Assemble for the NPS400 instruction set.
EM
Assemble for the ARC EM instruction set.
arcem
Assemble for ARC EM instruction set
em4
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_dmips
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_fpus
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density instructions.
em4_fpuda
Assemble for ARC EM with code-density, and double-precision assist instructions.
quarkse_em
Assemble for QuarkSE-EM instruction set.
HS
Assemble for the ARC HS instruction set.
archs
Assemble for ARC HS instruction set.
hs
Assemble for ARC HS instruction set.
hs34
Assemble for ARC HS34 instruction set.
hs38
Assemble for ARC HS38 instruction set.
hs38_linux
Assemble for ARC HS38 with floating point support on.
Note: the .cpu
directive overrides the command-line option
-mcpu=cpu
; a warning is emitted when the version is not
consistent between the two.
.extAuxRegister name, addr, mode
¶Auxiliary registers can be defined in the assembler source code by using this directive. The first parameter, name, is the name of the new auxiliary register. The second parameter, addr, is address the of the auxiliary register. The third parameter, mode, specifies whether the register is readable and/or writable and is one of:
r
Read only;
w
Write only;
r|w
Read and write.
For example:
.extAuxRegister mulhi, 0x12, w
specifies a write only extension auxiliary register, mulhi at address 0x12.
.extCondCode suffix, val
¶ARC supports extensible condition codes. This directive defines a new condition code, to be known by the suffix, suffix and will depend on the value, val in the condition code.
For example:
.extCondCode is_busy,0x14 add.is_busy r1,r2,r3
will only execute the add
instruction if the condition code
value is 0x14.
.extCoreRegister name, regnum, mode, shortcut
¶Specifies an extension core register named name as a synonym for the register numbered regnum. The register number must be between 32 and 59. The third argument, mode, indicates whether the register is readable and/or writable and is one of:
r
Read only;
w
Write only;
r|w
Read and write.
The final parameter, shortcut indicates whether the register has a short cut in the pipeline. The valid values are:
can_shortcut
The register has a short cut in the pipeline;
cannot_shortcut
The register does not have a short cut in the pipeline.
For example:
.extCoreRegister mlo, 57, r , can_shortcut
defines a read only extension core register, mlo
, which is
register 57, and can short cut the pipeline.
.extInstruction name, opcode, subopcode, suffixclass, syntaxclass
¶ARC allows the user to specify extension instructions. These extension instructions are not macros; the assembler creates encodings for use of these instructions according to the specification by the user.
The first argument, name, gives the name of the instruction.
The second argument, opcode, is the opcode to be used (bits 31:27 in the encoding).
The third argument, subopcode, is the sub-opcode to be used, but the correct value also depends on the fifth argument, syntaxclass
The fourth argument, suffixclass, determines the kinds of suffixes to be allowed. Valid values are:
SUFFIX_NONE
No suffixes are permitted;
SUFFIX_COND
Conditional suffixes are permitted;
SUFFIX_FLAG
Flag setting suffixes are permitted.
SUFFIX_COND|SUFFIX_FLAG
Both conditional and flag setting suffices are permitted.
The fifth and final argument, syntaxclass, determines the syntax class for the instruction. It can have the following values:
SYNTAX_2OP
Two Operand Instruction;
SYNTAX_3OP
Three Operand Instruction.
SYNTAX_1OP
One Operand Instruction.
SYNTAX_NOP
No Operand Instruction.
The syntax class may be followed by ‘|’ and one of the following modifiers.
OP1_MUST_BE_IMM
Modifies syntax class SYNTAX_3OP
, specifying that the first
operand of a three-operand instruction must be an immediate (i.e., the
result is discarded). This is usually used to set the flags using
specific instructions and not retain results.
OP1_IMM_IMPLIED
Modifies syntax class SYNTAX_20P
, specifying that there is an
implied immediate destination operand which does not appear in the
syntax.
For example, if the source code contains an instruction like:
inst r1,r2
the first argument is an implied immediate (that is, the result is discarded). This is the same as though the source code were: inst 0,r1,r2.
For example, defining a 64-bit multiplier with immediate operands:
.extInstruction mp64, 0x07, 0x2d, SUFFIX_COND|SUFFIX_FLAG, SYNTAX_3OP|OP1_MUST_BE_IMM
which specifies an extension instruction named mp64
with 3
operands. It sets the flags and can be used with a condition code,
for which the first operand is an immediate, i.e. equivalent to
discarding the result of the operation.
A two operands instruction variant would be:
.extInstruction mul64, 0x07, 0x2d, SUFFIX_COND, SYNTAX_2OP|OP1_IMM_IMPLIED
which describes a two operand instruction with an implicit first immediate operand. The result of this operation would be discarded.
.arc_attribute tag, value
¶Set the ARC object attribute tag to value.
The tag is either an attribute number, or one of the following:
Tag_ARC_PCS_config
, Tag_ARC_CPU_base
,
Tag_ARC_CPU_variation
, Tag_ARC_CPU_name
,
Tag_ARC_ABI_rf16
, Tag_ARC_ABI_osver
, Tag_ARC_ABI_sda
,
Tag_ARC_ABI_pic
, Tag_ARC_ABI_tls
, Tag_ARC_ABI_enumsize
,
Tag_ARC_ABI_exceptions
, Tag_ARC_ABI_double_size
,
Tag_ARC_ISA_config
, Tag_ARC_ISA_apex
,
Tag_ARC_ISA_mpy_option
The value is either a number
, "string"
, or
number, "string"
depending on the tag.
The following additional assembler modifiers have been added for position-independent code. These modifiers are available only with the ARC 700 and above processors and generate relocation entries, which are interpreted by the linker as follows:
@pcl(symbol)
¶Relative distance of symbol’s from the current program counter location.
@gotpc(symbol)
¶Relative distance of symbol’s Global Offset Table entry from the current program counter location.
@gotoff(symbol)
¶Distance of symbol from the base of the Global Offset Table.
@plt(symbol)
¶Distance of symbol’s Procedure Linkage Table entry from the current program counter. This is valid only with branch and link instructions and PC-relative calls.
@sda(symbol)
¶Relative distance of symbol from the base of the Small Data Pointer.
The following assembler symbols will prove useful when developing position-independent code. These symbols are available only with the ARC 700 and above processors.
__GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE__
¶Symbol referring to the base of the Global Offset Table.
__DYNAMIC__
¶An alias for the Global Offset Table
Base__GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE__
. It can be used only with
@gotpc
modifiers.
For information on the ARC instruction set, see ARC Programmers Reference Manual, available where you download the processor IP library.
-mcpu=processor[+extension…]
¶This option specifies the target processor. The assembler will issue an
error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which
will not execute on the target processor. The following processor names are
recognized:
arm1
,
arm2
,
arm250
,
arm3
,
arm6
,
arm60
,
arm600
,
arm610
,
arm620
,
arm7
,
arm7m
,
arm7d
,
arm7dm
,
arm7di
,
arm7dmi
,
arm70
,
arm700
,
arm700i
,
arm710
,
arm710t
,
arm720
,
arm720t
,
arm740t
,
arm710c
,
arm7100
,
arm7500
,
arm7500fe
,
arm7t
,
arm7tdmi
,
arm7tdmi-s
,
arm8
,
arm810
,
strongarm
,
strongarm1
,
strongarm110
,
strongarm1100
,
strongarm1110
,
arm9
,
arm920
,
arm920t
,
arm922t
,
arm940t
,
arm9tdmi
,
fa526
(Faraday FA526 processor),
fa626
(Faraday FA626 processor),
arm9e
,
arm926e
,
arm926ej-s
,
arm946e-r0
,
arm946e
,
arm946e-s
,
arm966e-r0
,
arm966e
,
arm966e-s
,
arm968e-s
,
arm10t
,
arm10tdmi
,
arm10e
,
arm1020
,
arm1020t
,
arm1020e
,
arm1022e
,
arm1026ej-s
,
fa606te
(Faraday FA606TE processor),
fa616te
(Faraday FA616TE processor),
fa626te
(Faraday FA626TE processor),
fmp626
(Faraday FMP626 processor),
fa726te
(Faraday FA726TE processor),
arm1136j-s
,
arm1136jf-s
,
arm1156t2-s
,
arm1156t2f-s
,
arm1176jz-s
,
arm1176jzf-s
,
mpcore
,
mpcorenovfp
,
cortex-a5
,
cortex-a7
,
cortex-a8
,
cortex-a9
,
cortex-a15
,
cortex-a17
,
cortex-a32
,
cortex-a35
,
cortex-a53
,
cortex-a55
,
cortex-a57
,
cortex-a72
,
cortex-a73
,
cortex-a75
,
cortex-a76
,
cortex-a76ae
,
cortex-a77
,
cortex-a78
,
cortex-a78ae
,
cortex-a78c
,
cortex-a710
,
ares
,
cortex-r4
,
cortex-r4f
,
cortex-r5
,
cortex-r7
,
cortex-r8
,
cortex-r52
,
cortex-r52plus
,
cortex-m35p
,
cortex-m33
,
cortex-m23
,
cortex-m7
,
cortex-m4
,
cortex-m3
,
cortex-m1
,
cortex-m0
,
cortex-m0plus
,
cortex-x1
,
cortex-x1c
,
exynos-m1
,
marvell-pj4
,
marvell-whitney
,
neoverse-n1
,
neoverse-n2
,
neoverse-v1
,
xgene1
,
xgene2
,
ep9312
(ARM920 with Cirrus Maverick coprocessor),
i80200
(Intel XScale processor)
iwmmxt
(Intel XScale processor with Wireless MMX technology coprocessor)
and
xscale
.
The special name all
may be used to allow the
assembler to accept instructions valid for any ARM processor.
In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told to
accept various extension mnemonics that extend the processor using the
co-processor instruction space. For example, -mcpu=arm920+maverick
is equivalent to specifying -mcpu=ep9312
.
Multiple extensions may be specified, separated by a +
. The
extensions should be specified in ascending alphabetical order.
Some extensions may be restricted to particular architectures; this is documented in the list of extensions below.
Extension mnemonics may also be removed from those the assembler accepts.
This is done be prepending no
to the option that adds the extension.
Extensions that are removed should be listed after all extensions which have
been added, again in ascending alphabetical order. For example,
-mcpu=ep9312+nomaverick
is equivalent to specifying -mcpu=arm920
.
The following extensions are currently supported:
bf16
(BFloat16 extensions for v8.6-A architecture),
i8mm
(Int8 Matrix Multiply extensions for v8.6-A architecture),
crc
crypto
(Cryptography Extensions for v8-A architecture, implies fp+simd
),
dotprod
(Dot Product Extensions for v8.2-A architecture, implies fp+simd
),
fp
(Floating Point Extensions for v8-A architecture),
fp16
(FP16 Extensions for v8.2-A architecture, implies fp
),
fp16fml
(FP16 Floating Point Multiplication Variant Extensions for v8.2-A architecture, implies fp16
),
idiv
(Integer Divide Extensions for v7-A and v7-R architectures),
iwmmxt
,
iwmmxt2
,
xscale
,
maverick
,
mp
(Multiprocessing Extensions for v7-A and v7-R
architectures),
os
(Operating System for v6M architecture),
predres
(Execution and Data Prediction Restriction Instruction for
v8-A architectures, added by default from v8.5-A),
sb
(Speculation Barrier Instruction for v8-A architectures, added by
default from v8.5-A),
sec
(Security Extensions for v6K and v7-A architectures),
simd
(Advanced SIMD Extensions for v8-A architecture, implies fp
),
virt
(Virtualization Extensions for v7-A architecture, implies
idiv
),
pan
(Privileged Access Never Extensions for v8-A architecture),
ras
(Reliability, Availability and Serviceability extensions
for v8-A architecture),
rdma
(ARMv8.1 Advanced SIMD extensions for v8-A architecture, implies
simd
)
and
xscale
.
-march=architecture[+extension…]
¶This option specifies the target architecture. The assembler will issue
an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which
will not execute on the target architecture. The following architecture
names are recognized:
armv1
,
armv2
,
armv2a
,
armv2s
,
armv3
,
armv3m
,
armv4
,
armv4xm
,
armv4t
,
armv4txm
,
armv5
,
armv5t
,
armv5txm
,
armv5te
,
armv5texp
,
armv6
,
armv6j
,
armv6k
,
armv6z
,
armv6kz
,
armv6-m
,
armv6s-m
,
armv7
,
armv7-a
,
armv7ve
,
armv7-r
,
armv7-m
,
armv7e-m
,
armv8-a
,
armv8.1-a
,
armv8.2-a
,
armv8.3-a
,
armv8-r
,
armv8.4-a
,
armv8.5-a
,
armv8-m.base
,
armv8-m.main
,
armv8.1-m.main
,
armv8.6-a
,
armv8.7-a
,
armv8.8-a
,
armv8.9-a
,
armv9-a
,
armv9.1-a
,
armv9.2-a
,
armv9.3-a
,
armv9.4-a
,
iwmmxt
,
iwmmxt2
and
xscale
.
If both -mcpu
and
-march
are specified, the assembler will use
the setting for -mcpu
.
The architecture option can be extended with a set extension options. These
extensions are context sensitive, i.e. the same extension may mean different
things when used with different architectures. When used together with a
-mfpu
option, the union of both feature enablement is taken.
See their availability and meaning below:
For armv5te
, armv5texp
, armv5tej
, armv6
, armv6j
, armv6k
, armv6z
, armv6kz
, armv6zk
, armv6t2
, armv6kt2
and armv6zt2
:
+fp
: Enables VFPv2 instructions.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instrunctions.
For armv7
:
+fp
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instructions.
For armv7-a
:
+fp
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-d16
: Alias for +fp
.
+vfpv3
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-d16-fp16
: Enables VFPv3 with half precision floating-point
conversion instructions and 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-fp16
: Enables VFPv3 with half precision floating-point conversion
instructions and 32 double-word registers.
+vfpv4-d16
: Enables VFPv4 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv4
: Enables VFPv4 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
+simd
: Enables VFPv3 and NEONv1 instructions with 32 double-word
registers.
+neon
: Alias for +simd
.
+neon-vfpv3
: Alias for +simd
.
+neon-fp16
: Enables VFPv3, half precision floating-point conversion and
NEONv1 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
+neon-vfpv4
: Enables VFPv4 and NEONv1 with Fused-MAC instructions and 32
double-word registers.
+mp
: Enables Multiprocessing Extensions.
+sec
: Enables Security Extensions.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU and NEON instructions.
+nosimd
: Disables all NEON instructions.
For armv7ve
:
+fp
: Enables VFPv4 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv4-d16
: Alias for +fp
.
+vfpv3-d16
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-d16-fp16
: Enables VFPv3 with half precision floating-point
conversion instructions and 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-fp16
: Enables VFPv3 with half precision floating-point conversion
instructions and 32 double-word registers.
+vfpv4
: Enables VFPv4 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
+simd
: Enables VFPv4 and NEONv1 with Fused-MAC instructions and 32
double-word registers.
+neon-vfpv4
: Alias for +simd
.
+neon
: Enables VFPv3 and NEONv1 instructions with 32 double-word
registers.
+neon-vfpv3
: Alias for +neon
.
+neon-fp16
: Enables VFPv3, half precision floating-point conversion and
NEONv1 instructions with 32 double-word registers.
double-word registers.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU and NEON instructions.
+nosimd
: Disables all NEON instructions.
For armv7-r
:
+fp.sp
: Enables single-precision only VFPv3 instructions with 16
double-word registers.
+vfpv3xd
: Alias for +fp.sp
.
+fp
: Enables VFPv3 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-d16
: Alias for +fp
.
+vfpv3xd-fp16
: Enables single-precision only VFPv3 and half
floating-point conversion instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+vfpv3-d16-fp16
: Enables VFPv3 and half precision floating-point
conversion instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+idiv
: Enables integer division instructions in ARM mode.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instructions.
For armv7e-m
:
+fp
: Enables single-precision only VFPv4 instructions with 16
double-word registers.
+vfpvf4-sp-d16
: Alias for +fp
.
+fpv5
: Enables single-precision only VFPv5 instructions with 16
double-word registers.
+fp.dp
: Enables VFPv5 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+fpv5-d16"
: Alias for +fp.dp
.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instructions.
For armv8-m.main
:
+dsp
: Enables DSP Extension.
+fp
: Enables single-precision only VFPv5 instructions with 16
double-word registers.
+fp.dp
: Enables VFPv5 instructions with 16 double-word registers.
+cdecp0
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 0),
+cdecp1
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 1),
+cdecp2
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 2),
+cdecp3
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 3),
+cdecp4
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 4),
+cdecp5
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 5),
+cdecp6
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 6),
+cdecp7
(CDE extensions for v8-m architecture with coprocessor 7),
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instructions.
+nodsp
: Disables DSP Extension.
For armv8.1-m.main
:
+dsp
: Enables DSP Extension.
+fp
: Enables single and half precision scalar Floating Point Extensions
for Armv8.1-M Mainline with 16 double-word registers.
+fp.dp
: Enables double precision scalar Floating Point Extensions for
Armv8.1-M Mainline, implies +fp
.
+mve
: Enables integer only M-profile Vector Extension for
Armv8.1-M Mainline, implies +dsp
.
+mve.fp
: Enables Floating Point M-profile Vector Extension for
Armv8.1-M Mainline, implies +mve
and +fp
.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU instructions.
+nodsp
: Disables DSP Extension.
+nomve
: Disables all M-profile Vector Extensions.
For armv8-a
:
+crc
: Enables CRC32 Extension.
+simd
: Enables VFP and NEON for Armv8-A.
+crypto
: Enables Cryptography Extensions for Armv8-A, implies +simd
.
+sb
: Enables Speculation Barrier Instruction for Armv8-A.
+predres
: Enables Execution and Data Prediction Restriction Instruction
for Armv8-A.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU, NEON and Cryptography Extensions.
+nocrypto
: Disables Cryptography Extensions.
For armv8.1-a
:
+simd
: Enables VFP and NEON for Armv8.1-A.
+crypto
: Enables Cryptography Extensions for Armv8-A, implies +simd
.
+sb
: Enables Speculation Barrier Instruction for Armv8-A.
+predres
: Enables Execution and Data Prediction Restriction Instruction
for Armv8-A.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU, NEON and Cryptography Extensions.
+nocrypto
: Disables Cryptography Extensions.
For armv8.2-a
and armv8.3-a
:
+simd
: Enables VFP and NEON for Armv8.1-A.
+fp16
: Enables FP16 Extension for Armv8.2-A, implies +simd
.
+fp16fml
: Enables FP16 Floating Point Multiplication Variant Extensions
for Armv8.2-A, implies +fp16
.
+crypto
: Enables Cryptography Extensions for Armv8-A, implies +simd
.
+dotprod
: Enables Dot Product Extensions for Armv8.2-A, implies +simd
.
+sb
: Enables Speculation Barrier Instruction for Armv8-A.
+predres
: Enables Execution and Data Prediction Restriction Instruction
for Armv8-A.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU, NEON, Cryptography and Dot Product Extensions.
+nocrypto
: Disables Cryptography Extensions.
For armv8.4-a
:
+simd
: Enables VFP and NEON for Armv8.1-A and Dot Product Extensions for
Armv8.2-A.
+fp16
: Enables FP16 Floating Point and Floating Point Multiplication
Variant Extensions for Armv8.2-A, implies +simd
.
+crypto
: Enables Cryptography Extensions for Armv8-A, implies +simd
.
+sb
: Enables Speculation Barrier Instruction for Armv8-A.
+predres
: Enables Execution and Data Prediction Restriction Instruction
for Armv8-A.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU, NEON, Cryptography and Dot Product Extensions.
+nocryptp
: Disables Cryptography Extensions.
For armv8.5-a
:
+simd
: Enables VFP and NEON for Armv8.1-A and Dot Product Extensions for
Armv8.2-A.
+fp16
: Enables FP16 Floating Point and Floating Point Multiplication
Variant Extensions for Armv8.2-A, implies +simd
.
+crypto
: Enables Cryptography Extensions for Armv8-A, implies +simd
.
+nofp
: Disables all FPU, NEON, Cryptography and Dot Product Extensions.
+nocryptp
: Disables Cryptography Extensions.
-mfpu=floating-point-format
¶This option specifies the floating point format to assemble for. The
assembler will issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble
an instruction which will not execute on the target floating point unit.
The following format options are recognized:
softfpa
,
fpe
,
fpe2
,
fpe3
,
fpa
,
fpa10
,
fpa11
,
arm7500fe
,
softvfp
,
softvfp+vfp
,
vfp
,
vfp10
,
vfp10-r0
,
vfp9
,
vfpxd
,
vfpv2
,
vfpv3
,
vfpv3-fp16
,
vfpv3-d16
,
vfpv3-d16-fp16
,
vfpv3xd
,
vfpv3xd-d16
,
vfpv4
,
vfpv4-d16
,
fpv4-sp-d16
,
fpv5-sp-d16
,
fpv5-d16
,
fp-armv8
,
arm1020t
,
arm1020e
,
arm1136jf-s
,
maverick
,
neon
,
neon-vfpv3
,
neon-fp16
,
neon-vfpv4
,
neon-fp-armv8
,
crypto-neon-fp-armv8
,
neon-fp-armv8.1
and
crypto-neon-fp-armv8.1
.
In addition to determining which instructions are assembled, this option
also affects the way in which the .double
assembler directive behaves
when assembling little-endian code.
The default is dependent on the processor selected. For Architecture 5 or later, the default is to assemble for VFP instructions; for earlier architectures the default is to assemble for FPA instructions.
-mfp16-format=format
¶This option specifies the half-precision floating point format to use
when assembling floating point numbers emitted by the .float16
directive.
The following format options are recognized:
ieee
,
alternative
.
If ieee
is specified then the IEEE 754-2008 half-precision floating
point format is used, if alternative
is specified then the Arm
alternative half-precision format is used. If this option is set on the
command line then the format is fixed and cannot be changed with
the float16_format
directive. If this value is not set then
the IEEE 754-2008 format is used until the format is explicitly set with
the float16_format
directive.
-mthumb
¶This option specifies that the assembler should start assembling Thumb
instructions; that is, it should behave as though the file starts with a
.code 16
directive.
-mthumb-interwork
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should
be marked as supporting interworking. It also affects the behaviour
of the ADR
and ADRL
pseudo opcodes.
-mimplicit-it=never
¶-mimplicit-it=always
-mimplicit-it=arm
-mimplicit-it=thumb
The -mimplicit-it
option controls the behavior of the assembler when
conditional instructions are not enclosed in IT blocks.
There are four possible behaviors.
If never
is specified, such constructs cause a warning in ARM
code and an error in Thumb-2 code.
If always
is specified, such constructs are accepted in both
ARM and Thumb-2 code, where the IT instruction is added implicitly.
If arm
is specified, such constructs are accepted in ARM code
and cause an error in Thumb-2 code.
If thumb
is specified, such constructs cause a warning in ARM
code and are accepted in Thumb-2 code. If you omit this option, the
behavior is equivalent to -mimplicit-it=arm
.
-mapcs-26
¶-mapcs-32
These options specify that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as supporting the indicated version of the Arm Procedure. Calling Standard.
-matpcs
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as supporting the Arm/Thumb Procedure Calling Standard. If enabled this option will cause the assembler to create an empty debugging section in the object file called .arm.atpcs. Debuggers can use this to determine the ABI being used by.
-mapcs-float
¶This indicates the floating point variant of the APCS should be used. In this variant floating point arguments are passed in FP registers rather than integer registers.
-mapcs-reentrant
¶This indicates that the reentrant variant of the APCS should be used. This variant supports position independent code.
-mfloat-abi=abi
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be
marked as using specified floating point ABI.
The following values are recognized:
soft
,
softfp
and
hard
.
-meabi=ver
¶This option specifies which EABI version the produced object files should
conform to.
The following values are recognized:
gnu
,
4
and
5
.
-EB
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a big-endian processor.
Note: If a program is being built for a system with big-endian data and little-endian instructions then it should be assembled with the -EB option, (all of it, code and data) and then linked with the --be8 option. This will reverse the endianness of the instructions back to little-endian, but leave the data as big-endian.
-EL
¶This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler should be marked as being encoded for a little-endian processor.
-k
¶This option specifies that the output of the assembler should be marked as position-independent code (PIC).
--fix-v4bx
¶Allow BX
instructions in ARMv4 code. This is intended for use with
the linker option of the same name.
-mwarn-deprecated
¶-mno-warn-deprecated
Enable or disable warnings about using deprecated options or features. The default is to warn.
-mccs
¶Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
-mwarn-syms
¶-mno-warn-syms
Enable or disable warnings about symbols that match the names of ARM instructions. The default is to warn.
Two slightly different syntaxes are support for ARM and THUMB
instructions. The default, divided
, uses the old style where
ARM and THUMB instructions had their own, separate syntaxes. The new,
unified
syntax, which can be selected via the .syntax
directive, and has the following main features:
#
prefix.
IT
instruction may appear, and if it does it is validated
against subsequent conditional affixes. In ARM mode it does not
generate machine code, in THUMB mode it does.
IT
instruction.
divided
syntax).
.N
and .W
suffixes are recognized and honored.
s
affix.
The presence of a ‘@’ anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
Either ‘#’ or ‘$’ can be used to indicate immediate operands.
*TODO* Explain about /data modifier on symbols.
Specific data relocations can be generated by putting the relocation name in parentheses after the symbol name. For example:
.word foo(TARGET1)
This will generate an ‘R_ARM_TARGET1’ relocation against the symbol
foo.
The following relocations are supported:
GOT
,
GOTOFF
,
TARGET1
,
TARGET2
,
SBREL
,
TLSGD
,
TLSLDM
,
TLSLDO
,
TLSDESC
,
TLSCALL
,
GOTTPOFF
,
GOT_PREL
and
TPOFF
.
For compatibility with older toolchains the assembler also accepts
(PLT)
after branch targets. On legacy targets this will
generate the deprecated ‘R_ARM_PLT32’ relocation. On EABI
targets it will encode either the ‘R_ARM_CALL’ or
‘R_ARM_JUMP24’ relocation, as appropriate.
Relocations for ‘MOVW’ and ‘MOVT’ instructions can be generated by prefixing the value with ‘#:lower16:’ and ‘#:upper16’ respectively. For example to load the 32-bit address of foo into r0:
MOVW r0, #:lower16:foo MOVT r0, #:upper16:foo
Relocations ‘R_ARM_THM_ALU_ABS_G0_NC’, ‘R_ARM_THM_ALU_ABS_G1_NC’, ‘R_ARM_THM_ALU_ABS_G2_NC’ and ‘R_ARM_THM_ALU_ABS_G3_NC’ can be generated by prefixing the value with ‘#:lower0_7:#’, ‘#:lower8_15:#’, ‘#:upper0_7:#’ and ‘#:upper8_15:#’ respectively. For example to load the 32-bit address of foo into r0:
MOVS r0, #:upper8_15:#foo LSLS r0, r0, #8 ADDS r0, #:upper0_7:#foo LSLS r0, r0, #8 ADDS r0, #:lower8_15:#foo LSLS r0, r0, #8 ADDS r0, #:lower0_7:#foo
Some NEON load/store instructions allow an optional address alignment qualifier. The ARM documentation specifies that this is indicated by ‘@ align’. However GAS already interprets the ‘@’ character as a "line comment" start, so ‘: align’ is used instead. For example:
vld1.8 {q0}, [r0, :128]
.align expression [, expression]
¶This is the generic .align directive. For the ARM however if the first argument is zero (ie no alignment is needed) the assembler will behave as if the argument had been 2 (ie pad to the next four byte boundary). This is for compatibility with ARM’s own assembler.
.arch name
¶Select the target architecture. Valid values for name are the same as for the -march command-line option without the instruction set extension.
Specifying .arch
clears any previously selected architecture
extensions.
.arch_extension name
¶Add or remove an architecture extension to the target architecture. Valid values for name are the same as those accepted as architectural extensions by the -mcpu and -march command-line options.
.arch_extension
may be used multiple times to add or remove extensions
incrementally to the architecture being compiled for.
.arm
¶This performs the same action as .code 32.
.cantunwind
¶Prevents unwinding through the current function. No personality routine or exception table data is required or permitted.
.code [16|32]
¶This directive selects the instruction set being generated. The value 16 selects Thumb, with the value 32 selecting ARM.
.cpu name
¶Select the target processor. Valid values for name are the same as for the -mcpu command-line option without the instruction set extension.
Specifying .cpu
clears any previously selected architecture
extensions.
name .dn register name [.type] [[index]]
¶name .qn register name [.type] [[index]]
The dn
and qn
directives are used to create typed
and/or indexed register aliases for use in Advanced SIMD Extension
(Neon) instructions. The former should be used to create aliases
of double-precision registers, and the latter to create aliases of
quad-precision registers.
If these directives are used to create typed aliases, those aliases can be used in Neon instructions instead of writing types after the mnemonic or after each operand. For example:
x .dn d2.f32 y .dn d3.f32 z .dn d4.f32[1] vmul x,y,z
This is equivalent to writing the following:
vmul.f32 d2,d3,d4[1]
Aliases created using dn
or qn
can be destroyed using
unreq
.
.eabi_attribute tag, value
¶Set the EABI object attribute tag to value.
The tag is either an attribute number, or one of the following:
Tag_CPU_raw_name
, Tag_CPU_name
, Tag_CPU_arch
,
Tag_CPU_arch_profile
, Tag_ARM_ISA_use
,
Tag_THUMB_ISA_use
, Tag_FP_arch
, Tag_WMMX_arch
,
Tag_Advanced_SIMD_arch
, Tag_MVE_arch
, Tag_PCS_config
,
Tag_ABI_PCS_R9_use
, Tag_ABI_PCS_RW_data
,
Tag_ABI_PCS_RO_data
, Tag_ABI_PCS_GOT_use
,
Tag_ABI_PCS_wchar_t
, Tag_ABI_FP_rounding
,
Tag_ABI_FP_denormal
, Tag_ABI_FP_exceptions
,
Tag_ABI_FP_user_exceptions
, Tag_ABI_FP_number_model
,
Tag_ABI_align_needed
, Tag_ABI_align_preserved
,
Tag_ABI_enum_size
, Tag_ABI_HardFP_use
,
Tag_ABI_VFP_args
, Tag_ABI_WMMX_args
,
Tag_ABI_optimization_goals
, Tag_ABI_FP_optimization_goals
,
Tag_compatibility
, Tag_CPU_unaligned_access
,
Tag_FP_HP_extension
, Tag_ABI_FP_16bit_format
,
Tag_MPextension_use
, Tag_DIV_use
,
Tag_nodefaults
, Tag_also_compatible_with
,
Tag_conformance
, Tag_T2EE_use
,
Tag_Virtualization_use
The value is either a number
, "string"
, or
number, "string"
depending on the tag.
Note - the following legacy values are also accepted by tag:
Tag_VFP_arch
, Tag_ABI_align8_needed
,
Tag_ABI_align8_preserved
, Tag_VFP_HP_extension
,
.even
¶This directive aligns to an even-numbered address.
.extend expression [, expression]*
¶.ldouble expression [, expression]*
These directives write 12byte long double floating-point values to the output section. These are not compatible with current ARM processors or ABIs.
.float16 value [,...,value_n]
¶Place the half precision floating point representation of one or more
floating-point values into the current section. The exact format of the
encoding is specified by .float16_format
. If the format has not
been explicitly set yet (either via the .float16_format
directive or
the command line option) then the IEEE 754-2008 format is used.
.float16_format format
¶Set the format to use when encoding float16 values emitted by
the .float16
directive.
Once the format has been set it cannot be changed.
format
should be one of the following: ieee
(encode in
the IEEE 754-2008 half precision format) or alternative
(encode in
the Arm alternative half precision format).
.fnend
¶Marks the end of a function with an unwind table entry. The unwind index table entry is created when this directive is processed.
If no personality routine has been specified then standard personality routine 0 or 1 will be used, depending on the number of unwind opcodes required.
.fnstart
¶Marks the start of a function with an unwind table entry.
.force_thumb
¶This directive forces the selection of Thumb instructions, even if the target processor does not support those instructions
.fpu name
¶Select the floating-point unit to assemble for. Valid values for name are the same as for the -mfpu command-line option.
.handlerdata
¶Marks the end of the current function, and the start of the exception table
entry for that function. Anything between this directive and the
.fnend
directive will be added to the exception table entry.
Must be preceded by a .personality
or .personalityindex
directive.
.inst opcode [ , … ]
¶.inst.n opcode [ , … ]
.inst.w opcode [ , … ]
Generates the instruction corresponding to the numerical value opcode.
.inst.n
and .inst.w
allow the Thumb instruction size to be
specified explicitly, overriding the normal encoding rules.
.ldouble expression [, expression]*
See .extend
.
.ltorg
¶This directive causes the current contents of the literal pool to be
dumped into the current section (which is assumed to be the .text
section) at the current location (aligned to a word boundary).
GAS
maintains a separate literal pool for each section and each
sub-section. The .ltorg
directive will only affect the literal
pool of the current section and sub-section. At the end of assembly
all remaining, un-empty literal pools will automatically be dumped.
Note - older versions of GAS
would dump the current literal
pool any time a section change occurred. This is no longer done, since
it prevents accurate control of the placement of literal pools.
.movsp reg [, #offset]
¶Tell the unwinder that reg contains an offset from the current stack pointer. If offset is not specified then it is assumed to be zero.
.object_arch name
¶Override the architecture recorded in the EABI object attribute section.
Valid values for name are the same as for the .arch
directive.
Typically this is useful when code uses runtime detection of CPU features.
.packed expression [, expression]*
¶This directive writes 12-byte packed floating-point values to the output section. These are not compatible with current ARM processors or ABIs.
.pacspval
¶Generate unwinder annotations to use effective vsp as modifier in PAC validation.
.pad #count
¶Generate unwinder annotations for a stack adjustment of count bytes. A positive value indicates the function prologue allocated stack space by decrementing the stack pointer.
.personality name
¶Sets the personality routine for the current function to name.
.personalityindex index
¶Sets the personality routine for the current function to the EABI standard routine number index
.pool
¶This is a synonym for .ltorg.
name .req register name
¶This creates an alias for register name called name. For example:
foo .req r0
.save reglist
¶Generate unwinder annotations to restore the registers in reglist. The format of reglist is the same as the corresponding store-multiple instruction.
core registers
.save {r4, r5, r6, lr} stmfd sp!, {r4, r5, r6, lr}
FPA registers
.save f4, 2 sfmfd f4, 2, [sp]!
VFP registers
.save {d8, d9, d10} fstmdx sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
iWMMXt registers
.save {wr10, wr11} wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]! wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]! or .save wr11 wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]! .save wr10 wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]!
.setfp fpreg, spreg [, #offset]
¶Make all unwinder annotations relative to a frame pointer. Without this the unwinder will use offsets from the stack pointer.
The syntax of this directive is the same as the add
or mov
instruction used to set the frame pointer. spreg must be either
sp
or mentioned in a previous .movsp
directive.
.movsp ip mov ip, sp ... .setfp fp, ip, #4 add fp, ip, #4
.secrel32 expression [, expression]*
¶This directive emits relocations that evaluate to the section-relative offset of each expression’s symbol. This directive is only supported for PE targets.
.syntax [unified
| divided
]
¶This directive sets the Instruction Set Syntax as described in the Instruction Set Syntax section.
.thumb
¶This performs the same action as .code 16.
.thumb_func
¶This directive specifies that the following symbol is the name of a
Thumb encoded function. This information is necessary in order to allow
the assembler and linker to generate correct code for interworking
between Arm and Thumb instructions and should be used even if
interworking is not going to be performed. The presence of this
directive also implies .thumb
This directive is not necessary when generating EABI objects. On these targets the encoding is implicit when generating Thumb code.
.thumb_set
¶This performs the equivalent of a .set
directive in that it
creates a symbol which is an alias for another symbol (possibly not yet
defined). This directive also has the added property in that it marks
the aliased symbol as being a thumb function entry point, in the same
way that the .thumb_func
directive does.
.tlsdescseq tls-variable
¶This directive is used to annotate parts of an inlined TLS descriptor trampoline. Normally the trampoline is provided by the linker, and this directive is not needed.
.unreq alias-name
¶This undefines a register alias which was previously defined using the
req
, dn
or qn
directives. For example:
foo .req r0 .unreq foo
An error occurs if the name is undefined. Note - this pseudo op can be used to delete builtin in register name aliases (eg ’r0’). This should only be done if it is really necessary.
.unwind_raw offset, byte1, …
¶Insert one of more arbitrary unwind opcode bytes, which are known to adjust the stack pointer by offset bytes.
For example .unwind_raw 4, 0xb1, 0x01
is equivalent to
.save {r0}
.vsave vfp-reglist
¶Generate unwinder annotations to restore the VFP registers in vfp-reglist using FLDMD. Also works for VFPv3 registers that are to be restored using VLDM. The format of vfp-reglist is the same as the corresponding store-multiple instruction.
VFP registers
.vsave {d8, d9, d10} fstmdd sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
VFPv3 registers
.vsave {d15, d16, d17} vstm sp!, {d15, d16, d17}
Since FLDMX and FSTMX are now deprecated, this directive should be
used in favour of .save
for saving VFP registers for ARMv6 and above.
as
implements all the standard ARM opcodes. It also
implements several pseudo opcodes, including several synthetic load
instructions.
NOP
¶nop
This pseudo op will always evaluate to a legal ARM instruction that does nothing. Currently it will evaluate to MOV r0, r0.
LDR
¶ldr <register> , = <expression>
If expression evaluates to a numeric constant then a MOV or MVN instruction will be used in place of the LDR instruction, if the constant can be generated by either of these instructions. Otherwise the constant will be placed into the nearest literal pool (if it not already there) and a PC relative LDR instruction will be generated.
ADR
¶adr <register> <label>
This instruction will load the address of label into the indicated register. The instruction will evaluate to a PC relative ADD or SUB instruction depending upon where the label is located. If the label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same file (and section) as the ADR instruction, then an error will be generated. This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
If label is a thumb function symbol, and thumb interworking has been enabled via the -mthumb-interwork option then the bottom bit of the value stored into register will be set. This allows the following sequence to work as expected:
adr r0, thumb_function blx r0
ADRL
¶adrl <register> <label>
This instruction will load the address of label into the indicated register. The instruction will evaluate to one or two PC relative ADD or SUB instructions depending upon where the label is located. If a second instruction is not needed a NOP instruction will be generated in its place, so that this instruction is always 8 bytes long.
If the label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same file (and section) as the ADRL instruction, then an error will be generated. This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
If label is a thumb function symbol, and thumb interworking has been enabled via the -mthumb-interwork option then the bottom bit of the value stored into register will be set.
For information on the ARM or Thumb instruction sets, see ARM Software Development Toolkit Reference Manual, Advanced RISC Machines Ltd.
The ARM ELF specification requires that special symbols be inserted into object files to mark certain features:
$a
¶At the start of a region of code containing ARM instructions.
$t
¶At the start of a region of code containing THUMB instructions.
$d
¶At the start of a region of data.
The assembler will automatically insert these symbols for you - there is no need to code them yourself. Support for tagging symbols ($b, $f, $p and $m) which is also mentioned in the current ARM ELF specification is not implemented. This is because they have been dropped from the new EABI and so tools cannot rely upon their presence.
The ABI for the ARM Architecture specifies a standard format for exception unwind information. This information is used when an exception is thrown to determine where control should be transferred. In particular, the unwind information is used to determine which function called the function that threw the exception, and which function called that one, and so forth. This information is also used to restore the values of callee-saved registers in the function catching the exception.
If you are writing functions in assembly code, and those functions call other functions that throw exceptions, you must use assembly pseudo ops to ensure that appropriate exception unwind information is generated. Otherwise, if one of the functions called by your assembly code throws an exception, the run-time library will be unable to unwind the stack through your assembly code and your program will not behave correctly.
To illustrate the use of these pseudo ops, we will examine the code that G++ generates for the following C++ input:
void callee (int *); int caller () { int i; callee (&i); return i; }
This example does not show how to throw or catch an exception from assembly code. That is a much more complex operation and should always be done in a high-level language, such as C++, that directly supports exceptions.
The code generated by one particular version of G++ when compiling the example above is:
_Z6callerv: .fnstart .LFB2: @ Function supports interworking. @ args = 0, pretend = 0, frame = 8 @ frame_needed = 1, uses_anonymous_args = 0 stmfd sp!, {fp, lr} .save {fp, lr} .LCFI0: .setfp fp, sp, #4 add fp, sp, #4 .LCFI1: .pad #8 sub sp, sp, #8 .LCFI2: sub r3, fp, #8 mov r0, r3 bl _Z6calleePi ldr r3, [fp, #-8] mov r0, r3 sub sp, fp, #4 ldmfd sp!, {fp, lr} bx lr .LFE2: .fnend
Of course, the sequence of instructions varies based on the options you pass to GCC and on the version of GCC in use. The exact instructions are not important since we are focusing on the pseudo ops that are used to generate unwind information.
An important assumption made by the unwinder is that the stack frame
does not change during the body of the function. In particular, since
we assume that the assembly code does not itself throw an exception,
the only point where an exception can be thrown is from a call, such
as the bl
instruction above. At each call site, the same saved
registers (including lr
, which indicates the return address)
must be located in the same locations relative to the frame pointer.
The .fnstart
(see .fnstart pseudo op) pseudo
op appears immediately before the first instruction of the function
while the .fnend
(see .fnend pseudo op) pseudo
op appears immediately after the last instruction of the function.
These pseudo ops specify the range of the function.
Only the order of the other pseudos ops (e.g., .setfp
or
.pad
) matters; their exact locations are irrelevant. In the
example above, the compiler emits the pseudo ops with particular
instructions. That makes it easier to understand the code, but it is
not required for correctness. It would work just as well to emit all
of the pseudo ops other than .fnend
in the same order, but
immediately after .fnstart
.
The .save
(see .save pseudo op) pseudo op
indicates registers that have been saved to the stack so that they can
be restored before the function returns. The argument to the
.save
pseudo op is a list of registers to save. If a register
is “callee-saved” (as specified by the ABI) and is modified by the
function you are writing, then your code must save the value before it
is modified and restore the original value before the function
returns. If an exception is thrown, the run-time library restores the
values of these registers from their locations on the stack before
returning control to the exception handler. (Of course, if an
exception is not thrown, the function that contains the .save
pseudo op restores these registers in the function epilogue, as is
done with the ldmfd
instruction above.)
You do not have to save callee-saved registers at the very beginning
of the function and you do not need to use the .save
pseudo op
immediately following the point at which the registers are saved.
However, if you modify a callee-saved register, you must save it on
the stack before modifying it and before calling any functions which
might throw an exception. And, you must use the .save
pseudo
op to indicate that you have done so.
The .pad
(see .pad) pseudo op indicates a
modification of the stack pointer that does not save any registers.
The argument is the number of bytes (in decimal) that are subtracted
from the stack pointer. (On ARM CPUs, the stack grows downwards, so
subtracting from the stack pointer increases the size of the stack.)
The .setfp
(see .setfp pseudo op) pseudo op
indicates the register that contains the frame pointer. The first
argument is the register that is set, which is typically fp
.
The second argument indicates the register from which the frame
pointer takes its value. The third argument, if present, is the value
(in decimal) added to the register specified by the second argument to
compute the value of the frame pointer. You should not modify the
frame pointer in the body of the function.
If you do not use a frame pointer, then you should not use the
.setfp
pseudo op. If you do not use a frame pointer, then you
should avoid modifying the stack pointer outside of the function
prologue. Otherwise, the run-time library will be unable to find
saved registers when it is unwinding the stack.
The pseudo ops described above are sufficient for writing assembly code that calls functions which may throw exceptions. If you need to know more about the object-file format used to represent unwind information, you may consult the Exception Handling ABI for the ARM Architecture available from http://infocenter.arm.com.
-mmcu=mcu
¶Specify ATMEL AVR instruction set or MCU type.
Instruction set avr1 is for the minimal AVR core, not supported by the C compiler, only for assembler programs (MCU types: at90s1200, attiny11, attiny12, attiny15, attiny28).
Instruction set avr2 (default) is for the classic AVR core with up to 8K program memory space (MCU types: at90s2313, at90s2323, at90s2333, at90s2343, attiny22, attiny26, at90s4414, at90s4433, at90s4434, at90s8515, at90c8534, at90s8535).
Instruction set avr25 is for the classic AVR core with up to 8K program memory space plus the MOVW instruction (MCU types: attiny13, attiny13a, attiny2313, attiny2313a, attiny24, attiny24a, attiny4313, attiny44, attiny44a, attiny84, attiny84a, attiny25, attiny45, attiny85, attiny261, attiny261a, attiny461, attiny461a, attiny861, attiny861a, attiny87, attiny43u, attiny48, attiny88, attiny828, at86rf401, ata6289, ata5272).
Instruction set avr3 is for the classic AVR core with up to 128K program memory space (MCU types: at43usb355, at76c711).
Instruction set avr31 is for the classic AVR core with exactly 128K program memory space (MCU types: atmega103, at43usb320).
Instruction set avr35 is for classic AVR core plus MOVW, CALL, and JMP instructions (MCU types: attiny167, attiny1634, at90usb82, at90usb162, atmega8u2, atmega16u2, atmega32u2, ata5505).
Instruction set avr4 is for the enhanced AVR core with up to 8K program memory space (MCU types: atmega48, atmega48a, atmega48pa, atmega48p, atmega8, atmega8a, atmega88, atmega88a, atmega88p, atmega88pa, atmega8515, atmega8535, atmega8hva, at90pwm1, at90pwm2, at90pwm2b, at90pwm3, at90pwm3b, at90pwm81, ata6285, ata6286).
Instruction set avr5 is for the enhanced AVR core with up to 128K program memory space (MCU types: at90pwm161, atmega16, atmega16a, atmega161, atmega162, atmega163, atmega164a, atmega164p, atmega164pa, atmega165, atmega165a, atmega165p, atmega165pa, atmega168, atmega168a, atmega168p, atmega168pa, atmega169, atmega169a, atmega169p, atmega169pa, atmega32, atmega323, atmega324a, atmega324p, atmega324pa, atmega325, atmega325a, atmega32, atmega32a, atmega323, atmega324a, atmega324p, atmega324pa, atmega325, atmega325a, atmega325p, atmega325p, atmega325pa, atmega3250, atmega3250a, atmega3250p, atmega3250pa, atmega328, atmega328p, atmega329, atmega329a, atmega329p, atmega329pa, atmega3290a, atmega3290p, atmega3290pa, atmega406, atmega64, atmega64a, atmega64rfr2, atmega644rfr2, atmega640, atmega644, atmega644a, atmega644p, atmega644pa, atmega645, atmega645a, atmega645p, atmega6450, atmega6450a, atmega6450p, atmega649, atmega649a, atmega649p, atmega6490, atmega6490a, atmega6490p, atmega16hva, atmega16hva2, atmega16hvb, atmega16hvbrevb, atmega32hvb, atmega32hvbrevb, atmega64hve, at90can32, at90can64, at90pwm161, at90pwm216, at90pwm316, atmega32c1, atmega64c1, atmega16m1, atmega32m1, atmega64m1, atmega16u4, atmega32u4, atmega32u6, at90usb646, at90usb647, at94k, at90scr100, ata5790, ata5795).
Instruction set avr51 is for the enhanced AVR core with exactly 128K program memory space (MCU types: atmega128, atmega128a, atmega1280, atmega1281, atmega1284, atmega1284p, atmega128rfa1, atmega128rfr2, atmega1284rfr2, at90can128, at90usb1286, at90usb1287, m3000).
Instruction set avr6 is for the enhanced AVR core with a 3-byte PC (MCU types: atmega2560, atmega2561, atmega256rfr2, atmega2564rfr2).
Instruction set avrxmega2 is for the XMEGA AVR core with 8K to 64K program memory space and less than 64K data space (MCU types: atxmega16a4, atxmega16a4u, atxmega16c4, atxmega16d4, atxmega16x1, atxmega32a4, atxmega32a4u, atxmega32c4, atxmega32d4, atxmega16e5, atxmega8e5, atxmega32e5, atxmega32x1).
Instruction set avrxmega3 is for the XMEGA AVR core with up to 64K of combined program memory and RAM, and with program memory visible in the RAM address space (MCU types: attiny212, attiny214, attiny412, attiny414, attiny416, attiny417, attiny814, attiny816, attiny817, attiny1614, attiny1616, attiny1617, attiny3214, attiny3216, attiny3217).
Instruction set avrxmega4 is for the XMEGA AVR core with up to 64K program memory space and less than 64K data space (MCU types: atxmega64a3, atxmega64a3u, atxmega64a4u, atxmega64b1, atxmega64b3, atxmega64c3, atxmega64d3, atxmega64d4).
Instruction set avrxmega5 is for the XMEGA AVR core with up to 64K program memory space and greater than 64K data space (MCU types: atxmega64a1, atxmega64a1u).
Instruction set avrxmega6 is for the XMEGA AVR core with larger than 64K program memory space and less than 64K data space (MCU types: atxmega128a3, atxmega128a3u, atxmega128c3, atxmega128d3, atxmega128d4, atxmega192a3, atxmega192a3u, atxmega128b1, atxmega128b3, atxmega192c3, atxmega192d3, atxmega256a3, atxmega256a3u, atxmega256a3b, atxmega256a3bu, atxmega256c3, atxmega256d3, atxmega384c3, atxmega256d3).
Instruction set avrxmega7 is for the XMEGA AVR core with larger than 64K program memory space and greater than 64K data space (MCU types: atxmega128a1, atxmega128a1u, atxmega128a4u).
Instruction set avrtiny is for the ATtiny4/5/9/10/20/40 microcontrollers.
-mall-opcodes
¶Accept all AVR opcodes, even if not supported by -mmcu
.
-mno-skip-bug
¶This option disable warnings for skipping two-word instructions.
-mno-wrap
¶This option reject rjmp/rcall
instructions with 8K wrap-around.
-mrmw
¶Accept Read-Modify-Write (XCH,LAC,LAS,LAT
) instructions.
-mlink-relax
¶Enable support for link-time relaxation. This is now on by default and this flag no longer has any effect.
-mno-link-relax
¶Disable support for link-time relaxation. The assembler will resolve relocations when it can, and may be able to better compress some debug information.
-mgcc-isr
¶Enable the __gcc_isr
pseudo instruction.
-mno-dollar-line-separator
¶Do not treat the $
character as a line separator character.
This is for languages where $
is valid character inside symbol
names.
The presence of a ‘;’ anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘$’ character can be used instead of a newline to separate statements. Note: the -mno-dollar-line-separator option disables this behaviour.
The AVR has 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers ‘r0’, ‘r1’, ... ‘r31’. Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data Space addressing. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit ‘X’, ‘Y’ and ‘Z’ - registers.
X = r26:r27 Y = r28:r29 Z = r30:r31
The assembler supports several modifiers when using relocatable addresses in AVR instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
modifier(relocatable-expression)
lo8
This modifier allows you to use bits 0 through 7 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression.
hi8
This modifier allows you to use bits 7 through 15 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression. This is useful with, for example, the AVR ‘ldi’ instruction and ‘lo8’ modifier.
For example
ldi r26, lo8(sym+10) ldi r27, hi8(sym+10)
hh8
This modifier allows you to use bits 16 through 23 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression. Also, can be useful for loading 32 bit constants.
hlo8
Synonym of ‘hh8’.
hhi8
This modifier allows you to use bits 24 through 31 of an expression as an 8 bit expression. This is useful with, for example, the AVR ‘ldi’ instruction and ‘lo8’, ‘hi8’, ‘hlo8’, ‘hhi8’, modifier.
For example
ldi r26, lo8(285774925) ldi r27, hi8(285774925) ldi r28, hlo8(285774925) ldi r29, hhi8(285774925) ; r29,r28,r27,r26 = 285774925
pm_lo8
This modifier allows you to use bits 0 through 7 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression. This modifier is useful for addressing data or code from Flash/Program memory by two-byte words. The use of ‘pm_lo8’ is similar to ‘lo8’.
pm_hi8
This modifier allows you to use bits 8 through 15 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression. This modifier is useful for addressing data or code from Flash/Program memory by two-byte words.
For example, when setting the AVR ‘Z’ register with the ‘ldi’ instruction for subsequent use by the ‘ijmp’ instruction:
ldi r30, pm_lo8(sym) ldi r31, pm_hi8(sym) ijmp
pm_hh8
This modifier allows you to use bits 15 through 23 of an address expression as an 8 bit relocatable expression. This modifier is useful for addressing data or code from Flash/Program memory by two-byte words.
For detailed information on the AVR machine instruction set, see www.atmel.com/products/AVR.
as
implements all the standard AVR opcodes.
The following table summarizes the AVR opcodes, and their arguments.
Legend: r any register d ‘ldi’ register (r16-r31) v ‘movw’ even register (r0, r2, ..., r28, r30) a ‘fmul’ register (r16-r23) w ‘adiw’ register (r24,r26,r28,r30) e pointer registers (X,Y,Z) b base pointer register and displacement ([YZ]+disp) z Z pointer register (for [e]lpm Rd,Z[+]) M immediate value from 0 to 255 n immediate value from 0 to 255 ( n = ~M ). Relocation impossible s immediate value from 0 to 7 P Port address value from 0 to 63. (in, out) p Port address value from 0 to 31. (cbi, sbi, sbic, sbis) K immediate value from 0 to 63 (used in ‘adiw’, ‘sbiw’) i immediate value l signed pc relative offset from -64 to 63 L signed pc relative offset from -2048 to 2047 h absolute code address (call, jmp) S immediate value from 0 to 7 (S = s << 4) ? use this opcode entry if no parameters, else use next opcode entry 1001010010001000 clc 1001010011011000 clh 1001010011111000 cli 1001010010101000 cln 1001010011001000 cls 1001010011101000 clt 1001010010111000 clv 1001010010011000 clz 1001010000001000 sec 1001010001011000 seh 1001010001111000 sei 1001010000101000 sen 1001010001001000 ses 1001010001101000 set 1001010000111000 sev 1001010000011000 sez 100101001SSS1000 bclr S 100101000SSS1000 bset S 1001010100001001 icall 1001010000001001 ijmp 1001010111001000 lpm ? 1001000ddddd010+ lpm r,z 1001010111011000 elpm ? 1001000ddddd011+ elpm r,z 0000000000000000 nop 1001010100001000 ret 1001010100011000 reti 1001010110001000 sleep 1001010110011000 break 1001010110101000 wdr 1001010111101000 spm 000111rdddddrrrr adc r,r 000011rdddddrrrr add r,r 001000rdddddrrrr and r,r 000101rdddddrrrr cp r,r 000001rdddddrrrr cpc r,r 000100rdddddrrrr cpse r,r 001001rdddddrrrr eor r,r 001011rdddddrrrr mov r,r 100111rdddddrrrr mul r,r 001010rdddddrrrr or r,r 000010rdddddrrrr sbc r,r 000110rdddddrrrr sub r,r 001001rdddddrrrr clr r 000011rdddddrrrr lsl r 000111rdddddrrrr rol r 001000rdddddrrrr tst r 0111KKKKddddKKKK andi d,M 0111KKKKddddKKKK cbr d,n 1110KKKKddddKKKK ldi d,M 11101111dddd1111 ser d 0110KKKKddddKKKK ori d,M 0110KKKKddddKKKK sbr d,M 0011KKKKddddKKKK cpi d,M 0100KKKKddddKKKK sbci d,M 0101KKKKddddKKKK subi d,M 1111110rrrrr0sss sbrc r,s 1111111rrrrr0sss sbrs r,s 1111100ddddd0sss bld r,s 1111101ddddd0sss bst r,s 10110PPdddddPPPP in r,P 10111PPrrrrrPPPP out P,r 10010110KKddKKKK adiw w,K 10010111KKddKKKK sbiw w,K 10011000pppppsss cbi p,s 10011010pppppsss sbi p,s 10011001pppppsss sbic p,s 10011011pppppsss sbis p,s 111101lllllll000 brcc l 111100lllllll000 brcs l 111100lllllll001 breq l 111101lllllll100 brge l 111101lllllll101 brhc l 111100lllllll101 brhs l 111101lllllll111 brid l 111100lllllll111 brie l 111100lllllll000 brlo l 111100lllllll100 brlt l 111100lllllll010 brmi l 111101lllllll001 brne l 111101lllllll010 brpl l 111101lllllll000 brsh l 111101lllllll110 brtc l 111100lllllll110 brts l 111101lllllll011 brvc l 111100lllllll011 brvs l 111101lllllllsss brbc s,l 111100lllllllsss brbs s,l 1101LLLLLLLLLLLL rcall L 1100LLLLLLLLLLLL rjmp L 1001010hhhhh111h call h 1001010hhhhh110h jmp h 1001010rrrrr0101 asr r 1001010rrrrr0000 com r 1001010rrrrr1010 dec r 1001010rrrrr0011 inc r 1001010rrrrr0110 lsr r 1001010rrrrr0001 neg r 1001000rrrrr1111 pop r 1001001rrrrr1111 push r 1001010rrrrr0111 ror r 1001010rrrrr0010 swap r 00000001ddddrrrr movw v,v 00000010ddddrrrr muls d,d 000000110ddd0rrr mulsu a,a 000000110ddd1rrr fmul a,a 000000111ddd0rrr fmuls a,a 000000111ddd1rrr fmulsu a,a 1001001ddddd0000 sts i,r 1001000ddddd0000 lds r,i 10o0oo0dddddbooo ldd r,b 100!000dddddee-+ ld r,e 10o0oo1rrrrrbooo std b,r 100!001rrrrree-+ st e,r 1001010100011001 eicall 1001010000011001 eijmp
The only available pseudo-instruction __gcc_isr
can be activated by
option -mgcc-isr.
__gcc_isr 1
Emit code chunk to be used in avr-gcc ISR prologue.
It will expand to at most six 1-word instructions, all optional:
push of tmp_reg
, push of SREG
,
push and clear of zero_reg
, push of Reg.
__gcc_isr 2
Emit code chunk to be used in an avr-gcc ISR epilogue.
It will expand to at most five 1-word instructions, all optional:
pop of Reg, pop of zero_reg
,
pop of SREG
, pop of tmp_reg
.
__gcc_isr 0, Reg
Finish avr-gcc ISR function. Scan code since the last prologue
for usage of: SREG
, tmp_reg
, zero_reg
.
Prologue chunk and epilogue chunks will be replaced by appropriate code
to save / restore SREG
, tmp_reg
, zero_reg
and Reg.
Example input:
__vector1: __gcc_isr 1 lds r24, var inc r24 sts var, r24 __gcc_isr 2 reti __gcc_isr 0, r24
Example output:
00000000 <__vector1>: 0: 8f 93 push r24 2: 8f b7 in r24, 0x3f 4: 8f 93 push r24 6: 80 91 60 00 lds r24, 0x0060 ; 0x800060 <var> a: 83 95 inc r24 c: 80 93 60 00 sts 0x0060, r24 ; 0x800060 <var> 10: 8f 91 pop r24 12: 8f bf out 0x3f, r24 14: 8f 91 pop r24 16: 18 95 reti
-mcpu=processor[-sirevision]
¶This option specifies the target processor. The optional sirevision
is not used in assembler. It’s here such that GCC can easily pass down its
-mcpu=
option. The assembler will issue an
error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which
will not execute on the target processor. The following processor names are
recognized:
bf504
,
bf506
,
bf512
,
bf514
,
bf516
,
bf518
,
bf522
,
bf523
,
bf524
,
bf525
,
bf526
,
bf527
,
bf531
,
bf532
,
bf533
,
bf534
,
bf535
(not implemented yet),
bf536
,
bf537
,
bf538
,
bf539
,
bf542
,
bf542m
,
bf544
,
bf544m
,
bf547
,
bf547m
,
bf548
,
bf548m
,
bf549
,
bf549m
,
bf561
,
and
bf592
.
-mfdpic
¶Assemble for the FDPIC ABI.
-mno-fdpic
¶-mnopic
Disable -mfdpic.
Special Characters
Assembler input is free format and may appear anywhere on the line. One instruction may extend across multiple lines or more than one instruction may appear on the same line. White space (space, tab, comments or newline) may appear anywhere between tokens. A token must not have embedded spaces. Tokens include numbers, register names, keywords, user identifiers, and also some multicharacter special symbols like "+=", "/*" or "||".
Comments are introduced by the ‘#’ character and extend to the end of the current line. If the ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Instruction Delimiting
A semicolon must terminate every instruction. Sometimes a complete instruction will consist of more than one operation. There are two cases where this occurs. The first is when two general operations are combined. Normally a comma separates the different parts, as in
a0= r3.h * r2.l, a1 = r3.l * r2.h ;
The second case occurs when a general instruction is combined with one or two memory references for joint issue. The latter portions are set off by a "||" token.
a0 = r3.h * r2.l || r1 = [p3++] || r4 = [i2++];
Multiple instructions can occur on the same line. Each must be terminated by a semicolon character.
Register Names
The assembler treats register names and instruction keywords in a case insensitive manner. User identifiers are case sensitive. Thus, R3.l, R3.L, r3.l and r3.L are all equivalent input to the assembler.
Register names are reserved and may not be used as program identifiers.
Some operations (such as "Move Register") require a register pair. Register pairs are always data registers and are denoted using a colon, eg., R3:2. The larger number must be written firsts. Note that the hardware only supports odd-even pairs, eg., R7:6, R5:4, R3:2, and R1:0.
Some instructions (such as –SP (Push Multiple)) require a group of adjacent registers. Adjacent registers are denoted in the syntax by the range enclosed in parentheses and separated by a colon, eg., (R7:3). Again, the larger number appears first.
Portions of a particular register may be individually specified. This is written with a dot (".") following the register name and then a letter denoting the desired portion. For 32-bit registers, ".H" denotes the most significant ("High") portion. ".L" denotes the least-significant portion. The subdivisions of the 40-bit registers are described later.
Accumulators
The set of 40-bit registers A1 and A0 that normally contain data that is being manipulated. Each accumulator can be accessed in four ways.
one 40-bit register
The register will be referred to as A1 or A0.
one 32-bit register
The registers are designated as A1.W or A0.W.
two 16-bit registers
The registers are designated as A1.H, A1.L, A0.H or A0.L.
one 8-bit register
The registers are designated as A1.X or A0.X for the bits that extend beyond bit 31.
Data Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7) that normally contain data for manipulation. These are abbreviated as D-register or Dreg. Data registers can be accessed as 32-bit registers or as two independent 16-bit registers. The least significant 16 bits of each register is called the "low" half and is designated with ".L" following the register name. The most significant 16 bits are called the "high" half and is designated with ".H" following the name.
R7.L, r2.h, r4.L, R0.H
Pointer Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, SP and FP) that normally contain byte addresses of data structures. These are abbreviated as P-register or Preg.
p2, p5, fp, sp
Stack Pointer SP
The stack pointer contains the 32-bit address of the last occupied byte location in the stack. The stack grows by decrementing the stack pointer.
Frame Pointer FP
The frame pointer contains the 32-bit address of the previous frame pointer in the stack. It is located at the top of a frame.
Loop Top
LT0 and LT1. These registers contain the 32-bit address of the top of a zero overhead loop.
Loop Count
LC0 and LC1. These registers contain the 32-bit counter of the zero overhead loop executions.
Loop Bottom
LB0 and LB1. These registers contain the 32-bit address of the bottom of a zero overhead loop.
Index Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (I0, I1, I2, I3) that normally contain byte addresses of data structures. Abbreviated I-register or Ireg.
Modify Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (M0, M1, M2, M3) that normally contain offset values that are added and subtracted to one of the index registers. Abbreviated as Mreg.
Length Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (L0, L1, L2, L3) that normally contain the length in bytes of the circular buffer. Abbreviated as Lreg. Clear the Lreg to disable circular addressing for the corresponding Ireg.
Base Registers
The set of 32-bit registers (B0, B1, B2, B3) that normally contain the base address in bytes of the circular buffer. Abbreviated as Breg.
Floating Point
The Blackfin family has no hardware floating point but the .float directive generates ieee floating point numbers for use with software floating point libraries.
Blackfin Opcodes
For detailed information on the Blackfin machine instruction set, see the Blackfin Processor Instruction Set Reference.
The following directives are provided for compatibility with the VDSP assembler.
.byte2
Initializes a two byte data object.
This maps to the .short
directive.
.byte4
Initializes a four byte data object.
This maps to the .int
directive.
.db
Initializes a single byte data object.
This directive is a synonym for .byte
.
.dw
Initializes a two byte data object.
This directive is a synonym for .byte2
.
.dd
Initializes a four byte data object.
This directive is a synonym for .byte4
.
.var
Define and initialize a 32 bit data object.
-EB
¶This option specifies that the assembler should emit big-endian eBPF.
-EL
¶This option specifies that the assembler should emit little-endian eBPF.
-mdialect=dialect
¶This option specifies the assembly language dialect to recognize while assembling. The assembler supports normal and pseudoc.
-misa-spec=spec
¶This option specifies the version of the BPF instruction set to use when assembling. The BPF ISA versions supported are v1 v2, v3 and v4.
The value xbpf can be specified to recognize extra instructions that are used by GCC for testing purposes. But beware this is not valid BPF.
-mno-relax
¶This option tells the assembler to not relax instructions.
Note that if no endianness option is specified in the command line, the host endianness is used.
The presence of a ‘#’ or ‘//’ anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the line.
The presence of the ‘/*’ sequence indicates the beginning of a block (multi-line) comment, whose contents span until the next ‘*/’ sequence. It is not possible to nest block comments.
Statements and assembly directives are separated by newlines and ‘;’ characters.
The eBPF processor provides ten general-purpose 64-bit registers, which are read-write, and a read-only frame pointer register:
In normal syntax:
General-purpose registers.
Read-only frame pointer register.
All BPF registers are 64-bit long. However, in the Pseudo-C syntax registers can be referred using different names, which actually reflect the kind of instruction they appear on:
In pseudoc syntax:
General-purpose register in an instruction that operates on its value as if it was a 64-bit value.
General-purpose register in an instruction that operates on its value as if it was a 32-bit value.
Read-only frame pointer register.
Note that in the Pseudo-C syntax register names are not preceded by
%
characters. A consequence of that is that in contexts like
instruction operands, where both register names and expressions
involving symbols are expected, there is no way to disambiguate
between them. In order to keep things simple, this assembler does not
allow to refer to symbols whose names collide with register names in
instruction operands.
The BPF version of as
supports the following additional
machine directives:
.word
¶The .half
directive produces a 16 bit value.
.word
¶The .word
directive produces a 32 bit value.
.dword
¶The .dword
directive produces a 64 bit value.
In the instruction descriptions below the following field descriptors are used:
rd
Destination general-purpose register whose role is to be the destination of an operation.
rs
Source general-purpose register whose role is to be the source of an operation.
disp16
16-bit signed PC-relative offset, measured in number of 64-bit words, minus one.
disp32
32-bit signed PC-relative offset, measured in number of 64-bit words, minus one.
offset16
Signed 16-bit immediate representing an offset in bytes.
disp16
Signed 16-bit immediate representing a displacement to a target, measured in number of 64-bit words minus one.
disp32
Signed 32-bit immediate representing a displacement to a target, measured in number of 64-bit words minus one.
imm32
Signed 32-bit immediate.
imm64
Signed 64-bit immediate.
Note that the assembler allows to express the value for an immediate
using any numerical literal whose two’s complement encoding fits in
the immediate field. For example, -2
, 0xfffffffe
and
4294967294
all denote the same encoded 32-bit immediate, whose
value may be then interpreted by different instructions as either as a
negative or a positive number.
The destination register in these instructions act like an accumulator.
Note that in pseudoc syntax these instructions should use r
registers.
add rd, rs
add rd, imm32
rd += rs
rd += imm32
64-bit arithmetic addition.
sub rd, rs
sub rd, rs
rd -= rs
rd -= imm32
64-bit arithmetic subtraction.
mul rd, rs
mul rd, imm32
rd *= rs
rd *= imm32
64-bit arithmetic multiplication.
div rd, rs
div rd, imm32
rd /= rs
rd /= imm32
64-bit arithmetic integer division.
mod rd, rs
mod rd, imm32
rd %= rs
rd %= imm32
64-bit integer remainder.
and rd, rs
and rd, imm32
rd &= rs
rd &= imm32
64-bit bit-wise “and” operation.
or rd, rs
or rd, imm32
rd |= rs
rd |= imm32
64-bit bit-wise “or” operation.
xor rd, imm32
xor rd, rs
rd ^= rs
rd ^= imm32
64-bit bit-wise exclusive-or operation.
lsh rd, rs
ldh rd, imm32
rd <<= rs
rd <<= imm32
64-bit left shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
rsh %d, %s
rsh rd, imm32
rd >>= rs
rd >>= imm32
64-bit right logical shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
arsh rd, rs
arsh rd, imm32
rd s>>= rs
rd s>>= imm32
64-bit right arithmetic shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
neg rd
rd = - rd
64-bit arithmetic negation.
mov rd, rs
mov rd, imm32
rd = rs
rd = imm32
Move the 64-bit value of rs
in rd
, or load imm32
in rd
.
movs rd, rs, 8
rd = (s8) rs
Move the sign-extended 8-bit value in rs
to rd
.
movs rd, rs, 16
rd = (s16) rs
Move the sign-extended 16-bit value in rs
to rd
.
movs rd, rs, 32
rd = (s32) rs
Move the sign-extended 32-bit value in rs
to rd
.
The destination register in these instructions act as an accumulator.
Note that in pseudoc syntax these instructions should use w
registers. It is not allowed to mix w
and r
registers
in the same instruction.
add32 rd, rs
add32 rd, imm32
rd += rs
rd += imm32
32-bit arithmetic addition.
sub32 rd, rs
sub32 rd, imm32
rd -= rs
rd += imm32
32-bit arithmetic subtraction.
mul32 rd, rs
mul32 rd, imm32
rd *= rs
rd *= imm32
32-bit arithmetic multiplication.
div32 rd, rs
div32 rd, imm32
rd /= rs
rd /= imm32
32-bit arithmetic integer division.
mod32 rd, rs
mod32 rd, imm32
rd %= rs
rd %= imm32
32-bit integer remainder.
and32 rd, rs
and32 rd, imm32
rd &= rs
rd &= imm32
32-bit bit-wise “and” operation.
or32 rd, rs
or32 rd, imm32
rd |= rs
rd |= imm32
32-bit bit-wise “or” operation.
xor32 rd, rs
xor32 rd, imm32
rd ^= rs
rd ^= imm32
32-bit bit-wise exclusive-or operation.
lsh32 rd, rs
lsh32 rd, imm32
rd <<= rs
rd <<= imm32
32-bit left shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
rsh32 rd, rs
rsh32 rd, imm32
rd >>= rs
rd >>= imm32
32-bit right logical shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
arsh32 rd, rs
arsh32 rd, imm32
rd s>>= rs
rd s>>= imm32
32-bit right arithmetic shift, by rs
or imm32
bits.
neg32 rd
rd = - rd
32-bit arithmetic negation.
mov32 rd, rs
mov32 rd, imm32
rd = rs
rd = imm32
Move the 32-bit value of rs
in rd
, or load imm32
in rd
.
mov32s rd, rs, 8
rd = (s8) rs
Move the sign-extended 8-bit value in rs
to rd
.
mov32s rd, rs, 16
rd = (s16) rs
Move the sign-extended 16-bit value in rs
to rd
.
mov32s rd, rs, 32
rd = (s32) rs
Move the sign-extended 32-bit value in rs
to rd
.
endle rd, 16
endle rd, 32
endle rd, 64
rd = le16 rd
rd = le32 rd
rd = le64 rd
Convert the 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit value in rd
to
little-endian and store it back in rd
.
endbe %d, 16
endbe %d, 32
endbe %d, 64
rd = be16 rd
rd = be32 rd
rd = be64 rd
Convert the 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit value in rd
to big-endian
and store it back in rd
.
bswap rd, 16
rd = bswap16 rd
Swap the least-significant 16-bit word in rd
with the
most-significant 16-bit word.
bswap rd, 32
rd = bswap32 rd
Swap the least-significant 32-bit word in rd
with the
most-significant 32-bit word.
bswap rd, 64
rd = bswap64 rd
Swap the least-significant 64-bit word in rd
with the
most-significant 64-bit word.
lddw rd, imm64
rd = imm64 ll
Load the given signed 64-bit immediate to the destination register
rd
.
The following instructions are intended to be used in socket filters, and are therefore not general-purpose: they make assumptions on the contents of several registers. See the file Documentation/networking/filter.txt in the Linux kernel source tree for more information.
Absolute loads:
ldabsdw imm32
r0 = *(u64 *) skb[imm32]
Absolute 64-bit load.
ldabsw imm32
r0 = *(u32 *) skb[imm32]
Absolute 32-bit load.
ldabsh imm32
r0 = *(u16 *) skb[imm32]
Absolute 16-bit load.
ldabsb imm32
r0 = *(u8 *) skb[imm32]
Absolute 8-bit load.
Indirect loads:
ldinddw rs, imm32
r0 = *(u64 *) skb[rs + imm32]
Indirect 64-bit load.
ldindw rs, imm32
r0 = *(u32 *) skb[rs + imm32]
Indirect 32-bit load.
ldindh rs, imm32
r0 = *(u16 *) skb[rs + imm32]
Indirect 16-bit load.
ldindb %s, imm32
r0 = *(u8 *) skb[rs + imm32]
Indirect 8-bit load.
General-purpose load and store instructions are provided for several word sizes.
Load to register instructions:
ldxdw rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(u64 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 64-bit load.
ldxw rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(u32 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 32-bit load.
ldxh rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(u16 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 16-bit load.
ldxb rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(u8 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 8-bit load.
Signed load to register instructions:
ldxsdw rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(s64 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 64-bit signed load.
ldxsw rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(s32 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 32-bit signed load.
ldxsh rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(s16 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 16-bit signed load.
ldxsb rd, [rs + offset16]
rd = *(s8 *) (rs + offset16)
Generic 8-bit signed load.
Store from register instructions:
stxdw [rd + offset16], %s
*(u64 *) (rd + offset16)
Generic 64-bit store.
stxw [rd + offset16], %s
*(u32 *) (rd + offset16)
Generic 32-bit store.
stxh [rd + offset16], %s
*(u16 *) (rd + offset16)
Generic 16-bit store.
stxb [rd + offset16], %s
*(u8 *) (rd + offset16)
Generic 8-bit store.
Store from immediates instructions:
stdw [rd + offset16], imm32
*(u64 *) (rd + offset16) = imm32
Store immediate as 64-bit.
stw [rd + offset16], imm32
*(u32 *) (rd + offset16) = imm32
Store immediate as 32-bit.
sth [rd + offset16], imm32
*(u16 *) (rd + offset16) = imm32
Store immediate as 16-bit.
stb [rd + offset16], imm32
*(u8 *) (rd + offset16) = imm32
Store immediate as 8-bit.
eBPF provides the following compare-and-jump instructions, which compare the values of the two given registers, or the values of a register and an immediate, and perform a branch in case the comparison holds true.
ja disp16
goto disp16
Jump-always.
jal disp32
gotol disp32
Jump-always, long range.
jeq rd, rs, disp16
jeq rd, imm32, disp16
if rd == rs goto disp16
if rd == imm32 goto disp16
Jump if equal, unsigned.
jgt rd, rs, disp16
jgt rd, imm32, disp16
if rd > rs goto disp16
if rd > imm32 goto disp16
Jump if greater, unsigned.
jge rd, rs, disp16
jge rd, imm32, disp16
if rd >= rs goto disp16
if rd >= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if greater or equal.
jlt rd, rs, disp16
jlt rd, imm32, disp16
if rd < rs goto disp16
if rd < imm32 goto disp16
Jump if lesser.
jle rd , rs, disp16
jle rd, imm32, disp16
if rd <= rs goto disp16
if rd <= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if lesser or equal.
jset rd, rs, disp16
jset rd, imm32, disp16
if rd & rs goto disp16
if rd & imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed equal.
jne rd, rs, disp16
jne rd, imm32, disp16
if rd != rs goto disp16
if rd != imm32 goto disp16
Jump if not equal.
jsgt rd, rs, disp16
jsgt rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s> rs goto disp16
if rd s> imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed greater.
jsge rd, rs, disp16
jsge rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s>= rd goto disp16
if rd s>= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed greater or equal.
jslt rd, rs, disp16
jslt rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s< rs goto disp16
if rd s< imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed lesser.
jsle rd, rs, disp16
jsle rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s<= rs goto disp16
if rd s<= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed lesser or equal.
A call instruction is provided in order to perform calls to other eBPF functions, or to external kernel helpers:
call disp32
call imm32
Jump and link to the offset disp32, or to the kernel helper function identified by imm32.
Finally:
exit
Terminate the eBPF program.
eBPF provides the following compare-and-jump instructions, which compare the 32-bit values of the two given registers, or the values of a register and an immediate, and perform a branch in case the comparison holds true.
These instructions are only available in BPF v3 or later.
jeq32 rd, rs, disp16
jeq32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd == rs goto disp16
if rd == imm32 goto disp16
Jump if equal, unsigned.
jgt32 rd, rs, disp16
jgt32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd > rs goto disp16
if rd > imm32 goto disp16
Jump if greater, unsigned.
jge32 rd, rs, disp16
jge32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd >= rs goto disp16
if rd >= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if greater or equal.
jlt32 rd, rs, disp16
jlt32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd < rs goto disp16
if rd < imm32 goto disp16
Jump if lesser.
jle32 rd , rs, disp16
jle32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd <= rs goto disp16
if rd <= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if lesser or equal.
jset32 rd, rs, disp16
jset32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd & rs goto disp16
if rd & imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed equal.
jne32 rd, rs, disp16
jne32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd != rs goto disp16
if rd != imm32 goto disp16
Jump if not equal.
jsgt32 rd, rs, disp16
jsgt32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s> rs goto disp16
if rd s> imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed greater.
jsge32 rd, rs, disp16
jsge32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s>= rd goto disp16
if rd s>= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed greater or equal.
jslt32 rd, rs, disp16
jslt32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s< rs goto disp16
if rd s< imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed lesser.
jsle32 rd, rs, disp16
jsle32 rd, imm32, disp16
if rd s<= rs goto disp16
if rd s<= imm32 goto disp16
Jump if signed lesser or equal.
Atomic exchange instructions are provided in two flavors: one for compare-and-swap, one for unconditional exchange.
acmp [rd + offset16], rs
r0 = cmpxchg_64 (rd + offset16, r0, rs)
Atomic compare-and-swap. Compares value in r0
to value
addressed by rd + offset16
. On match, the value addressed by
rd + offset16
is replaced with the value in rs
.
Regardless, the value that was at rd + offset16
is
zero-extended and loaded into r0
.
axchg [rd + offset16], rs
rs = xchg_64 (rd + offset16, rs)
Atomic exchange. Atomically exchanges the value in rs
with
the value addressed by rd + offset16
.
The following instructions provide atomic arithmetic operations.
aadd [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u64 *)(rd + offset16) = rs
Atomic add instruction.
aor [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u64 *) (rd + offset16) |= rs
Atomic or instruction.
aand [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u64 *) (rd + offset16) &= rs
Atomic and instruction.
axor [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u64 *) (rd + offset16) ^= rs
Atomic xor instruction.
The following variants perform fetching before the atomic operation.
afadd [rd + offset16], rs
rs = atomic_fetch_add ((u64 *)(rd + offset16), rs)
Atomic fetch-and-add instruction.
afor [rd + offset16], rs
rs = atomic_fetch_or ((u64 *)(rd + offset16), rs)
Atomic fetch-and-or instruction.
afand [rd + offset16], rs
rs = atomic_fetch_and ((u64 *)(rd + offset16), rs)
Atomic fetch-and-and instruction.
afxor [rd + offset16], rs
rs = atomic_fetch_xor ((u64 *)(rd + offset16), rs)
Atomic fetch-and-or instruction.
The above instructions were introduced in the V3 of the BPF instruction set. The following instruction is supported for backwards compatibility:
xadddw [rd + offset16], rs
Alias to aadd
.
32-bit atomic exchange instructions are provided in two flavors: one for compare-and-swap, one for unconditional exchange.
acmp32 [rd + offset16], rs
w0 = cmpxchg32_32 (rd + offset16, w0, ws)
Atomic compare-and-swap. Compares value in w0
to value
addressed by rd + offset16
. On match, the value addressed by
rd + offset16
is replaced with the value in ws
.
Regardless, the value that was at rd + offset16
is
zero-extended and loaded into w0
.
axchg [rd + offset16], rs
ws = xchg32_32 (rd + offset16, ws)
Atomic exchange. Atomically exchanges the value in ws
with
the value addressed by rd + offset16
.
The following instructions provide 32-bit atomic arithmetic operations.
aadd32 [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u32 *)(rd + offset16) = rs
Atomic add instruction.
aor32 [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u32 *) (rd + offset16) |= rs
Atomic or instruction.
aand32 [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u32 *) (rd + offset16) &= rs
Atomic and instruction.
axor32 [rd + offset16], rs
lock *(u32 *) (rd + offset16) ^= rs
Atomic xor instruction
The following variants perform fetching before the atomic operation.
afadd32 [dr + offset16], rs
ws = atomic_fetch_add ((u32 *)(rd + offset16), ws)
Atomic fetch-and-add instruction.
afor32 [dr + offset16], rs
ws = atomic_fetch_or ((u32 *)(rd + offset16), ws)
Atomic fetch-and-or instruction.
afand32 [dr + offset16], rs
ws = atomic_fetch_and ((u32 *)(rd + offset16), ws)
Atomic fetch-and-and instruction.
afxor32 [dr + offset16], rs
ws = atomic_fetch_xor ((u32 *)(rd + offset16), ws)
Atomic fetch-and-or instruction
The above instructions were introduced in the V3 of the BPF instruction set. The following instruction is supported for backwards compatibility:
xaddw [rd + offset16], rs
Alias to aadd32
.
The National Semiconductor CR16 target of as
has a few machine dependent operand qualifiers.
Operand expression type qualifier is an optional field in the instruction operand, to determines the type of the expression field of an operand. The @
is required. CR16 architecture uses one of the following expression qualifiers:
s
- Specifies expression operand type as small
m
- Specifies expression operand type as medium
l
- Specifies expression operand type as large
c
- Specifies the CR16 Assembler generates a relocation entry for the operand, where pc has implied bit, the expression is adjusted accordingly. The linker uses the relocation entry to update the operand address at link time.
got/GOT
- Specifies the CR16 Assembler generates a relocation entry for the operand, offset from Global Offset Table. The linker uses this relocation entry to update the operand address at link time
cgot/cGOT
- Specifies the CompactRISC Assembler generates a relocation entry for the operand, where pc has implied bit, the expression is adjusted accordingly. The linker uses the relocation entry to update the operand address at link time.
CR16 target operand qualifiers and its size (in bits):
4 bits.
16 bits, for movb and movw instructions.
20 bits, movd instructions.
32 bits.
Illegal specifier for this operand.
20 bits, movd instructions.
8 bits.
16 bits.
24 bits.
For example:
1movw $_myfun@c,r1
This loads the address of _myfun, shifted right by 1, into r1. 2movd $_myfun@c,(r2,r1)
This loads the address of _myfun, shifted right by 1, into register-pair r2-r1. 3_myfun_ptr:
.long _myfun@c
loadd _myfun_ptr, (r1,r0)
jal (r1,r0)
This .long directive, the address of _myfunc, shifted right by 1 at link time. 4loadd _data1@GOT(r12), (r1,r0)
This loads the address of _data1, into global offset table (ie GOT) and its offset value from GOT loads into register-pair r2-r1. 5loadd _myfunc@cGOT(r12), (r1,r0)
This loads the address of _myfun, shifted right by 1, into global offset table (ie GOT) and its offset value from GOT loads into register-pair r1-r0.
The presence of a ‘#’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line. If the ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The CRIS version of as
has these
machine-dependent command-line options.
The format of the generated object files can be either ELF or
a.out, specified by the command-line options
--emulation=crisaout and --emulation=criself.
The default is ELF (criself), unless as
has been
configured specifically for a.out by using the configuration
name cris-axis-aout
.
There are two different link-incompatible ELF object file variants for CRIS, for use in environments where symbols are expected to be prefixed by a leading ‘_’ character and for environments without such a symbol prefix. The variant used for GNU/Linux port has no symbol prefix. Which variant to produce is specified by either of the options --underscore and --no-underscore. The default is --underscore. Since symbols in CRIS a.out objects are expected to have a ‘_’ prefix, specifying --no-underscore when generating a.out objects is an error. Besides the object format difference, the effect of this option is to parse register names differently (see crisnous). The --no-underscore option makes a ‘$’ register prefix mandatory.
The option --pic must be passed to as
in
order to recognize the symbol syntax used for ELF (SVR4 PIC)
position-independent-code (see crispic). This will also
affect expansion of instructions. The expansion with
--pic will use PC-relative rather than (slightly
faster) absolute addresses in those expansions. This option is only
valid when generating ELF format object files.
The option --march=architecture specifies the recognized instruction set and recognized register names. It also controls the architecture type of the object file. Valid values for architecture are:
v0_v10
All instructions and register names for any architecture variant in the set v0…v10 are recognized. This is the default if the target is configured as cris-*.
v10
Only instructions and register names for CRIS v10 (as found in ETRAX 100 LX) are recognized. This is the default if the target is configured as crisv10-*.
v32
Only instructions and register names for CRIS v32 (code name Guinness) are recognized. This is the default if the target is configured as crisv32-*. This value implies --no-mul-bug-abort. (A subsequent --mul-bug-abort will turn it back on.)
common_v10_v32
Only instructions with register names and addressing modes with opcodes common to the v10 and v32 are recognized.
When -N is specified, as
will emit a
warning when a 16-bit branch instruction is expanded into a
32-bit multiple-instruction construct (see Instruction expansion).
Some versions of the CRIS v10, for example in the Etrax 100 LX,
contain a bug that causes destabilizing memory accesses when a
multiply instruction is executed with certain values in the
first operand just before a cache-miss. When the
--mul-bug-abort command-line option is active (the
default value), as
will refuse to assemble a file
containing a multiply instruction at a dangerous offset, one
that could be the last on a cache-line, or is in a section with
insufficient alignment. This placement checking does not catch
any case where the multiply instruction is dangerously placed
because it is located in a delay-slot. The
--mul-bug-abort command-line option turns off the
checking.
as
will silently choose an instruction that fits
the operand size for ‘[register+constant]’ operands. For
example, the offset 127
in move.d [r3+127],r4
fits
in an instruction using a signed-byte offset. Similarly,
move.d [r2+32767],r1
will generate an instruction using a
16-bit offset. For symbolic expressions and constants that do
not fit in 16 bits including the sign bit, a 32-bit offset is
generated.
For branches, as
will expand from a 16-bit branch
instruction into a sequence of instructions that can reach a
full 32-bit address. Since this does not correspond to a single
instruction, such expansions can optionally be warned about.
See Command-line Options.
If the operand is found to fit the range, a lapc
mnemonic
will translate to a lapcq
instruction. Use lapc.d
to force the 32-bit lapc
instruction.
Similarly, the addo
mnemonic will translate to the
shortest fitting instruction of addoq
, addo.w
and
addo.d
, when used with a operand that is a constant known
at assembly time.
Some symbols are defined by the assembler. They’re intended to be used in conditional assembly, for example:
.if ..asm.arch.cris.v32 code for CRIS v32 .elseif ..asm.arch.cris.common_v10_v32 code common to CRIS v32 and CRIS v10 .elseif ..asm.arch.cris.v10 | ..asm.arch.cris.any_v0_v10 code for v10 .else .error "Code needs to be added here." .endif
These symbols are defined in the assembler, reflecting command-line options, either when specified or the default. They are always defined, to 0 or 1.
..asm.arch.cris.any_v0_v10
This symbol is non-zero when --march=v0_v10 is specified or the default.
..asm.arch.cris.common_v10_v32
Set according to the option --march=common_v10_v32.
..asm.arch.cris.v10
Reflects the option --march=v10.
..asm.arch.cris.v32
Corresponds to --march=v10.
Speaking of symbols, when a symbol is used in code, it can have a suffix modifying its value for use in position-independent code. See Symbols in position-independent code.
There are different aspects of the CRIS assembly syntax.
The character ‘#’ is a line comment character. It starts a comment if and only if it is placed at the beginning of a line.
A ‘;’ character starts a comment anywhere on the line, causing all characters up to the end of the line to be ignored.
A ‘@’ character is handled as a line separator equivalent to a logical new-line character (except in a comment), so separate instructions can be specified on a single line.
When generating position-independent code (SVR4
PIC) for use in cris-axis-linux-gnu or crisv32-axis-linux-gnu
shared libraries, symbol
suffixes are used to specify what kind of run-time symbol lookup
will be used, expressed in the object as different
relocation types. Usually, all absolute symbol values
must be located in a table, the global offset table,
leaving the code position-independent; independent of values of
global symbols and independent of the address of the code. The
suffix modifies the value of the symbol, into for example an
index into the global offset table where the real symbol value
is entered, or a PC-relative value, or a value relative to the
start of the global offset table. All symbol suffixes start
with the character ‘:’ (omitted in the list below). Every
symbol use in code or a read-only section must therefore have a
PIC suffix to enable a useful shared library to be created.
Usually, these constructs must not be used with an additive
constant offset as is usually allowed, i.e. no 4 as in
symbol + 4
is allowed. This restriction is checked at
link-time, not at assembly-time.
GOT
Attaching this suffix to a symbol in an instruction causes the
symbol to be entered into the global offset table. The value is
a 32-bit index for that symbol into the global offset table.
The name of the corresponding relocation is
‘R_CRIS_32_GOT’. Example: move.d
[$r0+extsym:GOT],$r9
GOT16
Same as for ‘GOT’, but the value is a 16-bit index into the
global offset table. The corresponding relocation is
‘R_CRIS_16_GOT’. Example: move.d
[$r0+asymbol:GOT16],$r10
PLT
This suffix is used for function symbols. It causes a
procedure linkage table, an array of code stubs, to be
created at the time the shared object is created or linked
against, together with a global offset table entry. The value
is a pc-relative offset to the corresponding stub code in the
procedure linkage table. This arrangement causes the run-time
symbol resolver to be called to look up and set the value of the
symbol the first time the function is called (at latest;
depending environment variables). It is only safe to leave the
symbol unresolved this way if all references are function calls.
The name of the relocation is ‘R_CRIS_32_PLT_PCREL’.
Example: add.d fnname:PLT,$pc
PLTG
Like PLT, but the value is relative to the beginning of the
global offset table. The relocation is
‘R_CRIS_32_PLT_GOTREL’. Example: move.d
fnname:PLTG,$r3
GOTPLT
Similar to ‘PLT’, but the value of the symbol is a 32-bit
index into the global offset table. This is somewhat of a mix
between the effect of the ‘GOT’ and the ‘PLT’ suffix;
the difference to ‘GOT’ is that there will be a procedure
linkage table entry created, and that the symbol is assumed to
be a function entry and will be resolved by the run-time
resolver as with ‘PLT’. The relocation is
‘R_CRIS_32_GOTPLT’. Example: jsr
[$r0+fnname:GOTPLT]
GOTPLT16
A variant of ‘GOTPLT’ giving a 16-bit value. Its
relocation name is ‘R_CRIS_16_GOTPLT’. Example: jsr
[$r0+fnname:GOTPLT16]
GOTOFF
This suffix must only be attached to a local symbol, but may be
used in an expression adding an offset. The value is the
address of the symbol relative to the start of the global offset
table. The relocation name is ‘R_CRIS_32_GOTREL’.
Example: move.d [$r0+localsym:GOTOFF],r3
A ‘$’ character may always prefix a general or special
register name in an instruction operand but is mandatory when
the option --no-underscore is specified or when the
.syntax register_prefix
directive is in effect
(see crisnous). Register names are case-insensitive.
There are a few CRIS-specific pseudo-directives in addition to the generic ones. See Assembler Directives. Constants emitted by pseudo-directives are in little-endian order for CRIS. There is no support for floating-point-specific directives for CRIS.
.dword EXPRESSIONS
¶The .dword
directive is a synonym for .int
,
expecting zero or more EXPRESSIONS, separated by commas. For
each expression, a 32-bit little-endian constant is emitted.
.syntax ARGUMENT
¶The .syntax
directive takes as ARGUMENT one of the
following case-sensitive choices.
no_register_prefix
The .syntax no_register_prefix
directive
makes a ‘$’ character prefix on all registers optional. It
overrides a previous setting, including the corresponding effect
of the option --no-underscore. If this directive is
used when ordinary symbols do not have a ‘_’ character
prefix, care must be taken to avoid ambiguities whether an
operand is a register or a symbol; using symbols with names the
same as general or special registers then invoke undefined
behavior.
register_prefix
This directive makes a ‘$’ character prefix on all registers mandatory. It overrides a previous setting, including the corresponding effect of the option --underscore.
leading_underscore
This is an assertion directive, emitting an error if the --no-underscore option is in effect.
no_leading_underscore
This is the opposite of the .syntax leading_underscore
directive and emits an error if the option --underscore
is in effect.
.arch ARGUMENT
¶This is an assertion directive, giving an error if the specified ARGUMENT is not the same as the specified or default value for the --march=architecture option (see march-option).
-march=archname
¶Assemble for architecture archname. The --help option lists valid values for archname.
-mcpu=cpuname
¶Assemble for architecture cpuname. The --help option lists valid values for cpuname.
-EL
¶-mlittle-endian
Generate little-endian output.
-EB
¶-mbig-endian
Generate big-endian output.
-fpic
¶-pic
Generate position-independent code.
-mljump
¶-mno-ljump
Enable/disable transformation of the short branch instructions
jbf
, jbt
, and jbr
to jmpi
.
This option is for V2 processors only.
It is ignored on CK801 and CK802 targets, which do not support the jmpi
instruction, and is enabled by default for other processors.
-mbranch-stub
¶-mno-branch-stub
Pass through R_CKCORE_PCREL_IMM26BY2
relocations for bsr
instructions to the linker.
This option is only available for bare-metal C-SKY V2 ELF targets, where it is enabled by default. It cannot be used in code that will be dynamically linked against shared libraries.
-force2bsr
¶-mforce2bsr
-no-force2bsr
-mno-force2bsr
Enable/disable transformation of jbsr
instructions to bsr
.
This option is always enabled (and -mno-force2bsr is ignored)
for CK801/CK802 targets. It is also always enabled when
-mbranch-stub is in effect.
-jsri2bsr
¶-mjsri2bsr
-no-jsri2bsr
-mno-jsri2bsr
Enable/disable transformation of jsri
instructions to bsr
.
This option is enabled by default.
-mnolrw
¶-mno-lrw
Enable/disable transformation of lrw
instructions into a
movih
/ori
pair.
-melrw
¶-mno-elrw
Enable/disable extended lrw
instructions.
This option is enabled by default for CK800-series processors.
-mlaf
¶-mliterals-after-func
-mno-laf
-mno-literals-after-func
Enable/disable placement of literal pools after each function.
-mlabr
¶-mliterals-after-br
-mno-labr
-mnoliterals-after-br
Enable/disable placement of literal pools after unconditional branches. This option is enabled by default.
-mistack
¶-mno-istack
Enable/disable interrupt stack instructions. This option is enabled by default on CK801, CK802, and CK802 processors.
The following options explicitly enable certain optional instructions.
These features are also enabled implicitly by using -mcpu=
to specify
a processor that supports it.
-mhard-float
¶Enable hard float instructions.
-mmp
¶Enable multiprocessor instructions.
-mcp
¶Enable coprocessor instructions.
-mcache
¶Enable cache prefetch instruction.
-msecurity
¶Enable C-SKY security instructions.
-mtrust
¶Enable C-SKY trust instructions.
-mdsp
¶Enable DSP instructions.
-medsp
¶Enable enhanced DSP instructions.
-mvdsp
¶Enable vector DSP instructions.
as
implements the standard C-SKY assembler syntax
documented in the
C-SKY V2 CPU Applications Binary Interface Standards Manual.
The Mitsubishi D10V version of as
has a few machine
dependent options.
The D10V can often execute two sub-instructions in parallel. When this option
is used, as
will attempt to optimize its output by detecting when
instructions can be executed in parallel.
To optimize execution performance, as
will sometimes swap the
order of instructions. Normally this generates a warning. When this option
is used, no warning will be generated when instructions are swapped.
as
packs adjacent short instructions into a single packed
instruction. ‘--no-gstabs-packing’ turns instruction packing off if
‘--gstabs’ is specified as well; ‘--gstabs-packing’ (the
default) turns instruction packing on even when ‘--gstabs’ is
specified.
The D10V syntax is based on the syntax in Mitsubishi’s D10V architecture manual. The differences are detailed below.
The D10V version of as
uses the instruction names in the D10V
Architecture Manual. However, the names in the manual are sometimes ambiguous.
There are instruction names that can assemble to a short or long form opcode.
How does the assembler pick the correct form? as
will always pick the
smallest form if it can. When dealing with a symbol that is not defined yet when a
line is being assembled, it will always use the long form. If you need to force the
assembler to use either the short or long form of the instruction, you can append
either ‘.s’ (short) or ‘.l’ (long) to it. For example, if you are writing
an assembly program and you want to do a branch to a symbol that is defined later
in your program, you can write ‘bra.s foo’.
Objdump and GDB will always append ‘.s’ or ‘.l’ to instructions which
have both short and long forms.
The D10V assembler takes as input a series of instructions, either one-per-line, or in the special two-per-line format described in the next section. Some of these instructions will be short-form or sub-instructions. These sub-instructions can be packed into a single instruction. The assembler will do this automatically. It will also detect when it should not pack instructions. For example, when a label is defined, the next instruction will never be packaged with the previous one. Whenever a branch and link instruction is called, it will not be packaged with the next instruction so the return address will be valid. Nops are automatically inserted when necessary.
If you do not want the assembler automatically making these decisions, you can control the packaging and execution type (parallel or sequential) with the special execution symbols described in the next section.
A semicolon (‘;’) can be used anywhere on a line to start a comment that extends to the end of the line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Sub-instructions may be executed in order, in reverse-order, or in parallel. Instructions listed in the standard one-per-line format will be executed sequentially. To specify the executing order, use the following symbols:
Sequential with instruction on the left first.
Sequential with instruction on the right first.
Parallel
The D10V syntax allows either one instruction per line, one instruction per line with the execution symbol, or two instructions per line. For example
abs a1 -> abs r0
Execute these sequentially. The instruction on the right is in the right container and is executed second.
abs r0 <- abs a1
Execute these reverse-sequentially. The instruction on the right is in the right container, and is executed first.
ld2w r2,@r8+ || mac a0,r0,r7
Execute these in parallel.
ld2w r2,@r8+ ||
mac a0,r0,r7
Two-line format. Execute these in parallel.
ld2w r2,@r8+
mac a0,r0,r7
Two-line format. Execute these sequentially. Assembler will put them in the proper containers.
ld2w r2,@r8+ ->
mac a0,r0,r7
Two-line format. Execute these sequentially. Same as above but second instruction will always go into right container.
Since ‘$’ has no special meaning, you may use it in symbol names.
You can use the predefined symbols ‘r0’ through ‘r15’ to refer to the D10V registers. You can also use ‘sp’ as an alias for ‘r15’. The accumulators are ‘a0’ and ‘a1’. There are special register-pair names that may optionally be used in opcodes that require even-numbered registers. Register names are not case sensitive.
Register Pairs
r0-r1
r2-r3
r4-r5
r6-r7
r8-r9
r10-r11
r12-r13
r14-r15
The D10V also has predefined symbols for these control registers and status bits:
psw
Processor Status Word
bpsw
Backup Processor Status Word
pc
Program Counter
bpc
Backup Program Counter
rpt_c
Repeat Count
rpt_s
Repeat Start address
rpt_e
Repeat End address
mod_s
Modulo Start address
mod_e
Modulo End address
iba
Instruction Break Address
f0
Flag 0
f1
Flag 1
c
Carry flag
as
understands the following addressing modes for the D10V.
Rn
in the following refers to any of the numbered
registers, but not the control registers.
Rn
Register direct
@Rn
Register indirect
@Rn+
Register indirect with post-increment
@Rn-
Register indirect with post-decrement
@-SP
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@(disp, Rn)
Register indirect with displacement
addr
PC relative address (for branch or rep).
#imm
Immediate data (the ‘#’ is optional and ignored)
Any symbol followed by @word
will be replaced by the symbol’s value
shifted right by 2. This is used in situations such as loading a register
with the address of a function (or any other code fragment). For example, if
you want to load a register with the location of the function main
then
jump to that function, you could do it as follows:
ldi r2, main@word jmp r2
The D10V has no hardware floating point, but the .float
and .double
directives generates IEEE floating-point numbers for compatibility
with other development tools.
For detailed information on the D10V machine instruction set, see
D10V Architecture: A VLIW Microprocessor for Multimedia Applications
(Mitsubishi Electric Corp.).
as
implements all the standard D10V opcodes. The only changes are those
described in the section on size modifiers
The Mitsubishi D30V version of as
has a few machine
dependent options.
The D30V can often execute two sub-instructions in parallel. When this option
is used, as
will attempt to optimize its output by detecting when
instructions can be executed in parallel.
When this option is used, as
will issue a warning every
time it adds a nop instruction.
When this option is used, as
will issue a warning if it
needs to insert a nop after a 32-bit multiply before a load or 16-bit
multiply instruction.
The D30V syntax is based on the syntax in Mitsubishi’s D30V architecture manual. The differences are detailed below.
The D30V version of as
uses the instruction names in the D30V
Architecture Manual. However, the names in the manual are sometimes ambiguous.
There are instruction names that can assemble to a short or long form opcode.
How does the assembler pick the correct form? as
will always pick the
smallest form if it can. When dealing with a symbol that is not defined yet when a
line is being assembled, it will always use the long form. If you need to force the
assembler to use either the short or long form of the instruction, you can append
either ‘.s’ (short) or ‘.l’ (long) to it. For example, if you are writing
an assembly program and you want to do a branch to a symbol that is defined later
in your program, you can write ‘bra.s foo’.
Objdump and GDB will always append ‘.s’ or ‘.l’ to instructions which
have both short and long forms.
The D30V assembler takes as input a series of instructions, either one-per-line, or in the special two-per-line format described in the next section. Some of these instructions will be short-form or sub-instructions. These sub-instructions can be packed into a single instruction. The assembler will do this automatically. It will also detect when it should not pack instructions. For example, when a label is defined, the next instruction will never be packaged with the previous one. Whenever a branch and link instruction is called, it will not be packaged with the next instruction so the return address will be valid. Nops are automatically inserted when necessary.
If you do not want the assembler automatically making these decisions, you can control the packaging and execution type (parallel or sequential) with the special execution symbols described in the next section.
A semicolon (‘;’) can be used anywhere on a line to start a comment that extends to the end of the line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Sub-instructions may be executed in order, in reverse-order, or in parallel. Instructions listed in the standard one-per-line format will be executed sequentially unless you use the ‘-O’ option.
To specify the executing order, use the following symbols:
Sequential with instruction on the left first.
Sequential with instruction on the right first.
Parallel
The D30V syntax allows either one instruction per line, one instruction per line with the execution symbol, or two instructions per line. For example
abs r2,r3 -> abs r4,r5
Execute these sequentially. The instruction on the right is in the right container and is executed second.
abs r2,r3 <- abs r4,r5
Execute these reverse-sequentially. The instruction on the right is in the right container, and is executed first.
abs r2,r3 || abs r4,r5
Execute these in parallel.
ldw r2,@(r3,r4) ||
mulx r6,r8,r9
Two-line format. Execute these in parallel.
mulx a0,r8,r9
stw r2,@(r3,r4)
Two-line format. Execute these sequentially unless ‘-O’ option is used. If the ‘-O’ option is used, the assembler will determine if the instructions could be done in parallel (the above two instructions can be done in parallel), and if so, emit them as parallel instructions. The assembler will put them in the proper containers. In the above example, the assembler will put the ‘stw’ instruction in left container and the ‘mulx’ instruction in the right container.
stw r2,@(r3,r4) ->
mulx a0,r8,r9
Two-line format. Execute the ‘stw’ instruction followed by the ‘mulx’ instruction sequentially. The first instruction goes in the left container and the second instruction goes into right container. The assembler will give an error if the machine ordering constraints are violated.
stw r2,@(r3,r4) <-
mulx a0,r8,r9
Same as previous example, except that the ‘mulx’ instruction is executed before the ‘stw’ instruction.
Since ‘$’ has no special meaning, you may use it in symbol names.
as
supports the full range of guarded execution
directives for each instruction. Just append the directive after the
instruction proper. The directives are:
Execute the instruction if flag f0 is true.
Execute the instruction if flag f0 is false.
Execute the instruction if flag f1 is true.
Execute the instruction if flag f1 is false.
Execute the instruction if both flags f0 and f1 are true.
Execute the instruction if flag f0 is true and flag f1 is false.
You can use the predefined symbols ‘r0’ through ‘r63’ to refer to the D30V registers. You can also use ‘sp’ as an alias for ‘r63’ and ‘link’ as an alias for ‘r62’. The accumulators are ‘a0’ and ‘a1’.
The D30V also has predefined symbols for these control registers and status bits:
psw
Processor Status Word
bpsw
Backup Processor Status Word
pc
Program Counter
bpc
Backup Program Counter
rpt_c
Repeat Count
rpt_s
Repeat Start address
rpt_e
Repeat End address
mod_s
Modulo Start address
mod_e
Modulo End address
iba
Instruction Break Address
f0
Flag 0
f1
Flag 1
f2
Flag 2
f3
Flag 3
f4
Flag 4
f5
Flag 5
f6
Flag 6
f7
Flag 7
s
Same as flag 4 (saturation flag)
v
Same as flag 5 (overflow flag)
va
Same as flag 6 (sticky overflow flag)
c
Same as flag 7 (carry/borrow flag)
b
Same as flag 7 (carry/borrow flag)
as
understands the following addressing modes for the D30V.
Rn
in the following refers to any of the numbered
registers, but not the control registers.
Rn
Register direct
@Rn
Register indirect
@Rn+
Register indirect with post-increment
@Rn-
Register indirect with post-decrement
@-SP
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@(disp, Rn)
Register indirect with displacement
addr
PC relative address (for branch or rep).
#imm
Immediate data (the ‘#’ is optional and ignored)
The D30V has no hardware floating point, but the .float
and .double
directives generates IEEE floating-point numbers for compatibility
with other development tools.
For detailed information on the D30V machine instruction set, see
D30V Architecture: A VLIW Microprocessor for Multimedia Applications
(Mitsubishi Electric Corp.).
as
implements all the standard D30V opcodes. The only changes are those
described in the section on size modifiers
as
has two additional command-line options for the Epiphany
architecture.
-mepiphany
¶Specifies that the both 32 and 16 bit instructions are allowed. This is the default behavior.
-mepiphany16
¶Restricts the permitted instructions to just the 16 bit set.
The presence of a ‘;’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘`’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The Renesas H8/300 version of as
has one
machine-dependent option:
-h-tick-hex
Support H’00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
-mach=name
Sets the H8300 machine variant. The following machine names
are recognised:
h8300h
,
h8300hn
,
h8300s
,
h8300sn
,
h8300sx
and
h8300sxn
.
‘;’ is the line comment character.
‘$’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements. Therefore you may not use ‘$’ in symbol names on the H8/300.
You can use predefined symbols of the form ‘rnh’ and ‘rnl’ to refer to the H8/300 registers as sixteen 8-bit general-purpose registers. n is a digit from ‘0’ to ‘7’); for instance, both ‘r0h’ and ‘r7l’ are valid register names.
You can also use the eight predefined symbols ‘rn’ to refer to the H8/300 registers as 16-bit registers (you must use this form for addressing).
On the H8/300H, you can also use the eight predefined symbols ‘ern’ (‘er0’ … ‘er7’) to refer to the 32-bit general purpose registers.
The two control registers are called pc
(program counter; a
16-bit register, except on the H8/300H where it is 24 bits) and
ccr
(condition code register; an 8-bit register). r7
is
used as the stack pointer, and can also be called sp
.
as understands the following addressing modes for the H8/300:
rn
Register direct
@rn
Register indirect
@(d, rn)
@(d:16, rn)
@(d:24, rn)
Register indirect: 16-bit or 24-bit displacement d from register n. (24-bit displacements are only meaningful on the H8/300H.)
@rn+
Register indirect with post-increment
@-rn
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@
aa
@
aa:8
@
aa:16
@
aa:24
Absolute address aa
. (The address size ‘:24’ only makes
sense on the H8/300H.)
#xx
#xx:8
#xx:16
#xx:32
Immediate data xx. You may specify the ‘:8’, ‘:16’, or
‘:32’ for clarity, if you wish; but as
neither
requires this nor uses it—the data size required is taken from
context.
@
@
aa
@
@
aa:8
Memory indirect. You may specify the ‘:8’ for clarity, if you
wish; but as
neither requires this nor uses it.
The H8/300 family has no hardware floating point, but the .float
directive generates IEEE floating-point numbers for compatibility
with other development tools.
as
has the following machine-dependent directives for
the H8/300:
.h8300h
¶Recognize and emit additional instructions for the H8/300H variant, and
also make .int
emit 32-bit numbers rather than the usual (16-bit)
for the H8/300 family.
.h8300s
Recognize and emit additional instructions for the H8S variant, and
also make .int
emit 32-bit numbers rather than the usual (16-bit)
for the H8/300 family.
.h8300hn
Recognize and emit additional instructions for the H8/300H variant in
normal mode, and also make .int
emit 32-bit numbers rather than
the usual (16-bit) for the H8/300 family.
.h8300sn
Recognize and emit additional instructions for the H8S variant in
normal mode, and also make .int
emit 32-bit numbers rather than
the usual (16-bit) for the H8/300 family.
On the H8/300 family (including the H8/300H) ‘.word’ directives generate 16-bit numbers.
For detailed information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see H8/300 Series Programming Manual. For information specific to the H8/300H, see H8/300H Series Programming Manual (Renesas).
as
implements all the standard H8/300 opcodes. No additional
pseudo-instructions are needed on this family.
Four H8/300 instructions (add
, cmp
, mov
,
sub
) are defined with variants using the suffixes ‘.b’,
‘.w’, and ‘.l’ to specify the size of a memory operand.
as
supports these suffixes, but does not require them;
since one of the operands is always a register, as
can
deduce the correct size.
For example, since r0
refers to a 16-bit register,
mov r0,@foo
is equivalent to
mov.w r0,@foo
If you use the size suffixes, as
issues a warning when
the suffix and the register size do not match.
As a back end for GNU CC as
has been thoroughly tested and should
work extremely well. We have tested it only minimally on hand written assembly
code and no one has tested it much on the assembly output from the HP
compilers.
The format of the debugging sections has changed since the original
as
port (version 1.3X) was released; therefore,
you must rebuild all HPPA objects and libraries with the new
assembler so that you can debug the final executable.
The HPPA as
port generates a small subset of the relocations
available in the SOM and ELF object file formats. Additional relocation
support will be added as it becomes necessary.
The assembler syntax closely follows the HPPA instruction set reference manual; assembler directives and general syntax closely follow the HPPA assembly language reference manual, with a few noteworthy differences.
First, a colon may immediately follow a label definition. This is simply for compatibility with how most assembly language programmers write code.
Some obscure expression parsing problems may affect hand written code which
uses the spop
instructions, or code which makes significant
use of the !
line separator.
as
is much less forgiving about missing arguments and other
similar oversights than the HP assembler. as
notifies you
of missing arguments as syntax errors; this is regarded as a feature, not a
bug.
Finally, as
allows you to use an external symbol without
explicitly importing the symbol. Warning: in the future this will be
an error for HPPA targets.
Special characters for HPPA targets include:
‘;’ is the line comment character.
‘!’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
Since ‘$’ has no special meaning, you may use it in symbol names.
as
for the HPPA supports many additional directives for
compatibility with the native assembler. This section describes them only
briefly. For detailed information on HPPA-specific assembler directives, see
HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual (HP 92432-90001).
as
does not support the following assembler directives
described in the HP manual:
.endm .liston .enter .locct .leave .macro .listoff
Beyond those implemented for compatibility, as
supports one
additional assembler directive for the HPPA: .param
. It conveys
register argument locations for static functions. Its syntax closely follows
the .export
directive.
These are the additional directives in as
for the HPPA:
.block n
.blockz n
Reserve n bytes of storage, and initialize them to zero.
.call
Mark the beginning of a procedure call. Only the special case with no arguments is allowed.
.callinfo [ param=value, … ] [ flag, … ]
Specify a number of parameters and flags that define the environment for a procedure.
param may be any of ‘frame’ (frame size), ‘entry_gr’ (end of general register range), ‘entry_fr’ (end of float register range), ‘entry_sr’ (end of space register range).
The values for flag are ‘calls’ or ‘caller’ (proc has subroutines), ‘no_calls’ (proc does not call subroutines), ‘save_rp’ (preserve return pointer), ‘save_sp’ (proc preserves stack pointer), ‘no_unwind’ (do not unwind this proc), ‘hpux_int’ (proc is interrupt routine).
.code
Assemble into the standard section called ‘$TEXT$’, subsection ‘$CODE$’.
.copyright "string"
In the SOM object format, insert string into the object code, marked as a copyright string.
.copyright "string"
In the ELF object format, insert string into the object code, marked as a version string.
.enter
Not yet supported; the assembler rejects programs containing this directive.
.entry
Mark the beginning of a procedure.
.exit
Mark the end of a procedure.
.export name [ ,typ ] [ ,param=r ]
Make a procedure name available to callers. typ, if present, must be one of ‘absolute’, ‘code’ (ELF only, not SOM), ‘data’, ‘entry’, ‘data’, ‘entry’, ‘millicode’, ‘plabel’, ‘pri_prog’, or ‘sec_prog’.
param, if present, provides either relocation information for the
procedure arguments and result, or a privilege level. param may be
‘argwn’ (where n ranges from 0
to 3
, and
indicates one of four one-word arguments); ‘rtnval’ (the procedure’s
result); or ‘priv_lev’ (privilege level). For arguments or the result,
r specifies how to relocate, and must be one of ‘no’ (not
relocatable), ‘gr’ (argument is in general register), ‘fr’ (in
floating point register), or ‘fu’ (upper half of float register).
For ‘priv_lev’, r is an integer.
.half n
Define a two-byte integer constant n; synonym for the portable
as
directive .short
.
.import name [ ,typ ]
Converse of .export
; make a procedure available to call. The arguments
use the same conventions as the first two arguments for .export
.
.label name
Define name as a label for the current assembly location.
.leave
Not yet supported; the assembler rejects programs containing this directive.
.origin lc
Advance location counter to lc. Synonym for the as
portable directive .org
.
.param name [ ,typ ] [ ,param=r ]
Similar to .export
, but used for static procedures.
.proc
Use preceding the first statement of a procedure.
.procend
Use following the last statement of a procedure.
label .reg expr
Synonym for .equ
; define label with the absolute expression
expr as its value.
.space secname [ ,params ]
Switch to section secname, creating a new section by that name if necessary. You may only use params when creating a new section, not when switching to an existing one. secname may identify a section by number rather than by name.
If specified, the list params declares attributes of the section, identified by keywords. The keywords recognized are ‘spnum=exp’ (identify this section by the number exp, an absolute expression), ‘sort=exp’ (order sections according to this sort key when linking; exp is an absolute expression), ‘unloadable’ (section contains no loadable data), ‘notdefined’ (this section defined elsewhere), and ‘private’ (data in this section not available to other programs).
.spnum secnam
Allocate four bytes of storage, and initialize them with the section number of
the section named secnam. (You can define the section number with the
HPPA .space
directive.)
.string "str"
¶Copy the characters in the string str to the object file.
See Strings, for information on escape sequences you can use in
as
strings.
Warning! The HPPA version of .string
differs from the
usual as
definition: it does not write a zero byte
after copying str.
.stringz "str"
Like .string
, but appends a zero byte after copying str to object
file.
.subspa name [ ,params ]
.nsubspa name [ ,params ]
Similar to .space
, but selects a subsection name within the
current section. You may only specify params when you create a
subsection (in the first instance of .subspa
for this name).
If specified, the list params declares attributes of the subsection, identified by keywords. The keywords recognized are ‘quad=expr’ (“quadrant” for this subsection), ‘align=expr’ (alignment for beginning of this subsection; a power of two), ‘access=expr’ (value for “access rights” field), ‘sort=expr’ (sorting order for this subspace in link), ‘code_only’ (subsection contains only code), ‘unloadable’ (subsection cannot be loaded into memory), ‘comdat’ (subsection is comdat), ‘common’ (subsection is common block), ‘dup_comm’ (subsection may have duplicate names), or ‘zero’ (subsection is all zeros, do not write in object file).
.nsubspa
always creates a new subspace with the given name, even
if one with the same name already exists.
‘comdat’, ‘common’ and ‘dup_comm’ can be used to implement various flavors of one-only support when using the SOM linker. The SOM linker only supports specific combinations of these flags. The details are not documented. A brief description is provided here.
‘comdat’ provides a form of linkonce support. It is useful for both code and data subspaces. A ‘comdat’ subspace has a key symbol marked by the ‘is_comdat’ flag or ‘ST_COMDAT’. Only the first subspace for any given key is selected. The key symbol becomes universal in shared links. This is similar to the behavior of ‘secondary_def’ symbols.
‘common’ provides Fortran named common support. It is only useful for data subspaces. Symbols with the flag ‘is_common’ retain this flag in shared links. Referencing a ‘is_common’ symbol in a shared library from outside the library doesn’t work. Thus, ‘is_common’ symbols must be output whenever they are needed.
‘common’ and ‘dup_comm’ together provide Cobol common support. The subspaces in this case must all be the same length. Otherwise, this support is similar to the Fortran common support.
‘dup_comm’ by itself provides a type of one-only support for code. Only the first ‘dup_comm’ subspace is selected. There is a rather complex algorithm to compare subspaces. Code symbols marked with the ‘dup_common’ flag are hidden. This support was intended for "C++ duplicate inlines".
A simplified technique is used to mark the flags of symbols based on the flags of their subspace. A symbol with the scope SS_UNIVERSAL and type ST_ENTRY, ST_CODE or ST_DATA is marked with the corresponding settings of ‘comdat’, ‘common’ and ‘dup_comm’ from the subspace, respectively. This avoids having to introduce additional directives to mark these symbols. The HP assembler sets ‘is_common’ from ‘common’. However, it doesn’t set the ‘dup_common’ from ‘dup_comm’. It doesn’t have ‘comdat’ support.
.version "str"
Write str as version identifier in object code.
For detailed information on the HPPA machine instruction set, see PA-RISC Architecture and Instruction Set Reference Manual (HP 09740-90039).
The i386 version as
supports both the original Intel 386
architecture in both 16 and 32-bit mode as well as AMD x86-64 architecture
extending the Intel architecture to 64-bits.
The i386 version of as
has a few machine
dependent options:
--32 | --x32 | --64
¶Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits. ‘--32’ implies Intel i386 architecture, while ‘--x32’ and ‘--64’ imply AMD x86-64 architecture with 32-bit or 64-bit word-size respectively.
These options are only available with the ELF object file format, and require that the necessary BFD support has been included (on a 32-bit platform you have to add –enable-64-bit-bfd to configure enable 64-bit usage and use x86-64 as target platform).
-n
By default, x86 GAS replaces multiple nop instructions used for alignment within code sections with multi-byte nop instructions such as leal 0(%esi,1),%esi. This switch disables the optimization if a single byte nop (0x90) is explicitly specified as the fill byte for alignment.
--divide
¶On SVR4-derived platforms, the character ‘/’ is treated as a comment character, which means that it cannot be used in expressions. The ‘--divide’ option turns ‘/’ into a normal character. This does not disable ‘/’ at the beginning of a line starting a comment, or affect using ‘#’ for starting a comment.
-march=CPU[+EXTENSION…]
¶This option specifies the target processor. The assembler will
issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction
which will not execute on the target processor. The following
processor names are recognized:
i8086
,
i186
,
i286
,
i386
,
i486
,
i586
,
i686
,
pentium
,
pentiumpro
,
pentiumii
,
pentiumiii
,
pentium4
,
prescott
,
nocona
,
core
,
core2
,
corei7
,
iamcu
,
k6
,
k6_2
,
athlon
,
opteron
,
k8
,
amdfam10
,
bdver1
,
bdver2
,
bdver3
,
bdver4
,
znver1
,
znver2
,
znver3
,
znver4
,
znver5
,
btver1
,
btver2
,
generic32
and
generic64
.
In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told to
accept various extension mnemonics. For example,
-march=i686+sse4+vmx
extends i686 with sse4 and
vmx. The following extensions are currently supported:
8087
,
287
,
387
,
687
,
cmov
,
fxsr
,
mmx
,
sse
,
sse2
,
sse3
,
sse4a
,
ssse3
,
sse4.1
,
sse4.2
,
sse4
,
avx
,
avx2
,
lahf_sahf
,
monitor
,
adx
,
rdseed
,
prfchw
,
smap
,
mpx
,
sha
,
rdpid
,
ptwrite
,
cet
,
gfni
,
vaes
,
vpclmulqdq
,
prefetchwt1
,
clflushopt
,
se1
,
clwb
,
movdiri
,
movdir64b
,
enqcmd
,
serialize
,
tsxldtrk
,
kl
,
widekl
,
hreset
,
avx512f
,
avx512cd
,
avx512er
,
avx512pf
,
avx512vl
,
avx512bw
,
avx512dq
,
avx512ifma
,
avx512vbmi
,
avx512_4fmaps
,
avx512_4vnniw
,
avx512_vpopcntdq
,
avx512_vbmi2
,
avx512_vnni
,
avx512_bitalg
,
avx512_vp2intersect
,
tdx
,
avx512_bf16
,
avx_vnni
,
avx512_fp16
,
prefetchi
,
avx_ifma
,
avx_vnni_int8
,
cmpccxadd
,
wrmsrns
,
msrlist
,
avx_ne_convert
,
rao_int
,
fred
,
lkgs
,
avx_vnni_int16
,
sha512
,
sm3
,
sm4
,
pbndkb
,
avx10.1
,
avx10.1/512
,
avx10.1/256
,
avx10.1/128
,
user_msr
,
apx_f
,
amx_int8
,
amx_bf16
,
amx_fp16
,
amx_complex
,
amx_tile
,
vmx
,
vmfunc
,
smx
,
xsave
,
xsaveopt
,
xsavec
,
xsaves
,
aes
,
pclmul
,
fsgsbase
,
rdrnd
,
f16c
,
bmi2
,
fma
,
movbe
,
ept
,
lzcnt
,
popcnt
,
hle
,
rtm
,
tsx
,
invpcid
,
clflush
,
mwaitx
,
clzero
,
wbnoinvd
,
pconfig
,
waitpkg
,
uintr
,
cldemote
,
rdpru
,
mcommit
,
sev_es
,
lwp
,
fma4
,
xop
,
cx16
,
syscall
,
rdtscp
,
3dnow
,
3dnowa
,
sse4a
,
sse5
,
snp
,
invlpgb
,
tlbsync
,
svme
and
padlock
.
Note that these extension mnemonics can be prefixed with no
to revoke
the respective (and any dependent) functionality. Note further that the
suffixes permitted on -march=avx10.<N>
enforce a vector length
restriction, i.e. despite these otherwise being "enabling" options, using
these suffixes will disable all insns with wider vector or mask register
operands.
When the .arch
directive is used with -march, the
.arch
directive will take precedent.
-mtune=CPU
¶This option specifies a processor to optimize for. When used in conjunction with the -march option, only instructions of the processor specified by the -march option will be generated.
Valid CPU values are identical to the processor list of -march=CPU.
-msse2avx
¶This option specifies that the assembler should encode SSE instructions with VEX prefix.
-muse-unaligned-vector-move
¶This option specifies that the assembler should encode aligned vector move as unaligned vector move.
-msse-check=none
¶-msse-check=warning
-msse-check=error
These options control if the assembler should check SSE instructions. -msse-check=none will make the assembler not to check SSE instructions, which is the default. -msse-check=warning will make the assembler issue a warning for any SSE instruction. -msse-check=error will make the assembler issue an error for any SSE instruction.
-mavxscalar=128
¶-mavxscalar=256
These options control how the assembler should encode scalar AVX instructions. -mavxscalar=128 will encode scalar AVX instructions with 128bit vector length, which is the default. -mavxscalar=256 will encode scalar AVX instructions with 256bit vector length.
WARNING: Don’t use this for production code - due to CPU errata the resulting code may not work on certain models.
-mvexwig=0
¶-mvexwig=1
These options control how the assembler should encode VEX.W-ignored (WIG) VEX instructions. -mvexwig=0 will encode WIG VEX instructions with vex.w = 0, which is the default. -mvexwig=1 will encode WIG EVEX instructions with vex.w = 1.
WARNING: Don’t use this for production code - due to CPU errata the resulting code may not work on certain models.
-mevexlig=128
¶-mevexlig=256
-mevexlig=512
These options control how the assembler should encode length-ignored (LIG) EVEX instructions. -mevexlig=128 will encode LIG EVEX instructions with 128bit vector length, which is the default. -mevexlig=256 and -mevexlig=512 will encode LIG EVEX instructions with 256bit and 512bit vector length, respectively.
-mevexwig=0
¶-mevexwig=1
These options control how the assembler should encode w-ignored (WIG) EVEX instructions. -mevexwig=0 will encode WIG EVEX instructions with evex.w = 0, which is the default. -mevexwig=1 will encode WIG EVEX instructions with evex.w = 1.
-mmnemonic=att
¶-mmnemonic=intel
This option specifies instruction mnemonic for matching instructions.
The .att_mnemonic
and .intel_mnemonic
directives will
take precedent.
-msyntax=att
¶-msyntax=intel
This option specifies instruction syntax when processing instructions.
The .att_syntax
and .intel_syntax
directives will
take precedent.
-mnaked-reg
¶This option specifies that registers don’t require a ‘%’ prefix.
The .att_syntax
and .intel_syntax
directives will take precedent.
-madd-bnd-prefix
¶This option forces the assembler to add BND prefix to all branches, even if such prefix was not explicitly specified in the source code.
-mno-shared
¶On ELF target, the assembler normally optimizes out non-PLT relocations against defined non-weak global branch targets with default visibility. The ‘-mshared’ option tells the assembler to generate code which may go into a shared library where all non-weak global branch targets with default visibility can be preempted. The resulting code is slightly bigger. This option only affects the handling of branch instructions.
-mbig-obj
¶On PE/COFF target this option forces the use of big object file format, which allows more than 32768 sections.
-momit-lock-prefix=no
¶-momit-lock-prefix=yes
These options control how the assembler should encode lock prefix. This option is intended as a workaround for processors, that fail on lock prefix. This option can only be safely used with single-core, single-thread computers -momit-lock-prefix=yes will omit all lock prefixes. -momit-lock-prefix=no will encode lock prefix as usual, which is the default.
-mfence-as-lock-add=no
¶-mfence-as-lock-add=yes
These options control how the assembler should encode lfence, mfence and sfence. -mfence-as-lock-add=yes will encode lfence, mfence and sfence as ‘lock addl $0x0, (%rsp)’ in 64-bit mode and ‘lock addl $0x0, (%esp)’ in 32-bit mode. -mfence-as-lock-add=no will encode lfence, mfence and sfence as usual, which is the default.
-mrelax-relocations=no
¶-mrelax-relocations=yes
These options control whether the assembler should generate relax relocations, R_386_GOT32X, in 32-bit mode, or R_X86_64_GOTPCRELX and R_X86_64_REX_GOTPCRELX, in 64-bit mode. -mrelax-relocations=yes will generate relax relocations. -mrelax-relocations=no will not generate relax relocations. The default can be controlled by a configure option --enable-x86-relax-relocations.
-malign-branch-boundary=NUM
¶This option controls how the assembler should align branches with segment prefixes or NOP. NUM must be a power of 2. It should be 0 or no less than 16. Branches will be aligned within NUM byte boundary. -malign-branch-boundary=0, which is the default, doesn’t align branches.
-malign-branch=TYPE[+TYPE...]
¶This option specifies types of branches to align. TYPE is combination of ‘jcc’, which aligns conditional jumps, ‘fused’, which aligns fused conditional jumps, ‘jmp’, which aligns unconditional jumps, ‘call’ which aligns calls, ‘ret’, which aligns rets, ‘indirect’, which aligns indirect jumps and calls. The default is -malign-branch=jcc+fused+jmp.
-malign-branch-prefix-size=NUM
¶This option specifies the maximum number of prefixes on an instruction to align branches. NUM should be between 0 and 5. The default NUM is 5.
-mbranches-within-32B-boundaries
¶This option aligns conditional jumps, fused conditional jumps and unconditional jumps within 32 byte boundary with up to 5 segment prefixes on an instruction. It is equivalent to -malign-branch-boundary=32 -malign-branch=jcc+fused+jmp -malign-branch-prefix-size=5. The default doesn’t align branches.
-mlfence-after-load=no
¶-mlfence-after-load=yes
These options control whether the assembler should generate lfence after load instructions. -mlfence-after-load=yes will generate lfence. -mlfence-after-load=no will not generate lfence, which is the default.
-mlfence-before-indirect-branch=none
¶-mlfence-before-indirect-branch=all
-mlfence-before-indirect-branch=register
-mlfence-before-indirect-branch=memory
These options control whether the assembler should generate lfence before indirect near branch instructions. -mlfence-before-indirect-branch=all will generate lfence before indirect near branch via register and issue a warning before indirect near branch via memory. It also implicitly sets -mlfence-before-ret=shl when there’s no explicit -mlfence-before-ret=. -mlfence-before-indirect-branch=register will generate lfence before indirect near branch via register. -mlfence-before-indirect-branch=memory will issue a warning before indirect near branch via memory. -mlfence-before-indirect-branch=none will not generate lfence nor issue warning, which is the default. Note that lfence won’t be generated before indirect near branch via register with -mlfence-after-load=yes since lfence will be generated after loading branch target register.
-mlfence-before-ret=none
¶-mlfence-before-ret=shl
-mlfence-before-ret=or
-mlfence-before-ret=yes
-mlfence-before-ret=not
These options control whether the assembler should generate lfence before ret. -mlfence-before-ret=or will generate generate or instruction with lfence. -mlfence-before-ret=shl/yes will generate shl instruction with lfence. -mlfence-before-ret=not will generate not instruction with lfence. -mlfence-before-ret=none will not generate lfence, which is the default.
-mx86-used-note=no
¶-mx86-used-note=yes
These options control whether the assembler should generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_USED and GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_2_USED GNU property notes. The default can be controlled by the --enable-x86-used-note configure option.
-mevexrcig=rne
¶-mevexrcig=rd
-mevexrcig=ru
-mevexrcig=rz
These options control how the assembler should encode SAE-only EVEX instructions. -mevexrcig=rne will encode RC bits of EVEX instruction with 00, which is the default. -mevexrcig=rd, -mevexrcig=ru and -mevexrcig=rz will encode SAE-only EVEX instructions with 01, 10 and 11 RC bits, respectively.
-mamd64
¶-mintel64
This option specifies that the assembler should accept only AMD64 or Intel64 ISA in 64-bit mode. The default is to accept common, Intel64 only and AMD64 ISAs.
-O0 | -O | -O1 | -O2 | -Os
¶Optimize instruction encoding with smaller instruction size. ‘-O’ and ‘-O1’ encode 64-bit register load instructions with 64-bit immediate as 32-bit register load instructions with 31-bit or 32-bits immediates, encode 64-bit register clearing instructions with 32-bit register clearing instructions, encode 256-bit/512-bit VEX/EVEX vector register clearing instructions with 128-bit VEX vector register clearing instructions, encode 128-bit/256-bit EVEX vector register load/store instructions with VEX vector register load/store instructions, and encode 128-bit/256-bit EVEX packed integer logical instructions with 128-bit/256-bit VEX packed integer logical.
‘-O2’ includes ‘-O1’ optimization plus encodes 256-bit/512-bit EVEX vector register clearing instructions with 128-bit EVEX vector register clearing instructions. In 64-bit mode VEX encoded instructions with commutative source operands will also have their source operands swapped if this allows using the 2-byte VEX prefix form instead of the 3-byte one. Certain forms of AND as well as OR with the same (register) operand specified twice will also be changed to TEST.
‘-Os’ includes ‘-O2’ optimization plus encodes 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit register tests with immediate as 8-bit register test with immediate. ‘-O0’ turns off this optimization.
.lcomm symbol , length[, alignment]
¶Reserve length (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
denoted by symbol. The section and value of symbol are
those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. Since
symbol is not declared global, it is normally not visible to
ld
. The optional third parameter, alignment,
specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
This directive is only available for COFF based x86 targets.
.largecomm symbol , length[, alignment]
¶This directive behaves in the same way as the comm
directive
except that the data is placed into the .lbss section instead of
the .bss section .comm symbol , length
.
The directive is intended to be used for data which requires a large amount of space, and it is only available for ELF based x86_64 targets.
.value expression [, expression]
¶This directive behaves in the same way as the .short
directive,
taking a series of comma separated expressions and storing them as
two-byte wide values into the current section.
.insn [prefix[,...]] [encoding] major-opcode[+r
|/extension
] [,operand[,...]]
¶This directive allows composing instructions which as
may not know about yet, or which it has no way of expressing (which
can be the case for certain alternative encodings). It assumes certain
basic structure in how operands are encoded, and it also only
recognizes - with a few extensions as per below - operands otherwise
valid for instructions. Therefore there is no guarantee that
everything can be expressed (e.g. the original Intel Xeon Phi’s MVEX
encodings cannot be expressed).
VEX
[.len
][.prefix
][.space
][.w
]
EVEX
[.len
][.prefix
][.space
][.w
]
XOP
space[.len
][.prefix
][.w
]
Here
LIG
, 128
, 256
, or (EVEX
only) 512
as well as L0
/ L1
for VEX / XOP and
L0
...L3
for EVEX
NP
, 66
, F3
, or F2
0f
, 0f38
, 0f3a
, or M0
...M31
for VEX
08
...1f
for XOP
0f
, 0f38
, 0f3a
, or M0
...M15
for EVEX
WIG
, W0
, or W1
Defaults:
LIG
otherwise. (Obviously
len has to be omitted when there’s EVEX rounding control
specified later in the operands.)
NP
.
WIG
otherwise.
+r
can be suffixed to the major opcode
expression to specify register-only encoding forms not using a ModR/M
byte. /extension
can alternatively be suffixed to the
major opcode expression to specify an extension opcode, encoded in bits
3-5 of the ModR/M byte.
Encoding of operands: While for a memory operand (of which there can be only one) it is clear how to encode it in the resulting ModR/M byte, register operands are encoded strictly in this order (operand counts do not include immediate ones in the enumeration below, and if there was an extension opcode specified it counts as a register operand; VEX.vvvv is meant to cover XOP and EVEX as well):
obviously with the ModR/M.rm slot skipped when there is a memory
operand, and obviously with the ModR/M.reg slot skipped when there is
an extension opcode. For Intel syntax of course the opposite order
applies. With +r
(and hence no ModR/M) there can only be a
single register operand for legacy encodings. VEX and alike can have
two register operands, where the second (first in Intel syntax) would
go into VEX.vvvv.
Immediate operands (including immediate-like displacements, i.e. when
not part of ModR/M addressing) are emitted in the order specified,
regardless of AT&T or Intel syntax. Since it may not be possible to
infer the size of such immediates, they can be suffixed by
{:sn}
or {:un}
, representing signed /
unsigned immediates of the given number of bits respectively. When
emitting such operands, the number of bits will be rounded up to the
smallest suitable of 8, 16, 32, or 64. Immediates wider than 32 bits
are permitted in 64-bit code only.
For EVEX encoding memory operands with a displacement need to know
Disp8 scaling size in order to use an 8-bit displacement. For many
instructions this can be inferred from the types of other operands
specified. In Intel syntax ‘DWORD PTR’ and alike can be used to
specify the respective size. In AT&T syntax the memory operands can
be suffixed by {:dn}
to specify the size (in bytes).
This can be combined with an embedded broadcast specifier:
‘8(%eax){1to8:d8}’.
as
now supports assembly using Intel assembler syntax.
.intel_syntax
selects Intel mode, and .att_syntax
switches
back to the usual AT&T mode for compatibility with the output of
gcc
. Either of these directives may have an optional
argument, prefix
, or noprefix
specifying whether registers
require a ‘%’ prefix. AT&T System V/386 assembler syntax is quite
different from Intel syntax. We mention these differences because
almost all 80386 documents use Intel syntax. Notable differences
between the two syntaxes are:
In 64-bit code, ‘movabs’ can be used to encode the ‘mov’ instruction with the 64-bit displacement or immediate operand.
The presence of a ‘#’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
If the --divide command-line option has not been specified then the ‘/’ character appearing anywhere on a line also introduces a line comment.
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
Instruction mnemonics are suffixed with one character modifiers which
specify the size of operands. The letters ‘b’, ‘w’, ‘l’
and ‘q’ specify byte, word, long and quadruple word operands. If
no suffix is specified by an instruction then as
tries to
fill in the missing suffix based on the destination register operand
(the last one by convention). Thus, ‘mov %ax, %bx’ is equivalent
to ‘movw %ax, %bx’; also, ‘mov $1, %bx’ is equivalent to
‘movw $1, bx’. Note that this is incompatible with the AT&T Unix
assembler which assumes that a missing mnemonic suffix implies long
operand size. (This incompatibility does not affect compiler output
since compilers always explicitly specify the mnemonic suffix.)
When there is no sizing suffix and no (suitable) register operands to deduce the size of memory operands, with a few exceptions and where long operand size is possible in the first place, operand size will default to long in 32- and 64-bit modes. Similarly it will default to short in 16-bit mode. Noteworthy exceptions are
Different encoding options can be specified via pseudo prefixes:
Mnemonics of Intel VNNI/IFMA instructions are encoded with the EVEX prefix by default. The pseudo ‘{vex}’ prefix can be used to encode mnemonics of Intel VNNI/IFMA instructions with the VEX prefix.
The Intel-syntax conversion instructions
are called ‘cbtw’, ‘cwtl’, ‘cwtd’, ‘cltd’, ‘cltq’, and
‘cqto’ in AT&T naming. as
accepts either naming for these
instructions.
The Intel-syntax extension instructions
are called ‘movsbw/movsxb/movsx’, ‘movsbl/movsxb/movsx’, ‘movsbq/movsxb/movsx’, ‘movswl/movsxw’, ‘movswq/movsxw’, ‘movslq/movsxl’, ‘movzbw/movzxb/movzx’, ‘movzbl/movzxb/movzx’, ‘movzbq/movzxb/movzx’, ‘movzwl/movzxw’ and ‘movzwq/movzxw’ in AT&T syntax.
Far call/jump instructions are ‘lcall’ and ‘ljmp’ in AT&T syntax, but are ‘call far’ and ‘jump far’ in Intel convention.
as
supports assembly using Intel mnemonic.
.intel_mnemonic
selects Intel mnemonic with Intel syntax, and
.att_mnemonic
switches back to the usual AT&T mnemonic with AT&T
syntax for compatibility with the output of gcc
.
Several x87 instructions, ‘fadd’, ‘fdiv’, ‘fdivp’,
‘fdivr’, ‘fdivrp’, ‘fmul’, ‘fsub’, ‘fsubp’,
‘fsubr’ and ‘fsubrp’, are implemented in AT&T System V/386
assembler with different mnemonics from those in Intel IA32 specification.
gcc
generates those instructions with AT&T mnemonic.
Register operands are always prefixed with ‘%’. The 80386 registers consist of
The AMD x86-64 architecture extends the register set by:
With the AVX extensions more registers were made available:
The AVX512 extensions added the following registers:
Instruction prefixes are used to modify the following instruction. They are used to repeat string instructions, to provide section overrides, to perform bus lock operations, and to change operand and address sizes. (Most instructions that normally operate on 32-bit operands will use 16-bit operands if the instruction has an “operand size” prefix.) Instruction prefixes are best written on the same line as the instruction they act upon. For example, the ‘scas’ (scan string) instruction is repeated with:
repne scas %es:(%edi),%al
You may also place prefixes on the lines immediately preceding the
instruction, but this circumvents checks that as
does
with prefixes, and will not work with all prefixes.
Here is a list of instruction prefixes:
.code16
section) into 32-bit operands/addresses. These prefixes
must appear on the same line of code as the instruction they
modify. For example, in a 16-bit .code16
section, you might
write:
addr32 jmpl *(%ebx)
64
) used to change operand size
from 32-bit to 64-bit and X, Y and Z extensions bits used to extend the
register set.
You may write the ‘rex’ prefixes directly. The ‘rex64xyz’
instruction emits ‘rex’ prefix with all the bits set. By omitting
the 64
, x
, y
or z
you may write other
prefixes as well. Normally, there is no need to write the prefixes
explicitly, since gas will automatically generate them based on the
instruction operands.
An Intel syntax indirect memory reference of the form
section:[base + index*scale + disp]
is translated into the AT&T syntax
section:disp(base, index, scale)
where base and index are the optional 32-bit base and
index registers, disp is the optional displacement, and
scale, taking the values 1, 2, 4, and 8, multiplies index
to calculate the address of the operand. If no scale is
specified, scale is taken to be 1. section specifies the
optional section register for the memory operand, and may override the
default section register (see a 80386 manual for section register
defaults). Note that section overrides in AT&T syntax must
be preceded by a ‘%’. If you specify a section override which
coincides with the default section register, as
does not
output any section register override prefixes to assemble the given
instruction. Thus, section overrides can be specified to emphasize which
section register is used for a given memory operand.
Here are some examples of Intel and AT&T style memory references:
base is ‘%ebp’; disp is ‘-4’. section is missing, and the default section is used (‘%ss’ for addressing with ‘%ebp’ as the base register). index, scale are both missing.
index is ‘%eax’ (scaled by a scale 4); disp is ‘foo’. All other fields are missing. The section register here defaults to ‘%ds’.
This uses the value pointed to by ‘foo’ as a memory operand. Note that base and index are both missing, but there is only one ‘,’. This is a syntactic exception.
This selects the contents of the variable ‘foo’ with section register section being ‘%gs’.
Absolute (as opposed to PC relative) call and jump operands must be
prefixed with ‘*’. If no ‘*’ is specified, as
always chooses PC relative addressing for jump/call labels.
Any instruction that has a memory operand, but no register operand, must specify its size (byte, word, long, or quadruple) with an instruction mnemonic suffix (‘b’, ‘w’, ‘l’ or ‘q’, respectively).
The x86-64 architecture adds an RIP (instruction pointer relative) addressing. This addressing mode is specified by using ‘rip’ as a base register. Only constant offsets are valid. For example:
Points to the address 1234 bytes past the end of the current instruction.
Points to the symbol
in RIP relative way, this is shorter than
the default absolute addressing.
Other addressing modes remain unchanged in x86-64 architecture, except registers used are 64-bit instead of 32-bit.
Jump instructions are always optimized to use the smallest possible displacements. This is accomplished by using byte (8-bit) displacement jumps whenever the target is sufficiently close. If a byte displacement is insufficient a long displacement is used. We do not support word (16-bit) displacement jumps in 32-bit mode (i.e. prefixing the jump instruction with the ‘data16’ instruction prefix), since the 80386 insists upon masking ‘%eip’ to 16 bits after the word displacement is added. (See also see Specifying CPU Architecture)
Note that the ‘jcxz’, ‘jecxz’, ‘loop’, ‘loopz’,
‘loope’, ‘loopnz’ and ‘loopne’ instructions only come in byte
displacements, so that if you use these instructions (gcc
does
not use them) you may get an error message (and incorrect code). The AT&T
80386 assembler tries to get around this problem by expanding ‘jcxz foo’
to
jcxz cx_zero jmp cx_nonzero cx_zero: jmp foo cx_nonzero:
All 80387 floating point types except packed BCD are supported. (BCD support may be added without much difficulty). These data types are 16-, 32-, and 64- bit integers, and single (32-bit), double (64-bit), and extended (80-bit) precision floating point. Each supported type has an instruction mnemonic suffix and a constructor associated with it. Instruction mnemonic suffixes specify the operand’s data type. Constructors build these data types into memory.
Register to register operations should not use instruction mnemonic suffixes. ‘fstl %st, %st(1)’ will give a warning, and be assembled as if you wrote ‘fst %st, %st(1)’, since all register to register operations use 80-bit floating point operands. (Contrast this with ‘fstl %st, mem’, which converts ‘%st’ from 80-bit to 64-bit floating point format, then stores the result in the 4 byte location ‘mem’)
as
supports Intel’s MMX instruction set (SIMD
instructions for integer data), available on Intel’s Pentium MMX
processors and Pentium II processors, AMD’s K6 and K6-2 processors,
Cyrix’ M2 processor, and probably others. It also supports AMD’s 3DNow!
instruction set (SIMD instructions for 32-bit floating point data)
available on AMD’s K6-2 processor and possibly others in the future.
Currently, as
does not support Intel’s floating point
SIMD, Katmai (KNI).
The eight 64-bit MMX operands, also used by 3DNow!, are called ‘%mm0’, ‘%mm1’, ... ‘%mm7’. They contain eight 8-bit integers, four 16-bit integers, two 32-bit integers, one 64-bit integer, or two 32-bit floating point values. The MMX registers cannot be used at the same time as the floating point stack.
See Intel and AMD documentation, keeping in mind that the operand order in instructions is reversed from the Intel syntax.
as
supports AMD’s Lightweight Profiling (LWP)
instruction set, available on AMD’s Family 15h (Orochi) processors.
LWP enables applications to collect and manage performance data, and react to performance events. The collection of performance data requires no context switches. LWP runs in the context of a thread and so several counters can be used independently across multiple threads. LWP can be used in both 64-bit and legacy 32-bit modes.
For detailed information on the LWP instruction set, see the AMD Lightweight Profiling Specification available at Lightweight Profiling Specification.
as
supports the Bit Manipulation (BMI) instruction set.
BMI instructions provide several instructions implementing individual bit manipulation operations such as isolation, masking, setting, or resetting.
as
supports AMD’s Trailing Bit Manipulation (TBM)
instruction set, available on AMD’s BDVER2 processors (Trinity and
Viperfish).
TBM instructions provide instructions implementing individual bit manipulation operations such as isolating, masking, setting, resetting, complementing, and operations on trailing zeros and ones.
While as
normally writes only “pure” 32-bit i386 code
or 64-bit x86-64 code depending on the default configuration,
it also supports writing code to run in real mode or in 16-bit protected
mode code segments. To do this, put a ‘.code16’ or
‘.code16gcc’ directive before the assembly language instructions to
be run in 16-bit mode. You can switch as
to writing
32-bit code with the ‘.code32’ directive or 64-bit code with the
‘.code64’ directive.
‘.code16gcc’ provides experimental support for generating 16-bit code from gcc, and differs from ‘.code16’ in that ‘call’, ‘ret’, ‘enter’, ‘leave’, ‘push’, ‘pop’, ‘pusha’, ‘popa’, ‘pushf’, and ‘popf’ instructions default to 32-bit size. This is so that the stack pointer is manipulated in the same way over function calls, allowing access to function parameters at the same stack offsets as in 32-bit mode. ‘.code16gcc’ also automatically adds address size prefixes where necessary to use the 32-bit addressing modes that gcc generates.
The code which as
generates in 16-bit mode will not
necessarily run on a 16-bit pre-80386 processor. To write code that
runs on such a processor, you must refrain from using any 32-bit
constructs which require as
to output address or operand
size prefixes.
Note that writing 16-bit code instructions by explicitly specifying a prefix or an instruction mnemonic suffix within a 32-bit code section generates different machine instructions than those generated for a 16-bit code segment. In a 32-bit code section, the following code generates the machine opcode bytes ‘66 6a 04’, which pushes the value ‘4’ onto the stack, decrementing ‘%esp’ by 2.
pushw $4
The same code in a 16-bit code section would generate the machine opcode bytes ‘6a 04’ (i.e., without the operand size prefix), which is correct since the processor default operand size is assumed to be 16 bits in a 16-bit code section.
as
may be told to assemble for a particular CPU
(sub-)architecture with the .arch cpu_type
directive. This
directive enables a warning when gas detects an instruction that is not
supported on the CPU specified. The choices for cpu_type are:
‘default’ | ‘push’ | ‘pop’ | |
‘i8086’ | ‘i186’ | ‘i286’ | ‘i386’ |
‘i486’ | ‘i586’ | ‘i686’ | ‘pentium’ |
‘pentiumpro’ | ‘pentiumii’ | ‘pentiumiii’ | ‘pentium4’ |
‘prescott’ | ‘nocona’ | ‘core’ | ‘core2’ |
‘corei7’ | ‘iamcu’ | ||
‘k6’ | ‘k6_2’ | ‘athlon’ | ‘k8’ |
‘amdfam10’ | ‘bdver1’ | ‘bdver2’ | ‘bdver3’ |
‘bdver4’ | ‘znver1’ | ‘znver2’ | ‘znver3’ |
‘znver4’ | ‘znver5’ | ‘btver1’ | ‘btver2’ |
‘generic32’ | |||
‘generic64’ | ‘.cmov’ | ‘.fxsr’ | ‘.mmx’ |
‘.sse’ | ‘.sse2’ | ‘.sse3’ | ‘.sse4a’ |
‘.ssse3’ | ‘.sse4.1’ | ‘.sse4.2’ | ‘.sse4’ |
‘.avx’ | ‘.vmx’ | ‘.smx’ | ‘.ept’ |
‘.clflush’ | ‘.movbe’ | ‘.xsave’ | ‘.xsaveopt’ |
‘.aes’ | ‘.pclmul’ | ‘.fma’ | ‘.fsgsbase’ |
‘.rdrnd’ | ‘.f16c’ | ‘.avx2’ | ‘.bmi2’ |
‘.lzcnt’ | ‘.popcnt’ | ‘.invpcid’ | ‘.vmfunc’ |
‘.monitor’ | ‘.hle’ | ‘.rtm’ | ‘.tsx’ |
‘.lahf_sahf’ | ‘.adx’ | ‘.rdseed’ | ‘.prfchw’ |
‘.smap’ | ‘.mpx’ | ‘.sha’ | ‘.prefetchwt1’ |
‘.clflushopt’ | ‘.xsavec’ | ‘.xsaves’ | ‘.se1’ |
‘.avx512f’ | ‘.avx512cd’ | ‘.avx512er’ | ‘.avx512pf’ |
‘.avx512vl’ | ‘.avx512bw’ | ‘.avx512dq’ | ‘.avx512ifma’ |
‘.avx512vbmi’ | ‘.avx512_4fmaps’ | ‘.avx512_4vnniw’ | |
‘.avx512_vpopcntdq’ | ‘.avx512_vbmi2’ | ‘.avx512_vnni’ | |
‘.avx512_bitalg’ | ‘.avx512_bf16’ | ‘.avx512_vp2intersect’ | |
‘.tdx’ | ‘.avx_vnni’ | ‘.avx512_fp16’ | ‘.avx10.1’ |
‘.clwb’ | ‘.rdpid’ | ‘.ptwrite’ | ‘.ibt’ |
‘.prefetchi’ | ‘.avx_ifma’ | ‘.avx_vnni_int8’ | |
‘.cmpccxadd’ | ‘.wrmsrns’ | ‘.msrlist’ | |
‘.avx_ne_convert’ | ‘.rao_int’ | ‘.fred’ | ‘.lkgs’ |
‘.avx_vnni_int16’ | ‘.sha512’ | ‘.sm3’ | ‘.sm4’ |
‘.pbndkb’ | ‘.user_msr’ | ||
‘.wbnoinvd’ | ‘.pconfig’ | ‘.waitpkg’ | ‘.cldemote’ |
‘.shstk’ | ‘.gfni’ | ‘.vaes’ | ‘.vpclmulqdq’ |
‘.movdiri’ | ‘.movdir64b’ | ‘.enqcmd’ | ‘.tsxldtrk’ |
‘.amx_int8’ | ‘.amx_bf16’ | ‘.amx_fp16’ | |
‘.amx_complex’ | ‘.amx_tile’ | ||
‘.kl’ | ‘.widekl’ | ‘.uintr’ | ‘.hreset’ |
‘.3dnow’ | ‘.3dnowa’ | ‘.sse4a’ | ‘.sse5’ |
‘.syscall’ | ‘.rdtscp’ | ‘.svme’ | |
‘.lwp’ | ‘.fma4’ | ‘.xop’ | ‘.cx16’ |
‘.padlock’ | ‘.clzero’ | ‘.mwaitx’ | ‘.rdpru’ |
‘.mcommit’ | ‘.sev_es’ | ‘.snp’ | ‘.invlpgb’ |
‘.tlbsync’ | ‘.apx_f’ |
Apart from the warning, there are only two other effects on
as
operation; Firstly, if you specify a CPU other than
‘i486’, then shift by one instructions such as ‘sarl $1, %eax’
will automatically use a two byte opcode sequence. The larger three
byte opcode sequence is used on the 486 (and when no architecture is
specified) because it executes faster on the 486. Note that you can
explicitly request the two byte opcode by writing ‘sarl %eax’.
Secondly, if you specify ‘i8086’, ‘i186’, or ‘i286’,
and ‘.code16’ or ‘.code16gcc’ then byte offset
conditional jumps will be promoted when necessary to a two instruction
sequence consisting of a conditional jump of the opposite sense around
an unconditional jump to the target.
Note that the sub-architecture specifiers (starting with a dot) can be prefixed
with no
to revoke the respective (and any dependent) functionality.
Note further that ‘.avx10.<N>’ can be suffixed with a vector length
restriction (‘/256’ or ‘/128’, with ‘/512’ simply restoring the
default). Despite these otherwise being "enabling" specifiers, using these
suffixes will disable all insns with wider vector or mask register operands.
On SVR4-derived platforms, the separator character ‘/’ can be replaced by
‘:’.
Following the CPU architecture (but not a sub-architecture, which are those
starting with a dot), you may specify ‘jumps’ or ‘nojumps’ to
control automatic promotion of conditional jumps. ‘jumps’ is the
default, and enables jump promotion; All external jumps will be of the long
variety, and file-local jumps will be promoted as necessary.
(see Handling of Jump Instructions) ‘nojumps’ leaves external conditional jumps as
byte offset jumps, and warns about file-local conditional jumps that
as
promotes.
Unconditional jumps are treated as for ‘jumps’.
For example
.arch i8086,nojumps
There are some discrepancies between AMD64 and Intel64 ISAs.
The UnixWare assembler, and probably other AT&T derived ix86 Unix assemblers, generate floating point instructions with reversed source and destination registers in certain cases. Unfortunately, gcc and possibly many other programs use this reversed syntax, so we’re stuck with it.
For example
fsub %st,%st(3)
results in ‘%st(3)’ being updated to ‘%st - %st(3)’ rather than the expected ‘%st(3) - %st’. This happens with all the non-commutative arithmetic floating point operations with two register operands where the source register is ‘%st’ and the destination register is ‘%st(i)’.
There is some trickery concerning the ‘mul’ and ‘imul’
instructions that deserves mention. The 16-, 32-, 64- and 128-bit expanding
multiplies (base opcode ‘0xf6’; extension 4 for ‘mul’ and 5
for ‘imul’) can be output only in the one operand form. Thus,
‘imul %ebx, %eax’ does not select the expanding multiply;
the expanding multiply would clobber the ‘%edx’ register, and this
would confuse gcc
output. Use ‘imul %ebx’ to get the
64-bit product in ‘%edx:%eax’.
We have added a two operand form of ‘imul’ when the first operand is an immediate mode expression and the second operand is a register. This is just a shorthand, so that, multiplying ‘%eax’ by 69, for example, can be done with ‘imul $69, %eax’ rather than ‘imul $69, %eax, %eax’.
This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object file as using the “constant GP” model. With this model, it is assumed that the entire program uses a single global pointer (GP) value. Note that this option does not in any fashion affect the machine code emitted by the assembler. All it does is turn on the EF_IA_64_CONS_GP flag in the ELF file header.
This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object file as using the “constant GP without function descriptor” data model. This model is like the “constant GP” model, except that it additionally does away with function descriptors. What this means is that the address of a function refers directly to the function’s code entry-point. Normally, such an address would refer to a function descriptor, which contains both the code entry-point and the GP-value needed by the function. Note that this option does not in any fashion affect the machine code emitted by the assembler. All it does is turn on the EF_IA_64_NOFUNCDESC_CONS_GP flag in the ELF file header.
These options select the data model. The assembler defaults to -mlp64
(LP64 data model).
These options select the byte order. The -mle
option selects little-endian
byte order (default) and -mbe
selects big-endian byte order. Note that
IA-64 machine code always uses little-endian byte order.
Tune for a particular IA-64 CPU, itanium1 or itanium2. The default is itanium2.
These options control what the assembler will do when performing
consistency checks on unwind directives. -munwind-check=warning
will make the assembler issue a warning when an unwind directive check
fails. This is the default. -munwind-check=error
will make the
assembler issue an error when an unwind directive check fails.
These options control what the assembler will do when the ‘hint.b’
instruction is used. -mhint.b=ok
will make the assembler accept
‘hint.b’. -mint.b=warning
will make the assembler issue a
warning when ‘hint.b’ is used. -mhint.b=error
will make
the assembler treat ‘hint.b’ as an error, which is the default.
These options turn on dependency violation checking.
This option instructs the assembler to automatically insert stop bits where necessary to remove dependency violations. This is the default mode.
This option turns off dependency violation checking.
This turns on debug output intended to help tracking down bugs in the dependency violation checker.
This is a shortcut for -xnone -xdebug.
This is a shortcut for -xexplicit -xdebug.
The assembler syntax closely follows the IA-64 Assembly Language Reference Guide.
‘//’ is the line comment token.
‘;’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The 128 integer registers are referred to as ‘rn’. The 128 floating-point registers are referred to as ‘fn’. The 128 application registers are referred to as ‘arn’. The 128 control registers are referred to as ‘crn’. The 64 one-bit predicate registers are referred to as ‘pn’. The 8 branch registers are referred to as ‘bn’. In addition, the assembler defines a number of aliases: ‘gp’ (‘r1’), ‘sp’ (‘r12’), ‘rp’ (‘b0’), ‘ret0’ (‘r8’), ‘ret1’ (‘r9’), ‘ret2’ (‘r10’), ‘ret3’ (‘r9’), ‘fargn’ (‘f8+n’), and ‘fretn’ (‘f8+n’).
For convenience, the assembler also defines aliases for all named application and control registers. For example, ‘ar.bsp’ refers to the register backing store pointer (‘ar17’). Similarly, ‘cr.eoi’ refers to the end-of-interrupt register (‘cr67’).
The assembler defines bit masks for each of the bits in the IA-64 processor status register. For example, ‘psr.ic’ corresponds to a value of 0x2000. These masks are primarily intended for use with the ‘ssm’/‘sum’ and ‘rsm’/‘rum’ instructions, but they can be used anywhere else where an integer constant is expected.
In addition to the standard IA-64 relocations, the following relocations are
implemented by as
:
@slotcount(V)
Convert the address offset V into a slot count. This pseudo function is available only on VMS. The expression V must be known at assembly time: it can’t reference undefined symbols or symbols in different sections.
For detailed information on the IA-64 machine instruction set, see the IA-64 Architecture Handbook.
The Ubicom IP2K version of as
has a few machine
dependent options:
-mip2022ext
¶as
can assemble the extended IP2022 instructions, but
it will only do so if this is specifically allowed via this command
line option.
-mip2022
¶This option restores the assembler’s default behaviour of not permitting the extended IP2022 instructions to be assembled.
The presence of a ‘;’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The IP2K assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
-mmultiply-enabled
¶Enable multiply instructions.
-mdivide-enabled
¶Enable divide instructions.
-mbarrel-shift-enabled
¶Enable barrel-shift instructions.
-msign-extend-enabled
¶Enable sign extend instructions.
-muser-enabled
¶Enable user defined instructions.
-micache-enabled
¶Enable instruction cache related CSRs.
-mdcache-enabled
¶Enable data cache related CSRs.
-mbreak-enabled
¶Enable break instructions.
-mall-enabled
¶Enable all instructions and CSRs.
LM32 has 32 x 32-bit general purpose registers ‘r0’, ‘r1’, ... ‘r31’.
The following aliases are defined: ‘gp’ - ‘r26’, ‘fp’ - ‘r27’, ‘sp’ - ‘r28’, ‘ra’ - ‘r29’, ‘ea’ - ‘r30’, ‘ba’ - ‘r31’.
LM32 has the following Control and Status Registers (CSRs).
IE
Interrupt enable.
IM
Interrupt mask.
IP
Interrupt pending.
ICC
Instruction cache control.
DCC
Data cache control.
CC
Cycle counter.
CFG
Configuration.
EBA
Exception base address.
DC
Debug control.
DEBA
Debug exception base address.
JTX
JTAG transmit.
JRX
JTAG receive.
BP0
Breakpoint 0.
BP1
Breakpoint 1.
BP2
Breakpoint 2.
BP3
Breakpoint 3.
WP0
Watchpoint 0.
WP1
Watchpoint 1.
WP2
Watchpoint 2.
WP3
Watchpoint 3.
The assembler supports several modifiers when using relocatable addresses in LM32 instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
modifier(relocatable-expression)
lo
This modifier allows you to use bits 0 through 15 of an address expression as 16 bit relocatable expression.
hi
This modifier allows you to use bits 16 through 23 of an address expression as 16 bit relocatable expression.
For example
ori r4, r4, lo(sym+10) orhi r4, r4, hi(sym+10)
gp
This modified creates a 16-bit relocatable expression that is the offset of the symbol from the global pointer.
mva r4, gp(sym)
got
This modifier places a symbol in the GOT and creates a 16-bit relocatable expression that is the offset into the GOT of this symbol.
lw r4, (gp+got(sym))
gotofflo16
This modifier allows you to use the bits 0 through 15 of an address which is an offset from the GOT.
gotoffhi16
This modifier allows you to use the bits 16 through 31 of an address which is an offset from the GOT.
orhi r4, r4, gotoffhi16(lsym) addi r4, r4, gotofflo16(lsym)
The presence of a ‘#’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line. Note that if a line starts with a ‘#’ character then it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
A semicolon (‘;’) can be used to separate multiple statements on the same line.
For detailed information on the LM32 machine instruction set, see http://www.latticesemi.com/products/intellectualproperty/ipcores/mico32/.
as
implements all the standard LM32 opcodes.
Labels followed by ‘::’ are extern symbols.
--dump-insn
¶Dump the full list of instructions.
-march=
¶The assembler supports the following architectures: kv3-1, kv3-2.
--check-resources
¶Check that each bundle does not use more resources than available. This is the default.
--no-check-resources
¶Do not check that each bundle does not use more resources than available.
--generate-illegal-code
¶For debugging purposes only. In order to properly work, the bundle is sorted with respect to the issues it uses. If this option is turned on the assembler will not sort the bundle instructions and illegal bundles might be formed unless they were properly sorted by hand.
--dump-table
¶Dump the table of opcodes.
--mpic | --mPIC
¶Generate position independent code.
--mnopic
¶Generate position dependent code.
-m32
¶Generate 32-bits code.
--all-sfr
¶This switch enables the register class "system register". This register class is used when performing system validation and allows the full class of system registers to be used even on instructions that are only valid with some specific system registers.
--diagnostics
¶Print multi-line errors. This is the default.
--no-diagnostics
¶Print succinct diagnostics on one line.
.align ALIGNMENT
¶Pad with NOPs until the next boundary with the required ALIGNMENT.
.dword
¶Declare a double-word-sized (8 bytes) constant.
.endp [PROC]
¶This directive marks the end of the procedure PROC. The name of the procedure is always ignored (it is only here as a visual indicator).
.proc NAME ... .endp NAME
is equivalent to the more traditional
.type NAME, @function ... .size NAME,.-NAME
.file
¶This directive is only supported when producing ELF files.
see .file
for details.
.loc FILENO LINENO
¶This directive is only supported when producing ELF files.
see .line
for details.
.proc PROC
¶This directive marks the start of procedure, the name of the procedure PROC is
mandatory and all .proc
directive should be matched by exactly one
.endp
directive.
.word
¶Declare a word-sized (4 bytes) constant.
as
can assemble code for several different members of
the Renesas M32C family. Normally the default is to assemble code for
the M16C microprocessor. The -m32c
option may be used to
change the default to the M32C microprocessor.
The Renesas M32C version of as
has these
machine-dependent options:
-m32c
¶Assemble M32C instructions.
-m16c
¶Assemble M16C instructions (default).
-relax
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
-h-tick-hex
Support H’00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
The assembler supports several modifiers when using symbol addresses in M32C instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
%modifier(symbol)
%dsp8
%dsp16
These modifiers override the assembler’s assumptions about how big a symbol’s address is. Normally, when it sees an operand like ‘sym[a0]’ it assumes ‘sym’ may require the widest displacement field (16 bits for ‘-m16c’, 24 bits for ‘-m32c’). These modifiers tell it to assume the address will fit in an 8 or 16 bit (respectively) unsigned displacement. Note that, of course, if it doesn’t actually fit you will get linker errors. Example:
mov.w %dsp8(sym)[a0],r1 mov.b #0,%dsp8(sym)[a0]
%hi8
This modifier allows you to load bits 16 through 23 of a 24 bit address into an 8 bit register. This is useful with, for example, the M16C ‘smovf’ instruction, which expects a 20 bit address in ‘r1h’ and ‘a0’. Example:
mov.b #%hi8(sym),r1h mov.w #%lo16(sym),a0 smovf.b
%lo16
Likewise, this modifier allows you to load bits 0 through 15 of a 24 bit address into a 16 bit register.
%hi16
This modifier allows you to load bits 16 through 31 of a 32 bit address into a 16 bit register. While the M32C family only has 24 bits of address space, it does support addresses in pairs of 16 bit registers (like ‘a1a0’ for the ‘lde’ instruction). This modifier is for loading the upper half in such cases. Example:
mov.w #%hi16(sym),a1 mov.w #%lo16(sym),a0 ... lde.w [a1a0],r1
The presence of a ‘;’ character on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘|’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The Renesas M32R version of as
has a few machine
dependent options:
-m32rx
¶as
can assemble code for several different members of the
Renesas M32R family. Normally the default is to assemble code for
the M32R microprocessor. This option may be used to change the default
to the M32RX microprocessor, which adds some more instructions to the
basic M32R instruction set, and some additional parameters to some of
the original instructions.
-m32r2
¶This option changes the target processor to the M32R2 microprocessor.
-m32r
¶This option can be used to restore the assembler’s default behaviour of assembling for the M32R microprocessor. This can be useful if the default has been changed by a previous command-line option.
-little
¶This option tells the assembler to produce little-endian code and data. The default is dependent upon how the toolchain was configured.
-EL
¶This is a synonym for -little.
-big
¶This option tells the assembler to produce big-endian code and data.
-EB
¶This is a synonym for -big.
-KPIC
¶This option specifies that the output of the assembler should be marked as position-independent code (PIC).
-parallel
¶This option tells the assembler to attempts to combine two sequential instructions into a single, parallel instruction, where it is legal to do so.
-no-parallel
¶This option disables a previously enabled -parallel option.
-no-bitinst
¶This option disables the support for the extended bit-field instructions provided by the M32R2. If this support needs to be re-enabled the -bitinst switch can be used to restore it.
-O
¶This option tells the assembler to attempt to optimize the instructions that it produces. This includes filling delay slots and converting sequential instructions into parallel ones. This option implies -parallel.
-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts
¶Instructs as
to produce warning messages when
questionable parallel instructions are encountered. This option is
enabled by default, but gcc
disables it when it invokes
as
directly. Questionable instructions are those whose
behaviour would be different if they were executed sequentially. For
example the code fragment ‘mv r1, r2 || mv r3, r1’ produces a
different result from ‘mv r1, r2 \n mv r3, r1’ since the former
moves r1 into r3 and then r2 into r1, whereas the later moves r2 into r1
and r3.
-Wp
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts option.
-no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts
¶Instructs as
not to produce warning messages when
questionable parallel instructions are encountered.
-Wnp
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts option.
-ignore-parallel-conflicts
¶This option tells the assembler’s to stop checking parallel instructions for constraint violations. This ability is provided for hardware vendors testing chip designs and should not be used under normal circumstances.
-no-ignore-parallel-conflicts
¶This option restores the assembler’s default behaviour of checking parallel instructions to detect constraint violations.
-Ip
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -ignore-parallel-conflicts option.
-nIp
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -no-ignore-parallel-conflicts option.
-warn-unmatched-high
¶This option tells the assembler to produce a warning message if a
.high
pseudo op is encountered without a matching .low
pseudo op. The presence of such an unmatched pseudo op usually
indicates a programming error.
-no-warn-unmatched-high
¶Disables a previously enabled -warn-unmatched-high option.
-Wuh
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -warn-unmatched-high option.
-Wnuh
¶This is a shorter synonym for the -no-warn-unmatched-high option.
The Renesas M32R version of as
has a few architecture
specific directives:
low expression
¶The low
directive computes the value of its expression and
places the lower 16-bits of the result into the immediate-field of the
instruction. For example:
or3 r0, r0, #low(0x12345678) ; compute r0 = r0 | 0x5678 add3, r0, r0, #low(fred) ; compute r0 = r0 + low 16-bits of address of fred
high expression
¶The high
directive computes the value of its expression and
places the upper 16-bits of the result into the immediate-field of the
instruction. For example:
seth r0, #high(0x12345678) ; compute r0 = 0x12340000 seth, r0, #high(fred) ; compute r0 = upper 16-bits of address of fred
shigh expression
¶The shigh
directive is very similar to the high
directive. It also computes the value of its expression and places
the upper 16-bits of the result into the immediate-field of the
instruction. The difference is that shigh
also checks to see
if the lower 16-bits could be interpreted as a signed number, and if
so it assumes that a borrow will occur from the upper-16 bits. To
compensate for this the shigh
directive pre-biases the upper
16 bit value by adding one to it. For example:
For example:
seth r0, #shigh(0x12345678) ; compute r0 = 0x12340000 seth r0, #shigh(0x00008000) ; compute r0 = 0x00010000
In the second example the lower 16-bits are 0x8000. If these are treated as a signed value and sign extended to 32-bits then the value becomes 0xffff8000. If this value is then added to 0x00010000 then the result is 0x00008000.
This behaviour is to allow for the different semantics of the
or3
and add3
instructions. The or3
instruction
treats its 16-bit immediate argument as unsigned whereas the
add3
treats its 16-bit immediate as a signed value. So for
example:
seth r0, #shigh(0x00008000) add3 r0, r0, #low(0x00008000)
Produces the correct result in r0, whereas:
seth r0, #shigh(0x00008000) or3 r0, r0, #low(0x00008000)
Stores 0xffff8000 into r0.
Note - the shigh
directive does not know where in the assembly
source code the lower 16-bits of the value are going set, so it cannot
check to make sure that an or3
instruction is being used rather
than an add3
instruction. It is up to the programmer to make
sure that correct directives are used.
.m32r
¶The directive performs a similar thing as the -m32r command line option. It tells the assembler to only accept M32R instructions from now on. An instructions from later M32R architectures are refused.
.m32rx
¶The directive performs a similar thing as the -m32rx command line option. It tells the assembler to start accepting the extra instructions in the M32RX ISA as well as the ordinary M32R ISA.
.m32r2
¶The directive performs a similar thing as the -m32r2 command line option. It tells the assembler to start accepting the extra instructions in the M32R2 ISA as well as the ordinary M32R ISA.
.little
¶The directive performs a similar thing as the -little command line option. It tells the assembler to start producing little-endian code and data. This option should be used with care as producing mixed-endian binary files is fraught with danger.
.big
¶The directive performs a similar thing as the -big command line option. It tells the assembler to start producing big-endian code and data. This option should be used with care as producing mixed-endian binary files is fraught with danger.
There are several warning and error messages that can be produced by
as
which are specific to the M32R:
output of 1st instruction is the same as an input to 2nd instruction - is this intentional ?
This message is only produced if warnings for explicit parallel conflicts have been enabled. It indicates that the assembler has encountered a parallel instruction in which the destination register of the left hand instruction is used as an input register in the right hand instruction. For example in this code fragment ‘mv r1, r2 || neg r3, r1’ register r1 is the destination of the move instruction and the input to the neg instruction.
output of 2nd instruction is the same as an input to 1st instruction - is this intentional ?
This message is only produced if warnings for explicit parallel conflicts have been enabled. It indicates that the assembler has encountered a parallel instruction in which the destination register of the right hand instruction is used as an input register in the left hand instruction. For example in this code fragment ‘mv r1, r2 || neg r2, r3’ register r2 is the destination of the neg instruction and the input to the move instruction.
instruction ‘...’ is for the M32RX only
This message is produced when the assembler encounters an instruction which is only supported by the M32Rx processor, and the ‘-m32rx’ command-line flag has not been specified to allow assembly of such instructions.
unknown instruction ‘...’
This message is produced when the assembler encounters an instruction which it does not recognize.
only the NOP instruction can be issued in parallel on the m32r
This message is produced when the assembler encounters a parallel instruction which does not involve a NOP instruction and the ‘-m32rx’ command-line flag has not been specified. Only the M32Rx processor is able to execute two instructions in parallel.
instruction ‘...’ cannot be executed in parallel.
This message is produced when the assembler encounters a parallel instruction which is made up of one or two instructions which cannot be executed in parallel.
Instructions share the same execution pipeline
This message is produced when the assembler encounters a parallel instruction whose components both use the same execution pipeline.
Instructions write to the same destination register.
This message is produced when the assembler encounters a parallel instruction where both components attempt to modify the same register. For example these code fragments will produce this message: ‘mv r1, r2 || neg r1, r3’ ‘jl r0 || mv r14, r1’ ‘st r2, @-r1 || mv r1, r3’ ‘mv r1, r2 || ld r0, @r1+’ ‘cmp r1, r2 || addx r3, r4’ (Both write to the condition bit)
The Motorola 680x0 version of as
has a few machine
dependent options:
This option specifies a target architecture. The following
architectures are recognized:
68000
,
68010
,
68020
,
68030
,
68040
,
68060
,
cpu32
,
isaa
,
isaaplus
,
isab
,
isac
and
cfv4e
.
This option specifies a target cpu. When used in conjunction with the -march option, the cpu must be within the specified architecture. Also, the generic features of the architecture are used for instruction generation, rather than those of the specific chip.
Enable or disable various architecture specific features. If a chip or architecture by default supports an option (for instance -march=isaaplus includes the -mdiv option), explicitly disabling the option will override the default.
You can use the ‘-l’ option to shorten the size of references to undefined
symbols. If you do not use the ‘-l’ option, references to undefined
symbols are wide enough for a full long
(32 bits). (Since
as
cannot know where these symbols end up, as
can
only allocate space for the linker to fill in later. Since as
does not know how far away these symbols are, it allocates as much space as it
can.) If you use this option, the references are only one word wide (16 bits).
This may be useful if you want the object file to be as small as possible, and
you know that the relevant symbols are always less than 17 bits away.
For some configurations, especially those where the compiler normally does not prepend an underscore to the names of user variables, the assembler requires a ‘%’ before any use of a register name. This is intended to let the assembler distinguish between C variables and functions named ‘a0’ through ‘a7’, and so on. The ‘%’ is always accepted, but is not required for certain configurations, notably ‘sun3’. The ‘--register-prefix-optional’ option may be used to permit omitting the ‘%’ even for configurations for which it is normally required. If this is done, it will generally be impossible to refer to C variables and functions with the same names as register names.
Normally the character ‘|’ is treated as a comment character, which means that it can not be used in expressions. The ‘--bitwise-or’ option turns ‘|’ into a normal character. In this mode, you must either use C style comments, or start comments with a ‘#’ character at the beginning of a line.
If you use an addressing mode with a base register without specifying
the size, as
will normally use the full 32 bit value.
For example, the addressing mode ‘%a0@(%d0)’ is equivalent to
‘%a0@(%d0:l)’. You may use the ‘--base-size-default-16’
option to tell as
to default to using the 16 bit value.
In this case, ‘%a0@(%d0)’ is equivalent to ‘%a0@(%d0:w)’.
You may use the ‘--base-size-default-32’ option to restore the
default behaviour.
If you use an addressing mode with a displacement, and the value of the
displacement is not known, as
will normally assume that
the value is 32 bits. For example, if the symbol ‘disp’ has not
been defined, as
will assemble the addressing mode
‘%a0@(disp,%d0)’ as though ‘disp’ is a 32 bit value. You may
use the ‘--disp-size-default-16’ option to tell as
to instead assume that the displacement is 16 bits. In this case,
as
will assemble ‘%a0@(disp,%d0)’ as though
‘disp’ is a 16 bit value. You may use the
‘--disp-size-default-32’ option to restore the default behaviour.
Always keep branches PC-relative. In the M680x0 architecture all branches
are defined as PC-relative. However, on some processors they are limited
to word displacements maximum. When as
needs a long branch
that is not available, it normally emits an absolute jump instead. This
option disables this substitution. When this option is given and no long
branches are available, only word branches will be emitted. An error
message will be generated if a word branch cannot reach its target. This
option has no effect on 68020 and other processors that have long branches.
see Branch Improvement.
as
can assemble code for several different members of the
Motorola 680x0 family. The default depends upon how as
was configured when it was built; normally, the default is to assemble
code for the 68020 microprocessor. The following options may be used to
change the default. These options control which instructions and
addressing modes are permitted. The members of the 680x0 family are
very similar. For detailed information about the differences, see the
Motorola manuals.
Assemble for the 68000. ‘-m68008’, ‘-m68302’, and so on are synonyms for ‘-m68000’, since the chips are the same from the point of view of the assembler.
Assemble for the 68010.
Assemble for the 68020. This is normally the default.
Assemble for the 68030.
Assemble for the 68040.
Assemble for the 68060.
Assemble for the CPU32 family of chips.
Assemble for the ColdFire family of chips.
Assemble 68881 floating point instructions. This is the default for the 68020, 68030, and the CPU32. The 68040 and 68060 always support floating point instructions.
Do not assemble 68881 floating point instructions. This is the default for 68000 and the 68010. The 68040 and 68060 always support floating point instructions, even if this option is used.
Assemble 68851 MMU instructions. This is the default for the 68020, 68030, and 68060. The 68040 accepts a somewhat different set of MMU instructions; ‘-m68851’ and ‘-m68040’ should not be used together.
Do not assemble 68851 MMU instructions. This is the default for the 68000, 68010, and the CPU32. The 68040 accepts a somewhat different set of MMU instructions.
This syntax for the Motorola 680x0 was developed at MIT.
The 680x0 version of as
uses instructions names and
syntax compatible with the Sun assembler. Intervening periods are
ignored; for example, ‘movl’ is equivalent to ‘mov.l’.
In the following table apc stands for any of the address registers (‘%a0’ through ‘%a7’), the program counter (‘%pc’), the zero-address relative to the program counter (‘%zpc’), a suppressed address register (‘%za0’ through ‘%za7’), or it may be omitted entirely. The use of size means one of ‘w’ or ‘l’, and it may be omitted, along with the leading colon, unless a scale is also specified. The use of scale means one of ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, or ‘8’, and it may always be omitted along with the leading colon.
The following addressing modes are understood:
‘#number’
‘%d0’ through ‘%d7’
‘%a0’ through ‘%a7’
‘%a7’ is also known as ‘%sp’, i.e., the Stack Pointer. %a6
is also known as ‘%fp’, the Frame Pointer.
‘%a0@’ through ‘%a7@’
‘%a0@+’ through ‘%a7@+’
‘%a0@-’ through ‘%a7@-’
‘apc@(number)’
‘apc@(number,register:size:scale)’
The number may be omitted.
‘apc@(number)@(onumber,register:size:scale)’
The onumber or the register, but not both, may be omitted.
‘apc@(number,register:size:scale)@(onumber)’
The number may be omitted. Omitting the register produces the Postindex addressing mode.
‘symbol’, or ‘digits’, optionally followed by ‘:b’, ‘:w’, or ‘:l’.
The standard Motorola syntax for this chip differs from the syntax
already discussed (see Syntax). as
can
accept Motorola syntax for operands, even if MIT syntax is used for
other operands in the same instruction. The two kinds of syntax are
fully compatible.
In the following table apc stands for any of the address registers (‘%a0’ through ‘%a7’), the program counter (‘%pc’), the zero-address relative to the program counter (‘%zpc’), or a suppressed address register (‘%za0’ through ‘%za7’). The use of size means one of ‘w’ or ‘l’, and it may always be omitted along with the leading dot. The use of scale means one of ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, or ‘8’, and it may always be omitted along with the leading asterisk.
The following additional addressing modes are understood:
‘(%a0)’ through ‘(%a7)’
‘%a7’ is also known as ‘%sp’, i.e., the Stack Pointer. %a6
is also known as ‘%fp’, the Frame Pointer.
‘(%a0)+’ through ‘(%a7)+’
‘-(%a0)’ through ‘-(%a7)’
‘number(%a0)’ through ‘number(%a7)’, or ‘number(%pc)’.
The number may also appear within the parentheses, as in ‘(number,%a0)’. When used with the pc, the number may be omitted (with an address register, omitting the number produces Address Register Indirect mode).
‘number(apc,register.size*scale)’
The number may be omitted, or it may appear within the parentheses. The apc may be omitted. The register and the apc may appear in either order. If both apc and register are address registers, and the size and scale are omitted, then the first register is taken as the base register, and the second as the index register.
‘([number,apc],register.size*scale,onumber)’
The onumber, or the register, or both, may be omitted. Either the number or the apc may be omitted, but not both.
‘([number,apc,register.size*scale],onumber)’
The number, or the apc, or the register, or any two of them, may be omitted. The onumber may be omitted. The register and the apc may appear in either order. If both apc and register are address registers, and the size and scale are omitted, then the first register is taken as the base register, and the second as the index register.
Packed decimal (P) format floating literals are not supported. Feel free to add the code!
The floating point formats generated by directives are these.
.float
¶Single
precision floating point constants.
.double
¶Double
precision floating point constants.
.extend
¶.ldouble
Extended
precision (long double
) floating point constants.
In order to be compatible with the Sun assembler the 680x0 assembler understands the following directives.
.data1
¶This directive is identical to a .data 1
directive.
.data2
¶This directive is identical to a .data 2
directive.
.even
¶This directive is a special case of the .align
directive; it
aligns the output to an even byte boundary.
.skip
¶This directive is identical to a .space
directive.
.arch name
¶Select the target architecture and extension features. Valid values for name are the same as for the -march command-line option. This directive cannot be specified after any instructions have been assembled. If it is given multiple times, or in conjunction with the -march option, all uses must be for the same architecture and extension set.
.cpu name
¶Select the target cpu. Valid values for name are the same as for the -mcpu command-line option. This directive cannot be specified after any instructions have been assembled. If it is given multiple times, or in conjunction with the -mopt option, all uses must be for the same cpu.
Certain pseudo opcodes are permitted for branch instructions. They expand to the shortest branch instruction that reach the target. Generally these mnemonics are made by substituting ‘j’ for ‘b’ at the start of a Motorola mnemonic.
The following table summarizes the pseudo-operations. A *
flags
cases that are more fully described after the table:
Displacement +------------------------------------------------------------ | 68020 68000/10, not PC-relative OK Pseudo-Op |BYTE WORD LONG ABSOLUTE LONG JUMP ** +------------------------------------------------------------ jbsr |bsrs bsrw bsrl jsr jra |bras braw bral jmp * jXX |bXXs bXXw bXXl bNXs;jmp * dbXX | N/A dbXXw dbXX;bras;bral dbXX;bras;jmp fjXX | N/A fbXXw fbXXl N/A XX: condition NX: negative of condition XX
*
—see full description below
**
—this expansion mode is disallowed by ‘--pcrel’
jbsr
jra
These are the simplest jump pseudo-operations; they always map to one particular machine instruction, depending on the displacement to the branch target. This instruction will be a byte or word branch is that is sufficient. Otherwise, a long branch will be emitted if available. If no long branches are available and the ‘--pcrel’ option is not given, an absolute long jump will be emitted instead. If no long branches are available, the ‘--pcrel’ option is given, and a word branch cannot reach the target, an error message is generated.
In addition to standard branch operands, as
allows these
pseudo-operations to have all operands that are allowed for jsr and jmp,
substituting these instructions if the operand given is not valid for a
branch instruction.
jXX
Here, ‘jXX’ stands for an entire family of pseudo-operations, where XX is a conditional branch or condition-code test. The full list of pseudo-ops in this family is:
jhi jls jcc jcs jne jeq jvc jvs jpl jmi jge jlt jgt jle
Usually, each of these pseudo-operations expands to a single branch
instruction. However, if a word branch is not sufficient, no long branches
are available, and the ‘--pcrel’ option is not given, as
issues a longer code fragment in terms of NX, the opposite condition
to XX. For example, under these conditions:
jXX foo
gives
bNXs oof jmp foo oof:
dbXX
The full family of pseudo-operations covered here is
dbhi dbls dbcc dbcs dbne dbeq dbvc dbvs dbpl dbmi dbge dblt dbgt dble dbf dbra dbt
Motorola ‘dbXX’ instructions allow word displacements only. When
a word displacement is sufficient, each of these pseudo-operations expands
to the corresponding Motorola instruction. When a word displacement is not
sufficient and long branches are available, when the source reads
‘dbXX foo’, as
emits
dbXX oo1 bras oo2 oo1:bral foo oo2:
If, however, long branches are not available and the ‘--pcrel’ option is
not given, as
emits
dbXX oo1 bras oo2 oo1:jmp foo oo2:
fjXX
This family includes
fjne fjeq fjge fjlt fjgt fjle fjf fjt fjgl fjgle fjnge fjngl fjngle fjngt fjnle fjnlt fjoge fjogl fjogt fjole fjolt fjor fjseq fjsf fjsne fjst fjueq fjuge fjugt fjule fjult fjun
Each of these pseudo-operations always expands to a single Motorola coprocessor branch instruction, word or long. All Motorola coprocessor branch instructions allow both word and long displacements.
Line comments are introduced by the ‘|’ character appearing anywhere on a line, unless the --bitwise-or command-line option has been specified.
An asterisk (‘*’) as the first character on a line marks the start of a line comment as well.
A hash character (‘#’) as the first character on a line also marks the start of a line comment, but in this case it could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing). If the hash character appears elsewhere on a line it is used to introduce an immediate value. (This is for compatibility with Sun’s assembler).
Multiple statements on the same line can appear if they are separated by the ‘;’ character.
The Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 version of as
have a few machine
dependent options.
-m68hc11
¶This option switches the assembler into the M68HC11 mode. In this mode, the assembler only accepts 68HC11 operands and mnemonics. It produces code for the 68HC11.
-m68hc12
¶This option switches the assembler into the M68HC12 mode. In this mode, the assembler also accepts 68HC12 operands and mnemonics. It produces code for the 68HC12. A few 68HC11 instructions are replaced by some 68HC12 instructions as recommended by Motorola specifications.
-m68hcs12
¶This option switches the assembler into the M68HCS12 mode. This mode is similar to ‘-m68hc12’ but specifies to assemble for the 68HCS12 series. The only difference is on the assembling of the ‘movb’ and ‘movw’ instruction when a PC-relative operand is used.
-mm9s12x
¶This option switches the assembler into the M9S12X mode. This mode is similar to ‘-m68hc12’ but specifies to assemble for the S12X series which is a superset of the HCS12.
-mm9s12xg
¶This option switches the assembler into the XGATE mode for the RISC co-processor featured on some S12X-family chips.
--xgate-ramoffset
¶This option instructs the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into XGATE address space.
-mshort
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 16-bit integer ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions. This is the default.
-mlong
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 32-bit integer ABI.
-mshort-double
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 32-bit float ABI. This is the default.
-mlong-double
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 64-bit float ABI.
--strict-direct-mode
¶You can use the ‘--strict-direct-mode’ option to disable
the automatic translation of direct page mode addressing into
extended mode when the instruction does not support direct mode.
For example, the ‘clr’ instruction does not support direct page
mode addressing. When it is used with the direct page mode,
as
will ignore it and generate an absolute addressing.
This option prevents as
from doing this, and the wrong
usage of the direct page mode will raise an error.
--short-branches
¶The ‘--short-branches’ option turns off the translation of
relative branches into absolute branches when the branch offset is
out of range. By default as
transforms the relative
branch (‘bsr’, ‘bgt’, ‘bge’, ‘beq’, ‘bne’,
‘ble’, ‘blt’, ‘bhi’, ‘bcc’, ‘bls’,
‘bcs’, ‘bmi’, ‘bvs’, ‘bvs’, ‘bra’) into
an absolute branch when the offset is out of the -128 .. 127 range.
In that case, the ‘bsr’ instruction is translated into a
‘jsr’, the ‘bra’ instruction is translated into a
‘jmp’ and the conditional branches instructions are inverted and
followed by a ‘jmp’. This option disables these translations
and as
will generate an error if a relative branch
is out of range. This option does not affect the optimization
associated to the ‘jbra’, ‘jbsr’ and ‘jbXX’ pseudo opcodes.
--force-long-branches
¶The ‘--force-long-branches’ option forces the translation of relative branches into absolute branches. This option does not affect the optimization associated to the ‘jbra’, ‘jbsr’ and ‘jbXX’ pseudo opcodes.
--print-insn-syntax
¶You can use the ‘--print-insn-syntax’ option to obtain the syntax description of the instruction when an error is detected.
--print-opcodes
¶The ‘--print-opcodes’ option prints the list of all the
instructions with their syntax. The first item of each line
represents the instruction name and the rest of the line indicates
the possible operands for that instruction. The list is printed
in alphabetical order. Once the list is printed as
exits.
--generate-example
¶The ‘--generate-example’ option is similar to ‘--print-opcodes’ but it generates an example for each instruction instead.
In the M68HC11 syntax, the instruction name comes first and it may
be followed by one or several operands (up to three). Operands are
separated by comma (‘,’). In the normal mode,
as
will complain if too many operands are specified for
a given instruction. In the MRI mode (turned on with ‘-M’ option),
it will treat them as comments. Example:
inx lda #23 bset 2,x #4 brclr *bot #8 foo
The presence of a ‘;’ character or a ‘!’ character anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
A ‘*’ or a ‘#’ character at the start of a line also introduces a line comment, but these characters do not work elsewhere on the line. If the first character of the line is a ‘#’ then as well as starting a comment, the line could also be logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The M68HC11 assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
The following addressing modes are understood for 68HC11 and 68HC12:
‘#number’
‘number,X’, ‘number,Y’
The number may be omitted in which case 0 is assumed.
‘*symbol’, or ‘*digits’
‘symbol’, or ‘digits’
The M68HC12 has other more complex addressing modes. All of them are supported and they are represented below:
‘number,reg’
The number may be omitted in which case 0 is assumed. The register can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘SP’ or ‘PC’. The assembler will use the smaller post-byte definition according to the constant value (5-bit constant offset, 9-bit constant offset or 16-bit constant offset). If the constant is not known by the assembler it will use the 16-bit constant offset post-byte and the value will be resolved at link time.
‘[number,reg]’
The register can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘SP’ or ‘PC’.
‘number,-reg’ ‘number,+reg’ ‘number,reg-’ ‘number,reg+’
The number must be in the range ‘-8’..‘+8’ and must not be 0. The register can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘SP’ or ‘PC’.
‘acc,reg’
The accumulator register can be either ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘D’. The register can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘SP’ or ‘PC’.
‘[D,reg]’
The register can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘SP’ or ‘PC’.
For example:
ldab 1024,sp ldd [10,x] orab 3,+x stab -2,y- ldx a,pc sty [d,sp]
The assembler supports several modifiers when using symbol addresses in 68HC11 and 68HC12 instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
%modifier(symbol)
%addr
¶This modifier indicates to the assembler and linker to use the 16-bit physical address corresponding to the symbol. This is intended to be used on memory window systems to map a symbol in the memory bank window. If the symbol is in a memory expansion part, the physical address corresponds to the symbol address within the memory bank window. If the symbol is not in a memory expansion part, this is the symbol address (using or not using the %addr modifier has no effect in that case).
%page
This modifier indicates to use the memory page number corresponding to the symbol. If the symbol is in a memory expansion part, its page number is computed by the linker as a number used to map the page containing the symbol in the memory bank window. If the symbol is not in a memory expansion part, the page number is 0.
%hi
This modifier indicates to use the 8-bit high part of the physical address of the symbol.
%lo
This modifier indicates to use the 8-bit low part of the physical address of the symbol.
For example a 68HC12 call to a function ‘foo_example’ stored in memory expansion part could be written as follows:
call %addr(foo_example),%page(foo_example)
and this is equivalent to
call foo_example
And for 68HC11 it could be written as follows:
ldab #%page(foo_example) stab _page_switch jsr %addr(foo_example)
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 version of as
have the following
specific assembler directives:
.relax
¶The relax directive is used by the ‘GNU Compiler’ to emit a specific relocation to mark a group of instructions for linker relaxation. The sequence of instructions within the group must be known to the linker so that relaxation can be performed.
.mode [mshort|mlong|mshort-double|mlong-double]
¶This directive specifies the ABI. It overrides the ‘-mshort’, ‘-mlong’, ‘-mshort-double’ and ‘-mlong-double’ options.
.far symbol
¶This directive marks the symbol as a ‘far’ symbol meaning that it uses a ‘call/rtc’ calling convention as opposed to ‘jsr/rts’. During a final link, the linker will identify references to the ‘far’ symbol and will verify the proper calling convention.
.interrupt symbol
¶This directive marks the symbol as an interrupt entry point. This information is then used by the debugger to correctly unwind the frame across interrupts.
.xrefb symbol
¶This directive is defined for compatibility with the ‘Specification for Motorola 8 and 16-Bit Assembly Language Input Standard’ and is ignored.
Packed decimal (P) format floating literals are not supported. Feel free to add the code!
The floating point formats generated by directives are these.
.float
¶Single
precision floating point constants.
.double
¶Double
precision floating point constants.
.extend
¶.ldouble
Extended
precision (long double
) floating point constants.
Certain pseudo opcodes are permitted for branch instructions. They expand to the shortest branch instruction that reach the target. Generally these mnemonics are made by prepending ‘j’ to the start of Motorola mnemonic. These pseudo opcodes are not affected by the ‘--short-branches’ or ‘--force-long-branches’ options.
The following table summarizes the pseudo-operations.
Displacement Width +-------------------------------------------------------------+ | Options | | --short-branches --force-long-branches | +--------------------------+----------------------------------+ Op |BYTE WORD | BYTE WORD | +--------------------------+----------------------------------+ bsr | bsr <pc-rel> <error> | jsr <abs> | bra | bra <pc-rel> <error> | jmp <abs> | jbsr | bsr <pc-rel> jsr <abs> | bsr <pc-rel> jsr <abs> | jbra | bra <pc-rel> jmp <abs> | bra <pc-rel> jmp <abs> | bXX | bXX <pc-rel> <error> | bNX +3; jmp <abs> | jbXX | bXX <pc-rel> bNX +3; | bXX <pc-rel> bNX +3; jmp <abs> | | jmp <abs> | | +--------------------------+----------------------------------+ XX: condition NX: negative of condition XX
jbsr
jbra
These are the simplest jump pseudo-operations; they always map to one particular machine instruction, depending on the displacement to the branch target.
jbXX
Here, ‘jbXX’ stands for an entire family of pseudo-operations, where XX is a conditional branch or condition-code test. The full list of pseudo-ops in this family is:
jbcc jbeq jbge jbgt jbhi jbvs jbpl jblo jbcs jbne jblt jble jbls jbvc jbmi
For the cases of non-PC relative displacements and long displacements,
as
issues a longer code fragment in terms of
NX, the opposite condition to XX. For example, for the
non-PC relative case:
jbXX foo
gives
bNXs oof jmp foo oof:
The Freescale S12Z version of as
has a few machine
dependent features.
The S12Z version of as
recognizes the following options:
You can use the ‘-mreg-prefix=pfx’ option to indicate that the assembler should expect all register names to be prefixed with the string pfx.
For an explanation of what this means and why it might be needed, see Register Notation.
The ‘-mdollar-hex’ option affects the way that literal hexadecimal constants are represented. When this option is specified, the assembler will consider the ‘$’ character as the start of a hexadecimal integer constant. Without this option, the standard value of ‘0x’ is expected.
If you use this option, then you cannot have symbol names starting with ‘$’. ‘-mdollar-hex’ is implied if the ‘--traditional-format’ (see Compatible Output: --traditional-format) is used.
In the S12Z syntax, the instruction name comes first and it may
be followed by one, or by several operands.
In most cases the maximum number of operands is three.
Operands are separated by a comma (‘,’).
A comma however does not act as a separator if it appears within parentheses
(‘()’) or within square brackets (‘[]’).
as
will complain if too many, too few or inappropriate operands
are specified for a given instruction.
Some instructions accept and (in certain situations require) a suffix indicating the size of the operand. The suffix is separated from the instruction name by a period (‘.’) and may be one of ‘b’, ‘w’, ‘p’ or ‘l’ indicating ‘byte’ (a single byte), ‘word’ (2 bytes), ‘pointer’ (3 bytes) or ‘long’ (4 bytes) respectively.
Example:
bset.b 0xA98, #5 mov.b #6, 0x2409 ld d0, #4 mov.l (d0, x), 0x2409 inc d0 cmp d0, #12 blt *-4 lea x, 0x2409 st y, (1, x)
The presence of a ‘;’ character anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
A ‘*’ or a ‘#’ character at the start of a line also introduces a line comment, but these characters do not work elsewhere on the line. If the first character of the line is a ‘#’ then as well as starting a comment, the line could also be logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The S12Z assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
The following addressing modes are understood for the S12Z.
‘#number’
‘#width:offset’
Bit field instructions in the immediate mode require the width and offset to be specified. The width parameter specifies the number of bits in the field. It should be a number in the range [1,32]. Offset determines the position within the field where the operation should start. It should be a number in the range [0,31].
‘*symbol’, or ‘*[+-]digits’
Program counter relative addresses have a width of 15 bits. Thus, they must be within the range [-32768, 32767].
‘reg’
Some instructions accept a register as an operand. In general, reg may be a data register (‘D0’, ‘D1’ … ‘D7’), the ‘X’ register or the ‘Y’ register.
A few instructions accept as an argument the stack pointer register (‘S’), and/or the program counter (‘P’).
Some very special instructions accept arguments which refer to the condition code register. For these arguments the syntax is ‘CCR’, ‘CCH’ or ‘CCL’ which refer to the complete condition code register, the condition code register high byte and the condition code register low byte respectively.
‘symbol’, or ‘digits’
‘[symbol’, or ‘digits]’
‘(number,reg)’
Reg may be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘S’ or ‘P’ or one of the data registers ‘D0’, ‘D1’ … ‘D7’. If any of the registers ‘D2’ … ‘D5’ are specified, then the register value is treated as a signed value. Otherwise it is treated as unsigned. Number may be any integer in the range [-8388608,8388607].
‘[number,reg]’
Reg may be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, ‘S’ or ‘P’. Number may be any integer in the range [-8388608,8388607].
‘-reg’, ‘+reg’, ‘reg-’ or ‘reg+’
This addressing mode is typically used to access a value at an address, and simultaneously to increment/decrement the register pointing to that address. Thus reg may be any of the 24 bit registers ‘X’, ‘Y’, or ‘S’. Pre-increment and post-decrement are not available for register ‘S’ (only post-increment and pre-decrement are available).
‘(data-reg,reg)’
Reg can be either ‘X’, ‘Y’, or ‘S’. Data-reg must be one of the data registers ‘D0’, ‘D1’ … ‘D7’. If any of the registers ‘D2’ … ‘D5’ are specified, then the register value is treated as a signed value. Otherwise it is treated as unsigned.
‘[data-reg,reg]’
Reg can be either ‘X’ or ‘Y’. Data-reg must be one of the data registers ‘D0’, ‘D1’ … ‘D7’. If any of the registers ‘D2’ … ‘D5’ are specified, then the register value is treated as a signed value. Otherwise it is treated as unsigned.
For example:
trap #197 ;; Immediate mode bra *+49 ;; Relative mode bra .L0 ;; ditto jmp 0xFE0034 ;; Absolute direct mode jmp [0xFD0012] ;; Absolute indirect mode inc.b (4,x) ;; Constant offset indexed mode jsr (45, d0) ;; ditto dec.w [4,y] ;; Constant offset indexed indirect mode clr.p (-s) ;; Pre-decrement mode neg.l (d0, s) ;; Register offset direct mode com.b [d1, x] ;; Register offset indirect mode psh cch ;; Register mode
Without a register prefix (see S12Z Options), S12Z assembler code is expected in the traditional format like this:
lea s, (-2,s) st d2, (0,s) ld x, symbol tfr d2, d6 cmp d6, #1532
However, if as
is started with (for example) ‘-mreg-prefix=%’
then all register names must be prefixed with ‘%’ as follows:
lea %s, (-2,%s) st %d2, (0,%s) ld %x, symbol tfr %d2, %d6 cmp %d6, #1532
The register prefix feature is intended to be used by compilers to avoid ambiguity between symbols and register names. Consider the following assembler instruction:
st d0, d1
The destination operand of this instruction could either refer to the register
‘D1’, or it could refer to the symbol named “d1”.
If the latter is intended then as
must be invoked with
‘-mreg-prefix=pfx’ and the code written as
st pfxd0, d1
where pfx is the chosen register prefix. For this reason, compiler back-ends should choose a register prefix which cannot be confused with a symbol name.
The Imagination Technologies Meta architecture is implemented in a number of versions, with each new version adding new features such as instructions and registers. For precise details of what instructions each core supports, please see the chip’s technical reference manual.
The following table lists all available Meta options.
-mcpu=metac11
Generate code for Meta 1.1.
-mcpu=metac12
Generate code for Meta 1.2.
-mcpu=metac21
Generate code for Meta 2.1.
-mfpu=metac21
Allow code to use FPU hardware of Meta 2.1.
‘!’ is the line comment character.
You can use ‘;’ instead of a newline to separate statements.
Since ‘$’ has no special meaning, you may use it in symbol names.
Registers can be specified either using their mnemonic names, such as ‘D0Re0’, or using the unit plus register number separated by a ‘.’, such as ‘D0.0’.
The Xilinx MicroBlaze processor family includes several variants, all using the same core instruction set. This chapter covers features of the GNU assembler that are specific to the MicroBlaze architecture. For details about the MicroBlaze instruction set, please see the MicroBlaze Processor Reference Guide (UG081) available at www.xilinx.com.
A number of assembler directives are available for MicroBlaze.
.data8 expression,...
This directive is an alias for .byte
. Each expression is assembled
into an eight-bit value.
.data16 expression,...
This directive is an alias for .hword
. Each expression is assembled
into an 16-bit value.
.data32 expression,...
This directive is an alias for .word
. Each expression is assembled
into an 32-bit value.
.ent name[,label]
This directive is an alias for .func
denoting the start of function
name at (optional) label.
.end name[,label]
This directive is an alias for .endfunc
denoting the end of function
name.
.gpword label,...
This directive is an alias for .rva
. The resolved address of label
is stored in the data section.
.weakext label
Declare that label is a weak external symbol.
.rodata
Switch to .rodata section. Equivalent to .section .rodata
.sdata2
Switch to .sdata2 section. Equivalent to .section .sdata2
.sdata
Switch to .sdata section. Equivalent to .section .sdata
.bss
Switch to .bss section. Equivalent to .section .bss
.sbss
Switch to .sbss section. Equivalent to .section .sbss
The presence of a ‘#’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
MicroBlaze processors support the following options:
-mbig-endian
Build for MicroBlaze in Big Endian configuration.
-mlittle-endian
Build for MicroBlaze in Little Endian configuration.
GNU as
for MIPS architectures supports several
different MIPS processors, and MIPS ISA levels I through V, MIPS32,
and MIPS64. For information about the MIPS instruction set, see
MIPS RISC Architecture, by Kane and Heindrich (Prentice-Hall).
For an overview of MIPS assembly conventions, see “Appendix D:
Assembly Language Programming” in the same work.
The MIPS configurations of GNU as
support these
special options:
-G num
¶Set the “small data” limit to n bytes. The default limit is 8 bytes. See Controlling the use of small data accesses.
-EB
¶-EL
Any MIPS configuration of as
can select big-endian or
little-endian output at run time (unlike the other GNU development
tools, which must be configured for one or the other). Use ‘-EB’
to select big-endian output, and ‘-EL’ for little-endian.
-KPIC
¶Generate SVR4-style PIC. This option tells the assembler to generate SVR4-style position-independent macro expansions. It also tells the assembler to mark the output file as PIC.
-mvxworks-pic
¶Generate VxWorks PIC. This option tells the assembler to generate VxWorks-style position-independent macro expansions.
-mips1
¶-mips2
-mips3
-mips4
-mips5
-mips32
-mips32r2
-mips32r3
-mips32r5
-mips32r6
-mips64
-mips64r2
-mips64r3
-mips64r5
-mips64r6
Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level. ‘-mips1’ corresponds to the R2000 and R3000 processors, ‘-mips2’ to the R6000 processor, ‘-mips3’ to the R4000 processor, and ‘-mips4’ to the R8000 and R10000 processors. ‘-mips5’, ‘-mips32’, ‘-mips32r2’, ‘-mips32r3’, ‘-mips32r5’, ‘-mips32r6’, ‘-mips64’, ‘-mips64r2’, ‘-mips64r3’, ‘-mips64r5’, and ‘-mips64r6’ correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32 Release 6, MIPS64, and MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively. You can also switch instruction sets during the assembly; see Directives to override the ISA level.
-mgp32
-mfp32
Some macros have different expansions for 32-bit and 64-bit registers. The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at all times. ‘-mgp32’ controls the size of general-purpose registers and ‘-mfp32’ controls the size of floating-point registers.
The .set gp=32
and .set fp=32
directives allow the size
of registers to be changed for parts of an object. The default value is
restored by .set gp=default
and .set fp=default
.
On some MIPS variants there is a 32-bit mode flag; when this flag is set, 64-bit instructions generate a trap. Also, some 32-bit OSes only save the 32-bit registers on a context switch, so it is essential never to use the 64-bit registers.
-mgp64
-mfp64
Assume that 64-bit registers are available. This is provided in the interests of symmetry with ‘-mgp32’ and ‘-mfp32’.
The .set gp=64
and .set fp=64
directives allow the size
of registers to be changed for parts of an object. The default value is
restored by .set gp=default
and .set fp=default
.
-mfpxx
Make no assumptions about whether 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers are available. This is provided to support having modules compatible with either ‘-mfp32’ or ‘-mfp64’. This option can only be used with MIPS II and above.
The .set fp=xx
directive allows a part of an object to be marked
as not making assumptions about 32-bit or 64-bit FP registers. The
default value is restored by .set fp=default
.
-modd-spreg
-mno-odd-spreg
Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision registers when supported by the ISA. ‘-mfpxx’ implies ‘-mno-odd-spreg’, otherwise the default is ‘-modd-spreg’
-mips16
-no-mips16
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
.module mips16
at the start of the assembly file. ‘-no-mips16’
turns off this option.
-mmips16e2
-mno-mips16e2
Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
to putting .module mips16e2
at the start of the assembly file.
‘-mno-mips16e2’ turns off this option.
-mmicromips
-mno-micromips
Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
.module micromips
at the start of the assembly file.
‘-mno-micromips’ turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
.module nomicromips
at the start of the assembly file.
-msmartmips
-mno-smartmips
Enables the SmartMIPS extensions to the MIPS32 instruction set, which
provides a number of new instructions which target smartcard and
cryptographic applications. This is equivalent to putting
.module smartmips
at the start of the assembly file.
‘-mno-smartmips’ turns off this option.
-mips3d
-no-mips3d
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions. ‘-no-mips3d’ turns off this option.
-mdmx
-no-mdmx
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions. ‘-no-mdmx’ turns off this option.
-mdsp
-mno-dsp
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions. ‘-mno-dsp’ turns off this option.
-mdspr2
-mno-dspr2
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension. This option implies ‘-mdsp’. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions. ‘-mno-dspr2’ turns off this option.
-mdspr3
-mno-dspr3
Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension. This option implies ‘-mdsp’ and ‘-mdspr2’. This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions. ‘-mno-dspr3’ turns off this option.
-mmt
-mno-mt
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions. ‘-mno-mt’ turns off this option.
-mmcu
-mno-mcu
Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions. ‘-mno-mcu’ turns off this option.
-mmsa
-mno-msa
Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions. ‘-mno-msa’ turns off this option.
-mxpa
-mno-xpa
Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension. This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions. ‘-mno-xpa’ turns off this option.
-mvirt
-mno-virt
Generate code for the Virtualization Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept Virtualization instructions. ‘-mno-virt’ turns off this option.
-mcrc
-mno-crc
Generate code for the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions. ‘-mno-crc’ turns off this option.
-mginv
-mno-ginv
Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions. ‘-mno-ginv’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-mmi
-mno-loongson-mmi
Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-mmi’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-cam
-mno-loongson-cam
Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CAM instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-cam’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-ext
-mno-loongson-ext
Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept EXT instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-ext’ turns off this option.
-mloongson-ext2
-mno-loongson-ext2
Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept EXT2 instructions. ‘-mno-loongson-ext2’ turns off this option.
-minsn32
-mno-insn32
Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
instructions. This is equivalent to putting .set insn32
at
the start of the assembly file. ‘-mno-insn32’ turns off this
option. This is equivalent to putting .set noinsn32
at the
start of the assembly file. By default ‘-mno-insn32’ is
selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
-mfix7000
-mno-fix7000
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
-mfix-rm7000
-mno-fix-rm7000
Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is followed by a load instruction.
-mfix-loongson2f-jump
-mno-fix-loongson2f-jump
Eliminate instruction fetch from outside 256M region to work around the Loongson2F ‘jump’ instructions. Without it, under extreme cases, the kernel may crash. The issue has been solved in latest processor batches, but this fix has no side effect to them.
-mfix-loongson2f-nop
-mno-fix-loongson2f-nop
Replace nops by or at,at,zero
to work around the Loongson2F
‘nop’ errata. Without it, under extreme cases, the CPU might
deadlock. The issue has been solved in later Loongson2F batches, but
this fix has no side effect to them.
-mfix-loongson3-llsc
-mno-fix-loongson3-llsc
Insert ‘sync’ before ‘ll’ and ‘lld’ to work around Loongson3 LLSC errata. Without it, under extrame cases, the CPU might deadlock. The default can be controlled by the --enable-mips-fix-loongson3-llsc=[yes|no] configure option.
-mfix-vr4120
-mno-fix-vr4120
Insert nops to work around certain VR4120 errata. This option is intended to be used on GCC-generated code: it is not designed to catch all problems in hand-written assembler code.
-mfix-vr4130
-mno-fix-vr4130
Insert nops to work around the VR4130 ‘mflo’/‘mfhi’ errata.
-mfix-24k
-mno-fix-24k
Insert nops to work around the 24K ‘eret’/‘deret’ errata.
-mfix-cn63xxp1
-mno-fix-cn63xxp1
Replace pref
hints 0 - 4 and 6 - 24 with hint 28 to work around
certain CN63XXP1 errata.
-mfix-r5900
-mno-fix-r5900
Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
instructions or fewer and always schedule a nop
instruction there
instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
-m4010
-no-m4010
Generate code for the LSI R4010 chip. This tells the assembler to accept the R4010-specific instructions (‘addciu’, ‘ffc’, etc.), and to not schedule ‘nop’ instructions around accesses to the ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ registers. ‘-no-m4010’ turns off this option.
-m4650
-no-m4650
Generate code for the MIPS R4650 chip. This tells the assembler to accept the ‘mad’ and ‘madu’ instruction, and to not schedule ‘nop’ instructions around accesses to the ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ registers. ‘-no-m4650’ turns off this option.
-m3900
-no-m3900
-m4100
-no-m4100
For each option ‘-mnnnn’, generate code for the MIPS Rnnnn chip. This tells the assembler to accept instructions specific to that chip, and to schedule for that chip’s hazards.
-march=cpu
Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU. It is exactly equivalent to ‘-mcpu’, except that there are more value of cpu understood. Valid cpu value are:
2000, 3000, 3900, 4000, 4010, 4100, 4111, vr4120, vr4130, vr4181, 4300, 4400, 4600, 4650, 5000, rm5200, rm5230, rm5231, rm5261, rm5721, vr5400, vr5500, 6000, rm7000, 8000, rm9000, 10000, 12000, 14000, 16000, 4kc, 4km, 4kp, 4ksc, 4kec, 4kem, 4kep, 4ksd, m4k, m4kp, m14k, m14kc, m14ke, m14kec, 24kc, 24kf2_1, 24kf, 24kf1_1, 24kec, 24kef2_1, 24kef, 24kef1_1, 34kc, 34kf2_1, 34kf, 34kf1_1, 34kn, 74kc, 74kf2_1, 74kf, 74kf1_1, 74kf3_2, 1004kc, 1004kf2_1, 1004kf, 1004kf1_1, interaptiv, interaptiv-mr2, m5100, m5101, p5600, 5kc, 5kf, 20kc, 25kf, sb1, sb1a, i6400, i6500, p6600, loongson2e, loongson2f, gs464, gs464e, gs264e, octeon, octeon+, octeon2, octeon3, xlr, xlp
For compatibility reasons, ‘nx’ and ‘bfx’ are accepted as synonyms for ‘nf1_1’. These values are deprecated.
In addition the special name ‘from-abi’ can be used, in which case the assembler will select an architecture suitable for whichever ABI has been selected, either via the -mabi= command line option or the built in default.
-mtune=cpu
Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU. Valid cpu values are identical to ‘-march=cpu’.
-mabi=abi
Record which ABI the source code uses. The recognized arguments are: ‘32’, ‘n32’, ‘o64’, ‘64’ and ‘eabi’.
-msym32
¶-mno-sym32
Equivalent to adding .set sym32
or .set nosym32
to
the beginning of the assembler input. See Directives to override the size of symbols.
-nocpp
¶This option is ignored. It is accepted for command-line compatibility with
other assemblers, which use it to turn off C style preprocessing. With
GNU as
, there is no need for ‘-nocpp’, because the
GNU assembler itself never runs the C preprocessor.
-msoft-float
-mhard-float
Disable or enable floating-point instructions. Note that by default floating-point instructions are always allowed even with CPU targets that don’t have support for these instructions.
-msingle-float
-mdouble-float
Disable or enable double-precision floating-point operations. Note that by default double-precision floating-point operations are always allowed even with CPU targets that don’t have support for these operations.
--construct-floats
--no-construct-floats
The --no-construct-floats
option disables the construction of
double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
the double width register. This feature is useful if the processor
support the FR bit in its status register, and this bit is known (by
the programmer) to be set. This bit prevents the aliasing of the double
width register by the single width registers.
By default --construct-floats
is selected, allowing construction
of these floating point constants.
--relax-branch
--no-relax-branch
The ‘--relax-branch’ option enables the relaxation of out-of-range branches. Any branches whose target cannot be reached directly are converted to a small instruction sequence including an inverse-condition branch to the physically next instruction, and a jump to the original target is inserted between the two instructions. In PIC code the jump will involve further instructions for address calculation.
The BC1ANY2F
, BC1ANY2T
, BC1ANY4F
, BC1ANY4T
,
BPOSGE32
and BPOSGE64
instructions are excluded from
relaxation, because they have no complementing counterparts. They could
be relaxed with the use of a longer sequence involving another branch,
however this has not been implemented and if their target turns out of
reach, they produce an error even if branch relaxation is enabled.
Also no MIPS16 branches are ever relaxed.
By default ‘--no-relax-branch’ is selected, causing any out-of-range branches to produce an error.
-mignore-branch-isa
-mno-ignore-branch-isa
Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes.
The semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the same as the ISA mode of the branch’s target label. If the ISA modes do not match, then such a branch, if taken, will cause the ISA mode to remain unchanged and instructions that follow will be executed in the wrong ISA mode causing the program to misbehave or crash.
In the case of the BAL
instruction it may be possible to relax
it to an equivalent JALX
instruction so that the ISA mode is
switched at the run time as required. For other branches no relaxation
is possible and therefore GAS has checks implemented that verify in
branch assembly that the two ISA modes match, and report an error
otherwise so that the problem with code can be diagnosed at the assembly
time rather than at the run time.
However some assembly code, including generated code produced by some versions of GCC, may incorrectly include branches to data labels, which appear to require a mode switch but are either dead or immediately followed by valid instructions encoded for the same ISA the branch has been encoded for. While not strictly correct at the source level such code will execute as intended, so to help with these cases ‘-mignore-branch-isa’ is supported which disables ISA mode checks for branches.
By default ‘-mno-ignore-branch-isa’ is selected, causing any invalid branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
-mnan=encoding
¶This option indicates whether the source code uses the IEEE 2008
NaN encoding (-mnan=2008) or the original MIPS encoding
(-mnan=legacy). It is equivalent to adding a .nan
directive to the beginning of the source file. See Directives to record which NaN encoding is being used.
-mnan=legacy is the default if no -mnan option or
.nan
directive is used.
--trap
--no-break
as
automatically macro expands certain division and
multiplication instructions to check for overflow and division by zero. This
option causes as
to generate code to take a trap exception
rather than a break exception when an error is detected. The trap instructions
are only supported at Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher.
--break
--no-trap
Generate code to take a break exception rather than a trap exception when an error is detected. This is the default.
-mpdr
-mno-pdr
Control generation of .pdr
sections. Off by default on IRIX, on
elsewhere.
-mshared
-mno-shared
When generating code using the Unix calling conventions (selected by ‘-KPIC’ or ‘-mcall_shared’), gas will normally generate code which can go into a shared library. The ‘-mno-shared’ option tells gas to generate code which uses the calling convention, but can not go into a shared library. The resulting code is slightly more efficient. This option only affects the handling of the ‘.cpload’ and ‘.cpsetup’ pseudo-ops.
MIPS assemblers have traditionally provided a wider range of instructions than the MIPS architecture itself. These extra instructions are usually referred to as “macro” instructions 2.
Some MIPS macro instructions extend an underlying architectural instruction
while others are entirely new. An example of the former type is and
,
which allows the third operand to be either a register or an arbitrary
immediate value. Examples of the latter type include bgt
, which
branches to the third operand when the first operand is greater than
the second operand, and ulh
, which implements an unaligned
2-byte load.
One of the most common extensions provided by macros is to expand
memory offsets to the full address range (32 or 64 bits) and to allow
symbolic offsets such as ‘my_data + 4’ to be used in place of
integer constants. For example, the architectural instruction
lbu
allows only a signed 16-bit offset, whereas the macro
lbu
allows code such as ‘lbu $4,array+32769($5)’.
The implementation of these symbolic offsets depends on several factors,
such as whether the assembler is generating SVR4-style PIC (selected by
-KPIC, see Assembler options), the size of symbols
(see Directives to override the size of symbols),
and the small data limit (see Controlling the use
of small data accesses).
Sometimes it is undesirable to have one assembly instruction expand
to several machine instructions. The directive .set nomacro
tells the assembler to warn when this happens. .set macro
restores the default behavior.
Some macro instructions need a temporary register to store intermediate
results. This register is usually $1
, also known as $at
,
but it can be changed to any core register reg using
.set at=reg
. Note that $at
always refers
to $1
regardless of which register is being used as the
temporary register.
Implicit uses of the temporary register in macros could interfere with
explicit uses in the assembly code. The assembler therefore warns
whenever it sees an explicit use of the temporary register. The directive
.set noat
silences this warning while .set at
restores
the default behavior. It is safe to use .set noat
while
.set nomacro
is in effect since single-instruction macros
never need a temporary register.
Note that while the GNU assembler provides these macros for compatibility, it does not make any attempt to optimize them with the surrounding code.
The n64 ABI allows symbols to have any 64-bit value. Although this provides a great deal of flexibility, it means that some macros have much longer expansions than their 32-bit counterparts. For example, the non-PIC expansion of ‘dla $4,sym’ is usually:
lui $4,%highest(sym) lui $1,%hi(sym) daddiu $4,$4,%higher(sym) daddiu $1,$1,%lo(sym) dsll32 $4,$4,0 daddu $4,$4,$1
whereas the 32-bit expansion is simply:
lui $4,%hi(sym) daddiu $4,$4,%lo(sym)
n64 code is sometimes constructed in such a way that all symbolic constants are known to have 32-bit values, and in such cases, it’s preferable to use the 32-bit expansion instead of the 64-bit expansion.
You can use the .set sym32
directive to tell the assembler
that, from this point on, all expressions of the form
‘symbol’ or ‘symbol + offset’
have 32-bit values. For example:
.set sym32 dla $4,sym lw $4,sym+16 sw $4,sym+0x8000($4)
will cause the assembler to treat ‘sym’, sym+16
and
sym+0x8000
as 32-bit values. The handling of non-symbolic
addresses is not affected.
The directive .set nosym32
ends a .set sym32
block and
reverts to the normal behavior. It is also possible to change the
symbol size using the command-line options -msym32 and
-mno-sym32.
These options and directives are always accepted, but at present, they have no effect for anything other than n64.
It often takes several instructions to load the address of a symbol. For example, when ‘addr’ is a 32-bit symbol, the non-PIC expansion of ‘dla $4,addr’ is usually:
lui $4,%hi(addr) daddiu $4,$4,%lo(addr)
The sequence is much longer when ‘addr’ is a 64-bit symbol. See Directives to override the size of symbols.
In order to cut down on this overhead, most embedded MIPS systems set aside a 64-kilobyte “small data” area and guarantee that all data of size n and smaller will be placed in that area. The limit n is passed to both the assembler and the linker using the command-line option -G n, see Assembler options. Note that the same value of n must be used when linking and when assembling all input files to the link; any inconsistency could cause a relocation overflow error.
The size of an object in the .bss
section is set by the
.comm
or .lcomm
directive that defines it. The size of
an external object may be set with the .extern
directive. For
example, ‘.extern sym,4’ declares that the object at sym
is 4 bytes in length, while leaving sym
otherwise undefined.
When no -G option is given, the default limit is 8 bytes. The option -G 0 prevents any data from being automatically classified as small.
It is also possible to mark specific objects as small by putting them
in the special sections .sdata
and .sbss
, which are
“small” counterparts of .data
and .bss
respectively.
The toolchain will treat such data as small regardless of the
-G setting.
On startup, systems that support a small data area are expected to
initialize register $28
, also known as $gp
, in such a
way that small data can be accessed using a 16-bit offset from that
register. For example, when ‘addr’ is small data,
the ‘dla $4,addr’ instruction above is equivalent to:
daddiu $4,$28,%gp_rel(addr)
Small data is not supported for SVR4-style PIC.
GNU as
supports an additional directive to change
the MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level on the fly: .set
mipsn
. n should be a number from 0 to 5, or 32, 32r2, 32r3,
32r5, 32r6, 64, 64r2, 64r3, 64r5 or 64r6.
The values other than 0 make the assembler accept instructions
for the corresponding ISA level, from that point on in the
assembly. .set mipsn
affects not only which instructions
are permitted, but also how certain macros are expanded. .set
mips0
restores the ISA level to its original level: either the
level you selected with command-line options, or the default for your
configuration. You can use this feature to permit specific MIPS III
instructions while assembling in 32 bit mode. Use this directive with
care!
The .set arch=cpu
directive provides even finer control.
It changes the effective CPU target and allows the assembler to use
instructions specific to a particular CPU. All CPUs supported by the
‘-march’ command-line option are also selectable by this directive.
The original value is restored by .set arch=default
.
The directive .set mips16
puts the assembler into MIPS 16 mode,
in which it will assemble instructions for the MIPS 16 processor. Use
.set nomips16
to return to normal 32 bit mode.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
The directive .set micromips
puts the assembler into microMIPS mode,
in which it will assemble instructions for the microMIPS processor. Use
.set nomicromips
to return to normal 32 bit mode.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
The .module
directive allows command-line options to be set directly
from assembly. The format of the directive matches the .set
directive but only those options which are relevant to a whole module are
supported. The effect of a .module
directive is the same as the
corresponding command-line option. Where .set
directives support
returning to a default then the .module
directives do not as they
define the defaults.
These module-level directives must appear first in assembly.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
The directive .set insn32
makes the assembler only use 32-bit
instruction encodings when generating code for the microMIPS processor.
This directive inhibits the use of any 16-bit instructions from that
point on in the assembly. The .set noinsn32
directive allows
16-bit instructions to be accepted.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
By default, MIPS 16 instructions are automatically extended to 32 bits
when necessary. The directive .set noautoextend
will turn this
off. When .set noautoextend
is in effect, any 32 bit instruction
must be explicitly extended with the .e
modifier (e.g.,
li.e $4,1000
). The directive .set autoextend
may be used
to once again automatically extend instructions when necessary.
This directive is only meaningful when in MIPS 16 mode. Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
The .insn
directive tells as
that the following
data is actually instructions. This makes a difference in MIPS 16 and
microMIPS modes: when loading the address of a label which precedes
instructions, as
automatically adds 1 to the value, so
that jumping to the loaded address will do the right thing.
The .global
and .globl
directives supported by
as
will by default mark the symbol as pointing to a
region of data not code. This means that, for example, any
instructions following such a symbol will not be disassembled by
objdump
as it will regard them as data. To change this
behavior an optional section name can be placed after the symbol name
in the .global
directive. If this section exists and is known
to be a code section, then the symbol will be marked as pointing at
code not data. Ie the syntax for the directive is:
.global symbol[ section][, symbol[ section]] ...
,
Here is a short example:
.global foo .text, bar, baz .data foo: nop bar: .word 0x0 baz: .word 0x1
The MIPS ABIs support a variety of different floating-point extensions where calling-convention and register sizes vary for floating-point data. The extensions exist to support a wide variety of optional architecture features. The resulting ABI variants are generally incompatible with each other and must be tracked carefully.
Traditionally the use of an explicit .gnu_attribute 4, n
directive is used to indicate which ABI is in use by a specific module.
It was then left to the user to ensure that command-line options and the
selected ABI were compatible with some potential for inconsistencies.
The supported floating-point ABI variants are:
0 - No floating-point
This variant is used to indicate that floating-point is not used within the module at all and therefore has no impact on the ABI. This is the default.
1 - Double-precision
This variant indicates that double-precision support is used. For 64-bit ABIs this means that 64-bit wide floating-point registers are required. For 32-bit ABIs this means that 32-bit wide floating-point registers are required and double-precision operations use pairs of registers.
2 - Single-precision
This variant indicates that single-precision support is used. Double precision operations will be supported via soft-float routines.
3 - Soft-float
This variant indicates that although floating-point support is used all operations are emulated in software. This means the ABI is modified to pass all floating-point data in general-purpose registers.
4 - Deprecated
This variant existed as an initial attempt at supporting 64-bit wide floating-point registers for O32 ABI on a MIPS32r2 CPU. This has been superseded by 5, 6 and 7.
5 - Double-precision 32-bit CPU, 32-bit or 64-bit FPU
This variant is used by 32-bit ABIs to indicate that the floating-point code in the module has been designed to operate correctly with either 32-bit wide or 64-bit wide floating-point registers. Double-precision support is used. Only O32 currently supports this variant and requires a minimum architecture of MIPS II.
6 - Double-precision 32-bit FPU, 64-bit FPU
This variant is used by 32-bit ABIs to indicate that the floating-point code in the module requires 64-bit wide floating-point registers. Double-precision support is used. Only O32 currently supports this variant and requires a minimum architecture of MIPS32r2.
7 - Double-precision compat 32-bit FPU, 64-bit FPU
This variant is used by 32-bit ABIs to indicate that the floating-point code in the module requires 64-bit wide floating-point registers. Double-precision support is used. This differs from the previous ABI as it restricts use of odd-numbered single-precision registers. Only O32 currently supports this variant and requires a minimum architecture of MIPS32r2.
In order to simplify and add safety to the process of selecting the
correct floating-point ABI, the assembler will automatically infer the
correct .gnu_attribute 4, n
directive based on command-line
options and .module
overrides. Where an explicit
.gnu_attribute 4, n
directive has been seen then a warning
will be raised if it does not match an inferred setting.
The floating-point ABI is inferred as follows. If ‘-msoft-float’ has been used the module will be marked as soft-float. If ‘-msingle-float’ has been used then the module will be marked as single-precision. The remaining ABIs are then selected based on the FP register width. Double-precision is selected if the width of GP and FP registers match and the special double-precision variants for 32-bit ABIs are then selected depending on ‘-mfpxx’, ‘-mfp64’ and ‘-mno-odd-spreg’.
Modules using the default FP ABI (no floating-point) can be linked with any other (singular) FP ABI variant.
Special compatibility support exists for O32 with the four double-precision FP ABI variants. The ‘-mfpxx’ FP ABI is specifically designed to be compatible with the standard double-precision ABI and the ‘-mfp64’ FP ABIs. This makes it desirable for O32 modules to be built as ‘-mfpxx’ to ensure the maximum compatibility with other modules produced for more specific needs. The only FP ABIs which cannot be linked together are the standard double-precision ABI and the full ‘-mfp64’ ABI with ‘-modd-spreg’.
The IEEE 754 floating-point standard defines two types of not-a-number (NaN) data: “signalling” NaNs and “quiet” NaNs. The original version of the standard did not specify how these two types should be distinguished. Most implementations followed the i387 model, in which the first bit of the significand is set for quiet NaNs and clear for signalling NaNs. However, the original MIPS implementation assigned the opposite meaning to the bit, so that it was set for signalling NaNs and clear for quiet NaNs.
The 2008 revision of the standard formally suggested the i387 choice
and as from Sep 2012 the current release of the MIPS architecture
therefore optionally supports that form. Code that uses one NaN encoding
would usually be incompatible with code that uses the other NaN encoding,
so MIPS ELF objects have a flag (EF_MIPS_NAN2008
) to record which
encoding is being used.
Assembly files can use the .nan
directive to select between the
two encodings. ‘.nan 2008’ says that the assembly file uses the
IEEE 754-2008 encoding while ‘.nan legacy’ says that the file uses
the original MIPS encoding. If several .nan
directives are given,
the final setting is the one that is used.
The command-line options -mnan=legacy and -mnan=2008
can be used instead of ‘.nan legacy’ and ‘.nan 2008’
respectively. However, any .nan
directive overrides the
command-line setting.
‘.nan legacy’ is the default if no .nan
directive or
-mnan option is given.
Note that GNU as
does not produce NaNs itself and
therefore these directives do not affect code generation. They simply
control the setting of the EF_MIPS_NAN2008
flag.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
The directives .set push
and .set pop
may be used to save
and restore the current settings for all the options which are
controlled by .set
. The .set push
directive saves the
current settings on a stack. The .set pop
directive pops the
stack and restores the settings.
These directives can be useful inside an macro which must change an option such as the ISA level or instruction reordering but does not want to change the state of the code which invoked the macro.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
The directive .set mips3d
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension from that point on
in the assembly. The .set nomips3d
directive prevents MIPS-3D
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set smartmips
makes the assembler accept
instructions from the SmartMIPS Application Specific Extension to the
MIPS32 ISA from that point on in the assembly. The
.set nosmartmips
directive prevents SmartMIPS instructions from
being accepted.
The directive .set mdmx
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MDMX Application Specific Extension from that point on
in the assembly. The .set nomdmx
directive prevents MDMX
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set dsp
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension from that point
on in the assembly. The .set nodsp
directive prevents DSP
Release 1 instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set dspr2
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension from that point
on in the assembly. This directive implies .set dsp
. The
.set nodspr2
directive prevents DSP Release 2 instructions from
being accepted.
The directive .set dspr3
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension from that point
on in the assembly. This directive implies .set dsp
and
.set dspr2
. The .set nodspr3
directive prevents DSP
Release 3 instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set mt
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MT Application Specific Extension from that point on
in the assembly. The .set nomt
directive prevents MT
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set mcu
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MCU Application Specific Extension from that point on
in the assembly. The .set nomcu
directive prevents MCU
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set msa
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension from that point on
in the assembly. The .set nomsa
directive prevents MSA
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set virt
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the Virtualization Application Specific Extension from that point
on in the assembly. The .set novirt
directive prevents Virtualization
instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set xpa
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the XPA Extension from that point on in the assembly. The
.set noxpa
directive prevents XPA instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set mips16e2
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the MIPS16e2 Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
assembly, whenever in MIPS16 mode. The .set nomips16e2
directive
prevents MIPS16e2 instructions from being accepted, in MIPS16 mode. Neither
directive affects the state of MIPS16 mode being active itself which has
separate controls.
The directive .set crc
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the CRC Extension from that point on in the assembly. The
.set nocrc
directive prevents CRC instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set ginv
makes the assembler accept instructions
from the GINV Extension from that point on in the assembly. The
.set noginv
directive prevents GINV instructions from being accepted.
The directive .set loongson-mmi
makes the assembler accept
instructions from the MMI Extension from that point on in the assembly.
The .set noloongson-mmi
directive prevents MMI instructions from
being accepted.
The directive .set loongson-cam
makes the assembler accept
instructions from the Loongson CAM from that point on in the assembly.
The .set noloongson-cam
directive prevents Loongson CAM instructions
from being accepted.
The directive .set loongson-ext
makes the assembler accept
instructions from the Loongson EXT from that point on in the assembly.
The .set noloongson-ext
directive prevents Loongson EXT instructions
from being accepted.
The directive .set loongson-ext2
makes the assembler accept
instructions from the Loongson EXT2 from that point on in the assembly.
This directive implies .set loognson-ext
.
The .set noloongson-ext2
directive prevents Loongson EXT2 instructions
from being accepted.
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
The directives .set softfloat
and .set hardfloat
provide
finer control of disabling and enabling float-point instructions.
These directives always override the default (that hard-float
instructions are accepted) or the command-line options
(‘-msoft-float’ and ‘-mhard-float’).
The directives .set singlefloat
and .set doublefloat
provide finer control of disabling and enabling double-precision
float-point operations. These directives always override the default
(that double-precision operations are accepted) or the command-line
options (‘-msingle-float’ and ‘-mdouble-float’).
Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
The presence of a ‘#’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The MMIX version of as
has some machine-dependent options.
When ‘--fixed-special-register-names’ is specified, only the register
names specified in Register names are recognized in the instructions
PUT
and GET
.
You can use the ‘--globalize-symbols’ to make all symbols global.
This option is useful when splitting up a mmixal
program into
several files.
The ‘--gnu-syntax’ turns off most syntax compatibility with
mmixal
. Its usability is currently doubtful.
The ‘--relax’ option is not fully supported, but will eventually make the object file prepared for linker relaxation.
If you want to avoid inadvertently calling a predefined symbol and would
rather get an error, for example when using as
with a
compiler or other machine-generated code, specify
‘--no-predefined-syms’. This turns off built-in predefined
definitions of all such symbols, including rounding-mode symbols, segment
symbols, ‘BIT’ symbols, and TRAP
symbols used in mmix
“system calls”. It also turns off predefined special-register names,
except when used in PUT
and GET
instructions.
By default, some instructions are expanded to fit the size of the operand or an external symbol (see Instruction expansion). By passing ‘--no-expand’, no such expansion will be done, instead causing errors at link time if the operand does not fit.
The mmixal
documentation (see mmixsite) specifies that global
registers allocated with the ‘GREG’ directive (see MMIX-greg) and
initialized to the same non-zero value, will refer to the same global
register. This isn’t strictly enforceable in as
since the
final addresses aren’t known until link-time, but it will do an effort
unless the ‘--no-merge-gregs’ option is specified. (Register merging
isn’t yet implemented in ld
.)
as
will warn every time it expands an instruction to fit an
operand unless the option ‘-x’ is specified. It is believed that
this behaviour is more useful than just mimicking mmixal
’s
behaviour, in which instructions are only expanded if the ‘-x’ option
is specified, and assembly fails otherwise, when an instruction needs to
be expanded. It needs to be kept in mind that mmixal
is both an
assembler and linker, while as
will expand instructions
that at link stage can be contracted. (Though linker relaxation isn’t yet
implemented in ld
.) The option ‘-x’ also implies
‘--linker-allocated-gregs’.
If instruction expansion is enabled, as
can expand a
‘PUSHJ’ instruction into a series of instructions. The shortest
expansion is to not expand it, but just mark the call as redirectable to a
stub, which ld
creates at link-time, but only if the
original ‘PUSHJ’ instruction is found not to reach the target. The
stub consists of the necessary instructions to form a jump to the target.
This happens if as
can assert that the ‘PUSHJ’
instruction can reach such a stub. The option ‘--no-pushj-stubs’
disables this shorter expansion, and the longer series of instructions is
then created at assembly-time. The option ‘--no-stubs’ is a synonym,
intended for compatibility with future releases, where generation of stubs
for other instructions may be implemented.
Usually a two-operand-expression (see GREG-base) without a matching
‘GREG’ directive is treated as an error by as
. When
the option ‘--linker-allocated-gregs’ is in effect, they are instead
passed through to the linker, which will allocate as many global registers
as is needed.
When as
encounters an instruction with an operand that is
either not known or does not fit the operand size of the instruction,
as
(and ld
) will expand the instruction into
a sequence of instructions semantically equivalent to the operand fitting
the instruction. Expansion will take place for the following
instructions:
Expands to a sequence of four instructions: SETL
, INCML
,
INCMH
and INCH
. The operand must be a multiple of four.
A branch instruction is turned into a branch with the complemented
condition and prediction bit over five instructions; four instructions
setting $255
to the operand value, which like with GETA
must
be a multiple of four, and a final GO $255,$255,0
.
Similar to expansion for conditional branches; four instructions set
$255
to the operand value, followed by a PUSHGO $255,$255,0
.
Similar to conditional branches and PUSHJ
. The final instruction
is GO $255,$255,0
.
The linker ld
is expected to shrink these expansions for
code assembled with ‘--relax’ (though not currently implemented).
The assembly syntax is supposed to be upward compatible with that
described in Sections 1.3 and 1.4 of ‘The Art of Computer
Programming, Volume 1’. Draft versions of those chapters as well as other
MMIX information is located at
http://www-cs-faculty.stanford.edu/~knuth/mmix-news.html.
Most code examples from the mmixal package located there should work
unmodified when assembled and linked as single files, with a few
noteworthy exceptions (see Differences to mmixal
).
Before an instruction is emitted, the current location is aligned to the next four-byte boundary. If a label is defined at the beginning of the line, its value will be the aligned value.
In addition to the traditional hex-prefix ‘0x’, a hexadecimal number can also be specified by the prefix character ‘#’.
After all operands to an MMIX instruction or directive have been specified, the rest of the line is ignored, treated as a comment.
The characters ‘*’ and ‘#’ are line comment characters; each start a comment at the beginning of a line, but only at the beginning of a line. A ‘#’ prefixes a hexadecimal number if found elsewhere on a line. If a ‘#’ appears at the start of a line the whole line is treated as a comment, but the line can also act as a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Two other characters, ‘%’ and ‘!’, each start a comment anywhere on the line. Thus you can’t use the ‘modulus’ and ‘not’ operators in expressions normally associated with these two characters.
A ‘;’ is a line separator, treated as a new-line, so separate instructions can be specified on a single line.
The character ‘:’ is permitted in identifiers. There are two exceptions to it being treated as any other symbol character: if a symbol begins with ‘:’, it means that the symbol is in the global namespace and that the current prefix should not be prepended to that symbol (see MMIX-prefix). The ‘:’ is then not considered part of the symbol. For a symbol in the label position (first on a line), a ‘:’ at the end of a symbol is silently stripped off. A label is permitted, but not required, to be followed by a ‘:’, as with many other assembly formats.
The character ‘@’ in an expression, is a synonym for ‘.’, the current location.
In addition to the common forward and backward local symbol formats (see Symbol Names), they can be specified with upper-case ‘B’ and ‘F’, as in ‘8B’ and ‘9F’. A local label defined for the current position is written with a ‘H’ appended to the number:
3H LDB $0,$1,2
This and traditional local-label formats cannot be mixed: a label must be defined and referred to using the same format.
There’s a minor caveat: just as for the ordinary local symbols, the local symbols are translated into ordinary symbols using control characters are to hide the ordinal number of the symbol. Unfortunately, these symbols are not translated back in error messages. Thus you may see confusing error messages when local symbols are used. Control characters ‘\003’ (control-C) and ‘\004’ (control-D) are used for the MMIX-specific local-symbol syntax.
The symbol ‘Main’ is handled specially; it is always global.
By defining the symbols ‘__.MMIX.start..text’ and ‘__.MMIX.start..data’, the address of respectively the ‘.text’ and ‘.data’ segments of the final program can be defined, though when linking more than one object file, the code or data in the object file containing the symbol is not guaranteed to be start at that position; just the final executable. See MMIX-loc.
Local and global registers are specified as ‘$0’ to ‘$255’. The recognized special register names are ‘rJ’, ‘rA’, ‘rB’, ‘rC’, ‘rD’, ‘rE’, ‘rF’, ‘rG’, ‘rH’, ‘rI’, ‘rK’, ‘rL’, ‘rM’, ‘rN’, ‘rO’, ‘rP’, ‘rQ’, ‘rR’, ‘rS’, ‘rT’, ‘rU’, ‘rV’, ‘rW’, ‘rX’, ‘rY’, ‘rZ’, ‘rBB’, ‘rTT’, ‘rWW’, ‘rXX’, ‘rYY’ and ‘rZZ’. A leading ‘:’ is optional for special register names.
Local and global symbols can be equated to register names and used in place of ordinary registers.
Similarly for special registers, local and global symbols can be used.
Also, symbols equated from numbers and constant expressions are allowed in
place of a special register, except when either of the options
--no-predefined-syms
and --fixed-special-register-names
are
specified. Then only the special register names above are allowed for the
instructions having a special register operand; GET
and PUT
.
LOC
¶The LOC
directive sets the current location to the value of the
operand field, which may include changing sections. If the operand is a
constant, the section is set to either .data
if the value is
0x2000000000000000
or larger, else it is set to .text
.
Within a section, the current location may only be changed to
monotonically higher addresses. A LOC expression must be a previously
defined symbol or a “pure” constant.
An example, which sets the label prev to the current location, and updates the current location to eight bytes forward:
prev LOC @+8
When a LOC has a constant as its operand, a symbol
__.MMIX.start..text
or __.MMIX.start..data
is defined
depending on the address as mentioned above. Each such symbol is
interpreted as special by the linker, locating the section at that
address. Note that if multiple files are linked, the first object file
with that section will be mapped to that address (not necessarily the file
with the LOC definition).
LOCAL
¶Example:
LOCAL external_symbol LOCAL 42 .local asymbol
This directive-operation generates a link-time assertion that the operand does not correspond to a global register. The operand is an expression that at link-time resolves to a register symbol or a number. A number is treated as the register having that number. There is one restriction on the use of this directive: the pseudo-directive must be placed in a section with contents, code or data.
IS
¶The IS
directive:
asymbol IS an_expression
sets the symbol ‘asymbol’ to ‘an_expression’. A symbol may not be set more than once using this directive. Local labels may be set using this directive, for example:
5H IS @+4
GREG
¶This directive reserves a global register, gives it an initial value and optionally gives it a symbolic name. Some examples:
areg GREG breg GREG data_value GREG data_buffer .greg creg, another_data_value
The symbolic register name can be used in place of a (non-special)
register. If a value isn’t provided, it defaults to zero. Unless the
option ‘--no-merge-gregs’ is specified, non-zero registers allocated
with this directive may be eliminated by as
; another
register with the same value used in its place.
Any of the instructions
‘CSWAP’,
‘GO’,
‘LDA’,
‘LDBU’,
‘LDB’,
‘LDHT’,
‘LDOU’,
‘LDO’,
‘LDSF’,
‘LDTU’,
‘LDT’,
‘LDUNC’,
‘LDVTS’,
‘LDWU’,
‘LDW’,
‘PREGO’,
‘PRELD’,
‘PREST’,
‘PUSHGO’,
‘STBU’,
‘STB’,
‘STCO’,
‘STHT’,
‘STOU’,
‘STSF’,
‘STTU’,
‘STT’,
‘STUNC’,
‘SYNCD’,
‘SYNCID’,
can have a value nearby an initial value in place of its
second and third operands. Here, “nearby” is defined as within the
range 0…255 from the initial value of such an allocated register.
buffer1 BYTE 0,0,0,0,0 buffer2 BYTE 0,0,0,0,0 ... GREG buffer1 LDOU $42,buffer2
In the example above, the ‘Y’ field of the LDOUI
instruction
(LDOU with a constant Z) will be replaced with the global register
allocated for ‘buffer1’, and the ‘Z’ field will have the value
5, the offset from ‘buffer1’ to ‘buffer2’. The result is
equivalent to this code:
buffer1 BYTE 0,0,0,0,0 buffer2 BYTE 0,0,0,0,0 ... tmpreg GREG buffer1 LDOU $42,tmpreg,(buffer2-buffer1)
Global registers allocated with this directive are allocated in order higher-to-lower within a file. Other than that, the exact order of register allocation and elimination is undefined. For example, the order is undefined when more than one file with such directives are linked together. With the options ‘-x’ and ‘--linker-allocated-gregs’, ‘GREG’ directives for two-operand cases like the one mentioned above can be omitted. Sufficient global registers will then be allocated by the linker.
BYTE
¶The ‘BYTE’ directive takes a series of operands separated by a comma.
If an operand is a string (see Strings), each character of that string
is emitted as a byte. Other operands must be constant expressions without
forward references, in the range 0…255. If you need operands having
expressions with forward references, use ‘.byte’ (see .byte expressions
). An
operand can be omitted, defaulting to a zero value.
WYDE
¶TETRA
OCTA
The directives ‘WYDE’, ‘TETRA’ and ‘OCTA’ emit constants of two, four and eight bytes size respectively. Before anything else happens for the directive, the current location is aligned to the respective constant-size boundary. If a label is defined at the beginning of the line, its value will be that after the alignment. A single operand can be omitted, defaulting to a zero value emitted for the directive. Operands can be expressed as strings (see Strings), in which case each character in the string is emitted as a separate constant of the size indicated by the directive.
PREFIX
¶The ‘PREFIX’ directive sets a symbol name prefix to be prepended to all symbols (except local symbols, see Symbols), that are not prefixed with ‘:’, until the next ‘PREFIX’ directive. Such prefixes accumulate. For example,
PREFIX a PREFIX b c IS 0
defines a symbol ‘abc’ with the value 0.
BSPEC
¶ESPEC
A pair of ‘BSPEC’ and ‘ESPEC’ directives delimit a section of special contents (without specified semantics). Example:
BSPEC 42 TETRA 1,2,3 ESPEC
The single operand to ‘BSPEC’ must be number in the range 0…255. The ‘BSPEC’ number 80 is used by the GNU binutils implementation.
mmixal
¶The binutils as
and ld
combination has a few
differences in function compared to mmixal
(see mmixsite).
The replacement of a symbol with a GREG-allocated register
(see GREG-base) is not handled the exactly same way in
as
as in mmixal
. This is apparent in the
mmixal
example file inout.mms
, where different registers
with different offsets, eventually yielding the same address, are used in
the first instruction. This type of difference should however not affect
the function of any program unless it has specific assumptions about the
allocated register number.
Line numbers (in the ‘mmo’ object format) are currently not supported.
Expression operator precedence is not that of mmixal: operator precedence is that of the C programming language. It’s recommended to use parentheses to explicitly specify wanted operator precedence whenever more than one type of operators are used.
The serialize unary operator &
, the fractional division operator
‘//’, the logical not operator !
and the modulus operator
‘%’ are not available.
Symbols are not global by default, unless the option
‘--globalize-symbols’ is passed. Use the ‘.global’ directive to
globalize symbols (see .global symbol
, .globl symbol
).
Operand syntax is a bit stricter with as
than
mmixal
. For example, you can’t say addu 1,2,3
, instead you
must write addu $1,$2,3
.
You can’t LOC to a lower address than those already visited (i.e., “backwards”).
A LOC directive must come before any emitted code.
Predefined symbols are visible as file-local symbols after use. (In the ELF file, that is—the linked mmo file has no notion of a file-local symbol.)
Some mapping of constant expressions to sections in LOC expressions is
attempted, but that functionality is easily confused and should be avoided
unless compatibility with mmixal
is required. A LOC expression to
‘0x2000000000000000’ or higher, maps to the ‘.data’ section and
lower addresses map to the ‘.text’ section (see MMIX-loc).
The code and data areas are each contiguous. Sparse programs with
far-away LOC directives will take up the same amount of space as a
contiguous program with zeros filled in the gaps between the LOC
directives. If you need sparse programs, you might try and get the wanted
effect with a linker script and splitting up the code parts into sections
(see .section name
). Assembly code for this, to be compatible with
mmixal
, would look something like:
.if 0 LOC away_expression .else .section away,"ax" .fi
as
will not execute the LOC directive and mmixal
ignores the lines with .
. This construct can be used generally to
help compatibility.
Symbols can’t be defined twice–not even to the same value.
Instruction mnemonics are recognized case-insensitive, though the ‘IS’ and ‘GREG’ pseudo-operations must be specified in upper-case characters.
There’s no unicode support.
The following is a list of programs in ‘mmix.tar.gz’, available at
http://www-cs-faculty.stanford.edu/~knuth/mmix-news.html, last
checked with the version dated 2001-08-25 (md5sum
c393470cfc86fac040487d22d2bf0172) that assemble with mmixal
but do
not assemble with as
:
silly.mms
LOC to a previous address.
sim.mms
Redefines symbol ‘Done’.
test.mms
Uses the serial operator ‘&’.
-mmcu
selects the mcu architecture. If the architecture is 430Xv2 then this also enables NOP generation unless the -mN is also specified.
-mcpu
selects the cpu architecture. If the architecture is 430Xv2 then this also enables NOP generation unless the -mN is also specified.
-msilicon-errata=name[,name…]
Implements a fixup for named silicon errata. Multiple silicon errata can be specified by multiple uses of the -msilicon-errata option and/or by including the errata names, separated by commas, on an individual -msilicon-errata option. Errata names currently recognised by the assembler are:
cpu4
PUSH #4
and PUSH #8 need longer encodings on the
MSP430. This option is enabled by default, and cannot be disabled.
cpu8
Do not set the SP
to an odd value.
cpu11
Do not update the SR
and the PC
in the same instruction.
cpu12
Do not use the PC
in a CMP
or BIT
instruction.
cpu13
Do not use an arithmetic instruction to modify the SR
.
cpu19
Insert NOP
after CPUOFF
.
-msilicon-errata-warn=name[,name…]
Like the -msilicon-errata option except that instead of fixing the specified errata, a warning message is issued instead. This option can be used alongside -msilicon-errata to generate messages whenever a problem is fixed, or on its own in order to inspect code for potential problems.
-mP
enables polymorph instructions handler.
-mQ
enables relaxation at assembly time. DANGEROUS!
-ml
indicates that the input uses the large code model.
-mn
enables the generation of a NOP instruction following any instruction
that might change the interrupts enabled/disabled state. The
pipelined nature of the MSP430 core means that any instruction that
changes the interrupt state (EINT
, DINT
, BIC #8,
SR
, BIS #8, SR
or MOV.W <>, SR
) must be
followed by a NOP instruction in order to ensure the correct
processing of interrupts. By default it is up to the programmer to
supply these NOP instructions, but this command-line option enables
the automatic insertion by the assembler, if they are missing.
-mN
disables the generation of a NOP instruction following any instruction that might change the interrupts enabled/disabled state. This is the default behaviour.
-my
tells the assembler to generate a warning message if a NOP does not immediately follow an instruction that enables or disables interrupts. This is the default.
Note that this option can be stacked with the -mn option so that the assembler will both warn about missing NOP instructions and then insert them automatically.
-mY
disables warnings about missing NOP instructions.
-md
mark the object file as one that requires data to copied from ROM to RAM at execution startup. Disabled by default.
-mdata-region=region
Select the region data will be placed in. Region placement is performed by the compiler and linker. The only effect this option will have on the assembler is that if upper or either is selected, then the symbols to initialise high data and bss will be defined. Valid region values are:
none
lower
upper
either
The macro syntax used on the MSP 430 is like that described in the MSP
430 Family Assembler Specification. Normal as
macros should still work.
Additional built-in macros are:
llo(exp)
Extracts least significant word from 32-bit expression ’exp’.
lhi(exp)
Extracts most significant word from 32-bit expression ’exp’.
hlo(exp)
Extracts 3rd word from 64-bit expression ’exp’.
hhi(exp)
Extracts 4th word from 64-bit expression ’exp’.
They normally being used as an immediate source operand.
mov #llo(1), r10 ; == mov #1, r10 mov #lhi(1), r10 ; == mov #0, r10
A semicolon (‘;’) appearing anywhere on a line starts a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Multiple statements can appear on the same line provided that they are separated by the ‘{’ character.
The character ‘$’ in jump instructions indicates current location and implemented only for TI syntax compatibility.
General-purpose registers are represented by predefined symbols of the
form ‘rN’ (for global registers), where N represents
a number between 0
and 15
. The leading
letters may be in either upper or lower case; for example, ‘r13’
and ‘R7’ are both valid register names.
Register names ‘PC’, ‘SP’ and ‘SR’ cannot be used as register names and will be treated as variables. Use ‘r0’, ‘r1’, and ‘r2’ instead.
@rN
As destination operand being treated as ‘0(rn)’
0(rN)
As source operand being treated as ‘@rn’
jCOND +N
Skips next N bytes followed by jump instruction and equivalent to ‘jCOND $+N+2’
Also, there are some instructions, which cannot be found in other assemblers. These are branch instructions, which has different opcodes upon jump distance. They all got PC relative addressing mode.
beq label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jeq label’ in case if jump distance within allowed range for cpu’s jump instruction. If not, this unrolls into a sequence of
jne $+6 br label
bne label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jne label’ or ‘jeq +4; br label’
blt label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jl label’ or ‘jge +4; br label’
bltn label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jn label’ or ‘jn +2; jmp +4; br label’
bltu label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jlo label’ or ‘jhs +2; br label’
bge label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jge label’ or ‘jl +4; br label’
bgeu label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jhs label’ or ‘jlo +4; br label’
bgt label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jeq +2; jge label’ or ‘jeq +6; jl +4; br label’
bgtu label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jeq +2; jhs label’ or ‘jeq +6; jlo +4; br label’
bleu label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jeq label; jlo label’ or ‘jeq +2; jhs +4; br label’
ble label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jeq label; jl label’ or ‘jeq +2; jge +4; br label’
jump label
A polymorph instruction which is ‘jmp label’ or ‘br label’
.file
¶This directive is ignored; it is accepted for compatibility with other MSP 430 assemblers.
Warning: in other versions of the GNU assembler,
.file
is used for the directive called.app-file
in the MSP 430 support.
.line
¶This directive is ignored; it is accepted for compatibility with other MSP 430 assemblers.
.arch
¶Sets the target microcontroller in the same way as the -mmcu command-line option.
.cpu
¶Sets the target architecture in the same way as the -mcpu command-line option.
.profiler
¶This directive instructs assembler to add new profile entry to the object file.
.refsym
¶This directive instructs assembler to add an undefined reference to the symbol following the directive. The maximum symbol name length is 1023 characters. No relocation is created for this symbol; it will exist purely for pulling in object files from archives. Note that this reloc is not sufficient to prevent garbage collection; use a KEEP() directive in the linker file to preserve such objects.
.mspabi_attribute
¶This directive tells the assembler what the MSPABI build attributes for this
file are. This is used for validating the command line options passed to
the assembler against the options the original source file was compiled with.
The expected format is:
‘.mspabi_attribute tag_name, tag_value’
For example, to set the tag OFBA_MSPABI_Tag_ISA
to MSP430X
:
‘.mspabi_attribute 4, 2’
See the MSP430 EABI, document slaa534 for the details on tag names and values.
as
implements all the standard MSP 430 opcodes. No
additional pseudo-instructions are needed on this family.
For information on the 430 machine instruction set, see MSP430 User’s Manual, document slau049d, Texas Instrument, Inc.
It is a performance hit to use gcc’s profiling approach for this tiny target. Even more – jtag hardware facility does not perform any profiling functions. However we’ve got gdb’s built-in simulator where we can do anything.
We define new section ‘.profiler’ which holds all profiling information. We define new pseudo operation ‘.profiler’ which will instruct assembler to add new profile entry to the object file. Profile should take place at the present address.
Pseudo operation format:
‘.profiler flags,function_to_profile [, cycle_corrector, extra]’
where:
‘flags’ is a combination of the following characters:
s
function entry
x
function exit
i
function is in init section
f
function is in fini section
l
library call
c
libc standard call
d
stack value demand
I
interrupt service routine
P
prologue start
p
prologue end
E
epilogue start
e
epilogue end
j
long jump / sjlj unwind
a
an arbitrary code fragment
t
extra parameter saved (a constant value like frame size)
function_to_profile
a function address
cycle_corrector
a value which should be added to the cycle counter, zero if omitted.
extra
any extra parameter, zero if omitted.
For example:
.global fxx .type fxx,@function fxx: .LFrameOffset_fxx=0x08 .profiler "scdP", fxx ; function entry. ; we also demand stack value to be saved push r11 push r10 push r9 push r8 .profiler "cdpt",fxx,0, .LFrameOffset_fxx ; check stack value at this point ; (this is a prologue end) ; note, that spare var filled with ; the farme size mov r15,r8 ... .profiler cdE,fxx ; check stack pop r8 pop r9 pop r10 pop r11 .profiler xcde,fxx,3 ; exit adds 3 to the cycle counter ret ; cause 'ret' insn takes 3 cycles
The NDS32 processors family includes high-performance and low-power 32-bit
processors for high-end to low-end. GNU as
for NDS32
architectures supports NDS32 ISA version 3. For detail about NDS32
instruction set, please see the AndeStar ISA User Manual which is available
at http://www.andestech.com/en/index/index.htm
The NDS32 configurations of GNU as
support these
special options:
-O1
Optimize for performance.
-Os
Optimize for space.
-EL
Produce little endian data output.
-EB
Produce little endian data output.
-mpic
Generate PIC.
-mno-fp-as-gp-relax
Suppress fp-as-gp relaxation for this file.
-mb2bb-relax
Back-to-back branch optimization.
-mno-all-relax
Suppress all relaxation for this file.
-march=<arch name>
Assemble for architecture <arch name> which could be v3, v3j, v3m, v3f, v3s, v2, v2j, v2f, v2s.
-mbaseline=<baseline>
Assemble for baseline <baseline> which could be v2, v3, v3m.
-mfpu-freg=FREG
Specify a FPU configuration.
0 8 SP / 4 DP registers
1 16 SP / 8 DP registers
2 32 SP / 16 DP registers
3 32 SP / 32 DP registers
-mabi=abi
Specify a abi version <abi> could be v1, v2, v2fp, v2fpp.
-m[no-]mac
Enable/Disable Multiply instructions support.
-m[no-]div
Enable/Disable Divide instructions support.
-m[no-]16bit-ext
Enable/Disable 16-bit extension
-m[no-]dx-regs
Enable/Disable d0/d1 registers
-m[no-]perf-ext
Enable/Disable Performance extension
-m[no-]perf2-ext
Enable/Disable Performance extension 2
-m[no-]string-ext
Enable/Disable String extension
-m[no-]reduced-regs
Enable/Disable Reduced Register configuration (GPR16) option
-m[no-]audio-isa-ext
Enable/Disable AUDIO ISA extension
-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext
Enable/Disable FPU SP extension
-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext
Enable/Disable FPU DP extension
-m[no-]fpu-fma
Enable/Disable FPU fused-multiply-add instructions
-mall-ext
Turn on all extensions and instructions support
Use ‘#’ at column 1 and ‘!’ anywhere in the line except inside quotes.
Multiple instructions in a line are allowed though not recommended and should be separated by ‘;’.
Assembler is not case-sensitive in general except user defined label. For example, ‘jral F1’ is different from ‘jral f1’ while it is the same as ‘JRAL F1’.
General purpose registers (GPR)
There are 32 32-bit general purpose registers $r0 to $r31.
Accumulators d0 and d1
64-bit accumulators: $d0.hi, $d0.lo, $d1.hi, and $d1.lo.
Assembler reserved register $ta
Register $ta ($r15) is reserved for assembler using.
Operating system reserved registers $p0 and $p1
Registers $p0 ($r26) and $p1 ($r27) are used by operating system as scratch registers.
Frame pointer $fp
Register $r28 is regarded as the frame pointer.
Global pointer
Register $r29 is regarded as the global pointer.
Link pointer
Register $r30 is regarded as the link pointer.
Stack pointer
Register $r31 is regarded as the stack pointer.
li rt5,imm32
load 32-bit integer into register rt5. ‘sethi rt5,hi20(imm32)’ and then ‘ori rt5,reg,lo12(imm32)’.
la rt5,var
Load 32-bit address of var into register rt5. ‘sethi rt5,hi20(var)’ and then ‘ori reg,rt5,lo12(var)’
l.[bhw] rt5,var
Load value of var into register rt5. ‘sethi $ta,hi20(var)’ and then ‘l[bhw]i rt5,[$ta+lo12(var)]’
l.[bh]s rt5,var
Load value of var into register rt5. ‘sethi $ta,hi20(var)’ and then ‘l[bh]si rt5,[$ta+lo12(var)]’
l.[bhw]p rt5,var,inc
Load value of var into register rt5 and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘la $ta,var’ and then ‘l[bhw]i.bi rt5,[$ta],inc’
l.[bhw]pc rt5,inc
Continue loading value of var into register rt5 and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘l[bhw]i.bi rt5,[$ta],inc.’
l.[bh]sp rt5,var,inc
Load value of var into register rt5 and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘la $ta,var’ and then ‘l[bh]si.bi rt5,[$ta],inc’
l.[bh]spc rt5,inc
Continue loading value of var into register rt5 and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘l[bh]si.bi rt5,[$ta],inc.’
s.[bhw] rt5,var
Store register rt5 to var. ‘sethi $ta,hi20(var)’ and then ‘s[bhw]i rt5,[$ta+lo12(var)]’
s.[bhw]p rt5,var,inc
Store register rt5 to var and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘la $ta,var’ and then ‘s[bhw]i.bi rt5,[$ta],inc’
s.[bhw]pc rt5,inc
Continue storing register rt5 to var and increment $ta by amount inc. ‘s[bhw]i.bi rt5,[$ta],inc.’
not rt5,ra5
Alias of ‘nor rt5,ra5,ra5’.
neg rt5,ra5
Alias of ‘subri rt5,ra5,0’.
br rb5
Depending on how it is assembled, it is translated into ‘r5 rb5’ or ‘jr rb5’.
b label
Branch to label depending on how it is assembled, it is translated into ‘j8 label’, ‘j label’, or "‘la $ta,label’ ‘br $ta’".
bral rb5
Alias of jral br5 depending on how it is assembled, it is translated into ‘jral5 rb5’ or ‘jral rb5’.
bal fname
Alias of jal fname depending on how it is assembled, it is translated into ‘jal fname’ or "‘la $ta,fname’ ‘bral $ta’".
call fname
Call function fname same as ‘jal fname’.
move rt5,ra5
For 16-bit, this is ‘mov55 rt5,ra5’. For no 16-bit, this is ‘ori rt5,ra5,0’.
move rt5,var
This is the same as ‘l.w rt5,var’.
move rt5,imm32
This is the same as ‘li rt5,imm32’.
pushm ra5,rb5
Push contents of registers from ra5 to rb5 into stack.
push ra5
Push content of register ra5 into stack. (same ‘pushm ra5,ra5’).
push.d var
Push value of double-word variable var into stack.
push.w var
Push value of word variable var into stack.
push.h var
Push value of half-word variable var into stack.
push.b var
Push value of byte variable var into stack.
pusha var
Push 32-bit address of variable var into stack.
pushi imm32
Push 32-bit immediate value into stack.
popm ra5,rb5
Pop top of stack values into registers ra5 to rb5.
pop rt5
Pop top of stack value into register. (same as ‘popm rt5,rt5’.)
pop.d var,ra5
Pop value of double-word variable var from stack using register ra5 as 2nd scratch register. (1st is $ta)
pop.w var,ra5
Pop value of word variable var from stack using register ra5.
pop.h var,ra5
Pop value of half-word variable var from stack using register ra5.
pop.b var,ra5
Pop value of byte variable var from stack using register ra5.
-relax-section
¶Replace identified out-of-range branches with PC-relative jmp
sequences when possible. The generated code sequences are suitable
for use in position-independent code, but there is a practical limit
on the extended branch range because of the length of the sequences.
This option is the default.
-relax-all
¶Replace branch instructions not determinable to be in range
and all call instructions with jmp
and callr
sequences
(respectively). This option generates absolute relocations against the
target symbols and is not appropriate for position-independent code.
-no-relax
¶Do not replace any branches or calls.
-EB
¶Generate big-endian output.
-EL
¶Generate little-endian output. This is the default.
-march=architecture
¶This option specifies the target architecture. The assembler issues
an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which
will not execute on the target architecture. The following architecture
names are recognized:
r1
,
r2
.
The default is r1
.
‘#’ is the line comment character. ‘;’ is the line separator character.
%hiadj(expression)
¶Extract the upper 16 bits of expression and add one if the 15th bit is set.
The value of %hiadj(expression)
is:
((expression >> 16) & 0xffff) + ((expression >> 15) & 0x01)
The %hiadj
relocation is intended to be used with
the addi
, ld
or st
instructions
along with a %lo
, in order to load a 32-bit constant.
movhi r2, %hiadj(symbol) addi r2, r2, %lo(symbol)
%hi(expression)
¶Extract the upper 16 bits of expression.
%lo(expression)
¶Extract the lower 16 bits of expression.
%gprel(expression)
¶Subtract the value of the symbol _gp
from
expression.
The intention of the %gprel
relocation is
to have a fast small area of memory which only
takes a 16-bit immediate to access.
.section .sdata fastint: .int 123 .section .text ldw r4, %gprel(fastint)(gp)
%call(expression)
¶%call_lo(expression)
%call_hiadj(expression)
%got(expression)
%got_lo(expression)
%got_hiadj(expression)
%gotoff(expression)
%gotoff_lo(expression)
%gotoff_hiadj(expression)
%tls_gd(expression)
%tls_ie(expression)
%tls_le(expression)
%tls_ldm(expression)
%tls_ldo(expression)
These relocations support the ABI for Linux Systems documented in the Nios II Processor Reference Handbook.
.align expression [, expression]
¶This is the generic .align
directive, however
this aligns to a power of two.
.half expression
¶Create an aligned constant 2 bytes in size.
.word expression
¶Create an aligned constant 4 bytes in size.
.dword expression
¶Create an aligned constant 8 bytes in size.
.2byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 2 bytes in size.
.4byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 4 bytes in size.
.8byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 8 bytes in size.
.16byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 16 bytes in size.
.set noat
¶Allows assembly code to use at
register without
warning. Macro or relaxation expansions
generate warnings.
.set at
¶Assembly code using at
register generates
warnings, and macro expansion and relaxation are
enabled.
.set nobreak
¶Allows assembly code to use ba
and bt
registers without warning.
.set break
¶Turns warnings back on for using ba
and bt
registers.
.set norelax
¶Do not replace any branches or calls.
.set relaxsection
¶Replace identified out-of-range branches with
jmp
sequences (default).
.set relaxsection
¶Replace all branch and call instructions with
jmp
and callr
sequences.
.set …
¶All other .set
are the normal use.
as
implements all the standard Nios II opcodes documented in the
Nios II Processor Reference Handbook, including the assembler
pseudo-instructions.
The presence of a ‘#’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
If Sequent compatibility has been configured into the assembler then the ‘|’ character appearing as the first character on a line will also indicate the start of a line comment.
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The assembler syntax follows the OpenRISC 1000 Architecture Manual.
A ‘#’ character appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
‘;’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The OpenRISC register file contains 32 general purpose registers.
Floating point operations use the same general purpose registers. The
instructions lf.itof.s
(single precision) and lf.itof.d
(double
precision) can be used to convert integer values to floating point.
Likewise, instructions lf.ftoi.s
(single precision) and
lf.ftoi.d
(double precision) can be used to convert floating point to
integer.
OpenRISC also contains privileged special purpose registers (SPRs). The
SPRs are accessed using the l.mfspr
and l.mtspr
instructions.
ELF relocations are available as defined in the OpenRISC architecture specification.
R_OR1K_HI_16_IN_INSN
is obtained using ‘hi’ and
R_OR1K_LO_16_IN_INSN
and R_OR1K_SLO16
are obtained using
‘lo’. For signed offsets R_OR1K_AHI16
is obtained from
‘ha’. For example:
l.movhi r5, hi(symbol) l.ori r5, r5, lo(symbol) l.movhi r5, ha(symbol) l.addi r5, r5, lo(symbol)
These “high” mnemonics extract bits 31:16 of their operand, and the “low” mnemonics extract bits 15:0 of their operand.
The PC relative relocation R_OR1K_GOTPC_HI16
can be obtained by
enclosing an operand inside of ‘gotpchi’. Likewise, the
R_OR1K_GOTPC_LO16
relocation can be obtained using ‘gotpclo’.
These are mostly used when assembling PIC code. For example, the
standard PIC sequence on OpenRISC to get the base of the global offset
table, PC relative, into a register, can be performed as:
l.jal 0x8 l.movhi r17, gotpchi(_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_-4) l.ori r17, r17, gotpclo(_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+0) l.add r17, r17, r9
Several relocations exist to allow the link editor to perform GOT data
references. The R_OR1K_GOT16
relocation can obtained by enclosing an
operand inside of ‘got’. For example, assuming the GOT base is in
register r17
.
l.lwz r19, got(a)(r17) l.lwz r21, 0(r19)
Also, several relocations exist for local GOT references. The
R_OR1K_GOTOFF_AHI16
relocation can obtained by enclosing an operand
inside of ‘gotoffha’. Likewise, R_OR1K_GOTOFF_LO16
and
R_OR1K_GOTOFF_SLO16
can be obtained by enclosing an operand inside of
‘gotofflo’. For example, assuming the GOT base is in register
rl7
:
l.movhi r19, gotoffha(symbol) l.add r19, r19, r17 l.lwz r19, gotofflo(symbol)(r19)
The above PC relative relocations use a l.jal
(jump) instruction
and reading of the link register to load the PC. OpenRISC also supports
page offset PC relative locations without a jump instruction using the
l.adrp
instruction. By default the l.adrp
instruction will
create an R_OR1K_PCREL_PG21
relocation.
Likewise, BFD_RELOC_OR1K_LO13
and BFD_RELOC_OR1K_SLO13
can
be obtained by enclosing an operand inside of ‘po’. For example:
l.adrp r3, symbol l.ori r4, r3, po(symbol) l.lbz r5, po(symbol)(r3) l.sb po(symbol)(r3), r6
Likewise the page offset relocations can be used with GOT references. The
relocation R_OR1K_GOT_PG21
can be obtained by enclosing an
l.adrp
immediate operand inside of ‘got’. Likewise,
R_OR1K_GOT_LO13
can be obtained by enclosing an operand inside of
‘gotpo’. For example to load the value of a GOT symbol into register
‘r5’ we can do:
l.adrp r17, got(_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_) l.lwz r5, gotpo(symbol)(r17)
There are many relocations that can be requested for access to thread local storage variables. All of the OpenRISC TLS mnemonics are supported:
R_OR1K_TLS_GD_HI16
is requested using ‘tlsgdhi’.
R_OR1K_TLS_GD_LO16
is requested using ‘tlsgdlo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_GD_PG21
is requested using ‘tldgd’.
R_OR1K_TLS_GD_LO13
is requested using ‘tlsgdpo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDM_HI16
is requested using ‘tlsldmhi’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDM_LO16
is requested using ‘tlsldmlo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDM_PG21
is requested using ‘tldldm’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDM_LO13
is requested using ‘tlsldmpo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDO_HI16
is requested using ‘dtpoffhi’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LDO_LO16
is requested using ‘dtpofflo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_IE_HI16
is requested using ‘gottpoffhi’.
R_OR1K_TLS_IE_AHI16
is requested using ‘gottpoffha’.
R_OR1K_TLS_IE_LO16
is requested using ‘gottpofflo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_IE_PG21
is requested using ‘gottp’.
R_OR1K_TLS_IE_LO13
is requested using ‘gottppo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LE_HI16
is requested using ‘tpoffhi’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LE_AHI16
is requested using ‘tpoffha’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LE_LO16
is requested using ‘tpofflo’.
R_OR1K_TLS_LE_SLO16
also is requested using ‘tpofflo’
depending on the instruction format.
Here are some example TLS model sequences.
First, General Dynamic:
l.movhi r17, tlsgdhi(symbol) l.ori r17, r17, tlsgdlo(symbol) l.add r17, r17, r16 l.or r3, r17, r17 l.jal plt(__tls_get_addr) l.nop
Initial Exec:
l.movhi r17, gottpoffhi(symbol) l.add r17, r17, r16 l.lwz r17, gottpofflo(symbol)(r17) l.add r17, r17, r10 l.lbs r17, 0(r17)
And finally, Local Exec:
l.movhi r17, tpoffha(symbol) l.add r17, r17, r10 l.addi r17, r17, tpofflo(symbol) l.lbs r17, 0(r17)
The OpenRISC version of as
supports the following additional
machine directives:
.align
¶This must be followed by the desired alignment in bytes.
.word
¶On the OpenRISC, the .word
directive produces a 32 bit value.
.nodelay
¶On the OpenRISC, the .nodelay
directive sets a flag in elf binaries
indicating that the binary is generated catering for no delay slots.
.proc
¶This directive is ignored. Any text following it on the same line is also ignored.
.endproc
¶This directive is ignored. Any text following it on the same line is also ignored.
For detailed information on the OpenRISC machine instruction set, see http://www.openrisc.io/architecture/.
as
implements all the standard OpenRISC opcodes.
The PDP-11 version of as
has a rich set of machine
dependent options.
-mpic | -mno-pic
¶Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.
The default is to generate position-independent code.
These options enables or disables the use of extensions over the base
line instruction set as introduced by the first PDP-11 CPU: the KA11.
Most options come in two variants: a -m
extension that
enables extension, and a -mno-
extension that disables
extension.
The default is to enable all extensions.
-mall | -mall-extensions
¶Enable all instruction set extensions.
-mno-extensions
¶Disable all instruction set extensions.
-mcis | -mno-cis
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the commercial instruction set, which
consists of these instructions: ADDNI
, ADDN
, ADDPI
,
ADDP
, ASHNI
, ASHN
, ASHPI
, ASHP
,
CMPCI
, CMPC
, CMPNI
, CMPN
, CMPPI
,
CMPP
, CVTLNI
, CVTLN
, CVTLPI
, CVTLP
,
CVTNLI
, CVTNL
, CVTNPI
, CVTNP
, CVTPLI
,
CVTPL
, CVTPNI
, CVTPN
, DIVPI
, DIVP
,
L2DR
, L3DR
, LOCCI
, LOCC
, MATCI
,
MATC
, MOVCI
, MOVC
, MOVRCI
, MOVRC
,
MOVTCI
, MOVTC
, MULPI
, MULP
, SCANCI
,
SCANC
, SKPCI
, SKPC
, SPANCI
, SPANC
,
SUBNI
, SUBN
, SUBPI
, and SUBP
.
-mcsm | -mno-csm
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the CSM
instruction.
-meis | -mno-eis
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the extended instruction set, which
consists of these instructions: ASHC
, ASH
, DIV
,
MARK
, MUL
, RTT
, SOB
SXT
, and
XOR
.
-mfis | -mkev11
¶-mno-fis | -mno-kev11
Enable (or disable) the use of the KEV11 floating-point instructions:
FADD
, FDIV
, FMUL
, and FSUB
.
-mfpp | -mfpu | -mfp-11
¶-mno-fpp | -mno-fpu | -mno-fp-11
Enable (or disable) the use of FP-11 floating-point instructions:
ABSF
, ADDF
, CFCC
, CLRF
, CMPF
,
DIVF
, LDCFF
, LDCIF
, LDEXP
, LDF
,
LDFPS
, MODF
, MULF
, NEGF
, SETD
,
SETF
, SETI
, SETL
, STCFF
, STCFI
,
STEXP
, STF
, STFPS
, STST
, SUBF
, and
TSTF
.
-mlimited-eis | -mno-limited-eis
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the limited extended instruction set:
MARK
, RTT
, SOB
, SXT
, and XOR
.
The -mno-limited-eis options also implies -mno-eis.
-mmfpt | -mno-mfpt
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the MFPT
instruction.
-mmultiproc | -mno-multiproc
¶Enable (or disable) the use of multiprocessor instructions: TSTSET
and
WRTLCK
.
-mmxps | -mno-mxps
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the MFPS
and MTPS
instructions.
-mspl | -mno-spl
¶Enable (or disable) the use of the SPL
instruction.
Enable (or disable) the use of the microcode instructions: LDUB
,
MED
, and XFC
.
These options enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and disables all other extensions.
-mka11
¶KA11 CPU. Base line instruction set only.
-mkb11
¶KB11 CPU. Enable extended instruction set and SPL
.
-mkd11a
¶KD11-A CPU. Enable limited extended instruction set.
-mkd11b
¶KD11-B CPU. Base line instruction set only.
-mkd11d
¶KD11-D CPU. Base line instruction set only.
-mkd11e
¶KD11-E CPU. Enable extended instruction set, MFPS
, and MTPS
.
-mkd11f | -mkd11h | -mkd11q
¶KD11-F, KD11-H, or KD11-Q CPU. Enable limited extended instruction set,
MFPS
, and MTPS
.
-mkd11k
¶KD11-K CPU. Enable extended instruction set, LDUB
, MED
,
MFPS
, MFPT
, MTPS
, and XFC
.
-mkd11z
¶KD11-Z CPU. Enable extended instruction set, CSM
, MFPS
,
MFPT
, MTPS
, and SPL
.
-mf11
¶F11 CPU. Enable extended instruction set, MFPS
, MFPT
, and
MTPS
.
-mj11
¶J11 CPU. Enable extended instruction set, CSM
, MFPS
,
MFPT
, MTPS
, SPL
, TSTSET
, and WRTLCK
.
-mt11
¶T11 CPU. Enable limited extended instruction set, MFPS
, and
MTPS
.
These options enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine model, and disables all other extensions.
-m11/03
¶Same as -mkd11f
.
-m11/04
¶Same as -mkd11d
.
-m11/05 | -m11/10
¶Same as -mkd11b
.
-m11/15 | -m11/20
¶Same as -mka11
.
-m11/21
¶Same as -mt11
.
-m11/23 | -m11/24
¶Same as -mf11
.
-m11/34
¶Same as -mkd11e
.
-m11/34a
¶Ame as -mkd11e
-mfpp
.
-m11/35 | -m11/40
¶Same as -mkd11a
.
-m11/44
¶Same as -mkd11z
.
-m11/45 | -m11/50 | -m11/55 | -m11/70
¶Same as -mkb11
.
-m11/53 | -m11/73 | -m11/83 | -m11/84 | -m11/93 | -m11/94
¶Same as -mj11
.
-m11/60
¶Same as -mkd11k
.
The PDP-11 version of as
has a few machine
dependent assembler directives.
.bss
Switch to the bss
section.
.even
Align the location counter to an even number.
as
supports both DEC syntax and BSD syntax. The only
difference is that in DEC syntax, a #
character is used to denote
an immediate constants, while in BSD syntax the character for this
purpose is $
.
general-purpose registers are named r0
through r7
.
Mnemonic alternatives for r6
and r7
are sp
and
pc
, respectively.
Floating-point registers are named ac0
through ac3
, or
alternatively fr0
through fr3
.
Comments are started with a #
or a /
character, and extend
to the end of the line. (FIXME: clash with immediates?)
Multiple statements on the same line can be separated by the ‘;’ character.
Some instructions have alternative names.
BCC
BHIS
BCS
BLO
L2DR
L2D
L3DR
L3D
SYS
TRAP
as
has two additional command-line options for the picoJava
architecture.
-ml
This option selects little endian data output.
-mb
This option selects big endian data output.
The presence of a ‘!’ or ‘/’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The PowerPC chip family includes several successive levels, using the same core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions at each level. There are exceptions to this however. For details on what instructions each variant supports, please see the chip’s architecture reference manual.
The following table lists all available PowerPC options.
-a32
Generate ELF32 or XCOFF32.
-a64
Generate ELF64 or XCOFF64.
-K PIC
Set EF_PPC_RELOCATABLE_LIB in ELF flags.
-mpwrx | -mpwr2
Generate code for POWER/2 (RIOS2).
-mpwr
Generate code for POWER (RIOS1)
-m601
Generate code for PowerPC 601.
-mppc, -mppc32, -m603, -m604
Generate code for PowerPC 603/604.
-m403, -m405
Generate code for PowerPC 403/405.
-m440
Generate code for PowerPC 440. BookE and some 405 instructions.
-m464
Generate code for PowerPC 464.
-m476
Generate code for PowerPC 476.
-m7400, -m7410, -m7450, -m7455
Generate code for PowerPC 7400/7410/7450/7455.
-m750cl, -mgekko, -mbroadway
Generate code for PowerPC 750CL/Gekko/Broadway.
-m821, -m850, -m860
Generate code for PowerPC 821/850/860.
-mppc64, -m620
Generate code for PowerPC 620/625/630.
-me200z2, -me200z4
Generate code for e200 variants, e200z2 with LSP, e200z4 with SPE.
-me300
Generate code for PowerPC e300 family.
-me500, -me500x2
Generate code for Motorola e500 core complex.
-me500mc
Generate code for Freescale e500mc core complex.
-me500mc64
Generate code for Freescale e500mc64 core complex.
-me5500
Generate code for Freescale e5500 core complex.
-me6500
Generate code for Freescale e6500 core complex.
-mlsp
Enable LSP instructions. (Disables SPE and SPE2.)
-mspe
Generate code for Motorola SPE instructions. (Disables LSP.)
-mspe2
Generate code for Freescale SPE2 instructions. (Disables LSP.)
-mtitan
Generate code for AppliedMicro Titan core complex.
-mppc64bridge
Generate code for PowerPC 64, including bridge insns.
-mbooke
Generate code for 32-bit BookE.
-ma2
Generate code for A2 architecture.
-maltivec
Generate code for processors with AltiVec instructions.
-mvle
Generate code for Freescale PowerPC VLE instructions.
-mvsx
Generate code for processors with Vector-Scalar (VSX) instructions.
-mhtm
Generate code for processors with Hardware Transactional Memory instructions.
-mpower4, -mpwr4
Generate code for Power4 architecture.
-mpower5, -mpwr5, -mpwr5x
Generate code for Power5 architecture.
-mpower6, -mpwr6
Generate code for Power6 architecture.
-mpower7, -mpwr7
Generate code for Power7 architecture.
-mpower8, -mpwr8
Generate code for Power8 architecture.
-mpower9, -mpwr9
Generate code for Power9 architecture.
-mpower10, -mpwr10
Generate code for Power10 architecture.
-mfuture
Generate code for ’future’ architecture.
-mcell
-mcell
Generate code for Cell Broadband Engine architecture.
-mcom
Generate code Power/PowerPC common instructions.
-many
Generate code for any architecture (PWR/PWRX/PPC).
-mregnames
Allow symbolic names for registers.
-mno-regnames
Do not allow symbolic names for registers.
-mrelocatable
Support for GCC’s -mrelocatable option.
-mrelocatable-lib
Support for GCC’s -mrelocatable-lib option.
-memb
Set PPC_EMB bit in ELF flags.
-mlittle, -mlittle-endian, -le
Generate code for a little endian machine.
-mbig, -mbig-endian, -be
Generate code for a big endian machine.
-msolaris
Generate code for Solaris.
-mno-solaris
Do not generate code for Solaris.
-nops=count
If an alignment directive inserts more than count nops, put a branch at the beginning to skip execution of the nops.
A number of assembler directives are available for PowerPC. The following table is far from complete.
.machine "string"
This directive allows you to change the machine for which code is
generated. "string"
may be any of the -m cpu selection options
(without the -m) enclosed in double quotes, "push"
, or
"pop"
. .machine "push"
saves the currently selected
cpu, which may be restored with .machine "pop"
.
The presence of a ‘#’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
If the assembler has been configured for the ppc-*-solaris* target then the ‘!’ character also acts as a line comment character. This can be disabled via the -mno-solaris command-line option.
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
-mlink-relax
¶Assume that LD would optimize LDI32 instructions by checking the upper
16 bits of the expression. If they are all zeros, then LD would
shorten the LDI32 instruction to a single LDI. In such case as
will output DIFF relocations for diff expressions.
-mno-link-relax
¶Assume that LD would not optimize LDI32 instructions. As a consequence, DIFF relocations will not be emitted.
-mno-warn-regname-label
¶Do not warn if a label name matches a register name. Usually assembler programmers will want this warning to be emitted. C compilers may want to turn this off.
%pmem(expression)
¶Convert expression from byte-address to a word-address. In other words, shift right by two.
%label(expression)
Mark the given operand as a label. This is useful if you need to jump to a label that matches a register name.
r1: jmp r1 ; Will jump to register R1 jmp %label(r1) ; Will jump to label r1
.align expression [, expression]
¶This is the generic .align
directive, however
this aligns to a power of two.
.word expression
¶Create an aligned constant 4 bytes in size.
.dword expression
¶Create an aligned constant 8 bytes in size.
.2byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 2 bytes in size.
.4byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 4 bytes in size.
.8byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 8 bytes in size.
.16byte expression
¶Create an unaligned constant 16 bytes in size.
.set no_warn_regname_label
¶Do not output warnings when a label name matches a register name. Equivalent
to passing the -mno-warn-regname-label
command-line option.
as
implements all the standard PRU core V3 opcodes in the
original pasm assembler. Older cores are not supported by as
.
GAS also implements the LDI32 pseudo instruction for loading a 32-bit immediate value into a register.
ldi32 sp, __stack_top ldi32 r14, 0x12345678
The following table lists all available RISC-V specific options.
-fpic
¶-fPIC
Generate position-independent code
-fno-pic
¶Don’t generate position-independent code (default)
-march=ISA
¶Select the base isa, as specified by ISA. For example -march=rv32ima. If this option and the architecture attributes aren’t set, then assembler will check the default configure setting –with-arch=ISA.
-misa-spec=ISAspec
¶Select the default isa spec version. If the version of ISA isn’t set by -march, then assembler helps to set the version according to the default chosen spec. If this option isn’t set, then assembler will check the default configure setting –with-isa-spec=ISAspec.
-mpriv-spec=PRIVspec
¶Select the privileged spec version. We can decide whether the CSR is valid or not according to the chosen spec. If this option and the privilege attributes aren’t set, then assembler will check the default configure setting –with-priv-spec=PRIVspec.
-mabi=ABI
¶Selects the ABI, which is either "ilp32" or "lp64", optionally followed by "f", "d", or "q" to indicate single-precision, double-precision, or quad-precision floating-point calling convention, or none or "e" to indicate the soft-float calling convention ("e" indicates a soft-float RVE ABI).
-mrelax
¶Take advantage of linker relaxations to reduce the number of instructions required to materialize symbol addresses. (default)
-mno-relax
¶Don’t do linker relaxations.
-march-attr
¶Generate the default contents for the riscv elf attribute section if the .attribute directives are not set. This section is used to record the information that a linker or runtime loader needs to check compatibility. This information includes ISA string, stack alignment requirement, unaligned memory accesses, and the major, minor and revision version of privileged specification.
-mno-arch-attr
¶Don’t generate the default riscv elf attribute section if the .attribute directives are not set.
-mcsr-check
¶Enable the CSR checking for the ISA-dependent CRS and the read-only CSR. The ISA-dependent CSR are only valid when the specific ISA is set. The read-only CSR can not be written by the CSR instructions.
-mno-csr-check
¶Don’t do CSR checking.
-mlittle-endian
¶Generate code for a little endian machine.
-mbig-endian
¶Generate code for a big endian machine.
The following table lists all available RISC-V specific directives.
.align size-log-2
¶Align to the given boundary, with the size given as log2 the number of bytes to align to.
.half value
¶.word value
.dword value
Emits a half-word, word, or double-word value at the current position.
.dtprelword value
¶.dtpreldword value
Emits a DTP-relative word (or double-word) at the current position. This is meant to be used by the compiler in shared libraries for DWARF debug info for thread local variables.
.uleb128 value
¶.sleb128 value
Emits a signed or unsigned LEB128 value at the current position. This only accepts constant expressions, because symbol addresses can change with relaxation, and we don’t support relocations to modify LEB128 values at link time.
.option argument
¶Modifies RISC-V specific assembler options inline with the assembly code. This is used when particular instruction sequences must be assembled with a specific set of options. For example, since we relax addressing sequences to shorter GP-relative sequences when possible the initial load of GP must not be relaxed and should be emitted as something like
.option push .option norelax la gp, __global_pointer$ .option pop
in order to produce after linker relaxation the expected
auipc gp, %pcrel_hi(__global_pointer$) addi gp, gp, %pcrel_lo(__global_pointer$)
instead of just
addi gp, gp, 0
It’s not expected that options are changed in this manner during regular use, but there are a handful of esoteric cases like the one above where users need to disable particular features of the assembler for particular code sequences. The complete list of option arguments is shown below:
push
pop
Pushes or pops the current option stack. These should be used whenever changing an option in line with assembly code in order to ensure the user’s command-line options are respected for the bulk of the file being assembled.
rvc
norvc
Enables or disables the generation of compressed instructions. Instructions are opportunistically compressed by the RISC-V assembler when possible, but sometimes this behavior is not desirable, especially when handling alignments.
pic
nopic
Enables or disables position-independent code generation. Unless you really know what you’re doing, this should only be at the top of a file.
relax
norelax
Enables or disables relaxation. The RISC-V assembler and linker opportunistically relax some code sequences, but sometimes this behavior is not desirable.
csr-check
no-csr-check
Enables or disables the CSR checking.
arch, +extension[version] [,...,+extension_n[version_n]]
arch, -extension [,...,-extension_n]
arch, =ISA
Enables or disables the extensions for specific code region. For example, ‘.option arch, +m2p0’ means add m extension with version 2.0, and ‘.option arch, -f, -d’ means remove extensions, f and d, from the architecture string. Note that, ‘.option arch, +c, -c’ have the same behavior as ‘.option rvc, norvc’. However, they are also undesirable sometimes. Besides, ‘.option arch, -i’ is illegal, since we cannot remove the base i extension anytime. If you want to reset the whole ISA string, you can also use ‘.option arch, =rv32imac’ to overwrite the previous settings.
.insn type, operand [,...,operand_n]
¶.insn insn_length, value
.insn value
This directive permits the numeric representation of an instructions and makes the assembler insert the operands according to one of the instruction formats for ‘.insn’ (RISC-V Instruction Formats). For example, the instruction ‘add a0, a1, a2’ could be written as ‘.insn r 0x33, 0, 0, a0, a1, a2’. But in fact, the instruction formats are difficult to use for some users, so most of them are using ‘.word’ to encode the instruction directly, rather than using ‘.insn’. It is fine for now, but will be wrong when the mapping symbols are supported, since ‘.word’ will not be shown as an instruction, it should be shown as data. Therefore, we also support two more formats of the ‘.insn’, the instruction ‘add a0, a1, a2’ could also be written as ‘.insn 0x4, 0xc58533’ or ‘.insn 0xc58533’. When the insn_length is set, then assembler will check if the value is a valid insn_length bytes instruction.
.attribute tag, value
¶Set the object attribute tag to value.
The tag is either an attribute number, or one of the following:
Tag_RISCV_arch
, Tag_RISCV_stack_align
,
Tag_RISCV_unaligned_access
, Tag_RISCV_priv_spec
,
Tag_RISCV_priv_spec_minor
, Tag_RISCV_priv_spec_revision
.
The RISC-V assembler supports following modifiers for relocatable addresses used in RISC-V instruction operands. However, we also support some pseudo instructions that are easier to use than these modifiers.
%lo(symbol)
The low 12 bits of absolute address for symbol.
%hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of absolute address for symbol. This is usually used with the %lo modifier to represent a 32-bit absolute address.
lui a0, %hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_HI20 addi a0, a0, %lo(symbol) // R_RISCV_LO12_I lui a0, %hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_HI20 load/store a0, %lo(symbol)(a0) // R_RISCV_LO12_I/S
%pcrel_lo(label)
The low 12 bits of relative address between pc and symbol. The symbol is related to the high part instruction which is marked by label.
%pcrel_hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of relative address between pc and symbol. This is usually used with the %pcrel_lo modifier to represent a +/-2GB pc-relative range.
label: auipc a0, %pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_PCREL_HI20 addi a0, a0, %pcrel_lo(label) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I label: auipc a0, %pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_PCREL_HI20 load/store a0, %pcrel_lo(label)(a0) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I/S
Or you can use the pseudo lla/lw/sw/... instruction to do this.
lla a0, symbol
%got_pcrel_hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of relative address between pc and the GOT entry of symbol. This is usually used with the %pcrel_lo modifier to access the GOT entry.
label: auipc a0, %got_pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_GOT_HI20 addi a0, a0, %pcrel_lo(label) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I label: auipc a0, %got_pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_GOT_HI20 load/store a0, %pcrel_lo(label)(a0) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I/S
Also, the pseudo la instruction with PIC has similar behavior.
%tprel_add(symbol)
This is used purely to associate the R_RISCV_TPREL_ADD relocation for TLS relaxation. This one is only valid as the fourth operand to the normally 3 operand add instruction.
%tprel_lo(symbol)
The low 12 bits of relative address between tp and symbol.
%tprel_hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of relative address between tp and symbol. This is usually used with the %tprel_lo and %tprel_add modifiers to access the thread local variable symbol in TLS Local Exec.
lui a5, %tprel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_TPREL_HI20 add a5, a5, tp, %tprel_add(symbol) // R_RISCV_TPREL_ADD load/store t0, %tprel_lo(symbol)(a5) // R_RISCV_TPREL_LO12_I/S
%tls_ie_pcrel_hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of relative address between pc and GOT entry. It is usually used with the %pcrel_lo modifier to access the thread local variable symbol in TLS Initial Exec.
la.tls.ie a5, symbol add a5, a5, tp load/store t0, 0(a5)
The pseudo la.tls.ie instruction can be expended to
label: auipc a5, %tls_ie_pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_TLS_GOT_HI20 load a5, %pcrel_lo(label)(a5) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I
%tls_gd_pcrel_hi(symbol)
The high 20 bits of relative address between pc and GOT entry. It is usually used with the %pcrel_lo modifier to access the thread local variable symbol in TLS Global Dynamic.
la.tls.gd a0, symbol call __tls_get_addr@plt mv a5, a0 load/store t0, 0(a5)
The pseudo la.tls.gd instruction can be expended to
label: auipc a0, %tls_gd_pcrel_hi(symbol) // R_RISCV_TLS_GD_HI20 addi a0, a0, %pcrel_lo(label) // R_RISCV_PCREL_LO12_I
The RISC-V architecture uses IEEE floating-point numbers.
The RISC-V Zfa extension includes a load-immediate instruction
for floating-point registers, which allows specifying the immediate
(from a pool of 32 predefined values defined in the specification)
as operand.
E.g. to load the value 0.0625
as single-precision FP value into
the FP register ft1
one of the following instructions can be used:
fli.s ft1, 0.0625 # dec floating-point literal fli.s ft1, 0x1p-4 # hex floating-point literal fli.s ft1, 0x0.8p-3 fli.s ft1, 0x1.0p-4 fli.s ft1, 0x2p-5 fli.s ft1, 0x4p-6 ...
As can be seen, many valid ways exist to express a floating-point value. This is realized by parsing the value operand using strtof() and comparing the parsed value against built-in float-constants that are written as hex floating-point literals.
This approach works on all machines that use IEEE 754. However, there is a chance that this fails on other machines with the following error message:
Error: improper fli value operand Error: illegal operands ‘fli.s ft1,0.0625
The error indicates that parsing ‘0x1p-4’ and ‘0.0625’ to single-precision floating point numbers will not result in two equal values on that machine.
If you encounter this problem, then please report it.
The RISC-V Instruction Set Manual Volume I: User-Level ISA lists 15 instruction formats where some of the formats have multiple variants. For the ‘.insn’ pseudo directive the assembler recognizes some of the formats. Typically, the most general variant of the instruction format is used by the ‘.insn’ directive.
The following table lists the abbreviations used in the table of instruction formats:
opcode | Unsigned immediate or opcode name for 7-bits opcode. |
opcode2 | Unsigned immediate or opcode name for 2-bits opcode. |
func7 | Unsigned immediate for 7-bits function code. |
func6 | Unsigned immediate for 6-bits function code. |
func4 | Unsigned immediate for 4-bits function code. |
func3 | Unsigned immediate for 3-bits function code. |
func2 | Unsigned immediate for 2-bits function code. |
rd | Destination register number for operand x, can be GPR or FPR. |
rd’ | Destination register number for operand x, only accept s0-s1, a0-a5, fs0-fs1 and fa0-fa5. |
rs1 | First source register number for operand x, can be GPR or FPR. |
rs1’ | First source register number for operand x, only accept s0-s1, a0-a5, fs0-fs1 and fa0-fa5. |
rs2 | Second source register number for operand x, can be GPR or FPR. |
rs2’ | Second source register number for operand x, only accept s0-s1, a0-a5, fs0-fs1 and fa0-fa5. |
simm12 | Sign-extended 12-bit immediate for operand x. |
simm20 | Sign-extended 20-bit immediate for operand x. |
simm6 | Sign-extended 6-bit immediate for operand x. |
uimm5 | Unsigned 5-bit immediate for operand x. |
uimm6 | Unsigned 6-bit immediate for operand x. |
uimm8 | Unsigned 8-bit immediate for operand x. |
symbol | Symbol or label reference for operand x. |
The following table lists all available opcode name:
C0
C1
C2
Opcode space for compressed instructions.
LOAD
Opcode space for load instructions.
LOAD_FP
Opcode space for floating-point load instructions.
STORE
Opcode space for store instructions.
STORE_FP
Opcode space for floating-point store instructions.
AUIPC
Opcode space for auipc instruction.
LUI
Opcode space for lui instruction.
BRANCH
Opcode space for branch instructions.
JAL
Opcode space for jal instruction.
JALR
Opcode space for jalr instruction.
OP
Opcode space for ALU instructions.
OP_32
Opcode space for 32-bits ALU instructions.
OP_IMM
Opcode space for ALU with immediate instructions.
OP_IMM_32
Opcode space for 32-bits ALU with immediate instructions.
OP_FP
Opcode space for floating-point operation instructions.
MADD
Opcode space for madd instruction.
MSUB
Opcode space for msub instruction.
NMADD
Opcode space for nmadd instruction.
NMSUB
Opcode space for msub instruction.
AMO
Opcode space for atomic memory operation instructions.
MISC_MEM
Opcode space for misc instructions.
SYSTEM
Opcode space for system instructions.
CUSTOM_0
CUSTOM_1
CUSTOM_2
CUSTOM_3
Opcode space for customize instructions.
An instruction is two or four bytes in length and must be aligned on a 2 byte boundary. The first two bits of the instruction specify the length of the instruction, 00, 01 and 10 indicates a two byte instruction, 11 indicates a four byte instruction.
The following table lists the RISC-V instruction formats that are available with the ‘.insn’ pseudo directive:
R type: .insn r opcode6, func3, func7, rd, rs1, rs2
+-------+-----+-----+-------+----+---------+ | func7 | rs2 | rs1 | func3 | rd | opcode6 | +-------+-----+-----+-------+----+---------+ 31 25 20 15 12 7 0
R type with 4 register operands: .insn r opcode6, func3, func2, rd, rs1, rs2, rs3
R4 type: .insn r4 opcode6, func3, func2, rd, rs1, rs2, rs3
+-----+-------+-----+-----+-------+----+---------+ | rs3 | func2 | rs2 | rs1 | func3 | rd | opcode6 | +-----+-------+-----+-----+-------+----+---------+ 31 27 25 20 15 12 7 0
I type: .insn i opcode6, func3, rd, rs1, simm12
I type: .insn i opcode6, func3, rd, simm12(rs1)
+--------------+-----+-------+----+---------+ | simm12[11:0] | rs1 | func3 | rd | opcode6 | +--------------+-----+-------+----+---------+ 31 20 15 12 7 0
S type: .insn s opcode6, func3, rs2, simm12(rs1)
+--------------+-----+-----+-------+-------------+---------+ | simm12[11:5] | rs2 | rs1 | func3 | simm12[4:0] | opcode6 | +--------------+-----+-----+-------+-------------+---------+ 31 25 20 15 12 7 0
B type: .insn s opcode6, func3, rs1, rs2, symbol
SB type: .insn sb opcode6, func3, rs1, rs2, symbol
+-----------------+-----+-----+-------+----------------+---------+ | simm12[12|10:5] | rs2 | rs1 | func3 | simm12[4:1|11] | opcode6 | +-----------------+-----+-----+-------+----------------+---------+ 31 25 20 15 12 7 0
U type: .insn u opcode6, rd, simm20
+--------------------------+----+---------+ | simm20[20|10:1|11|19:12] | rd | opcode6 | +--------------------------+----+---------+ 31 12 7 0
J type: .insn j opcode6, rd, symbol
UJ type: .insn uj opcode6, rd, symbol
+------------+--------------+------------+---------------+----+---------+ | simm20[20] | simm20[10:1] | simm20[11] | simm20[19:12] | rd | opcode6 | +------------+--------------+------------+---------------+----+---------+ 31 30 21 20 12 7 0
CR type: .insn cr opcode2, func4, rd, rs2
+-------+--------+-----+---------+ | func4 | rd/rs1 | rs2 | opcode2 | +-------+--------+-----+---------+ 15 12 7 2 0
CI type: .insn ci opcode2, func3, rd, simm6
+-------+----------+--------+------------+---------+ | func3 | simm6[5] | rd/rs1 | simm6[4:0] | opcode2 | +-------+----------+--------+------------+---------+ 15 13 12 7 2 0
CIW type: .insn ciw opcode2, func3, rd', uimm8
+-------+------------+-----+---------+ | func3 | uimm8[7:0] | rd' | opcode2 | +-------+-------- ---+-----+---------+ 15 13 5 2 0
CSS type: .insn css opcode2, func3, rd, uimm6
+-------+------------+----+---------+ | func3 | uimm6[5:0] | rd | opcode2 | +-------+------------+----+---------+ 15 13 7 2 0
CL type: .insn cl opcode2, func3, rd', uimm5(rs1')
+-------+------------+------+------------+------+---------+ | func3 | uimm5[4:2] | rs1' | uimm5[1:0] | rd' | opcode2 | +-------+------------+------+------------+------+---------+ 15 13 10 7 5 2 0
CS type: .insn cs opcode2, func3, rs2', uimm5(rs1')
+-------+------------+------+------------+------+---------+ | func3 | uimm5[4:2] | rs1' | uimm5[1:0] | rs2' | opcode2 | +-------+------------+------+------------+------+---------+ 15 13 10 7 5 2 0
CA type: .insn ca opcode2, func6, func2, rd', rs2'
+-- ----+----------+-------+------+---------+ | func6 | rd'/rs1' | func2 | rs2' | opcode2 | +-------+----------+-------+------+---------+ 15 10 7 5 2 0
CB type: .insn cb opcode2, func3, rs1', symbol
+-------+--------------+------+------------------+---------+ | func3 | simm8[8|4:3] | rs1' | simm8[7:6|2:1|5] | opcode2 | +-------+--------------+------+------------------+---------+ 15 13 10 7 2 0
CJ type: .insn cj opcode2, symbol
+-------+-------------------------------+---------+ | func3 | simm11[11|4|9:8|10|6|7|3:1|5] | opcode2 | +-------+-------------------------------+---------+ 15 13 2 0
For the complete list of all instruction format variants see The RISC-V Instruction Set Manual Volume I: User-Level ISA.
RISC-V attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and an integer value if the tag number is even.
Tag_RISCV_strict_align records the N-byte stack alignment for this object. The default value is 16 for RV32I or RV64I, and 4 for RV32E.
The smallest value will be used if object files with different Tag_RISCV_stack_align values are merged.
Tag_RISCV_arch contains a string for the target architecture taken from the option -march. Different architectures will be integrated into a superset when object files are merged.
Note that the version information of the target architecture must be presented
explicitly in the attribute and abbreviations must be expanded. The version
information, if not given by -march, must be in accordance with the
default specified by the tool. For example, the architecture RV32I
has
to be recorded in the attribute as RV32I2P0
in which 2P0
stands
for the default version of its base ISA. On the other hand, the architecture
RV32G
has to be presented as RV32I2P0_M2P0_A2P0_F2P0_D2P0
in
which the abbreviation G
is expanded to the IMAFD
combination
with default versions of the standard extensions.
Tag_RISCV_unaligned_access is 0 for files that do not allow any unaligned memory accesses, and 1 for files that do allow unaligned memory accesses.
Tag_RISCV_priv_spec contains the major/minor/revision version information of the privileged specification. It will report errors if object files of different privileged specification versions are merged.
The following table lists the custom (vendor-defined) RISC-V extensions supported and provides the location of their publicly-released documentation:
The Xcvmac extension provides instructions for multiply-accumulate operations.
It is documented in https://docs.openhwgroup.org/projects/cv32e40p-user-manual/en/latest/instruction_set_extensions.html
The Xcvalu extension provides instructions for general ALU operations.
It is documented in https://docs.openhwgroup.org/projects/cv32e40p-user-manual/en/latest/instruction_set_extensions.html
The XTheadBa extension provides instructions for address calculations.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadBb extension provides instructions for basic bit-manipulation
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadBs extension provides single-bit instructions.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadCmo extension provides instructions for cache management.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadCondMov extension provides instructions for conditional moves.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadFMemIdx extension provides floating-point memory operations.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadFmv extension provides access to the upper 32 bits of a doulbe-precision floating point register.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.1.0/xthead-2022-11-07-2.1.0.pdf.
The XTheadInt extension provides access to ISR stack management instructions.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.1.0/xthead-2022-11-07-2.1.0.pdf.
The XTheadMac extension provides multiply-accumulate instructions.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadMemIdx extension provides GPR memory operations.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadMemPair extension provides two-GP-register memory operations.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadSync extension provides instructions for multi-processor synchronization.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.0.0/xthead-2022-09-05-2.0.0.pdf.
The XTheadVector extension provides instructions for thead vector.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.3.0/xthead-2023-11-10-2.3.0.pdf.
The XTheadZvamo extension is a subextension of the XTheadVector extension, and it provides AMO instructions for the T-Head VECTOR vendor extension.
It is documented in https://github.com/T-head-Semi/thead-extension-spec/releases/download/2.3.0/xthead-2023-11-10-2.3.0.pdf.
XVentanaCondOps extension provides instructions for branchless sequences that perform conditional arithmetic, conditional bitwise-logic, and conditional select operations.
It is documented in https://github.com/ventanamicro/ventana-custom-extensions/releases/download/v1.0.0/ventana-custom-extensions-v1.0.0.pdf.
The XSfVcp (VCIX) extension provides flexible instructions for extending vector coprocessor. To accelerate performance, system designers may use VCIX as a low-latency, high-throughput interface to a coprocessor.
It is documented in https://sifive.cdn.prismic.io/sifive/c3829e36-8552-41f0-a841-79945784241b_vcix-spec-software.pdf.
relax
Enable support for link-time relaxation.
norelax
Disable support for link-time relaxation (default).
mg10
Mark the generated binary as targeting the G10 variant of the RL78 architecture.
mg13
Mark the generated binary as targeting the G13 variant of the RL78 architecture.
mg14
mrl78
Mark the generated binary as targeting the G14 variant of the RL78 architecture. This is the default.
m32bit-doubles
Mark the generated binary as one that uses 32-bits to hold the
double
floating point type. This is the default.
m64bit-doubles
Mark the generated binary as one that uses 64-bits to hold the
double
floating point type.
The RL78 has three modifiers that adjust the relocations used by the linker:
%lo16()
When loading a 20-bit (or wider) address into registers, this modifier selects the 16 least significant bits.
movw ax,#%lo16(_sym)
%hi16()
When loading a 20-bit (or wider) address into registers, this modifier selects the 16 most significant bits.
movw ax,#%hi16(_sym)
%hi8()
When loading a 20-bit (or wider) address into registers, this modifier selects the 8 bits that would go into CS or ES (i.e. bits 23..16).
mov es, #%hi8(_sym)
In addition to the common directives, the RL78 adds these:
.double
Output a constant in “double” format, which is either a 32-bit or a 64-bit floating point value, depending upon the setting of the -m32bit-doubles|-m64bit-doubles command-line option.
.bss
Select the BSS section.
.3byte
Output a constant value in a three byte format.
.int
.word
Output a constant value in a four byte format.
The presence of a ‘;’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘|’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The Renesas RX port of as
has a few target specific
command-line options:
-m32bit-doubles
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 32-bit float ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions, but it does influence the behaviour of the ‘.double’ pseudo-op. This is the default.
-m64bit-doubles
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 64-bit float ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions, but it does influence the behaviour of the ‘.double’ pseudo-op.
-mbig-endian
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a big-endian data ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions, but it does influence the behaviour of the ‘.short’, ‘.hword’, ‘.int’, ‘.word’, ‘.long’, ‘.quad’ and ‘.octa’ pseudo-ops.
-mlittle-endian
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a little-endian data ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions, but it does influence the behaviour of the ‘.short’, ‘.hword’, ‘.int’, ‘.word’, ‘.long’, ‘.quad’ and ‘.octa’ pseudo-ops. This is the default.
-muse-conventional-section-names
¶This option controls the default names given to the code (.text), initialised data (.data) and uninitialised data sections (.bss).
-muse-renesas-section-names
¶This option controls the default names given to the code (P), initialised data (D_1) and uninitialised data sections (B_1). This is the default.
-msmall-data-limit
¶This option tells the assembler that the small data limit feature of
the RX port of GCC is being used. This results in the assembler
generating an undefined reference to a symbol called __gp
for
use by the relocations that are needed to support the small data limit
feature. This option is not enabled by default as it would otherwise
pollute the symbol table.
-mpid
¶This option tells the assembler that the position independent data of the
RX port of GCC is being used. This results in the assembler
generating an undefined reference to a symbol called __pid_base
,
and also setting the RX_PID flag bit in the e_flags field of the ELF
header of the object file.
-mint-register=num
¶This option tells the assembler how many registers have been reserved
for use by interrupt handlers. This is needed in order to compute the
correct values for the %gpreg
and %pidreg
meta registers.
-mgcc-abi
¶This option tells the assembler that the old GCC ABI is being used by the assembled code. With this version of the ABI function arguments that are passed on the stack are aligned to a 32-bit boundary.
-mrx-abi
¶This option tells the assembler that the official RX ABI is being used by the assembled code. With this version of the ABI function arguments that are passed on the stack are aligned to their natural alignments. This option is the default.
-mcpu=name
¶This option tells the assembler the target CPU type. Currently the
rx100
, rx200
, rx600
, rx610
, rxv2
,
rxv3
and rxv3-dfpu
are recognised as valid cpu names.
Attempting to assemble an instructionnot supported by the indicated
cpu type will result in an error message being generated.
-mno-allow-string-insns
¶This option tells the assembler to mark the object file that it is
building as one that does not use the string instructions
SMOVF
, SCMPU
, SMOVB
, SMOVU
, SUNTIL
SWHILE
or the RMPA
instruction. In addition the mark
tells the linker to complain if an attempt is made to link the binary
with another one that does use any of these instructions.
Note - the inverse of this option, -mallow-string-insns
, is
not needed. The assembler automatically detects the use of the
the instructions in the source code and labels the resulting
object file appropriately. If no string instructions are detected
then the object file is labelled as being one that can be linked with
either string-using or string-banned object files.
The assembler supports one modifier when using symbol addresses in RX instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
%gp(symbol)
The modifier returns the offset from the __gp symbol to the specified symbol as a 16-bit value. The intent is that this offset should be used in a register+offset move instruction when generating references to small data. Ie, like this:
mov.W %gp(_foo)[%gpreg], r1
The assembler also supports two meta register names which can be used to refer to registers whose values may not be known to the programmer. These meta register names are:
Both registers normally have the value r13, but this can change if some registers have been reserved for use by interrupt handlers or if both the small data limit and position independent data features are being used at the same time.
The RX version of as
has the following specific
assembler directives:
.3byte
¶Inserts a 3-byte value into the output file at the current location.
.fetchalign
¶If the next opcode following this directive spans a fetch line boundary (8 byte boundary), the opcode is aligned to that boundary. If the next opcode does not span a fetch line, this directive has no effect. Note that one or more labels may be between this directive and the opcode; those labels are aligned as well. Any inserted bytes due to alignment will form a NOP opcode.
The floating point formats generated by directives are these.
.float
Single
precision (32-bit) floating point constants.
.double
¶If the -m64bit-doubles command-line option has been specified
then then double
directive generates double
precision
(64-bit) floating point constants, otherwise it generates
single
precision (32-bit) floating point constants. To force
the generation of 64-bit floating point constants used the dc.d
directive instead.
The presence of a ‘;’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘!’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The s390 version of as
supports two architectures modes
and eleven chip levels. The architecture modes are the Enterprise System
Architecture (ESA) and the newer z/Architecture mode. The chip levels
are g5 (or arch3), g6, z900 (or arch5), z990 (or arch6), z9-109, z9-ec
(or arch7), z10 (or arch8), z196 (or arch9), zEC12 (or arch10), z13
(or arch11), z14 (or arch12), z15 (or arch13), or z16 (or arch14).
The following table lists all available s390 specific options:
-m31 | -m64
¶Select 31- or 64-bit ABI implying a word size of 32- or 64-bit.
These options are only available with the ELF object file format, and require that the necessary BFD support has been included (on a 31-bit platform you must add –enable-64-bit-bfd on the call to the configure script to enable 64-bit usage and use s390x as target platform).
-mesa | -mzarch
¶Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System Architecture (esa) mode or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
The 64-bit instructions are only available with the z/Architecture mode. The combination of ‘-m64’ and ‘-mesa’ results in a warning message.
-march=CPU
¶This option specifies the target processor. The following processor names
are recognized:
g5
(or arch3
),
g6
,
z900
(or arch5
),
z990
(or arch6
),
z9-109
,
z9-ec
(or arch7
),
z10
(or arch8
),
z196
(or arch9
),
zEC12
(or arch10
),
z13
(or arch11
),
z14
(or arch12
),
z15
(or arch13
), and
z16
(or arch14
).
Assembling an instruction that is not supported on the target processor results in an error message.
The processor names starting with arch
refer to the edition
number in the Principle of Operations manual. They can be used as
alternate processor names and have been added for compatibility with
the IBM XL compiler.
arch3
, g5
and g6
cannot be used with the
‘-mzarch’ option since the z/Architecture mode is not supported
on these processor levels.
There is no arch4
option supported. arch4
matches
-march=arch5 -mesa
.
-mregnames
¶Allow symbolic names for registers.
-mno-regnames
¶Do not allow symbolic names for registers.
-mwarn-areg-zero
¶Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified but evaluates to zero. This can indicate the misuse of general purpose register 0 as an address register.
‘#’ is the line comment character.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The assembler syntax closely follows the syntax outlined in Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Principles of Operation (SA22-7201) and the z/Architecture Principles of Operation (SA22-7832).
Each instruction has two major parts, the instruction mnemonic and the instruction operands. The instruction format varies.
The as
recognizes a number of predefined symbols for the
various processor registers. A register specification in one of the
instruction formats is an unsigned integer between 0 and 15. The specific
instruction and the position of the register in the instruction format
denotes the type of the register. The register symbols are prefixed with
‘%’:
%rN | the 16 general purpose registers, 0 <= N <= 15 |
%fN | the 16 floating point registers, 0 <= N <= 15 |
%aN | the 16 access registers, 0 <= N <= 15 |
%cN | the 16 control registers, 0 <= N <= 15 |
%lit | an alias for the general purpose register %r13 |
%sp | an alias for the general purpose register %r15 |
All instructions documented in the Principles of Operation are supported with the mnemonic and order of operands as described. The instruction mnemonic identifies the instruction format (Instruction Formats) and the specific operation code for the instruction. For example, the ‘lr’ mnemonic denotes the instruction format ‘RR’ with the operation code ‘0x18’.
The definition of the various mnemonics follows a scheme, where the first character usually hint at the type of the instruction:
a | add instruction, for example ‘al’ for add logical 32-bit |
b | branch instruction, for example ‘bc’ for branch on condition |
c | compare or convert instruction, for example ‘cr’ for compare register 32-bit |
d | divide instruction, for example ‘dlr’ divide logical register 64-bit to 32-bit |
i | insert instruction, for example ‘ic’ insert character |
l | load instruction, for example ‘ltr’ load and test register |
mv | move instruction, for example ‘mvc’ move character |
m | multiply instruction, for example ‘mh’ multiply halfword |
n | and instruction, for example ‘ni’ and immediate |
o | or instruction, for example ‘oc’ or character |
sla, sll | shift left single instruction |
sra, srl | shift right single instruction |
st | store instruction, for example ‘stm’ store multiple |
s | subtract instruction, for example ‘slr’ subtract logical 32-bit |
t | test or translate instruction, of example ‘tm’ test under mask |
x | exclusive or instruction, for example ‘xc’ exclusive or character |
Certain characters at the end of the mnemonic may describe a property of the instruction:
c | the instruction uses a 8-bit character operand |
f | the instruction extends a 32-bit operand to 64 bit |
g | the operands are treated as 64-bit values |
h | the operand uses a 16-bit halfword operand |
i | the instruction uses an immediate operand |
l | the instruction uses unsigned, logical operands |
m | the instruction uses a mask or operates on multiple values |
r | if r is the last character, the instruction operates on registers |
y | the instruction uses 20-bit displacements |
There are many exceptions to the scheme outlined in the above lists, in particular for the privileged instructions. For non-privileged instruction it works quite well, for example the instruction ‘clgfr’ c: compare instruction, l: unsigned operands, g: 64-bit operands, f: 32- to 64-bit extension, r: register operands. The instruction compares an 64-bit value in a register with the zero extended 32-bit value from a second register. For a complete list of all mnemonics see appendix B in the Principles of Operation.
Instruction operands can be grouped into three classes, operands located in registers, immediate operands, and operands in storage.
A register operand can be located in general, floating-point, access, or control register. The register is identified by a four-bit field. The field containing the register operand is called the R field.
Immediate operands are contained within the instruction and can have 8, 16 or 32 bits. The field containing the immediate operand is called the I field. Dependent on the instruction the I field is either signed or unsigned.
A storage operand consists of an address and a length. The address of a storage operands can be specified in any of these ways:
The length of a storage operand can be:
The notation for storage operand addresses formed from multiple fields is as follows:
Dn(Bn)
the address for operand number n is formed from the content of general register Bn called the base register and the displacement field Dn.
Dn(Xn,Bn)
the address for operand number n is formed from the content of general register Xn called the index register, general register Bn called the base register and the displacement field Dn.
Dn(Ln,Bn)
the address for operand number n is formed from the content of general register Bn called the base register and the displacement field Dn. The length of the operand n is specified by the field Ln.
The base registers Bn and the index registers Xn of a storage operand can be skipped. If Bn and Xn are skipped, a zero will be stored to the operand field. The notation changes as follows:
full notation | short notation |
---|---|
Dn(0,Bn) | Dn(Bn) |
Dn(0,0) | Dn |
Dn(0) | Dn |
Dn(Ln,0) | Dn(Ln) |
The Principles of Operation manuals lists 35 instruction formats where some of the formats have multiple variants. For the ‘.insn’ pseudo directive the assembler recognizes some of the formats. Typically, the most general variant of the instruction format is used by the ‘.insn’ directive.
The following table lists the abbreviations used in the table of instruction formats:
OpCode / OpCd | Part of the op code. |
Bx | Base register number for operand x. |
Dx | Displacement for operand x. |
DLx | Displacement lower 12 bits for operand x. |
DHx | Displacement higher 8-bits for operand x. |
Rx | Register number for operand x. |
Xx | Index register number for operand x. |
Ix | Signed immediate for operand x. |
Ux | Unsigned immediate for operand x. |
An instruction is two, four, or six bytes in length and must be aligned on a 2 byte boundary. The first two bits of the instruction specify the length of the instruction, 00 indicates a two byte instruction, 01 and 10 indicates a four byte instruction, and 11 indicates a six byte instruction.
The following table lists the s390 instruction formats that are available with the ‘.insn’ pseudo directive:
E format
+-------------+ | OpCode | +-------------+ 0 15
RI format: <insn> R1,I2
+--------+----+----+------------------+ | OpCode | R1 |OpCd| I2 | +--------+----+----+------------------+ 0 8 12 16 31
RIE format: <insn> R1,R3,I2
+--------+----+----+------------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | I2 |////////| OpCode | +--------+----+----+------------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 32 40 47
RIL format: <insn> R1,I2
+--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ | OpCode | R1 |OpCd| I2 | +--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ 0 8 12 16 47
RILU format: <insn> R1,U2
+--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ | OpCode | R1 |OpCd| U2 | +--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ 0 8 12 16 47
RIS format: <insn> R1,I2,M3,D4(B4)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | M3 | B4 | D4 | I2 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
RR format: <insn> R1,R2
+--------+----+----+ | OpCode | R1 | R2 | +--------+----+----+ 0 8 12 15
RRE format: <insn> R1,R2
+------------------+--------+----+----+ | OpCode |////////| R1 | R2 | +------------------+--------+----+----+ 0 16 24 28 31
RRF format: <insn> R1,R2,R3,M4
+------------------+----+----+----+----+ | OpCode | R3 | M4 | R1 | R2 | +------------------+----+----+----+----+ 0 16 20 24 28 31
RRS format: <insn> R1,R2,M3,D4(B4)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+----+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | B4 | D4 | M3 |////| OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+----+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 40 47
RS format: <insn> R1,R3,D2(B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | B2 | D2 | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 31
RSE format: <insn> R1,R3,D2(B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | B2 | D2 |////////| OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 40 47
RSI format: <insn> R1,R3,I2
+--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | I2 | +--------+----+----+------------------------------------+ 0 8 12 16 47
RSY format: <insn> R1,R3,D2(B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | B2 | DL2 | DH2 | OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 40 47
RX format: <insn> R1,D2(X2,B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+ | OpCode | R1 | X2 | B2 | D2 | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 31
RXE format: <insn> R1,D2(X2,B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | X2 | B2 | D2 |////////| OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 40 47
RXF format: <insn> R1,R3,D2(X2,B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+---+--------+ | OpCode | R3 | X2 | B2 | D2 | R1 |///| OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+---+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 40 47
RXY format: <insn> R1,D2(X2,B2)
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | R1 | X2 | B2 | DL2 | DH2 | OpCode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 40 47
S format: <insn> D2(B2)
+------------------+----+-------------+ | OpCode | B2 | D2 | +------------------+----+-------------+ 0 16 20 31
SI format: <insn> D1(B1),I2
+--------+---------+----+-------------+ | OpCode | I2 | B1 | D1 | +--------+---------+----+-------------+ 0 8 16 20 31
SIY format: <insn> D1(B1),U2
+--------+---------+----+-------------+--------+--------+ | OpCode | I2 | B1 | DL1 | DH1 | OpCode | +--------+---------+----+-------------+--------+--------+ 0 8 16 20 32 36 40 47
SIL format: <insn> D1(B1),I2
+------------------+----+-------------+-----------------+ | OpCode | B1 | D1 | I2 | +------------------+----+-------------+-----------------+ 0 16 20 32 47
SS format: <insn> D1(R1,B1),D2(B3),R3
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | R1 | R3 | B1 | D1 | B2 | D2 | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
SSE format: <insn> D1(B1),D2(B2)
+------------------+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | B1 | D1 | B2 | D2 | +------------------+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
SSF format: <insn> D1(B1),D2(B2),R3
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | R3 |OpCd| B1 | D1 | B2 | D2 | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
VRV format: <insn> V1,D2(V2,B2),M3
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | V1 | V2 | B2 | D2 | M3 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
VRI format: <insn> V1,V2,I3,M4,M5
+--------+----+----+-------------+----+----+------------+ | OpCode | V1 | V2 | I3 | M5 | M4 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+-------------+----+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 28 32 36 47
VRX format: <insn> V1,D2(R2,B2),M3
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | V1 | R2 | B2 | D2 | M3 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
VRS format: <insn> R1,V3,D2(B2),M4
+--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | R1 | V3 | B2 | D2 | M4 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 20 32 36 47
VRR format: <insn> V1,V2,V3,M4,M5,M6
+--------+----+----+----+---+----+----+----+------------+ | OpCode | V1 | V2 | V3 |///| M6 | M5 | M4 | Opcode | +--------+----+----+----+---+----+----+----+------------+ 0 8 12 16 24 28 32 36 47
VSI format: <insn> V1,D2(B2),I3
+--------+---------+----+-------------+----+------------+ | OpCode | I3 | B2 | D2 | V1 | Opcode | +--------+---------+----+-------------+----+------------+ 0 8 16 20 32 36 47
For the complete list of all instruction format variants see the Principles of Operation manuals.
A specific bit pattern can have multiple mnemonics, for example
the bit pattern ‘0xa7000000’ has the mnemonics ‘tmh’ and
‘tmlh’. In addition, there are a number of mnemonics recognized by
as
that are not present in the Principles of Operation.
These are the short forms of the branch instructions, where the condition
code mask operand is encoded in the mnemonic. This is relevant for the
branch instructions, the compare and branch instructions, and the
compare and trap instructions.
For the branch instructions there are 20 condition code strings that can be used as part of the mnemonic in place of a mask operand in the instruction format:
instruction | short form |
---|---|
bcr M1,R2 | b<m>r R2 |
bc M1,D2(X2,B2) | b<m> D2(X2,B2) |
brc M1,I2 | j<m> I2 |
brcl M1,I2 | jg<m> I2 |
In the mnemonic for a branch instruction the condition code string <m> can be any of the following:
o | jump on overflow / if ones |
h | jump on A high |
p | jump on plus |
nle | jump on not low or equal |
l | jump on A low |
m | jump on minus |
nhe | jump on not high or equal |
lh | jump on low or high |
ne | jump on A not equal B |
nz | jump on not zero / if not zeros |
e | jump on A equal B |
z | jump on zero / if zeroes |
nlh | jump on not low or high |
he | jump on high or equal |
nl | jump on A not low |
nm | jump on not minus / if not mixed |
le | jump on low or equal |
nh | jump on A not high |
np | jump on not plus |
no | jump on not overflow / if not ones |
For the compare and branch, and compare and trap instructions there are 12 condition code strings that can be used as part of the mnemonic in place of a mask operand in the instruction format:
instruction | short form |
---|---|
crb R1,R2,M3,D4(B4) | crb<m> R1,R2,D4(B4) |
cgrb R1,R2,M3,D4(B4) | cgrb<m> R1,R2,D4(B4) |
crj R1,R2,M3,I4 | crj<m> R1,R2,I4 |
cgrj R1,R2,M3,I4 | cgrj<m> R1,R2,I4 |
cib R1,I2,M3,D4(B4) | cib<m> R1,I2,D4(B4) |
cgib R1,I2,M3,D4(B4) | cgib<m> R1,I2,D4(B4) |
cij R1,I2,M3,I4 | cij<m> R1,I2,I4 |
cgij R1,I2,M3,I4 | cgij<m> R1,I2,I4 |
crt R1,R2,M3 | crt<m> R1,R2 |
cgrt R1,R2,M3 | cgrt<m> R1,R2 |
cit R1,I2,M3 | cit<m> R1,I2 |
cgit R1,I2,M3 | cgit<m> R1,I2 |
clrb R1,R2,M3,D4(B4) | clrb<m> R1,R2,D4(B4) |
clgrb R1,R2,M3,D4(B4) | clgrb<m> R1,R2,D4(B4) |
clrj R1,R2,M3,I4 | clrj<m> R1,R2,I4 |
clgrj R1,R2,M3,I4 | clgrj<m> R1,R2,I4 |
clib R1,I2,M3,D4(B4) | clib<m> R1,I2,D4(B4) |
clgib R1,I2,M3,D4(B4) | clgib<m> R1,I2,D4(B4) |
clij R1,I2,M3,I4 | clij<m> R1,I2,I4 |
clgij R1,I2,M3,I4 | clgij<m> R1,I2,I4 |
clrt R1,R2,M3 | clrt<m> R1,R2 |
clgrt R1,R2,M3 | clgrt<m> R1,R2 |
clfit R1,I2,M3 | clfit<m> R1,I2 |
clgit R1,I2,M3 | clgit<m> R1,I2 |
In the mnemonic for a compare and branch and compare and trap instruction the condition code string <m> can be any of the following:
h | jump on A high |
nle | jump on not low or equal |
l | jump on A low |
nhe | jump on not high or equal |
ne | jump on A not equal B |
lh | jump on low or high |
e | jump on A equal B |
nlh | jump on not low or high |
nl | jump on A not low |
he | jump on high or equal |
nh | jump on A not high |
le | jump on low or equal |
If a symbol modifier is attached to a symbol in an expression for an instruction operand field, the symbol term is replaced with a reference to an object in the global offset table (GOT) or the procedure linkage table (PLT). The following expressions are allowed: ‘symbol@modifier + constant’, ‘symbol@modifier + label + constant’, and ‘symbol@modifier - label + constant’. The term ‘symbol’ is the symbol that will be entered into the GOT or PLT, ‘label’ is a local label, and ‘constant’ is an arbitrary expression that the assembler can evaluate to a constant value.
The term ‘(symbol + constant1)@modifier +/- label + constant2’ is also accepted but a warning message is printed and the term is converted to ‘symbol@modifier +/- label + constant1 + constant2’.
@got
@got12
The @got modifier can be used for displacement fields, 16-bit immediate fields and 32-bit pc-relative immediate fields. The @got12 modifier is synonym to @got. The symbol is added to the GOT. For displacement fields and 16-bit immediate fields the symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the GOT slot for the symbol. For a 32-bit pc-relative field the pc-relative offset to the GOT slot from the current instruction address is used.
@gotent
The @gotent modifier can be used for 32-bit pc-relative immediate fields. The symbol is added to the GOT and the symbol term is replaced with the pc-relative offset from the current instruction to the GOT slot for the symbol.
@gotoff
The @gotoff modifier can be used for 16-bit immediate fields. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the address of the symbol.
@gotplt
The @gotplt modifier can be used for displacement fields, 16-bit immediate fields, and 32-bit pc-relative immediate fields. A procedure linkage table entry is generated for the symbol and a jump slot for the symbol is added to the GOT. For displacement fields and 16-bit immediate fields the symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the jump slot for the symbol. For a 32-bit pc-relative field the pc-relative offset to the jump slot from the current instruction address is used.
@plt
The @plt modifier can be used for 16-bit and 32-bit pc-relative immediate fields. A procedure linkage table entry is generated for the symbol. The symbol term is replaced with the relative offset from the current instruction to the PLT entry for the symbol.
@pltoff
The @pltoff modifier can be used for 16-bit immediate fields. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the PLT to the address of the symbol.
@gotntpoff
The @gotntpoff modifier can be used for displacement fields. The symbol is added to the static TLS block and the negated offset to the symbol in the static TLS block is added to the GOT. The symbol term is replaced with the offset to the GOT slot from the start of the GOT.
@indntpoff
The @indntpoff modifier can be used for 32-bit pc-relative immediate fields. The symbol is added to the static TLS block and the negated offset to the symbol in the static TLS block is added to the GOT. The symbol term is replaced with the pc-relative offset to the GOT slot from the current instruction address.
For more information about the thread local storage modifiers ‘gotntpoff’ and ‘indntpoff’ see the ELF extension documentation ‘ELF Handling For Thread-Local Storage’.
The thread local storage instruction markers are used by the linker to perform code optimization.
:tls_load
The :tls_load marker is used to flag the load instruction in the initial exec TLS model that retrieves the offset from the thread pointer to a thread local storage variable from the GOT.
:tls_gdcall
The :tls_gdcall marker is used to flag the branch-and-save instruction to the __tls_get_offset function in the global dynamic TLS model.
:tls_ldcall
The :tls_ldcall marker is used to flag the branch-and-save instruction to the __tls_get_offset function in the local dynamic TLS model.
For more information about the thread local storage instruction marker and the linker optimizations see the ELF extension documentation ‘ELF Handling For Thread-Local Storage’.
A literal pool is a collection of values. To access the values a pointer to the literal pool is loaded to a register, the literal pool register. Usually, register %r13 is used as the literal pool register (Register naming). Literal pool entries are created by adding the suffix :lit1, :lit2, :lit4, or :lit8 to the end of an expression for an instruction operand. The expression is added to the literal pool and the operand is replaced with the offset to the literal in the literal pool.
:lit1
The literal pool entry is created as an 8-bit value. An operand modifier must not be used for the original expression.
:lit2
The literal pool entry is created as a 16 bit value. The operand modifier @got may be used in the original expression. The term ‘x@got:lit2’ will put the got offset for the global symbol x to the literal pool as 16 bit value.
:lit4
The literal pool entry is created as a 32-bit value. The operand modifier @got and @plt may be used in the original expression. The term ‘x@got:lit4’ will put the got offset for the global symbol x to the literal pool as a 32-bit value. The term ‘x@plt:lit4’ will put the plt offset for the global symbol x to the literal pool as a 32-bit value.
:lit8
The literal pool entry is created as a 64-bit value. The operand modifier @got and @plt may be used in the original expression. The term ‘x@got:lit8’ will put the got offset for the global symbol x to the literal pool as a 64-bit value. The term ‘x@plt:lit8’ will put the plt offset for the global symbol x to the literal pool as a 64-bit value.
The assembler directive ‘.ltorg’ is used to emit all literal pool entries to the current position.
as
for s390 supports all of the standard ELF
assembler directives as outlined in the main part of this document.
Some directives have been extended and there are some additional
directives, which are only available for the s390 as
.
.insn
¶This directive permits the numeric representation of an instructions and makes the assembler insert the operands according to one of the instructions formats for ‘.insn’ (Instruction Formats). For example, the instruction ‘l %r1,24(%r15)’ could be written as ‘.insn rx,0x58000000,%r1,24(%r15)’.
.short
.long
.quad
This directive places one or more 16-bit (.short), 32-bit (.long), or 64-bit (.quad) values into the current section. If an ELF or TLS modifier is used only the following expressions are allowed: ‘symbol@modifier + constant’, ‘symbol@modifier + label + constant’, and ‘symbol@modifier - label + constant’. The following modifiers are available:
@got
@got12
The @got modifier can be used for .short, .long and .quad. The @got12 modifier is synonym to @got. The symbol is added to the GOT. The symbol term is replaced with offset from the start of the GOT to the GOT slot for the symbol.
@gotoff
The @gotoff modifier can be used for .short, .long and .quad. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the address of the symbol.
@gotplt
The @gotplt modifier can be used for .long and .quad. A procedure linkage table entry is generated for the symbol and a jump slot for the symbol is added to the GOT. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the jump slot for the symbol.
@plt
The @plt modifier can be used for .long and .quad. A procedure linkage table entry us generated for the symbol. The symbol term is replaced with the address of the PLT entry for the symbol.
@pltoff
The @pltoff modifier can be used for .short, .long and .quad. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the PLT to the address of the symbol.
@tlsgd
@tlsldm
The @tlsgd and @tlsldm modifier can be used for .long and .quad. A tls_index structure for the symbol is added to the GOT. The symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the tls_index structure.
@gotntpoff
@indntpoff
The @gotntpoff and @indntpoff modifier can be used for .long and .quad. The symbol is added to the static TLS block and the negated offset to the symbol in the static TLS block is added to the GOT. For @gotntpoff the symbol term is replaced with the offset from the start of the GOT to the GOT slot, for @indntpoff the symbol term is replaced with the address of the GOT slot.
@dtpoff
The @dtpoff modifier can be used for .long and .quad. The symbol term is replaced with the offset of the symbol relative to the start of the TLS block it is contained in.
@ntpoff
The @ntpoff modifier can be used for .long and .quad. The symbol term is replaced with the offset of the symbol relative to the TCB pointer.
For more information about the thread local storage modifiers see the ELF extension documentation ‘ELF Handling For Thread-Local Storage’.
.ltorg
¶This directive causes the current contents of the literal pool to be dumped to the current location (Literal Pool Entries).
.machine STRING[+EXTENSION]…
¶This directive allows changing the machine for which code is
generated. string
may be any of the -march=
selection options, or push
, or pop
. .machine
push
saves the currently selected cpu, which may be restored with
.machine pop
. Be aware that the cpu string has to be put
into double quotes in case it contains characters not appropriate
for identifiers. So you have to write "z9-109"
instead of
just z9-109
. Extensions can be specified after the cpu
name, separated by plus characters. Valid extensions are:
htm
,
nohtm
,
vx
,
novx
.
They extend the basic instruction set with features from a higher
cpu level, or remove support for a feature from the given cpu
level.
Example: z13+nohtm
allows all instructions of the z13 cpu
except instructions from the HTM facility.
.machinemode string
¶This directive allows one to change the architecture mode for which code
is being generated. string
may be esa
, zarch
,
zarch_nohighgprs
, push
, or pop
.
.machinemode zarch_nohighgprs
can be used to prevent the
highgprs
flag from being set in the ELF header of the output
file. This is useful in situations where the code is gated with a
runtime check which makes sure that the code is only executed on
kernels providing the highgprs
feature.
.machinemode push
saves the currently selected mode, which may
be restored with .machinemode pop
.
The assembler recognizes both the IEEE floating-point instruction and the hexadecimal floating-point instructions. The floating-point constructors ‘.float’, ‘.single’, and ‘.double’ always emit the IEEE format. To assemble hexadecimal floating-point constants the ‘.long’ and ‘.quad’ directives must be used.
The following table lists all available SCORE options.
-G num
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
implicitly with the gp
register. The default value is 8.
-EB
Assemble code for a big-endian cpu
-EL
Assemble code for a little-endian cpu
-FIXDD
Assemble code for fix data dependency
-NWARN
Assemble code for no warning message for fix data dependency
-SCORE5
Assemble code for target is SCORE5
-SCORE5U
Assemble code for target is SCORE5U
-SCORE7
Assemble code for target is SCORE7, this is default setting
-SCORE3
Assemble code for target is SCORE3
-march=score7
Assemble code for target is SCORE7, this is default setting
-march=score3
Assemble code for target is SCORE3
-USE_R1
Assemble code for no warning message when using temp register r1
-KPIC
Generate code for PIC. This option tells the assembler to generate score position-independent macro expansions. It also tells the assembler to mark the output file as PIC.
-O0
Assembler will not perform any optimizations
-V
Sunplus release version
A number of assembler directives are available for SCORE. The following table is far from complete.
.set nwarn
Let the assembler not to generate warnings if the source machine language instructions happen data dependency.
.set fixdd
Let the assembler to insert bubbles (32 bit nop instruction / 16 bit nop! Instruction) if the source machine language instructions happen data dependency.
.set nofixdd
Let the assembler to generate warnings if the source machine language instructions happen data dependency. (Default)
.set r1
Let the assembler not to generate warnings if the source program uses r1. allow user to use r1
set nor1
Let the assembler to generate warnings if the source program uses r1. (Default)
.sdata
Tell the assembler to add subsequent data into the sdata section
.rdata
Tell the assembler to add subsequent data into the rdata section
.frame "frame-register", "offset", "return-pc-register"
Describe a stack frame. "frame-register" is the frame register, "offset" is the distance from the frame register to the virtual frame pointer, "return-pc-register" is the return program register. You must use ".ent" before ".frame" and only one ".frame" can be used per ".ent".
.mask "bitmask", "frameoffset"
Indicate which of the integer registers are saved in the current function’s stack frame, this is for the debugger to explain the frame chain.
.ent "proc-name"
Set the beginning of the procedure "proc_name". Use this directive when you want to generate information for the debugger.
.end proc-name
Set the end of a procedure. Use this directive to generate information for the debugger.
.bss
Switch the destination of following statements into the bss section, which is used for data that is uninitialized anywhere.
The presence of a ‘#’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
as
has following command-line options for the Renesas
(formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH family.
--little
Generate little endian code.
--big
Generate big endian code.
--relax
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
--small
Align sections to 4 byte boundaries, not 16.
--dsp
Enable sh-dsp insns, and disable sh3e / sh4 insns.
--renesas
Disable optimization with section symbol for compatibility with Renesas assembler.
--allow-reg-prefix
Allow ’$’ as a register name prefix.
--fdpic
¶Generate an FDPIC object file.
--isa=sh4 | sh4a
Specify the sh4 or sh4a instruction set.
--isa=dsp
Enable sh-dsp insns, and disable sh3e / sh4 insns.
--isa=fp
Enable sh2e, sh3e, sh4, and sh4a insn sets.
--isa=all
Enable sh1, sh2, sh2e, sh3, sh3e, sh4, sh4a, and sh-dsp insn sets.
-h-tick-hex
Support H’00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
‘!’ is the line comment character.
You can use ‘;’ instead of a newline to separate statements.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Since ‘$’ has no special meaning, you may use it in symbol names.
You can use the predefined symbols ‘r0’, ‘r1’, ‘r2’, ‘r3’, ‘r4’, ‘r5’, ‘r6’, ‘r7’, ‘r8’, ‘r9’, ‘r10’, ‘r11’, ‘r12’, ‘r13’, ‘r14’, and ‘r15’ to refer to the SH registers.
The SH also has these control registers:
pr
procedure register (holds return address)
pc
program counter
mach
macl
high and low multiply accumulator registers
sr
status register
gbr
global base register
vbr
vector base register (for interrupt vectors)
as
understands the following addressing modes for the SH.
Rn
in the following refers to any of the numbered
registers, but not the control registers.
Rn
Register direct
@Rn
Register indirect
@-Rn
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@Rn+
Register indirect with post-increment
@(disp, Rn)
Register indirect with displacement
@(R0, Rn)
Register indexed
@(disp, GBR)
GBR
offset
@(R0, GBR)
GBR indexed
addr
@(disp, PC)
PC relative address (for branch or for addressing memory). The
as
implementation allows you to use the simpler form
addr anywhere a PC relative address is called for; the alternate
form is supported for compatibility with other assemblers.
#imm
Immediate data
SH2E, SH3E and SH4 groups have on-chip floating-point unit (FPU). Other
SH groups can use .float
directive to generate IEEE
floating-point numbers.
SH2E and SH3E support single-precision floating point calculations as well as entirely PCAPI compatible emulation of double-precision floating point calculations. SH2E and SH3E instructions are a subset of the floating point calculations conforming to the IEEE754 standard.
In addition to single-precision and double-precision floating-point operation capability, the on-chip FPU of SH4 has a 128-bit graphic engine that enables 32-bit floating-point data to be processed 128 bits at a time. It also supports 4 * 4 array operations and inner product operations. Also, a superscalar architecture is employed that enables simultaneous execution of two instructions (including FPU instructions), providing performance of up to twice that of conventional architectures at the same frequency.
uaword
ualong
uaquad
as
will issue a warning when a misaligned .word
,
.long
, or .quad
directive is used. You may use
.uaword
, .ualong
, or .uaquad
to indicate that the
value is intentionally misaligned.
For detailed information on the SH machine instruction set, see SH-Microcomputer User’s Manual (Renesas) or SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture (SuperH) and SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series (SuperH).
as
implements all the standard SH opcodes. No additional
pseudo-instructions are needed on this family. Note, however, that
because as
supports a simpler form of PC-relative
addressing, you may simply write (for example)
mov.l bar,r0
where other assemblers might require an explicit displacement to
bar
from the program counter:
mov.l @(disp, PC)
The SPARC chip family includes several successive versions, using the same core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions at each version. There are exceptions to this however. For details on what instructions each variant supports, please see the chip’s architecture reference manual.
By default, as
assumes the core instruction set (SPARC
v6), but “bumps” the architecture level as needed: it switches to
successively higher architectures as it encounters instructions that
only exist in the higher levels.
If not configured for SPARC v9 (sparc64-*-*
) GAS will not bump
past sparclite by default, an option must be passed to enable the
v9 instructions.
GAS treats sparclite as being compatible with v8, unless an architecture is explicitly requested. SPARC v9 is always incompatible with sparclite.
-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Aleon | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
¶-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av8plusb | -Av8plusc | -Av8plusd |
-Av8plusv | -Av8plusm | -Av8plusm8
-Av9 | -Av9a | -Av9b | -Av9c | -Av9d | -Av9e | -Av9v | -Av9m | -Av9m8
-Asparc | -Asparcvis | -Asparcvis2 | -Asparcfmaf | -Asparcima
-Asparcvis3 | -Asparcvis3r | -Asparc5 | -Asparc6
Use one of the ‘-A’ options to select one of the SPARC
architectures explicitly. If you select an architecture explicitly,
as
reports a fatal error if it encounters an instruction
or feature requiring an incompatible or higher level.
‘-Av8plus’, ‘-Av8plusa’, ‘-Av8plusb’, ‘-Av8plusc’, ‘-Av8plusd’, and ‘-Av8plusv’ select a 32 bit environment.
‘-Av9’, ‘-Av9a’, ‘-Av9b’, ‘-Av9c’, ‘-Av9d’, ‘-Av9e’, ‘-Av9v’ and ‘-Av9m’ select a 64 bit environment and are not available unless GAS is explicitly configured with 64 bit environment support.
‘-Av8plusa’ and ‘-Av9a’ enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with UltraSPARC VIS 1.0 extensions.
‘-Av8plusb’ and ‘-Av9b’ enable the UltraSPARC VIS 2.0 instructions, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusa’ and ‘-Av9a’.
‘-Av8plusc’ and ‘-Av9c’ enable the UltraSPARC Niagara instructions, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusb’ and ‘-Av9b’.
‘-Av8plusd’ and ‘-Av9d’ enable the floating point fused multiply-add, VIS 3.0, and HPC extension instructions, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusc’ and ‘-Av9c’.
‘-Av8pluse’ and ‘-Av9e’ enable the cryptographic instructions, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusd’ and ‘-Av9d’.
‘-Av8plusv’ and ‘-Av9v’ enable floating point unfused multiply-add, and integer multiply-add, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8pluse’ and ‘-Av9e’.
‘-Av8plusm’ and ‘-Av9m’ enable the VIS 4.0, subtract extended, xmpmul, xmontmul and xmontsqr instructions, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusv’ and ‘-Av9v’.
‘-Av8plusm8’ and ‘-Av9m8’ enable the instructions introduced in the Oracle SPARC Architecture 2017 and the M8 processor, as well as the instructions enabled by ‘-Av8plusm’ and ‘-Av9m’.
‘-Asparc’ specifies a v9 environment. It is equivalent to ‘-Av9’ if the word size is 64-bit, and ‘-Av8plus’ otherwise.
‘-Asparcvis’ specifies a v9a environment. It is equivalent to ‘-Av9a’ if the word size is 64-bit, and ‘-Av8plusa’ otherwise.
‘-Asparcvis2’ specifies a v9b environment. It is equivalent to ‘-Av9b’ if the word size is 64-bit, and ‘-Av8plusb’ otherwise.
‘-Asparcfmaf’ specifies a v9b environment with the floating point fused multiply-add instructions enabled.
‘-Asparcima’ specifies a v9b environment with the integer multiply-add instructions enabled.
‘-Asparcvis3’ specifies a v9b environment with the VIS 3.0, HPC , and floating point fused multiply-add instructions enabled.
‘-Asparcvis3r’ specifies a v9b environment with the VIS 3.0, HPC, and floating point unfused multiply-add instructions enabled.
‘-Asparc5’ is equivalent to ‘-Av9m’.
‘-Asparc6’ is equivalent to ‘-Av9m8’.
-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa | -xarch=v8plusb | -xarch=v8plusc
-xarch=v8plusd | -xarch=v8plusv | -xarch=v8plusm |
-xarch=v8plusm8 | -xarch=v9 | -xarch=v9a | -xarch=v9b
-xarch=v9c | -xarch=v9d | -xarch=v9e | -xarch=v9v
-xarch=v9m | -xarch=v9m8
-xarch=sparc | -xarch=sparcvis | -xarch=sparcvis2
-xarch=sparcfmaf | -xarch=sparcima | -xarch=sparcvis3
-xarch=sparcvis3r | -xarch=sparc5 | -xarch=sparc6
For compatibility with the SunOS v9 assembler. These options are equivalent to -Av8plus, -Av8plusa, -Av8plusb, -Av8plusc, -Av8plusd, -Av8plusv, -Av8plusm, -Av8plusm8, -Av9, -Av9a, -Av9b, -Av9c, -Av9d, -Av9e, -Av9v, -Av9m, -Av9m8, -Asparc, -Asparcvis, -Asparcvis2, -Asparcfmaf, -Asparcima, -Asparcvis3, -Asparcvis3r, -Asparc5 and -Asparc6 respectively.
-bump
Warn whenever it is necessary to switch to another level. If an architecture level is explicitly requested, GAS will not issue warnings until that level is reached, and will then bump the level as required (except between incompatible levels).
-32 | -64
Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits. These options are only available with the ELF object file format, and require that the necessary BFD support has been included.
--dcti-couples-detect
Warn if a DCTI (delayed control transfer instruction) couple is found when generating code for a variant of the SPARC architecture in which the execution of the couple is unpredictable, or very slow. This is disabled by default.
SPARC GAS normally permits data to be misaligned. For example, it
permits the .long
pseudo-op to be used on a byte boundary.
However, the native SunOS assemblers issue an error when they see
misaligned data.
You can use the --enforce-aligned-data
option to make SPARC GAS
also issue an error about misaligned data, just as the SunOS
assemblers do.
The --enforce-aligned-data
option is not the default because gcc
issues misaligned data pseudo-ops when it initializes certain packed
data structures (structures defined using the packed
attribute).
You may have to assemble with GAS in order to initialize packed data
structures in your own code.
The assembler syntax closely follows The Sparc Architecture Manual, versions 8 and 9, as well as most extensions defined by Sun for their UltraSPARC and Niagara line of processors.
A ‘!’ character appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
‘;’ can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
The Sparc integer register file is broken down into global, outgoing, local, and incoming.
Floating point registers are simply referred to as ‘%fn’. When assembling for pre-V9, only 32 floating point registers are available. For V9 and later there are 64, but there are restrictions when referencing the upper 32 registers. They can only be accessed as double or quad, and thus only even or quad numbered accesses are allowed. For example, ‘%f34’ is a legal floating point register, but ‘%f35’ is not.
Floating point registers accessed as double can also be referred using the ‘%dn’ notation, where n is even. Similarly, floating point registers accessed as quad can be referred using the ‘%qn’ notation, where n is a multiple of 4. For example, ‘%f4’ can be denoted as both ‘%d4’ and ‘%q4’. On the other hand, ‘%f2’ can be denoted as ‘%d2’ but not as ‘%q2’.
Certain V9 instructions allow access to ancillary state registers. Most simply they can be referred to as ‘%asrn’ where n can be from 16 to 31. However, there are some aliases defined to reference ASR registers defined for various UltraSPARC processors:
Various V9 branch and conditional move instructions allow specification of which set of integer condition codes to test. These are referred to as ‘%xcc’ and ‘%icc’.
Additionally, GAS supports the so-called “natural” condition codes; these are referred to as ‘%ncc’ and reference to ‘%icc’ if the word size is 32, ‘%xcc’ if the word size is 64.
In V9, there are 4 sets of floating point condition codes which are referred to as ‘%fccn’.
Several special privileged and non-privileged registers exist:
Several special register names exist for hypervisor mode code:
Several Sparc instructions take an immediate operand field for which mnemonic names exist. Two such examples are ‘membar’ and ‘prefetch’. Another example are the set of V9 memory access instruction that allow specification of an address space identifier.
The ‘membar’ instruction specifies a memory barrier that is the defined by the operand which is a bitmask. The supported mask mnemonics are:
membar
must have
been performed and the effects of any exceptions become visible before
any instructions after the membar
may be initiated. This
corresponds to membar
cmask field bit 2.
membar
must have been performed before
any memory operation after the membar
may be initiated. This
corresponds to membar
cmask field bit 1.
membar
must complete before any load following the
membar
referencing the same address can be initiated. This
corresponds to membar
cmask field bit 0.
membar
instruction must be visible to all
processors before the effect of any stores following the
membar
. Equivalent to the deprecated stbar
instruction.
This corresponds to membar
mmask field bit 3.
membar
instruction must have been performed before the effect
of any stores following the membar
is visible to any other
processor. This corresponds to membar
mmask field bit 2.
membar
instruction must be visible to all
processors before loads following the membar
may be performed.
This corresponds to membar
mmask field bit 1.
membar
instruction must have been performed before any loads
following the membar
may be performed. This corresponds to
membar
mmask field bit 0.
These values can be ored together, for example:
membar #Sync membar #StoreLoad | #LoadLoad membar #StoreLoad | #StoreStore
The prefetch
and prefetcha
instructions take a prefetch
function code. The following prefetch function code constant
mnemonics are available:
‘#one_read’ requests a prefetch for one read, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 1.
‘#n_writes’ requests a prefetch for several writes (and possibly reads), and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 2.
‘#one_write’ requests a prefetch for one write, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 3.
‘#page’ requests a prefetch page, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 4.
‘#invalidate’ requests a prefetch invalidate, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 16.
‘#unified’ requests a prefetch to the nearest unified cache, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 17.
‘#n_reads_strong’ requests a strong prefetch for several reads, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 20.
‘#one_read_strong’ requests a strong prefetch for one read, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 21.
‘#n_writes_strong’ requests a strong prefetch for several writes, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 22.
‘#one_write_strong’ requests a strong prefetch for one write, and corresponds to a prefetch function code of 23.
Onle one prefetch code may be specified. Here are some examples:
prefetch [%l0 + %l2], #one_read prefetch [%g2 + 8], #n_writes prefetcha [%g1] 0x8, #unified prefetcha [%o0 + 0x10] %asi, #n_reads
The actual behavior of a given prefetch function code is processor specific. If a processor does not implement a given prefetch function code, it will treat the prefetch instruction as a nop.
For instructions that accept an immediate address space identifier,
as
provides many mnemonics corresponding to
V9 defined as well as UltraSPARC and Niagara extended values.
For example, ‘#ASI_P’ and ‘#ASI_BLK_INIT_QUAD_LDD_AIUS’.
See the V9 and processor specific manuals for details.
ELF relocations are available as defined in the 32-bit and 64-bit Sparc ELF specifications.
R_SPARC_HI22
is obtained using ‘%hi’ and R_SPARC_LO10
is obtained using ‘%lo’. Likewise R_SPARC_HIX22
is
obtained from ‘%hix’ and R_SPARC_LOX10
is obtained
using ‘%lox’. For example:
sethi %hi(symbol), %g1 or %g1, %lo(symbol), %g1 sethi %hix(symbol), %g1 xor %g1, %lox(symbol), %g1
These “high” mnemonics extract bits 31:10 of their operand, and the “low” mnemonics extract bits 9:0 of their operand.
V9 code model relocations can be requested as follows:
R_SPARC_HH22
is requested using ‘%hh’. It can
also be generated using ‘%uhi’.
R_SPARC_HM10
is requested using ‘%hm’. It can
also be generated using ‘%ulo’.
R_SPARC_LM22
is requested using ‘%lm’.
R_SPARC_H44
is requested using ‘%h44’.
R_SPARC_M44
is requested using ‘%m44’.
R_SPARC_L44
is requested using ‘%l44’ or ‘%l34’.
R_SPARC_H34
is requested using ‘%h34’.
The ‘%l34’ generates a R_SPARC_L44
relocation because it
calculates the necessary value, and therefore no explicit
R_SPARC_L34
relocation needed to be created for this purpose.
The ‘%h34’ and ‘%l34’ relocations are used for the abs34 code model. Here is an example abs34 address generation sequence:
sethi %h34(symbol), %g1 sllx %g1, 2, %g1 or %g1, %l34(symbol), %g1
The PC relative relocation R_SPARC_PC22
can be obtained by
enclosing an operand inside of ‘%pc22’. Likewise, the
R_SPARC_PC10
relocation can be obtained using ‘%pc10’.
These are mostly used when assembling PIC code. For example, the
standard PIC sequence on Sparc to get the base of the global offset
table, PC relative, into a register, can be performed as:
sethi %pc22(_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_-4), %l7 add %l7, %pc10(_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+4), %l7
Several relocations exist to allow the link editor to potentially
optimize GOT data references. The R_SPARC_GOTDATA_OP_HIX22
relocation can obtained by enclosing an operand inside of
‘%gdop_hix22’. The R_SPARC_GOTDATA_OP_LOX10
relocation can obtained by enclosing an operand inside of
‘%gdop_lox10’. Likewise, R_SPARC_GOTDATA_OP
can be
obtained by enclosing an operand inside of ‘%gdop’.
For example, assuming the GOT base is in register %l7
:
sethi %gdop_hix22(symbol), %l1 xor %l1, %gdop_lox10(symbol), %l1 ld [%l7 + %l1], %l2, %gdop(symbol)
There are many relocations that can be requested for access to thread local storage variables. All of the Sparc TLS mnemonics are supported:
R_SPARC_TLS_GD_HI22
is requested using ‘%tgd_hi22’.
R_SPARC_TLS_GD_LO10
is requested using ‘%tgd_lo10’.
R_SPARC_TLS_GD_ADD
is requested using ‘%tgd_add’.
R_SPARC_TLS_GD_CALL
is requested using ‘%tgd_call’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDM_HI22
is requested using ‘%tldm_hi22’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDM_LO10
is requested using ‘%tldm_lo10’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDM_ADD
is requested using ‘%tldm_add’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDM_CALL
is requested using ‘%tldm_call’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDO_HIX22
is requested using ‘%tldo_hix22’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDO_LOX10
is requested using ‘%tldo_lox10’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LDO_ADD
is requested using ‘%tldo_add’.
R_SPARC_TLS_IE_HI22
is requested using ‘%tie_hi22’.
R_SPARC_TLS_IE_LO10
is requested using ‘%tie_lo10’.
R_SPARC_TLS_IE_LD
is requested using ‘%tie_ld’.
R_SPARC_TLS_IE_LDX
is requested using ‘%tie_ldx’.
R_SPARC_TLS_IE_ADD
is requested using ‘%tie_add’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LE_HIX22
is requested using ‘%tle_hix22’.
R_SPARC_TLS_LE_LOX10
is requested using ‘%tle_lox10’.
Here are some example TLS model sequences.
First, General Dynamic:
sethi %tgd_hi22(symbol), %l1 add %l1, %tgd_lo10(symbol), %l1 add %l7, %l1, %o0, %tgd_add(symbol) call __tls_get_addr, %tgd_call(symbol) nop
Local Dynamic:
sethi %tldm_hi22(symbol), %l1 add %l1, %tldm_lo10(symbol), %l1 add %l7, %l1, %o0, %tldm_add(symbol) call __tls_get_addr, %tldm_call(symbol) nop sethi %tldo_hix22(symbol), %l1 xor %l1, %tldo_lox10(symbol), %l1 add %o0, %l1, %l1, %tldo_add(symbol)
Initial Exec:
sethi %tie_hi22(symbol), %l1 add %l1, %tie_lo10(symbol), %l1 ld [%l7 + %l1], %o0, %tie_ld(symbol) add %g7, %o0, %o0, %tie_add(symbol) sethi %tie_hi22(symbol), %l1 add %l1, %tie_lo10(symbol), %l1 ldx [%l7 + %l1], %o0, %tie_ldx(symbol) add %g7, %o0, %o0, %tie_add(symbol)
And finally, Local Exec:
sethi %tle_hix22(symbol), %l1 add %l1, %tle_lox10(symbol), %l1 add %g7, %l1, %l1
When assembling for 64-bit, and a secondary constant addend is
specified in an address expression that would normally generate
an R_SPARC_LO10
relocation, the assembler will emit an
R_SPARC_OLO10
instead.
Often it is desirable to write code in an operand size agnostic
manner. as
provides support for this via
operand size opcode translations. Translations are supported
for loads, stores, shifts, compare-and-swap atomics, and the
‘clr’ synthetic instruction.
If generating 32-bit code, as
will generate the
32-bit opcode. Whereas if 64-bit code is being generated,
the 64-bit opcode will be emitted. For example ldn
will be transformed into ld
for 32-bit code and
ldx
for 64-bit code.
Here is an example meant to demonstrate all the supported opcode translations:
ldn [%o0], %o1 ldna [%o0] %asi, %o2 stn %o1, [%o0] stna %o2, [%o0] %asi slln %o3, 3, %o3 srln %o4, 8, %o4 sran %o5, 12, %o5 casn [%o0], %o1, %o2 casna [%o0] %asi, %o1, %o2 clrn %g1
In 32-bit mode as
will emit:
ld [%o0], %o1 lda [%o0] %asi, %o2 st %o1, [%o0] sta %o2, [%o0] %asi sll %o3, 3, %o3 srl %o4, 8, %o4 sra %o5, 12, %o5 cas [%o0], %o1, %o2 casa [%o0] %asi, %o1, %o2 clr %g1
And in 64-bit mode as
will emit:
ldx [%o0], %o1 ldxa [%o0] %asi, %o2 stx %o1, [%o0] stxa %o2, [%o0] %asi sllx %o3, 3, %o3 srlx %o4, 8, %o4 srax %o5, 12, %o5 casx [%o0], %o1, %o2 casxa [%o0] %asi, %o1, %o2 clrx %g1
Finally, the ‘.nword’ translating directive is supported as well. It is documented in the section on Sparc machine directives.
The Sparc version of as
supports the following additional
machine directives:
.align
¶This must be followed by the desired alignment in bytes.
.common
¶This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
"bss"
. This behaves somewhat like .comm
, but the
syntax is different.
.half
¶This is functionally identical to .short
.
.nword
¶On the Sparc, the .nword
directive produces native word sized value,
ie. if assembling with -32 it is equivalent to .word
, if assembling
with -64 it is equivalent to .xword
.
.proc
¶This directive is ignored. Any text following it on the same line is also ignored.
.register
¶This directive declares use of a global application or system register.
It must be followed by a register name %g2, %g3, %g6 or %g7, comma and
the symbol name for that register. If symbol name is #scratch
,
it is a scratch register, if it is #ignore
, it just suppresses any
errors about using undeclared global register, but does not emit any
information about it into the object file. This can be useful e.g. if you
save the register before use and restore it after.
.reserve
¶This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
"bss"
. This behaves somewhat like .lcomm
, but the
syntax is different.
.seg
¶This must be followed by "text"
, "data"
, or
"data1"
. It behaves like .text
, .data
, or
.data 1
.
.skip
¶This is functionally identical to the .space
directive.
.word
¶On the Sparc, the .word
directive produces 32 bit values,
instead of the 16 bit values it produces on many other machines.
.xword
¶On the Sparc V9 processor, the .xword
directive produces
64 bit values.
The TMS320C54X version of as
has a few machine-dependent options.
You can use the ‘-mfar-mode’ option to enable extended addressing mode. All addresses will be assumed to be > 16 bits, and the appropriate relocation types will be used. This option is equivalent to using the ‘.far_mode’ directive in the assembly code. If you do not use the ‘-mfar-mode’ option, all references will be assumed to be 16 bits. This option may be abbreviated to ‘-mf’.
You can use the ‘-mcpu’ option to specify a particular CPU.
This option is equivalent to using the ‘.version’ directive in the
assembly code. For recognized CPU codes, see
See .version
. The default CPU version is
‘542’.
You can use the ‘-merrors-to-file’ option to redirect error output to a file (this provided for those deficient environments which don’t provide adequate output redirection). This option may be abbreviated to ‘-me’.
A blocked section or memory block is guaranteed not to cross the blocking boundary (usually a page, or 128 words) if it is smaller than the blocking size, or to start on a page boundary if it is larger than the blocking size.
‘C54XDSP_DIR’ and ‘A_DIR’ are semicolon-separated paths which are added to the list of directories normally searched for source and include files. ‘C54XDSP_DIR’ will override ‘A_DIR’.
The TIC54X version of as
allows the following additional
constant formats, using a suffix to indicate the radix:
A subset of allowable symbols (which we’ll call subsyms) may be assigned
arbitrary string values. This is roughly equivalent to C preprocessor
#define macros. When as
encounters one of these
symbols, the symbol is replaced in the input stream by its string value.
Subsym names must begin with a letter.
Subsyms may be defined using the .asg
and .eval
directives
(See .asg
,
See .eval
.
Expansion is recursive until a previously encountered symbol is seen, at which point substitution stops.
In this example, x is replaced with SYM2; SYM2 is replaced with SYM1, and SYM1 is replaced with x. At this point, x has already been encountered and the substitution stops.
.asg "x",SYM1 .asg "SYM1",SYM2 .asg "SYM2",x add x,a ; final code assembled is "add x, a"
Macro parameters are converted to subsyms; a side effect of this is the normal
as
’\ARG’ dereferencing syntax is unnecessary. Subsyms
defined within a macro will have global scope, unless the .var
directive is used to identify the subsym as a local macro variable
see .var
.
Substitution may be forced in situations where replacement might be ambiguous by placing colons on either side of the subsym. The following code:
.eval "10",x LAB:X: add #x, a
When assembled becomes:
LAB10 add #10, a
Smaller parts of the string assigned to a subsym may be accessed with the following syntax:
:symbol(char_index):
Evaluates to a single-character string, the character at char_index.
:symbol(start,length):
Evaluates to a substring of symbol beginning at start with length length.
Local labels may be defined in two ways:
Local labels thus defined may be redefined or automatically generated. The scope of a local label is based on when it may be undefined or reset. This happens when one of the following situations is encountered:
.newblock
The following built-in functions may be used to generate a floating-point value. All return a floating-point value except ‘$cvi’, ‘$int’, and ‘$sgn’, which return an integer value.
$acos(expr)
¶Returns the floating point arccosine of expr.
$asin(expr)
¶Returns the floating point arcsine of expr.
$atan(expr)
¶Returns the floating point arctangent of expr.
$atan2(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point arctangent of expr1 / expr2.
$ceil(expr)
¶Returns the smallest integer not less than expr as floating point.
$cosh(expr)
¶Returns the floating point hyperbolic cosine of expr.
$cos(expr)
¶Returns the floating point cosine of expr.
$cvf(expr)
¶Returns the integer value expr converted to floating-point.
$cvi(expr)
¶Returns the floating point value expr converted to integer.
$exp(expr)
¶Returns the floating point value e ^ expr.
$fabs(expr)
¶Returns the floating point absolute value of expr.
$floor(expr)
¶Returns the largest integer that is not greater than expr as floating point.
$fmod(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point remainder of expr1 / expr2.
$int(expr)
¶Returns 1 if expr evaluates to an integer, zero otherwise.
$ldexp(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point value expr1 * 2 ^ expr2.
$log10(expr)
¶Returns the base 10 logarithm of expr.
$log(expr)
¶Returns the natural logarithm of expr.
$max(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point maximum of expr1 and expr2.
$min(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point minimum of expr1 and expr2.
$pow(expr1,expr2)
¶Returns the floating point value expr1 ^ expr2.
$round(expr)
¶Returns the nearest integer to expr as a floating point number.
$sgn(expr)
¶Returns -1, 0, or 1 based on the sign of expr.
$sin(expr)
¶Returns the floating point sine of expr.
$sinh(expr)
¶Returns the floating point hyperbolic sine of expr.
$sqrt(expr)
¶Returns the floating point square root of expr.
$tan(expr)
¶Returns the floating point tangent of expr.
$tanh(expr)
¶Returns the floating point hyperbolic tangent of expr.
$trunc(expr)
¶Returns the integer value of expr truncated towards zero as floating point.
The LDX
pseudo-op is provided for loading the extended addressing bits
of a label or address. For example, if an address _label
resides
in extended program memory, the value of _label
may be loaded as
follows:
ldx #_label,16,a ; loads extended bits of _label or #_label,a ; loads lower 16 bits of _label bacc a ; full address is in accumulator A
.align [size]
¶.even
Align the section program counter on the next boundary, based on
size. size may be any power of 2. .even
is
equivalent to .align
with a size of 2.
1
Align SPC to word boundary
2
Align SPC to longword boundary (same as .even)
128
Align SPC to page boundary
.asg string, name
¶Assign name the string string. String replacement is performed on string before assignment.
.eval string, name
¶Evaluate the contents of string string and assign the result as a string to the subsym name. String replacement is performed on string before assignment.
.bss symbol, size [, [blocking_flag] [,alignment_flag]]
¶Reserve space for symbol in the .bss section. size is in words. If present, blocking_flag indicates the allocated space should be aligned on a page boundary if it would otherwise cross a page boundary. If present, alignment_flag causes the assembler to allocate size on a long word boundary.
.byte value [,...,value_n]
¶.ubyte value [,...,value_n]
.char value [,...,value_n]
.uchar value [,...,value_n]
Place one or more bytes into consecutive words of the current section. The upper 8 bits of each word is zero-filled. If a label is used, it points to the word allocated for the first byte encountered.
.clink ["section_name"]
¶Set STYP_CLINK flag for this section, which indicates to the linker that if no symbols from this section are referenced, the section should not be included in the link. If section_name is omitted, the current section is used.
.c_mode
¶TBD.
.copy "filename" | filename
¶.include "filename" | filename
Read source statements from filename. The normal include search path is used. Normally .copy will cause statements from the included file to be printed in the assembly listing and .include will not, but this distinction is not currently implemented.
.data
¶Begin assembling code into the .data section.
.double value [,...,value_n]
¶.ldouble value [,...,value_n]
.float value [,...,value_n]
.xfloat value [,...,value_n]
Place an IEEE single-precision floating-point representation of one or
more floating-point values into the current section. All but
.xfloat
align the result on a longword boundary. Values are
stored most-significant word first.
.drlist
¶.drnolist
Control printing of directives to the listing file. Ignored.
.emsg string
¶.mmsg string
.wmsg string
Emit a user-defined error, message, or warning, respectively.
.far_mode
¶Use extended addressing when assembling statements. This should appear
only once per file, and is equivalent to the -mfar-mode option see -mfar-mode
.
.fclist
¶.fcnolist
Control printing of false conditional blocks to the listing file.
.field value [,size]
¶Initialize a bitfield of size bits in the current section. If
value is relocatable, then size must be 16. size
defaults to 16 bits. If value does not fit into size bits,
the value will be truncated. Successive .field
directives will
pack starting at the current word, filling the most significant bits
first, and aligning to the start of the next word if the field size does
not fit into the space remaining in the current word. A .align
directive with an operand of 1 will force the next .field
directive to begin packing into a new word. If a label is used, it
points to the word that contains the specified field.
.global symbol [,...,symbol_n]
¶.def symbol [,...,symbol_n]
.ref symbol [,...,symbol_n]
.def
nominally identifies a symbol defined in the current file
and available to other files. .ref
identifies a symbol used in
the current file but defined elsewhere. Both map to the standard
.global
directive.
.half value [,...,value_n]
¶.uhalf value [,...,value_n]
.short value [,...,value_n]
.ushort value [,...,value_n]
.int value [,...,value_n]
.uint value [,...,value_n]
.word value [,...,value_n]
.uword value [,...,value_n]
Place one or more values into consecutive words of the current section. If a label is used, it points to the word allocated for the first value encountered.
.label symbol
¶Define a special symbol to refer to the load time address of the current section program counter.
.length
¶.width
Set the page length and width of the output listing file. Ignored.
.list
¶.nolist
Control whether the source listing is printed. Ignored.
.long value [,...,value_n]
¶.ulong value [,...,value_n]
.xlong value [,...,value_n]
Place one or more 32-bit values into consecutive words in the current
section. The most significant word is stored first. .long
and
.ulong
align the result on a longword boundary; xlong
does
not.
.loop [count]
¶.break [condition]
.endloop
Repeatedly assemble a block of code. .loop
begins the block, and
.endloop
marks its termination. count defaults to 1024,
and indicates the number of times the block should be repeated.
.break
terminates the loop so that assembly begins after the
.endloop
directive. The optional condition will cause the
loop to terminate only if it evaluates to zero.
macro_name .macro [param1][,...param_n]
¶[.mexit]
.endm
See the section on macros for more explanation (See Macros.
.mlib "filename" | filename
¶Load the macro library filename. filename must be an archived library (BFD ar-compatible) of text files, expected to contain only macro definitions. The standard include search path is used.
.mlist
¶.mnolist
Control whether to include macro and loop block expansions in the listing output. Ignored.
.mmregs
¶Define global symbolic names for the ’c54x registers. Supposedly
equivalent to executing .set
directives for each register with
its memory-mapped value, but in reality is provided only for
compatibility and does nothing.
.newblock
¶This directive resets any TIC54X local labels currently defined. Normal
as
local labels are unaffected.
.option option_list
¶Set listing options. Ignored.
.sblock "section_name" | section_name [,"name_n" | name_n]
¶Designate section_name for blocking. Blocking guarantees that a section will start on a page boundary (128 words) if it would otherwise cross a page boundary. Only initialized sections may be designated with this directive. See also See Blocking.
.sect "section_name"
¶Define a named initialized section and make it the current section.
symbol .set "value"
¶symbol .equ "value"
Equate a constant value to a symbol, which is placed in the symbol table. symbol may not be previously defined.
.space size_in_bits
¶.bes size_in_bits
Reserve the given number of bits in the current section and zero-fill
them. If a label is used with .space
, it points to the
first word reserved. With .bes
, the label points to the
last word reserved.
.sslist
¶.ssnolist
Controls the inclusion of subsym replacement in the listing output. Ignored.
.string "string" [,...,"string_n"]
¶.pstring "string" [,...,"string_n"]
Place 8-bit characters from string into the current section.
.string
zero-fills the upper 8 bits of each word, while
.pstring
puts two characters into each word, filling the
most-significant bits first. Unused space is zero-filled. If a label
is used, it points to the first word initialized.
[stag] .struct [offset]
¶[name_1] element [count_1]
[name_2] element [count_2]
[tname] .tag stagx [tcount]
...
[name_n] element [count_n]
[ssize] .endstruct
label .tag [stag]
Assign symbolic offsets to the elements of a structure. stag
defines a symbol to use to reference the structure. offset
indicates a starting value to use for the first element encountered;
otherwise it defaults to zero. Each element can have a named offset,
name, which is a symbol assigned the value of the element’s offset
into the structure. If stag is missing, these become global
symbols. count adjusts the offset that many times, as if
element
were an array. element
may be one of
.byte
, .word
, .long
, .float
, or any
equivalent of those, and the structure offset is adjusted accordingly.
.field
and .string
are also allowed; the size of
.field
is one bit, and .string
is considered to be one
word in size. Only element descriptors, structure/union tags,
.align
and conditional assembly directives are allowed within
.struct
/.endstruct
. .align
aligns member offsets
to word boundaries only. ssize, if provided, will always be
assigned the size of the structure.
The .tag
directive, in addition to being used to define a
structure/union element within a structure, may be used to apply a
structure to a symbol. Once applied to label, the individual
structure elements may be applied to label to produce the desired
offsets using label as the structure base.
.tab
¶Set the tab size in the output listing. Ignored.
[utag] .union
¶[name_1] element [count_1]
[name_2] element [count_2]
[tname] .tag utagx[,tcount]
...
[name_n] element [count_n]
[usize] .endstruct
label .tag [utag]
Similar to .struct
, but the offset after each element is reset to
zero, and the usize is set to the maximum of all defined elements.
Starting offset for the union is always zero.
[symbol] .usect "section_name", size, [,[blocking_flag] [,alignment_flag]]
¶Reserve space for variables in a named, uninitialized section (similar to
.bss). .usect
allows definitions sections independent of .bss.
symbol points to the first location reserved by this allocation.
The symbol may be used as a variable name. size is the allocated
size in words. blocking_flag indicates whether to block this
section on a page boundary (128 words) (see Blocking).
alignment flag indicates whether the section should be
longword-aligned.
.var sym[,..., sym_n]
¶Define a subsym to be a local variable within a macro. See See Macros.
.version version
¶Set which processor to build instructions for. Though the following values are accepted, the op is ignored.
541
542
543
545
545LP
546LP
548
549
Macros do not require explicit dereferencing of arguments (i.e., \ARG).
During macro expansion, the macro parameters are converted to subsyms. If the number of arguments passed the macro invocation exceeds the number of parameters defined, the last parameter is assigned the string equivalent of all remaining arguments. If fewer arguments are given than parameters, the missing parameters are assigned empty strings. To include a comma in an argument, you must enclose the argument in quotes.
The following built-in subsym functions allow examination of the string value of subsyms (or ordinary strings). The arguments are strings unless otherwise indicated (subsyms passed as args will be replaced by the strings they represent).
$symlen(str)
¶Returns the length of str.
$symcmp(str1,str2)
¶Returns 0 if str1 == str2, non-zero otherwise.
$firstch(str,ch)
¶Returns index of the first occurrence of character constant ch in str.
$lastch(str,ch)
¶Returns index of the last occurrence of character constant ch in str.
$isdefed(symbol)
¶Returns zero if the symbol symbol is not in the symbol table, non-zero otherwise.
$ismember(symbol,list)
¶Assign the first member of comma-separated string list to symbol; list is reassigned the remainder of the list. Returns zero if list is a null string. Both arguments must be subsyms.
$iscons(expr)
¶Returns 1 if string expr is binary, 2 if octal, 3 if hexadecimal, 4 if a character, 5 if decimal, and zero if not an integer.
$isname(name)
¶Returns 1 if name is a valid symbol name, zero otherwise.
$isreg(reg)
¶Returns 1 if reg is a valid predefined register name (AR0-AR7 only).
$structsz(stag)
¶Returns the size of the structure or union represented by stag.
$structacc(stag)
¶Returns the reference point of the structure or union represented by stag. Always returns zero.
The presence of a ‘;’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The presence of an asterisk (‘*’) at the start of a line also indicates a comment that extends to the end of that line.
The TIC54X assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
-march=arch
¶Enable (only) instructions from architecture arch. By default, all instructions are permitted.
The following values of arch are accepted: c62x
,
c64x
, c64x+
, c67x
, c67x+
, c674x
.
-mdsbt
¶-mno-dsbt
The -mdsbt option causes the assembler to generate the
Tag_ABI_DSBT
attribute with a value of 1, indicating that the
code is using DSBT addressing. The -mno-dsbt option, the
default, causes the tag to have a value of 0, indicating that the code
does not use DSBT addressing. The linker will emit a warning if
objects of different type (DSBT and non-DSBT) are linked together.
-mpid=no
¶-mpid=near
-mpid=far
The -mpid= option causes the assembler to generate the
Tag_ABI_PID
attribute with a value indicating the form of data
addressing used by the code. -mpid=no, the default,
indicates position-dependent data addressing, -mpid=near
indicates position-independent addressing with GOT accesses using near
DP addressing, and -mpid=far indicates position-independent
addressing with GOT accesses using far DP addressing. The linker will
emit a warning if objects built with different settings of this option
are linked together.
-mpic
¶-mno-pic
The -mpic option causes the assembler to generate the
Tag_ABI_PIC
attribute with a value of 1, indicating that the
code is using position-independent code addressing, The
-mno-pic
option, the default, causes the tag to have a value of
0, indicating position-dependent code addressing. The linker will
emit a warning if objects of different type (position-dependent and
position-independent) are linked together.
-mbig-endian
¶-mlittle-endian
Generate code for the specified endianness. The default is little-endian.
The presence of a ‘;’ on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of the current line. If a ‘#’ or ‘*’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment. Note that if a line starts with a ‘#’ character then it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘@’ character can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
Instruction, register and functional unit names are case-insensitive.
as
requires fully-specified functional unit names,
such as ‘.S1’, ‘.L1X’ or ‘.D1T2’, on all instructions
using a functional unit.
For some instructions, there may be syntactic ambiguity between register or functional unit names and the names of labels or other symbols. To avoid this, enclose the ambiguous symbol name in parentheses; register and functional unit names may not be enclosed in parentheses.
Directives controlling the set of instructions accepted by the assembler have effect for instructions between the directive and any subsequent directive overriding it.
.arch arch
¶This has the same effect as -march=arch.
.cantunwind
¶Prevents unwinding through the current function. No personality routine or exception table data is required or permitted.
If this is not specified then frame unwinding information will be constructed from CFI directives. see CFI directives.
.c6xabi_attribute tag, value
¶Set the C6000 EABI build attribute tag to value.
The tag is either an attribute number or one of
Tag_ISA
, Tag_ABI_wchar_t
,
Tag_ABI_stack_align_needed
,
Tag_ABI_stack_align_preserved
, Tag_ABI_DSBT
,
Tag_ABI_PID
, Tag_ABI_PIC
,
TAG_ABI_array_object_alignment
,
TAG_ABI_array_object_align_expected
,
Tag_ABI_compatibility
and Tag_ABI_conformance
. The
value is either a number
, "string"
, or
number, "string"
depending on the tag.
.ehtype symbol
¶Output an exception type table reference to symbol.
.endp
¶Marks the end of and exception table or function. If preceded by a
.handlerdata
directive then this also switched back to the previous
text section.
.handlerdata
¶Marks the end of the current function, and the start of the exception table
entry for that function. Anything between this directive and the
.endp
directive will be added to the exception table entry.
Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a .cfi_lsda
directive.
.nocmp
¶Disallow use of C64x+ compact instructions in the current text section.
.personalityindex index
¶Sets the personality routine for the current function to the ABI specified compact routine number index
.personality name
¶Sets the personality routine for the current function to name.
.scomm symbol, size, align
¶Like .comm
, creating a common symbol symbol with size size
and alignment align, but unlike when using .comm
, this symbol
will be placed into the small BSS section by the linker.
The following table lists all available TILE-Gx specific options:
-m32 | -m64
¶Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits.
-EB | -EL
¶Select the endianness, either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL).
Block comments are delimited by ‘/*’ and ‘*/’. End of line comments may be introduced by ‘#’.
Instructions consist of a leading opcode or macro name followed by whitespace and an optional comma-separated list of operands:
opcode [operand, ...]
Instructions must be separated by a newline or semicolon.
There are two ways to write code: either write naked instructions, which the assembler is free to combine into VLIW bundles, or specify the VLIW bundles explicitly.
Bundles are specified using curly braces:
{ add r3,r4,r5 ; add r7,r8,r9 ; lw r10,r11 }
A bundle can span multiple lines. If you want to put multiple instructions on a line, whether in a bundle or not, you need to separate them with semicolons as in this example.
A bundle may contain one or more instructions, up to the limit
specified by the ISA (currently three). If fewer instructions are
specified than the hardware supports in a bundle, the assembler
inserts fnop
instructions automatically.
The assembler will prefer to preserve the ordering of instructions
within the bundle, putting the first instruction in a lower-numbered
pipeline than the next one, etc. This fact, combined with the
optional use of explicit fnop
or nop
instructions,
allows precise control over which pipeline executes each instruction.
If the instructions cannot be bundled in the listed order, the assembler will automatically try to find a valid pipeline assignment. If there is no way to bundle the instructions together, the assembler reports an error.
The assembler does not yet auto-bundle (automatically combine multiple
instructions into one bundle), but it reserves the right to do so in
the future. If you want to force an instruction to run by itself, put
it in a bundle explicitly with curly braces and use nop
instructions (not fnop
) to fill the remaining pipeline slots in
that bundle.
For a complete list of opcodes and descriptions of their semantics, see TILE-Gx Instruction Set Architecture, available upon request at www.tilera.com.
General-purpose registers are represented by predefined symbols of the
form ‘rN’, where N represents a number between
0
and 63
. However, the following registers have
canonical names that must be used instead:
r54
sp
r55
lr
r56
sn
r57
idn0
r58
idn1
r59
udn0
r60
udn1
r61
udn2
r62
udn3
r63
zero
The assembler will emit a warning if a numeric name is used instead of
the non-numeric name. The .no_require_canonical_reg_names
assembler pseudo-op turns off this
warning. .require_canonical_reg_names
turns it back on.
The assembler supports several modifiers when using symbol addresses in TILE-Gx instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
modifier(symbol)
The following modifiers are supported:
hw0
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the symbol’s address.
hw1
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the symbol’s address.
hw2
This modifier is used to load bits 32-47 of the symbol’s address.
hw3
This modifier is used to load bits 48-63 of the symbol’s address.
hw0_last
This modifier yields the same value as hw0
, but it also checks
that the value does not overflow.
hw1_last
This modifier yields the same value as hw1
, but it also checks
that the value does not overflow.
hw2_last
This modifier yields the same value as hw2
, but it also checks
that the value does not overflow.
A 48-bit symbolic value is constructed by using the following idiom:
moveli r0, hw2_last(sym) shl16insli r0, r0, hw1(sym) shl16insli r0, r0, hw0(sym)
hw0_got
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the symbol’s offset in the GOT entry corresponding to the symbol.
hw0_last_got
This modifier yields the same value as hw0_got
, but it also
checks that the value does not overflow.
hw1_last_got
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the symbol’s offset in the GOT entry corresponding to the symbol, and it also checks that the value does not overflow.
plt
This modifier is used for function symbols. It causes a procedure linkage table, an array of code stubs, to be created at the time the shared object is created or linked against, together with a global offset table entry. The value is a pc-relative offset to the corresponding stub code in the procedure linkage table. This arrangement causes the run-time symbol resolver to be called to look up and set the value of the symbol the first time the function is called (at latest; depending environment variables). It is only safe to leave the symbol unresolved this way if all references are function calls.
hw0_plt
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the pc-relative address of a plt entry.
hw1_plt
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the pc-relative address of a plt entry.
hw1_last_plt
This modifier yields the same value as hw1_plt
, but it also
checks that the value does not overflow.
hw2_last_plt
This modifier is used to load bits 32-47 of the pc-relative address of a plt entry, and it also checks that the value does not overflow.
hw0_tls_gd
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the offset of the GOT entry of the symbol’s TLS descriptor, to be used for general-dynamic TLS accesses.
hw0_last_tls_gd
This modifier yields the same value as hw0_tls_gd
, but it also
checks that the value does not overflow.
hw1_last_tls_gd
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the offset of the GOT entry of the symbol’s TLS descriptor, to be used for general-dynamic TLS accesses. It also checks that the value does not overflow.
hw0_tls_ie
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the offset of the GOT entry containing the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for initial-exec TLS accesses.
hw0_last_tls_ie
This modifier yields the same value as hw0_tls_ie
, but it also
checks that the value does not overflow.
hw1_last_tls_ie
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the offset of the GOT entry containing the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for initial-exec TLS accesses. It also checks that the value does not overflow.
hw0_tls_le
This modifier is used to load bits 0-15 of the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for local-exec TLS accesses.
hw0_last_tls_le
This modifier yields the same value as hw0_tls_le
, but it also
checks that the value does not overflow.
hw1_last_tls_le
This modifier is used to load bits 16-31 of the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for local-exec TLS accesses. It also checks that the value does not overflow.
tls_gd_call
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “call” part of a calling sequence for a TLS GD reference of its operand.
tls_gd_add
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “add” part of a calling sequence for a TLS GD reference of its operand.
tls_ie_load
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “load” part of a calling sequence for a TLS IE reference of its operand.
.align expression [, expression]
¶This is the generic .align directive. The first argument is the requested alignment in bytes.
.allow_suspicious_bundles
¶Turns on error checking for combinations of instructions in a bundle that probably indicate a programming error. This is on by default.
.no_allow_suspicious_bundles
Turns off error checking for combinations of instructions in a bundle that probably indicate a programming error.
.require_canonical_reg_names
¶Require that canonical register names be used, and emit a warning if the numeric names are used. This is on by default.
.no_require_canonical_reg_names
Permit the use of numeric names for registers that have canonical names.
Block comments are delimited by ‘/*’ and ‘*/’. End of line comments may be introduced by ‘#’.
Instructions consist of a leading opcode or macro name followed by whitespace and an optional comma-separated list of operands:
opcode [operand, ...]
Instructions must be separated by a newline or semicolon.
There are two ways to write code: either write naked instructions, which the assembler is free to combine into VLIW bundles, or specify the VLIW bundles explicitly.
Bundles are specified using curly braces:
{ add r3,r4,r5 ; add r7,r8,r9 ; lw r10,r11 }
A bundle can span multiple lines. If you want to put multiple instructions on a line, whether in a bundle or not, you need to separate them with semicolons as in this example.
A bundle may contain one or more instructions, up to the limit
specified by the ISA (currently three). If fewer instructions are
specified than the hardware supports in a bundle, the assembler
inserts fnop
instructions automatically.
The assembler will prefer to preserve the ordering of instructions
within the bundle, putting the first instruction in a lower-numbered
pipeline than the next one, etc. This fact, combined with the
optional use of explicit fnop
or nop
instructions,
allows precise control over which pipeline executes each instruction.
If the instructions cannot be bundled in the listed order, the assembler will automatically try to find a valid pipeline assignment. If there is no way to bundle the instructions together, the assembler reports an error.
The assembler does not yet auto-bundle (automatically combine multiple
instructions into one bundle), but it reserves the right to do so in
the future. If you want to force an instruction to run by itself, put
it in a bundle explicitly with curly braces and use nop
instructions (not fnop
) to fill the remaining pipeline slots in
that bundle.
For a complete list of opcodes and descriptions of their semantics, see TILE Processor User Architecture Manual, available upon request at www.tilera.com.
General-purpose registers are represented by predefined symbols of the
form ‘rN’, where N represents a number between
0
and 63
. However, the following registers have
canonical names that must be used instead:
r54
sp
r55
lr
r56
sn
r57
idn0
r58
idn1
r59
udn0
r60
udn1
r61
udn2
r62
udn3
r63
zero
The assembler will emit a warning if a numeric name is used instead of
the canonical name. The .no_require_canonical_reg_names
assembler pseudo-op turns off this
warning. .require_canonical_reg_names
turns it back on.
The assembler supports several modifiers when using symbol addresses in TILEPro instruction operands. The general syntax is the following:
modifier(symbol)
The following modifiers are supported:
lo16
This modifier is used to load the low 16 bits of the symbol’s address, sign-extended to a 32-bit value (sign-extension allows it to be range-checked against signed 16 bit immediate operands without complaint).
hi16
This modifier is used to load the high 16 bits of the symbol’s address, also sign-extended to a 32-bit value.
ha16
ha16(N)
is identical to hi16(N)
, except if
lo16(N)
is negative it adds one to the hi16(N)
value. This way lo16
and ha16
can be added to create any
32-bit value using auli
. For example, here is how you move an
arbitrary 32-bit address into r3:
moveli r3, lo16(sym) auli r3, r3, ha16(sym)
got
This modifier is used to load the offset of the GOT entry corresponding to the symbol.
got_lo16
This modifier is used to load the sign-extended low 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry corresponding to the symbol.
got_hi16
This modifier is used to load the sign-extended high 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry corresponding to the symbol.
got_ha16
This modifier is like got_hi16
, but it adds one if
got_lo16
of the input value is negative.
plt
This modifier is used for function symbols. It causes a procedure linkage table, an array of code stubs, to be created at the time the shared object is created or linked against, together with a global offset table entry. The value is a pc-relative offset to the corresponding stub code in the procedure linkage table. This arrangement causes the run-time symbol resolver to be called to look up and set the value of the symbol the first time the function is called (at latest; depending environment variables). It is only safe to leave the symbol unresolved this way if all references are function calls.
tls_gd
This modifier is used to load the offset of the GOT entry of the symbol’s TLS descriptor, to be used for general-dynamic TLS accesses.
tls_gd_lo16
This modifier is used to load the sign-extended low 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry of the symbol’s TLS descriptor, to be used for general dynamic TLS accesses.
tls_gd_hi16
This modifier is used to load the sign-extended high 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry of the symbol’s TLS descriptor, to be used for general dynamic TLS accesses.
tls_gd_ha16
This modifier is like tls_gd_hi16
, but it adds one to the value
if tls_gd_lo16
of the input value is negative.
tls_ie
This modifier is used to load the offset of the GOT entry containing the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for initial-exec TLS accesses.
tls_ie_lo16
This modifier is used to load the low 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry containing the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for initial-exec TLS accesses.
tls_ie_hi16
This modifier is used to load the high 16 bits of the offset of the GOT entry containing the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for initial-exec TLS accesses.
tls_ie_ha16
This modifier is like tls_ie_hi16
, but it adds one to the value
if tls_ie_lo16
of the input value is negative.
tls_le
This modifier is used to load the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for local-exec TLS accesses.
tls_le_lo16
This modifier is used to load the low 16 bits of the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for local-exec TLS accesses.
tls_le_hi16
This modifier is used to load the high 16 bits of the offset of the symbol’s address from the TCB, to be used for local-exec TLS accesses.
tls_le_ha16
This modifier is like tls_le_hi16
, but it adds one to the value
if tls_le_lo16
of the input value is negative.
tls_gd_call
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “call” part of a calling sequence for a TLS GD reference of its operand.
tls_gd_add
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “add” part of a calling sequence for a TLS GD reference of its operand.
tls_ie_load
This modifier is used to tag an instruction as the “load” part of a calling sequence for a TLS IE reference of its operand.
.align expression [, expression]
¶This is the generic .align directive. The first argument is the requested alignment in bytes.
.allow_suspicious_bundles
¶Turns on error checking for combinations of instructions in a bundle that probably indicate a programming error. This is on by default.
.no_allow_suspicious_bundles
Turns off error checking for combinations of instructions in a bundle that probably indicate a programming error.
.require_canonical_reg_names
¶Require that canonical register names be used, and emit a warning if the numeric names are used. This is on by default.
.no_require_canonical_reg_names
Permit the use of numeric names for registers that have canonical names.
as
supports the following additional command-line options
for the V850 processor family:
-wsigned_overflow
¶Causes warnings to be produced when signed immediate values overflow the space available for then within their opcodes. By default this option is disabled as it is possible to receive spurious warnings due to using exact bit patterns as immediate constants.
-wunsigned_overflow
¶Causes warnings to be produced when unsigned immediate values overflow the space available for then within their opcodes. By default this option is disabled as it is possible to receive spurious warnings due to using exact bit patterns as immediate constants.
-mv850
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mv850e
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mv850e1
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E1 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mv850any
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850 processor but support instructions that are specific to the extended variants of the process. This allows the production of binaries that contain target specific code, but which are also intended to be used in a generic fashion. For example libgcc.a contains generic routines used by the code produced by GCC for all versions of the v850 architecture, together with support routines only used by the V850E architecture.
-mv850e2
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E2 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mv850e2v3
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E2V3 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mv850e2v4
¶This is an alias for -mv850e3v5.
-mv850e3v5
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E3V5 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
-mrelax
¶Enables relaxation. This allows the .longcall and .longjump pseudo ops to be used in the assembler source code. These ops label sections of code which are either a long function call or a long branch. The assembler will then flag these sections of code and the linker will attempt to relax them.
-mgcc-abi
¶Marks the generated object file as supporting the old GCC ABI.
-mrh850-abi
¶Marks the generated object file as supporting the RH850 ABI. This is the default.
-m8byte-align
¶Marks the generated object file as supporting a maximum 64-bits of alignment for variables defined in the source code.
-m4byte-align
¶Marks the generated object file as supporting a maximum 32-bits of alignment for variables defined in the source code. This is the default.
-msoft-float
¶Marks the generated object file as not using any floating point
instructions - and hence can be linked with other V850 binaries
that do or do not use floating point. This is the default for
binaries for architectures earlier than the e2v3
.
-mhard-float
¶Marks the generated object file as one that uses floating point
instructions - and hence can only be linked with other V850 binaries
that use the same kind of floating point instructions, or with
binaries that do not use floating point at all. This is the default
for binaries the e2v3
and later architectures.
‘#’ is the line comment character. If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Two dashes (‘--’) can also be used to start a line comment.
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
as
supports the following names for registers:
general register 0
¶r0, zero
general register 1
r1
general register 2
general register 3
general register 4
general register 5
r5, tp
general register 6
r6
general register 7
r7
general register 8
r8
general register 9
r9
general register 10
r10
general register 11
r11
general register 12
r12
general register 13
r13
general register 14
r14
general register 15
r15
general register 16
r16
general register 17
r17
general register 18
r18
general register 19
r19
general register 20
r20
general register 21
r21
general register 22
r22
general register 23
r23
general register 24
r24
general register 25
r25
general register 26
r26
general register 27
r27
general register 28
r28
general register 29
general register 30
general register 31
system register 0
system register 1
system register 2
system register 3
system register 4
system register 5
system register 16
system register 17
system register 18
system register 19
system register 20
ctbp
.offset <expression>
¶Moves the offset into the current section to the specified amount.
.section "name", <type>
¶This is an extension to the standard .section directive. It sets the current section to be <type> and creates an alias for this section called "name".
.v850
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e1
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E1 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e2
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E2 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e2v3
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E2V3 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e2v4
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E3V5 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
.v850e3v5
¶Specifies that the assembled code should be marked as being targeted at the V850E3V5 processor. This allows the linker to detect attempts to link such code with code assembled for other processors.
as
implements all the standard V850 opcodes.
as
also implements the following pseudo ops:
hi0()
¶Computes the higher 16 bits of the given expression and stores it into the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘mulhi hi0(here - there), r5, r6’
computes the difference between the address of labels ’here’ and ’there’, takes the upper 16 bits of this difference, shifts it down 16 bits and then multiplies it by the lower 16 bits in register 5, putting the result into register 6.
lo()
¶Computes the lower 16 bits of the given expression and stores it into the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘addi lo(here - there), r5, r6’
computes the difference between the address of labels ’here’ and ’there’, takes the lower 16 bits of this difference and adds it to register 5, putting the result into register 6.
hi()
¶Computes the higher 16 bits of the given expression and then adds the value of the most significant bit of the lower 16 bits of the expression and stores the result into the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example the following code can be used to compute the address of the label ’here’ and store it into register 6:
‘movhi hi(here), r0, r6’ ‘movea lo(here), r6, r6’
The reason for this special behaviour is that movea performs a sign extension on its immediate operand. So for example if the address of ’here’ was 0xFFFFFFFF then without the special behaviour of the hi() pseudo-op the movhi instruction would put 0xFFFF0000 into r6, then the movea instruction would takes its immediate operand, 0xFFFF, sign extend it to 32 bits, 0xFFFFFFFF, and then add it into r6 giving 0xFFFEFFFF which is wrong (the fifth nibble is E). With the hi() pseudo op adding in the top bit of the lo() pseudo op, the movhi instruction actually stores 0 into r6 (0xFFFF + 1 = 0x0000), so that the movea instruction stores 0xFFFFFFFF into r6 - the right value.
hilo()
¶Computes the 32 bit value of the given expression and stores it into the immediate operand field of the given instruction (which must be a mov instruction). For example:
‘mov hilo(here), r6’
computes the absolute address of label ’here’ and puts the result into register 6.
sdaoff()
¶Computes the offset of the named variable from the start of the Small Data Area (whose address is held in register 4, the GP register) and stores the result as a 16 bit signed value in the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘ld.w sdaoff(_a_variable)[gp],r6’
loads the contents of the location pointed to by the label ’_a_variable’ into register 6, provided that the label is located somewhere within +/- 32K of the address held in the GP register. [Note the linker assumes that the GP register contains a fixed address set to the address of the label called ’__gp’. This can either be set up automatically by the linker, or specifically set by using the ‘--defsym __gp=<value>’ command-line option].
tdaoff()
¶Computes the offset of the named variable from the start of the Tiny Data Area (whose address is held in register 30, the EP register) and stores the result as a 4,5, 7 or 8 bit unsigned value in the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘sld.w tdaoff(_a_variable)[ep],r6’
loads the contents of the location pointed to by the label ’_a_variable’ into register 6, provided that the label is located somewhere within +256 bytes of the address held in the EP register. [Note the linker assumes that the EP register contains a fixed address set to the address of the label called ’__ep’. This can either be set up automatically by the linker, or specifically set by using the ‘--defsym __ep=<value>’ command-line option].
zdaoff()
¶Computes the offset of the named variable from address 0 and stores the result as a 16 bit signed value in the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘movea zdaoff(_a_variable),zero,r6’
puts the address of the label ’_a_variable’ into register 6, assuming that the label is somewhere within the first 32K of memory. (Strictly speaking it also possible to access the last 32K of memory as well, as the offsets are signed).
ctoff()
¶Computes the offset of the named variable from the start of the Call Table Area (whose address is held in system register 20, the CTBP register) and stores the result a 6 or 16 bit unsigned value in the immediate field of then given instruction or piece of data. For example:
‘callt ctoff(table_func1)’
will put the call the function whose address is held in the call table at the location labeled ’table_func1’.
.longcall name
¶Indicates that the following sequence of instructions is a long call
to function name
. The linker will attempt to shorten this call
sequence if name
is within a 22bit offset of the call. Only
valid if the -mrelax
command-line switch has been enabled.
.longjump name
¶Indicates that the following sequence of instructions is a long jump
to label name
. The linker will attempt to shorten this code
sequence if name
is within a 22bit offset of the jump. Only
valid if the -mrelax
command-line switch has been enabled.
For information on the V850 instruction set, see V850 Family 32-/16-Bit single-Chip Microcontroller Architecture Manual from NEC. Ltd.
The Vax version of as
accepts any of the following options,
gives a warning message that the option was ignored and proceeds.
These options are for compatibility with scripts designed for other
people’s assemblers.
-D
(Debug)
¶-S
(Symbol Table)
-T
(Token Trace)
These are obsolete options used to debug old assemblers.
-d
(Displacement size for JUMPs)
¶This option expects a number following the ‘-d’. Like options that expect filenames, the number may immediately follow the ‘-d’ (old standard) or constitute the whole of the command-line argument that follows ‘-d’ (GNU standard).
-V
(Virtualize Interpass Temporary File)
¶Some other assemblers use a temporary file. This option
commanded them to keep the information in active memory rather
than in a disk file. as
always does this, so this
option is redundant.
-J
(JUMPify Longer Branches)
¶Many 32-bit computers permit a variety of branch instructions to do the same job. Some of these instructions are short (and fast) but have a limited range; others are long (and slow) but can branch anywhere in virtual memory. Often there are 3 flavors of branch: short, medium and long. Some other assemblers would emit short and medium branches, unless told by this option to emit short and long branches.
-t
(Temporary File Directory)
¶Some other assemblers may use a temporary file, and this option
takes a filename being the directory to site the temporary
file. Since as
does not use a temporary disk file, this
option makes no difference. ‘-t’ needs exactly one
filename.
The Vax version of the assembler accepts additional options when compiled for VMS:
External symbol or section (used for global variables) names are not case sensitive on VAX/VMS and always mapped to upper case. This is contrary to the C language definition which explicitly distinguishes upper and lower case. To implement a standard conforming C compiler, names must be changed (mapped) to preserve the case information. The default mapping is to convert all lower case characters to uppercase and adding an underscore followed by a 6 digit hex value, representing a 24 digit binary value. The one digits in the binary value represent which characters are uppercase in the original symbol name.
The ‘-h n’ option determines how we map names. This takes
several values. No ‘-h’ switch at all allows case hacking as
described above. A value of zero (‘-h0’) implies names should be
upper case, and inhibits the case hack. A value of 2 (‘-h2’)
implies names should be all lower case, with no case hack. A value of 3
(‘-h3’) implies that case should be preserved. The value 1 is
unused. The -H
option directs as
to display
every mapped symbol during assembly.
Symbols whose names include a dollar sign ‘$’ are exceptions to the general name mapping. These symbols are normally only used to reference VMS library names. Such symbols are always mapped to upper case.
The ‘-+’ option causes as
to truncate any symbol
name larger than 31 characters. The ‘-+’ option also prevents some
code following the ‘_main’ symbol normally added to make the object
file compatible with Vax-11 "C".
This option is ignored for backward compatibility with as
version 1.x.
The ‘-H’ option causes as
to print every symbol
which was changed by case mapping.
Conversion of flonums to floating point is correct, and compatible with previous assemblers. Rounding is towards zero if the remainder is exactly half the least significant bit.
D
, F
, G
and H
floating point formats
are understood.
Immediate floating literals (e.g. ‘S`$6.9’) are rendered correctly. Again, rounding is towards zero in the boundary case.
The .float
directive produces f
format numbers.
The .double
directive produces d
format numbers.
The Vax version of the assembler supports four directives for generating Vax floating point constants. They are described in the table below.
.dfloat
¶This expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas, and
assembles Vax d
format 64-bit floating point constants.
.ffloat
¶This expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas, and
assembles Vax f
format 32-bit floating point constants.
.gfloat
¶This expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas, and
assembles Vax g
format 64-bit floating point constants.
.hfloat
¶This expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas, and
assembles Vax h
format 128-bit floating point constants.
All DEC mnemonics are supported. Beware that case…
instructions have exactly 3 operands. The dispatch table that
follows the case…
instruction should be made with
.word
statements. This is compatible with all unix
assemblers we know of.
Certain pseudo opcodes are permitted. They are for branch instructions. They expand to the shortest branch instruction that reaches the target. Generally these mnemonics are made by substituting ‘j’ for ‘b’ at the start of a DEC mnemonic. This feature is included both for compatibility and to help compilers. If you do not need this feature, avoid these opcodes. Here are the mnemonics, and the code they can expand into.
jbsb
‘Jsb’ is already an instruction mnemonic, so we chose ‘jbsb’.
bsbb …
bsbw …
jsb …
jbr
jr
Unconditional branch.
brb …
brw …
jmp …
jCOND
COND may be any one of the conditional branches
neq
, nequ
, eql
, eqlu
, gtr
,
geq
, lss
, gtru
, lequ
, vc
, vs
,
gequ
, cc
, lssu
, cs
.
COND may also be one of the bit tests
bs
, bc
, bss
, bcs
, bsc
, bcc
,
bssi
, bcci
, lbs
, lbc
.
NOTCOND is the opposite condition to COND.
bCOND …
bNOTCOND foo ; brw … ; foo:
bNOTCOND foo ; jmp … ; foo:
jacbX
X may be one of b d f g h l w
.
OPCODE …
OPCODE ..., foo ; brb bar ; foo: jmp ... ; bar:
jaobYYY
YYY may be one of lss leq
.
jsobZZZ
ZZZ may be one of geq gtr
.
OPCODE …
OPCODE ..., foo ; brb bar ; foo: brw destination ; bar:
OPCODE ..., foo ; brb bar ; foo: jmp destination ; bar:
aobleq
aoblss
sobgeq
sobgtr
OPCODE …
OPCODE ..., foo ; brb bar ; foo: brw destination ; bar:
OPCODE ..., foo ; brb bar ; foo: jmp destination ; bar:
The immediate character is ‘$’ for Unix compatibility, not ‘#’ as DEC writes it.
The indirect character is ‘*’ for Unix compatibility, not ‘@’ as DEC writes it.
The displacement sizing character is ‘`’ (an accent grave) for
Unix compatibility, not ‘^’ as DEC writes it. The letter
preceding ‘`’ may have either case. ‘G’ is not
understood, but all other letters (b i l s w
) are understood.
Register names understood are r0 r1 r2 … r15 ap fp sp
pc
. Upper and lower case letters are equivalent.
For instance
tstb *w`$4(r5)
Any expression is permitted in an operand. Operands are comma separated.
Vax bit fields can not be assembled with as
. Someone
can add the required code if they really need it.
The presence of a ‘#’ appearing anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The ‘;’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
The Visium assembler implements one machine-specific option:
-mtune=arch
¶This option specifies the target architecture. If an attempt is made to assemble an instruction that will not execute on the target architecture, the assembler will issue an error message.
The following names are recognized:
mcm24
mcm
gr5
gr6
Line comments are introduced either by the ‘!’ character or by the ‘;’ character appearing anywhere on a line.
A hash character (‘#’) as the first character on a line also marks the start of a line comment, but in this case it could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The Visium assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
Registers can be specified either by using their canonical mnemonic names or by using their alias if they have one, for example ‘sp’.
All the standard opcodes of the architecture are implemented, along with the
following three pseudo-instructions: cmp
, cmpc
, move
.
In addition, the following two illegal opcodes are implemented and used by the simulation:
stop 5-bit immediate, SourceA trace 5-bit immediate, SourceA
While WebAssembly provides its own module format for executables, this
documentation describes how to use as
to produce
intermediate ELF object format files.
The assembler syntax directly encodes sequences of opcodes as defined in the WebAssembly binary encoding specification at https://github.com/webassembly/spec/BinaryEncoding.md. Structured sexp-style expressions are not supported as input.
‘#’ and ‘;’ are the line comment characters. Note that if ‘#’ is the first character on a line then it can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Special relocations are available by using the ‘@plt’, ‘@got’, or ‘@got’ suffixes after a constant expression, which correspond to the R_ASMJS_LEB128_PLT, R_ASMJS_LEB128_GOT, and R_ASMJS_LEB128_GOT_CODE relocations, respectively.
The ‘@plt’ suffix is followed by a symbol name in braces; the symbol value is used to determine the function signature for which a PLT stub is generated. Currently, the symbol name is parsed from its last ‘F’ character to determine the argument count of the function, which is also necessary for generating a PLT stub.
Function signatures are specified with the signature
pseudo-opcode, followed by a simple function signature imitating a
C++-mangled function type: F
followed by an optional v
,
then a sequence of i
, l
, f
, and d
characters to mark i32, i64, f32, and f64 parameters, respectively;
followed by a final E
to mark the end of the function
signature.
Ordinary instructions are encoded with the WebAssembly mnemonics as listed at: https://github.com/WebAssembly/design/blob/master/BinaryEncoding.md.
Opcodes are written directly in the order in which they are encoded,
without going through an intermediate sexp-style expression as in the
was
format.
For “typed” opcodes (block, if, etc.), the type of the block is
specified in square brackets following the opcode: if[i]
,
if[]
.
as
will only produce ELF output, not a valid
WebAssembly module. It is possible to make as
produce
output in a single ELF section which becomes a valid WebAssembly
module, but a linker script to do so may be preferable, as it doesn’t
require running the entire module through the assembler at once.
The Freescale XGATE version of as
has a few machine
dependent options.
-mshort
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 16-bit integer ABI. It has no effect on the assembled instructions. This is the default.
-mlong
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 32-bit integer ABI.
-mshort-double
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 32-bit float ABI. This is the default.
-mlong-double
¶This option controls the ABI and indicates to use a 64-bit float ABI.
--print-insn-syntax
¶You can use the ‘--print-insn-syntax’ option to obtain the syntax description of the instruction when an error is detected.
--print-opcodes
¶The ‘--print-opcodes’ option prints the list of all the
instructions with their syntax. Once the list is printed
as
exits.
In XGATE RISC syntax, the instruction name comes first and it may
be followed by up to three operands. Operands are separated by commas
(‘,’). as
will complain if too many operands are specified
for a given instruction. The same will happen if you specified too few
operands.
nop ldl #23 CMP R1, R2
The presence of a ‘;’ character or a ‘!’ character anywhere on a line indicates the start of a comment that extends to the end of that line.
A ‘*’ or a ‘#’ character at the start of a line also introduces a line comment, but these characters do not work elsewhere on the line. If the first character of the line is a ‘#’ then as well as starting a comment, the line could also be logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The XGATE assembler does not currently support a line separator character.
The following addressing modes are understood for XGATE:
‘’
‘#number’
‘#number’
‘#number’
‘reg’
‘reg, reg’
‘reg, reg, reg’
‘*symbol’
‘*symbol’
‘reg, (reg, #number)’
‘reg, reg, reg’
‘reg, reg, reg+’
‘reg, reg, -reg’
The register can be either ‘R0’, ‘R1’, ‘R2’, ‘R3’, ‘R4’, ‘R5’, ‘R6’ or ‘R7’.
Convene macro opcodes to deal with 16-bit values have been added.
‘#number’, or ‘*symbol’
For example:
ldw R1, #1024 ldw R3, timer ldw R1, (R1, #0) COM R1 stw R2, (R1, #0)
The XGATE version of as
have the following
specific assembler directives:
Packed decimal (P) format floating literals are not supported(yet).
The floating point formats generated by directives are these.
.float
¶Single
precision floating point constants.
.double
¶Double
precision floating point constants.
.extend
¶.ldouble
Extended
precision (long double
) floating point constants.
‘#’ is the line comment character. If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line can also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
A semicolon (‘;’) can be used to start a comment that extends from wherever the character appears on the line up to the end of the line.
The ‘|’ character can be used to separate statements on the same line.
.16bit_pointers
¶Like the --16bit-pointers command-line option this directive indicates that the assembly code makes use of 16-bit pointers.
.32bit_pointers
¶Like the --32bit-pointers command-line option this directive indicates that the assembly code makes use of 32-bit pointers.
.no_pointers
¶Like the --no-pointers command-line option this directive indicates that the assembly code does not makes use pointers.
as
implements all the standard XStormy16 opcodes.
as
also implements the following pseudo ops:
@lo()
¶Computes the lower 16 bits of the given expression and stores it into the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘add r6, @lo(here - there)’
computes the difference between the address of labels ’here’ and ’there’, takes the lower 16 bits of this difference and adds it to register 6.
@hi()
¶Computes the higher 16 bits of the given expression and stores it into the immediate operand field of the given instruction. For example:
‘addc r7, @hi(here - there)’
computes the difference between the address of labels ’here’ and ’there’, takes the upper 16 bits of this difference, shifts it down 16 bits and then adds it, along with the carry bit, to the value in register 7.
This chapter covers features of the GNU assembler that are specific to the Xtensa architecture. For details about the Xtensa instruction set, please consult the Xtensa Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) Reference Manual.
--text-section-literals | --no-text-section-literals
¶Control the treatment of literal pools. The default is
‘--no-text-section-literals’, which places literals in
separate sections in the output file. This allows the literal pool to be
placed in a data RAM/ROM. With ‘--text-section-literals’, the
literals are interspersed in the text section in order to keep them as
close as possible to their references. This may be necessary for large
assembly files, where the literals would otherwise be out of range of the
L32R
instructions in the text section. Literals are grouped into
pools following .literal_position
directives or preceding
ENTRY
instructions. These options only affect literals referenced
via PC-relative L32R
instructions; literals for absolute mode
L32R
instructions are handled separately.
See literal.
--auto-litpools | --no-auto-litpools
¶Control the treatment of literal pools. The default is
‘--no-auto-litpools’, which in the absence of
‘--text-section-literals’ places literals in separate sections
in the output file. This allows the literal pool to be placed in a data
RAM/ROM. With ‘--auto-litpools’, the literals are interspersed
in the text section in order to keep them as close as possible to their
references, explicit .literal_position
directives are not
required. This may be necessary for very large functions, where single
literal pool at the beginning of the function may not be reachable by
L32R
instructions at the end. These options only affect
literals referenced via PC-relative L32R
instructions; literals
for absolute mode L32R
instructions are handled separately.
When used together with ‘--text-section-literals’,
‘--auto-litpools’ takes precedence.
See literal.
--absolute-literals | --no-absolute-literals
¶Indicate to the assembler whether L32R
instructions use absolute
or PC-relative addressing. If the processor includes the absolute
addressing option, the default is to use absolute L32R
relocations. Otherwise, only the PC-relative L32R
relocations
can be used.
--target-align | --no-target-align
¶Enable or disable automatic alignment to reduce branch penalties at some
expense in code size. See Automatic
Instruction Alignment. This optimization is enabled by default. Note
that the assembler will always align instructions like LOOP
that
have fixed alignment requirements.
--longcalls | --no-longcalls
¶Enable or disable transformation of call instructions to allow calls across a greater range of addresses. See Function Call Relaxation. This option should be used when call targets can potentially be out of range. It may degrade both code size and performance, but the linker can generally optimize away the unnecessary overhead when a call ends up within range. The default is ‘--no-longcalls’.
--transform | --no-transform
¶Enable or disable all assembler transformations of Xtensa instructions, including both relaxation and optimization. The default is ‘--transform’; ‘--no-transform’ should only be used in the rare cases when the instructions must be exactly as specified in the assembly source. Using ‘--no-transform’ causes out of range instruction operands to be errors.
--rename-section oldname=newname
¶Rename the oldname section to newname. This option can be used multiple times to rename multiple sections.
--trampolines | --no-trampolines
¶Enable or disable transformation of jump instructions to allow jumps across a greater range of addresses. See Jump Trampolines. This option should be used when jump targets can potentially be out of range. In the absence of such jumps this option does not affect code size or performance. The default is ‘--trampolines’.
--abi-windowed | --abi-call0
¶Choose ABI tag written to the .xtensa.info
section. ABI tag
indicates ABI of the assembly code. A warning is issued by the linker
on an attempt to link object files with inconsistent ABI tags.
Default ABI is chosen by the Xtensa core configuration.
Block comments are delimited by ‘/*’ and ‘*/’. End of line comments may be introduced with either ‘#’ or ‘//’.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
Instructions consist of a leading opcode or macro name followed by whitespace and an optional comma-separated list of operands:
opcode [operand, ...]
Instructions must be separated by a newline or semicolon (‘;’).
FLIX instructions, which bundle multiple opcodes together in a single instruction, are specified by enclosing the bundled opcodes inside braces:
{ [format] opcode0 [operands]
opcode1 [operands]
opcode2 [operands] ... }
The opcodes in a FLIX instruction are listed in the same order as the corresponding instruction slots in the TIE format declaration. Directives and labels are not allowed inside the braces of a FLIX instruction. A particular TIE format name can optionally be specified immediately after the opening brace, but this is usually unnecessary. The assembler will automatically search for a format that can encode the specified opcodes, so the format name need only be specified in rare cases where there is more than one applicable format and where it matters which of those formats is used. A FLIX instruction can also be specified on a single line by separating the opcodes with semicolons:
{ [format;] opcode0 [operands]; opcode1 [operands]; opcode2 [operands]; ... }
If an opcode can only be encoded in a FLIX instruction but is not specified as part of a FLIX bundle, the assembler will choose the smallest format where the opcode can be encoded and will fill unused instruction slots with no-ops.
See the Xtensa Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) Reference Manual for a complete list of opcodes and descriptions of their semantics.
If an opcode name is prefixed with an underscore character (‘_’),
as
will not transform that instruction in any way. The
underscore prefix disables both optimization (see Xtensa Optimizations) and relaxation (see Xtensa Relaxation) for that particular instruction. Only
use the underscore prefix when it is essential to select the exact
opcode produced by the assembler. Using this feature unnecessarily
makes the code less efficient by disabling assembler optimization and
less flexible by disabling relaxation.
Note that this special handling of underscore prefixes only applies to
Xtensa opcodes, not to either built-in macros or user-defined macros.
When an underscore prefix is used with a macro (e.g., _MOV
), it
refers to a different macro. The assembler generally provides built-in
macros both with and without the underscore prefix, where the underscore
versions behave as if the underscore carries through to the instructions
in the macros. For example, _MOV
may expand to _MOV.N
.
The underscore prefix only applies to individual instructions, not to
series of instructions. For example, if a series of instructions have
underscore prefixes, the assembler will not transform the individual
instructions, but it may insert other instructions between them (e.g.,
to align a LOOP
instruction). To prevent the assembler from
modifying a series of instructions as a whole, use the
no-transform
directive. See transform.
The assembly syntax for a register file entry is the “short” name for
a TIE register file followed by the index into that register file. For
example, the general-purpose AR
register file has a short name of
a
, so these registers are named a0
…a15
.
As a special feature, sp
is also supported as a synonym for
a1
. Additional registers may be added by processor configuration
options and by designer-defined TIE extensions. An initial ‘$’
character is optional in all register names.
The optimizations currently supported by as
are
generation of density instructions where appropriate and automatic
branch target alignment.
The Xtensa instruction set has a code density option that provides
16-bit versions of some of the most commonly used opcodes. Use of these
opcodes can significantly reduce code size. When possible, the
assembler automatically translates instructions from the core
Xtensa instruction set into equivalent instructions from the Xtensa code
density option. This translation can be disabled by using underscore
prefixes (see Opcode Names), by using the
‘--no-transform’ command-line option (see Command
Line Options), or by using the no-transform
directive
(see transform).
It is a good idea not to use the density instructions directly. The assembler will automatically select dense instructions where possible. If you later need to use an Xtensa processor without the code density option, the same assembly code will then work without modification.
The Xtensa assembler will automatically align certain instructions, both to optimize performance and to satisfy architectural requirements.
As an optimization to improve performance, the assembler attempts to align branch targets so they do not cross instruction fetch boundaries. (Xtensa processors can be configured with either 32-bit or 64-bit instruction fetch widths.) An instruction immediately following a call is treated as a branch target in this context, because it will be the target of a return from the call. This alignment has the potential to reduce branch penalties at some expense in code size. This optimization is enabled by default. You can disable it with the ‘--no-target-align’ command-line option (see Command-line Options).
The target alignment optimization is done without adding instructions that could increase the execution time of the program. If there are density instructions in the code preceding a target, the assembler can change the target alignment by widening some of those instructions to the equivalent 24-bit instructions. Extra bytes of padding can be inserted immediately following unconditional jump and return instructions. This approach is usually successful in aligning many, but not all, branch targets.
The LOOP
family of instructions must be aligned such that the
first instruction in the loop body does not cross an instruction fetch
boundary (e.g., with a 32-bit fetch width, a LOOP
instruction
must be on either a 1 or 2 mod 4 byte boundary). The assembler knows
about this restriction and inserts the minimal number of 2 or 3 byte
no-op instructions to satisfy it. When no-op instructions are added,
any label immediately preceding the original loop will be moved in order
to refer to the loop instruction, not the newly generated no-op
instruction. To preserve binary compatibility across processors with
different fetch widths, the assembler conservatively assumes a 32-bit
fetch width when aligning LOOP
instructions (except if the first
instruction in the loop is a 64-bit instruction).
Previous versions of the assembler automatically aligned ENTRY
instructions to 4-byte boundaries, but that alignment is now the
programmer’s responsibility.
When an instruction operand is outside the range allowed for that
particular instruction field, as
can transform the code
to use a functionally-equivalent instruction or sequence of
instructions. This process is known as relaxation. This is
typically done for branch instructions because the distance of the
branch targets is not known until assembly-time. The Xtensa assembler
offers branch relaxation and also extends this concept to function
calls, MOVI
instructions and other instructions with immediate
fields.
When the target of a branch is too far away from the branch itself, i.e., when the offset from the branch to the target is too large to fit in the immediate field of the branch instruction, it may be necessary to replace the branch with a branch around a jump. For example,
beqz a2, L
may result in:
bnez.n a2, M j L M:
(The BNEZ.N
instruction would be used in this example only if the
density option is available. Otherwise, BNEZ
would be used.)
This relaxation works well because the unconditional jump instruction
has a much larger offset range than the various conditional branches.
However, an error will occur if a branch target is beyond the range of a
jump instruction. as
cannot relax unconditional jumps.
Similarly, an error will occur if the original input contains an
unconditional jump to a target that is out of range.
Branch relaxation is enabled by default. It can be disabled by using
underscore prefixes (see Opcode Names), the
‘--no-transform’ command-line option (see Command-line Options), or the no-transform
directive
(see transform).
Function calls may require relaxation because the Xtensa immediate call
instructions (CALL0
, CALL4
, CALL8
and
CALL12
) provide a PC-relative offset of only 512 Kbytes in either
direction. For larger programs, it may be necessary to use indirect
calls (CALLX0
, CALLX4
, CALLX8
and CALLX12
)
where the target address is specified in a register. The Xtensa
assembler can automatically relax immediate call instructions into
indirect call instructions. This relaxation is done by loading the
address of the called function into the callee’s return address register
and then using a CALLX
instruction. So, for example:
call8 func
might be relaxed to:
.literal .L1, func l32r a8, .L1 callx8 a8
Because the addresses of targets of function calls are not generally known until link-time, the assembler must assume the worst and relax all the calls to functions in other source files, not just those that really will be out of range. The linker can recognize calls that were unnecessarily relaxed, and it will remove the overhead introduced by the assembler for those cases where direct calls are sufficient.
Call relaxation is disabled by default because it can have a negative
effect on both code size and performance, although the linker can
usually eliminate the unnecessary overhead. If a program is too large
and some of the calls are out of range, function call relaxation can be
enabled using the ‘--longcalls’ command-line option or the
longcalls
directive (see longcalls).
Jump instruction may require relaxation because the Xtensa jump instruction
(J
) provide a PC-relative offset of only 128 Kbytes in either
direction. One option is to use jump long (J.L
) instruction, which
depending on jump distance may be assembled as jump (J
) or indirect
jump (JX
). However it needs a free register. When there’s no spare
register it is possible to plant intermediate jump sites (trampolines)
between the jump instruction and its target. These sites may be located in
areas unreachable by normal code execution flow, in that case they only
contain intermediate jumps, or they may be inserted in the middle of code
block, in which case there’s an additional jump from the beginning of the
trampoline to the instruction past its end. So, for example:
j 1f ... retw ... mov a10, a2 call8 func ... 1: ...
might be relaxed to:
j .L0_TR_1 ... retw .L0_TR_1: j 1f ... mov a10, a2 call8 func ... 1: ...
or to:
j .L0_TR_1 ... retw ... mov a10, a2 j .L0_TR_0 .L0_TR_1: j 1f .L0_TR_0: call8 func ... 1: ...
The Xtensa assembler uses trampolines with jump around only when it cannot find suitable unreachable trampoline. There may be multiple trampolines between the jump instruction and its target.
This relaxation does not apply to jumps to undefined symbols, assuming they will reach their targets once resolved.
Jump relaxation is enabled by default because it does not affect code size or performance while the code itself is small. This relaxation may be disabled completely with ‘--no-trampolines’ or ‘--no-transform’ command-line options (see Command-line Options).
The assembler normally performs the following other relaxations. They
can be disabled by using underscore prefixes (see Opcode Names), the ‘--no-transform’ command-line option
(see Command-line Options), or the
no-transform
directive (see transform).
The MOVI
machine instruction can only materialize values in the
range from -2048 to 2047. Values outside this range are best
materialized with L32R
instructions. Thus:
movi a0, 100000
is assembled into the following machine code:
.literal .L1, 100000 l32r a0, .L1
The L8UI
machine instruction can only be used with immediate
offsets in the range from 0 to 255. The L16SI
and L16UI
machine instructions can only be used with offsets from 0 to 510. The
L32I
machine instruction can only be used with offsets from 0 to
1020. A load offset outside these ranges can be materialized with
an L32R
instruction if the destination register of the load
is different than the source address register. For example:
l32i a1, a0, 2040
is translated to:
.literal .L1, 2040 l32r a1, .L1
add a1, a0, a1 l32i a1, a1, 0
If the load destination and source address register are the same, an out-of-range offset causes an error.
The Xtensa ADDI
instruction only allows immediate operands in the
range from -128 to 127. There are a number of alternate instruction
sequences for the ADDI
operation. First, if the
immediate is 0, the ADDI
will be turned into a MOV.N
instruction (or the equivalent OR
instruction if the code density
option is not available). If the ADDI
immediate is outside of
the range -128 to 127, but inside the range -32896 to 32639, an
ADDMI
instruction or ADDMI
/ADDI
sequence will be
used. Finally, if the immediate is outside of this range and a free
register is available, an L32R
/ADD
sequence will be used
with a literal allocated from the literal pool.
For example:
addi a5, a6, 0 addi a5, a6, 512
addi a5, a6, 513 addi a5, a6, 50000
is assembled into the following:
.literal .L1, 50000 mov.n a5, a6
addmi a5, a6, 0x200 addmi a5, a6, 0x200 addi a5, a5, 1
l32r a5, .L1 add a5, a6, a5
The Xtensa assembler supports a region-based directive syntax:
.begin directive [options] ... .end directive
All the Xtensa-specific directives that apply to a region of code use this syntax.
The directive applies to code between the .begin
and the
.end
. The state of the option after the .end
reverts to
what it was before the .begin
.
A nested .begin
/.end
region can further
change the state of the directive without having to be aware of its
outer state. For example, consider:
.begin no-transform L: add a0, a1, a2
.begin transform M: add a0, a1, a2 .end transform
N: add a0, a1, a2 .end no-transform
The ADD
opcodes at L
and N
in the outer
no-transform
region both result in ADD
machine instructions,
but the assembler selects an ADD.N
instruction for the
ADD
at M
in the inner transform
region.
The advantage of this style is that it works well inside macros which can preserve the context of their callers.
The following directives are available:
The schedule
directive is recognized only for compatibility with
Tensilica’s assembler.
.begin [no-]schedule .end [no-]schedule
This directive is ignored and has no effect on as
.
The longcalls
directive enables or disables function call
relaxation. See Function Call Relaxation.
.begin [no-]longcalls .end [no-]longcalls
Call relaxation is disabled by default unless the ‘--longcalls’
command-line option is specified. The longcalls
directive
overrides the default determined by the command-line options.
This directive enables or disables all assembler transformation, including relaxation (see Xtensa Relaxation) and optimization (see Xtensa Optimizations).
.begin [no-]transform .end [no-]transform
Transformations are enabled by default unless the ‘--no-transform’
option is used. The transform
directive overrides the default
determined by the command-line options. An underscore opcode prefix,
disabling transformation of that opcode, always takes precedence over
both directives and command-line flags.
The .literal
directive is used to define literal pool data, i.e.,
read-only 32-bit data accessed via L32R
instructions.
.literal label, value[, value...]
This directive is similar to the standard .word
directive, except
that the actual location of the literal data is determined by the
assembler and linker, not by the position of the .literal
directive. Using this directive gives the assembler freedom to locate
the literal data in the most appropriate place and possibly to combine
identical literals. For example, the code:
entry sp, 40 .literal .L1, sym l32r a4, .L1
can be used to load a pointer to the symbol sym
into register
a4
. The value of sym
will not be placed between the
ENTRY
and L32R
instructions; instead, the assembler puts
the data in a literal pool.
Literal pools are placed by default in separate literal sections;
however, when using the ‘--text-section-literals’
option (see Command-line Options), the literal
pools for PC-relative mode L32R
instructions
are placed in the current section.3
These text section literal
pools are created automatically before ENTRY
instructions and
manually after ‘.literal_position’ directives (see literal_position). If there are no preceding
ENTRY
instructions, explicit .literal_position
directives
must be used to place the text section literal pools; otherwise,
as
will report an error.
When literals are placed in separate sections, the literal section names
are derived from the names of the sections where the literals are
defined. The base literal section names are .literal
for
PC-relative mode L32R
instructions and .lit4
for absolute
mode L32R
instructions (see absolute-literals). These base names are used for literals defined in
the default .text
section. For literals defined in other
sections or within the scope of a literal_prefix
directive
(see literal_prefix), the following rules
determine the literal section name:
.literal
or .lit4
name, with a period to separate the base
name and group name. The literal section is also made a member of the
group.
literal_prefix
value) begins with
“.gnu.linkonce.kind.
”, the literal section name is formed
by replacing “.kind
” with the base .literal
or
.lit4
name. For example, for literals defined in a section named
.gnu.linkonce.t.func
, the literal section will be
.gnu.linkonce.literal.func
or .gnu.linkonce.lit4.func
.
literal_prefix
value) ends with
.text
, the literal section name is formed by replacing that
suffix with the base .literal
or .lit4
name. For example,
for literals defined in a section named .iram0.text
, the literal
section will be .iram0.literal
or .iram0.lit4
.
.literal
or .lit4
name as a
suffix to the current section name (or literal_prefix
value).
When using ‘--text-section-literals’ to place literals inline
in the section being assembled, the .literal_position
directive
can be used to mark a potential location for a literal pool.
.literal_position
The .literal_position
directive is ignored when the
‘--text-section-literals’ option is not used or when
L32R
instructions use the absolute addressing mode.
The assembler will automatically place text section literal pools
before ENTRY
instructions, so the .literal_position
directive is only needed to specify some other location for a literal
pool. You may need to add an explicit jump instruction to skip over an
inline literal pool.
For example, an interrupt vector does not begin with an ENTRY
instruction so the assembler will be unable to automatically find a good
place to put a literal pool. Moreover, the code for the interrupt
vector must be at a specific starting address, so the literal pool
cannot come before the start of the code. The literal pool for the
vector must be explicitly positioned in the middle of the vector (before
any uses of the literals, due to the negative offsets used by
PC-relative L32R
instructions). The .literal_position
directive can be used to do this. In the following code, the literal
for ‘M’ will automatically be aligned correctly and is placed after
the unconditional jump.
.global M code_start:
j continue .literal_position .align 4
continue: movi a4, M
The literal_prefix
directive allows you to override the default
literal section names, which are derived from the names of the sections
where the literals are defined.
.begin literal_prefix [name] .end literal_prefix
For literals defined within the delimited region, the literal section names are derived from the name argument instead of the name of the current section. The rules used to derive the literal section names do not change. See literal. If the name argument is omitted, the literal sections revert to the defaults. This directive has no effect when using the ‘--text-section-literals’ option (see Command-line Options).
The absolute-literals
and no-absolute-literals
directives control the absolute vs. PC-relative mode for L32R
instructions. These are relevant only for Xtensa configurations that
include the absolute addressing option for L32R
instructions.
.begin [no-]absolute-literals .end [no-]absolute-literals
These directives do not change the L32R
mode—they only cause
the assembler to emit the appropriate kind of relocation for L32R
instructions and to place the literal values in the appropriate section.
To change the L32R
mode, the program must write the
LITBASE
special register. It is the programmer’s responsibility
to keep track of the mode and indicate to the assembler which mode is
used in each region of code.
If the Xtensa configuration includes the absolute L32R
addressing
option, the default is to assume absolute L32R
addressing unless
the ‘--no-absolute-literals’ command-line option is specified.
Otherwise, the default is to assume PC-relative L32R
addressing.
The absolute-literals
directive can then be used to override
the default determined by the command-line options.
-march=CPU[-EXT…][+EXT…]
¶This option specifies the target processor. The assembler will issue
an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an instruction which
will not execute on the target processor. The following processor names
are recognized:
z80
,
z180
,
ez80
,
gbz80
,
z80n
,
r800
.
In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told to
accept some extension mnemonics. For example,
-march=z180+sli+infc
extends z180 with SLI instructions and
IN F,(C). The following extensions are currently supported:
full
(all known instructions),
adl
(ADL CPU mode by default, eZ80 only),
sli
(instruction known as SLI, SLL or SL1),
xyhl
(instructions with halves of index registers: IXL, IXH,
IYL, IYH),
xdcb
(instructions like RotOp (II+d),R and BitOp n,(II+d),R),
infc
(instruction IN F,(C) or IN (C)),
outc0
(instruction OUT (C),0).
Note that rather than extending a basic instruction set, the extension
mnemonics starting with -
revoke the respective functionality:
-march=z80-full+xyhl
first removes all default extensions and adds
support for index registers halves only.
If this option is not specified then -march=z80+xyhl+infc
is assumed.
-local-prefix=prefix
¶Mark all labels with specified prefix as local. But such label can be
marked global explicitly in the code. This option do not change default
local label prefix .L
, it is just adds new one.
-colonless
¶Accept colonless labels. All symbols at line begin are treated as labels.
-sdcc
¶Accept assembler code produced by SDCC.
-fp-s=FORMAT
¶Single precision floating point numbers format. Default: ieee754 (32 bit).
-fp-d=FORMAT
¶Double precision floating point numbers format. Default: ieee754 (64 bit).
Floating point numbers formats.
ieee754
Single or double precision IEEE754 compatible format.
half
Half precision IEEE754 compatible format (16 bits).
single
Single precision IEEE754 compatible format (32 bits).
double
Double precision IEEE754 compatible format (64 bits).
zeda32
32 bit floating point format from z80float library by Zeda.
math48
48 bit floating point format from Math48 package by Anders Hejlsberg.
The assembler syntax closely follows the ’Z80 family CPU User Manual’ by Zilog. In expressions a single ‘=’ may be used as “is equal to” comparison operator.
Suffices can be used to indicate the radix of integer constants; ‘H’ or ‘h’ for hexadecimal, ‘D’ or ‘d’ for decimal, ‘Q’, ‘O’, ‘q’ or ‘o’ for octal, and ‘B’ for binary.
The suffix ‘b’ denotes a backreference to local label.
The semicolon ‘;’ is the line comment character;
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
The Z80 assembler does not support a line separator character.
The dollar sign ‘$’ can be used as a prefix for hexadecimal numbers and as a symbol denoting the current location counter.
A backslash ‘\’ is an ordinary character for the Z80 assembler.
The single quote ‘'’ must be followed by a closing quote. If there is one character in between, it is a character constant, otherwise it is a string constant.
The registers are referred to with the letters assigned to them by
Zilog. In addition as
recognizes ‘ixl’ and
‘ixh’ as the least and most significant octet in ‘ix’, and
similarly ‘iyl’ and ‘iyh’ as parts of ‘iy’.
Upper and lower case are equivalent in register names, opcodes, condition codes and assembler directives. The case of letters is significant in labels and symbol names. The case is also important to distinguish the suffix ‘b’ for a backward reference to a local label from the suffix ‘B’ for a number in binary notation.
Labels started by .L
acts as local labels. You may specify custom local
label prefix by -local-prefix
command-line option.
Dollar, forward and backward local labels are supported. By default, all labels
are followed by colon.
Legacy code with colonless labels can be built with -colonless
command-line option specified. In this case all tokens at line begin are treated
as labels.
Floating-point numbers of following types are supported:
ieee754
Supported half, single and double precision IEEE754 compatible numbers.
zeda32
32 bit floating point numbers from z80float library by Zeda.
math48
48 bit floating point numbers from Math48 package by Anders Hejlsberg.
as
for the Z80 supports some additional directives for
compatibility with other assemblers.
These are the additional directives in as
for the Z80:
.assume ADL = expression
¶Set ADL status for eZ80. Non-zero value enable compilation in ADL mode else used Z80 mode. ADL and Z80 mode produces incompatible object code. Mixing both of them within one binary may lead problems with disassembler.
db expression|string[,expression|string...]
¶defb expression|string[,expression|string...]
defm string[,string...]
For each string the characters are copied to the object file, for
each other expression the value is stored in one byte.
A warning is issued in case of an overflow.
Backslash symbol in the strings is generic symbol, it cannot be used as
escape character. See .ascii
.
dw expression[,expression...]
¶defw expression[,expression...]
For each expression the value is stored in two bytes, ignoring overflow.
d24 expression[,expression...]
¶def24 expression[,expression...]
For each expression the value is stored in three bytes, ignoring overflow.
d32 expression[,expression...]
¶def32 expression[,expression...]
For each expression the value is stored in four bytes, ignoring overflow.
ds count[, value]
¶defs count[, value]
Fill count bytes in the object file with value, if value is omitted it defaults to zero.
symbol defl expression
¶The defl
directive is like .set
but with different
syntax. See .set
.
It set the value of symbol to expression. Symbols defined
with defl
are not protected from redefinition.
symbol equ expression
¶The equ
directive is like .equiv
but with different
syntax. See .equiv
.
It set the value of symbol to expression. It is an error
if symbol is already defined. Symbols defined with equ
are not protected from redefinition.
psect name
¶A synonym for .section
, no second argument should be given.
See .section
.
xdef symbol
¶A synonym for .global
, make symbol is visible to linker.
See .global
.
xref name
¶A synonym for .extern
(.extern
).
In line with common practice, Z80 mnemonics are used for the Z80, Z80N, Z180, eZ80, Ascii R800 and the GameBoy Z80.
In many instructions it is possible to use one of the half index
registers (‘ixl’,‘ixh’,‘iyl’,‘iyh’) in stead of an
8-bit general purpose register. This yields instructions that are
documented on the eZ80 and the R800, undocumented on the Z80 and
unsupported on the Z180.
Similarly in f,(c)
is documented on the R800, undocumented on
the Z80 and unsupported on the Z180 and the eZ80.
The assembler also supports the following undocumented Z80-instructions, that have not been adopted in any other instruction set:
out (c),0
Sends zero to the port pointed to by register C
.
sli m
Equivalent to m = (m<<1)+1
, the operand m can
be any operand that is valid for ‘sla’. One can use ‘sll’ as a
synonym for ‘sli’.
op (ix+d), r
This is equivalent to
ld r, (ix+d) op r ld (ix+d), r
The operation ‘op’ may be any of ‘res b,’, ‘set b,’, ‘rl’, ‘rlc’, ‘rr’, ‘rrc’, ‘sla’, ‘sli’, ‘sra’ and ‘srl’, and the register ‘r’ may be any of ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘e’, ‘h’ and ‘l’.
op (iy+d), r
As above, but with ‘iy’ instead of ‘ix’.
The web site at http://www.z80.info is a good starting place to find more information on programming the Z80.
You may enable or disable any of these instructions for any target CPU even this instruction is not supported by any real CPU of this type. Useful for custom CPU cores.
The Z8000 as supports both members of the Z8000 family: the unsegmented Z8002, with 16 bit addresses, and the segmented Z8001 with 24 bit addresses.
When the assembler is in unsegmented mode (specified with the
unsegm
directive), an address takes up one word (16 bit)
sized register. When the assembler is in segmented mode (specified with
the segm
directive), a 24-bit address takes up a long (32 bit)
register. See Assembler Directives for the Z8000,
for a list of other Z8000 specific assembler directives.
‘!’ is the line comment character.
If a ‘#’ appears as the first character of a line then the whole line is treated as a comment, but in this case the line could also be a logical line number directive (see Comments) or a preprocessor control command (see Preprocessing).
You can use ‘;’ instead of a newline to separate statements.
The Z8000 has sixteen 16 bit registers, numbered 0 to 15. You can refer to different sized groups of registers by register number, with the prefix ‘r’ for 16 bit registers, ‘rr’ for 32 bit registers and ‘rq’ for 64 bit registers. You can also refer to the contents of the first eight (of the sixteen 16 bit registers) by bytes. They are named ‘rln’ and ‘rhn’.
byte registers
rl0 rh0 rl1 rh1 rl2 rh2 rl3 rh3 rl4 rh4 rl5 rh5 rl6 rh6 rl7 rh7
word registers
r0 r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 r13 r14 r15
long word registers
rr0 rr2 rr4 rr6 rr8 rr10 rr12 rr14
quad word registers
rq0 rq4 rq8 rq12
as understands the following addressing modes for the Z8000:
rln
rhn
rn
rrn
rqn
Register direct: 8bit, 16bit, 32bit, and 64bit registers.
@rn
@rrn
Indirect register: @rrn in segmented mode, @rn in unsegmented mode.
addr
Direct: the 16 bit or 24 bit address (depending on whether the assembler is in segmented or unsegmented mode) of the operand is in the instruction.
address(rn)
Indexed: the 16 or 24 bit address is added to the 16 bit register to produce the final address in memory of the operand.
rn(#imm)
rrn(#imm)
Base Address: the 16 or 24 bit register is added to the 16 bit sign extended immediate displacement to produce the final address in memory of the operand.
rn(rm)
rrn(rm)
Base Index: the 16 or 24 bit register rn or rrn is added to the sign extended 16 bit index register rm to produce the final address in memory of the operand.
#xx
Immediate data xx.
The Z8000 port of as includes additional assembler directives, for compatibility with other Z8000 assemblers. These do not begin with ‘.’ (unlike the ordinary as directives).
segm
¶.z8001
Generate code for the segmented Z8001.
unsegm
¶.z8002
Generate code for the unsegmented Z8002.
name
¶Synonym for .file
global
¶Synonym for .global
wval
¶Synonym for .word
lval
¶Synonym for .long
bval
¶Synonym for .byte
sval
¶Assemble a string. sval
expects one string literal, delimited by
single quotes. It assembles each byte of the string into consecutive
addresses. You can use the escape sequence ‘%xx’ (where
xx represents a two-digit hexadecimal number) to represent the
character whose ASCII value is xx. Use this feature to
describe single quote and other characters that may not appear in string
literals as themselves. For example, the C statement ‘char *a = "he said \"it's 50% off\"";’ is represented in Z8000 assembly language
(shown with the assembler output in hex at the left) as
68652073 sval 'he said %22it%27s 50%25 off%22%00' 61696420 22697427 73203530 25206F66 662200
rsect
¶synonym for .section
block
¶synonym for .space
even
¶special case of .align
; aligns output to even byte boundary.
For detailed information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see Z8000 Technical Manual.
Your bug reports play an essential role in making as
reliable.
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
entire community by making the next version of as
work better.
Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of as
.
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the information that enables us to fix the bug.
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
as
bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
as
produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
as
does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of “invalid input” might
be our idea of “an extension” or “support for traditional practice”.
as
are welcome in any case.
A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products. If
you obtained as
from a support organization, we recommend you
contact that organization first.
You can find contact information for many support companies and individuals in the file etc/SERVICE in the GNU Emacs distribution.
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for as
to https://sourceware.org/bugzilla/.
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: report all the facts. If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it out, state it!
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, “Does this ring a bell?” This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
as
. as
announces it if you start
it with the ‘--version’ argument.
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
the bug in the current version of as
.
as
source.
as
—e.g.
“gcc-2.7
”.
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
gcc
, use
the options ‘-v --save-temps’; this will save the assembler source in a
file with an extension of .s, and also show you exactly how
as
is being run.
Of course, if the bug is that as
gets a fatal signal, then we
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
make a mistake.
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
as
is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
observations.
as
source, send us context
diffs, as generated by diff
with the ‘-u’, ‘-c’, or ‘-p’
option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
discuss something in the as
source, refer to it by context, not
by line number.
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
Here are some things that are not necessary:
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which changes will not affect it.
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. We recommend that you save your time for something else.
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report instead of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take less time, and so on.
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
Sometimes with a program as complicated as as
it is very hard to
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will help us to understand.
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn’t listed here,
it is not meant as a slight. We just don’t know about it. Send mail to the
maintainer, and we’ll correct the situation. Currently
the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address nickc@redhat.com
).
Dean Elsner wrote the original GNU assembler for the VAX.4
Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and extensive changes in messages.c, input-file.c, write.c.
K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite, testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated “know” assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code in format-specific I/O modules.
The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale has done much work with it since.
The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end (tc-mips.c, tc-mips.h), and contributed Rose format support (which hasn’t been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to support a.out format.
Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k, tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k targets.
John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added .include
support, and
simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola’s opcodes always produced
fixed-size instructions (e.g., jsr
), while synthetic instructions
remained shrinkable (jbsr
). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
required the proverbial one-bit fix.
Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix), added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM) along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc, and some initial 64-bit support).
Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 “IBM 370” architecture.
Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD support for openVMS/Alpha.
Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic* flavors.
David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica, Inc. added support for Xtensa processors.
Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and configuration enhancements.
Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not intentionally leaving anyone out.
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
This
is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by ld
’s
‘--section-alignment’ option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
(‘*.o’) files, which are less strictly aligned.
The term “macro” is somewhat overloaded here, since
these macros have no relation to those defined by .macro
,
see .macro
.
Literals for the
.init
and .fini
sections are always placed in separate
sections, even when ‘--text-section-literals’ is enabled.
Any more details?